Change Font Face | Change Font Size | Change Background Color color | Change Text Color color | Change Link Color color | Change Visited Link Color color |
Cite as: Eric Allen Engle,  Westphalian Procedure, Post-Westphalian Substance: Alien Torts in Bolivia, 17 E. Afr. J. Peace & Hum. Rts. 264-268 (2011).


EAST AFRICAN JOURNAL OF PEACE & HUMAN RIGHTS

Journal of the Human Rights and Peace Centre (HURIPEC)

Faculty of Law, Makerere University

Volume 17, Number 1

June 2011

Copyright © 2011 by HURIPEC

EAST AFRICAN JOURNAL OF PEACE & HUMAN RIGHTS

Volume 17 Number 1, 2011

EDITORIAL COMMITTEE

FACULTY OF LAW, MAKERERE UNIVERSITY

Managing Editor

J. Oloka-Onyango

HURIPEC

Editor

Denis A. Katebire

HURIPEC

 

COMMITTEE MEMBERS

Samuel Tindifa

Fredrick W. Jjuuko

Hadija Namyalo

HURIPEC

Law & Jurisprudence

Public & Comparative Law

Sylvia Tamale

Christopher Mbaziira

Esther D. Naggita

Law & Jurisprudence

HURIPEC

Law & Jurisprudence

Henry Onoria

Robert Kirunda

Phionah Muhwezi-Mpanga

Public & Comparative Law

Public & Comparative Law

Commercial Law

Assistant Editor

Francis X. Birikadde

HURIPEC

ii

EAST AFRICAN JOURNAL OF PEACE & HUMAN RIGHTS

Volume 17 Number 1, 2011

INTERNATIONAL ADVISORY BOARD

Selina Goulbourne

Winston P. Nagan

Hope Lewis

Coventry University

University of Florida

Northeastern University

Penelope Andrews

Patricia Kameri Mbote

Fareda Banda

CUNY Law School

University of Nairobi School of Oriental & African Studies

Chris Maina Peter

Karin Arts

Makau wa Mutua

University of Dar es Salaam

Institute of Social Studies

SUNY, Buffalo

Gudmundur Alfredsson

Amina Mama

Peter R. Schmidt

University of Strasbourg

University of California, Davis

University of Florida

Christof Heyns

Onalenna Selolwane

Abdul Paliwala

University of Pretoria

University of Botswana

University of Warwick

Deepika Udagama

 

J. Purusi Sadiki

University of Colombo

 

University of Ghent

iii

EAST AFRICAN JOURNAL OF PEACE & HUMAN RIGHTS

Volume 17 Number 1, 2011

The East African Journal of Peace and Human Rights, ISSN: 1021-8858, is published twice annually by the Faculty of Law, Makerere University under the auspices of the Human Rights and Peace Centre (HURIPEC). Contributions for publication should be original. The text of the article, including footnotes, should be double-spaced. Footnotes should be placed at the bottom of each page and citations should follow A Uniform System of Citation (15th ed). Contributors are requested to indicate their professional, academic, and other qualifications as well as their e-mail and physical address for communication. Published authors will receive a free copy of the Journal in which their contribution appears.

Works published in the Journal do not necessarily represent the views of the Editors, the International Advisory Board, or the Human Rights and Peace Centre.

This journal should be cited as EAST AFR. J. PEACE HUM. RIGHTS. Further inquiries should be directed to:

Denis Asiimwe Katebire

HURIPEC

Faculty of Law

Makerere University

P.O. Box 7062

Kampala

UGANDA

Telephone: (256-41) 532-954

Fax No: (256-41) 543-110 or 532-956

E-mail: dasiimwe@law.mak.ac.ug

iv

TABLE OF CONTENTS

ARTICLES

INTERNATIONAL HUMAN RIGHTS AND INTERNATIONAL HUMANITARIAN LAW IN SITUATIONS OF ARMED CONFLICT

M.O.A. Ashiru . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

MAINSTREAMING HUMAN RIGHTS INTO ALL NGO WORK

Maria Nassali . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

THE GHOST OF THE ORGANIZATION FOR AFRICAN UNITY (OAU) HAUNTS AFRICA

Josephine Ndagire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

INTERNATIONAL HUMAN RIGHTS FRAMEWORK ON ACCESS TO

CONTRACEPTION FOR ADOLESCENTS IN AFRICA

Ebenezer Durojaye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

CIVIL SOCIETY PARTICIPATION IN HEALTH SECTOR PLANNING,

 

BUDGETING, AND MONITORING IN SELECTED DISTRICTS

 

IN UGANDA

 

Sandra Kiapi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

105

HUMAN RIGHTS-BASED ACCOUNTABILITY FOR HEALTHCARE IN

 

UGANDA

 

Tenywa Aloysius Malagala . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

124

COURTS AND THE NEED FOR DYNAMISM IN THE PROMOTION OF REPRODUCTIVE HEALTH RIGHTS: A NIGERIAN PERSPECTIVE Babafemi Odunsi & Folake Olaleye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

THE QUEST FOR POVERTY ALLEVIATION IN NIGERIA: THE NEED FOR A RIGHTS-BASED APPROACH

O.A. Orifowomo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

v

FEDERALISM AND LEGAL PLURALISM IN ETHIOPIA: PRELIMINARY OBSERVATIONS ON THEIR IMPACTS ON THE PROTECTION OF HUMAN RIGHTS

Getachew Assefa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

THE RIGHT TO LEAVE AND ITS RAMIFICATIONS IN ERITREA

Simon M. Weldehaimanot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

POLITICIZATION OF LAND LAW AND GENDER RELATIONS IN UGANDA:

A CASE STUDY

 

Godard Busingye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

262

A HISTORICAL PERSPECTIVE ON LAND TRANSFER: “SHOWING THE

LAND,” SURVEY, AND REGISTRATION IN (B)UGANDA FROM 1900-1950

Holly E. Hanson . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

COMMENT

WESTPHALIAN PROCEDURE, POST-WESTPHALIAN SUBSTANCE: ALIEN TORTS IN BOLIVIA

Eric Engle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

COURT DECISIONS

REVIEW OF MAJOR DECISIONS ON FUNDAMENTAL RIGHTS AND FREEDOMS IN UGANDA, 2008–2009

Henry Onoria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

vi

INTERNATIONAL HUMAN RIGHTS AND INTERNATIONAL HUMANITARIAN LAW IN SITUATIONS OF ARMED CONFLICT

M.O.A. Ashiru*

ABSTRACT

International Human Rights Law and International Humanitarian Law are two distinct areas of law both in origin and development, yet over the years Human Rights Law has had a major impact on International Humanitarian Law. This article considers the areas in which International Human Rights Law has played a part in armed conflict situations.

I. INTRODUCTION

Human rights law as embodied in international human rights instruments and humanitarian laws as embodied in the Geneva Conventions of 1949 and the Additional Protocols thereto, prohibiting attacks on civilian populations are systematically ignored and violated in armed conflict situations and military occupation, by armed and security forces and other parties to armed conflicts. By the end of the twentieth century, there was a dramatic increase in the number of countries which were involved in violent conflicts and wars. There was also a dramatic increase in the number of civilians affected by the deliberate and systematic violation of human rights. This was witnessed, for example, in wars which occurred in countries such as Yugoslavia, Rwanda, Somalia, Iraq, Turkey and Liberia, and Sierra-Leone, thus reminding us of the cruelty, suffering, destruction and death which occur in armed conflict situations.

For many decades now, there have been extensive debates on the application of human rights law to armed conflict situations, thus focusing on the relationship between International Humanitarian Law (IHL) and International Human Rights Law (IHRL). Even though it is now recognized that IHRL applies in armed conflict situations, there are certain obstacles which are encountered in the practical application of this law. This arises in situations where rights such as the right to life, the right to freedom from torture and other cruel and inhuman or degrading treatment or punishment, economic, social and cultural rights apply to both these bodies of law.

This article considers how human rights law is applied in armed conflict situations and

* Lecturer, Faculty of Law, Obafemi Awolowo University. Email:<ashirumo@yahoo.com>

1

2

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

the practical problems encountered in its application. It also considers how these two bodies of law can work concurrently and also complement and reinforce each other.

II. CONSIDERATION OF BOTH BODIES OF LAW AND THE RECOGNITION OF HUMAN RIGHTS LAW IN ARMED CONFLICT SITUATIONS

IHL and IHRL vary in terms of their origin and the situations in which they apply. IHL applies in times of armed conflict, whether international or non-international.1 It binds parties to the conflict, thus in the case of international conflicts, IHL must be observed by the States involved whereas in internal conflicts IHL binds the government as well as the groups fighting against it or among themselves. IHL aims to protect not only people who do not or are no longer taking part in hostilities but also civilians. Thus, it is necessary that the parties to a conflict distinguish between combatants and non- combatants and also between military and non-military targets. Their object of attack must not be on the civilian population as a whole neither on an individual civilian. They are also prohibited from attacking military objectives if that would cause disproportionate harm to civilians or civilian objects.

On the other hand since human rights are rights which are inherent to human beings, IHRL protects the individual at all times from abuse by the State2 and thus it applies both in times of peace and in armed conflict. It lays down rules that bind States in their relations with individuals. There is however a growing body of opinion which remains unsettled that organized groups especially where they exercise government-like functions must also respect human rights. It is yet to be seen how the law will evolve in this regard.

Despite their differences, these two bodies of law share a common ideal that is the protection of the lives, health and dignity of individuals. Also many of their guarantees are identical, such as the protection of the right to life, freedom from torture

1.International conflicts are wars involving two or more states, they can also be wars of liberations, regardless of whether a declaration of war has been made or whether the parties involved recognize that there is a state of war. Non-international armed conflicts on the other hand are those in which government forces are fighting against armed insurgents, or rebel groups are fighting among themselves.

2.See, e.g., Article 2, International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights, 99 U.N.T.S.171; Article 15, European Convention for the Protection of Human Rights and Fundamental Freedoms, U.N.T.S. 123; and Article 27, American Convention on Human Rights, 1144 U.N.T.S.123.

2011]

International Human Rights & Humanitarian Law in Armed Conflict

3

and ill treatment and the protection of family rights.3 The recognition by universal and regional human right bodies that human rights law applies to armed conflict situations bridged the gap between the separation of the law of peace and the law of war.4 The concurrent application of these two bodies of law was expressly recognized, for example, by the International Court of Justice in its Nuclear Weapons Advisory Opinion on the application of human rights in situations of armed conflict, with respect to the International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights (ICCPR). It rejected the position that the Covenant could only be applied in peace time and observed that:

… the protection of the International Covenant of Civil and Political Rights does not cease in times of war, except by operation of Article 4 of the Covenant whereby certain provision may be derogated from in time of national emergency. Respect for the right to life is not, however such a provision. In principle, the right not arbitrarily to be deprived of one’s life applies also in hostilities. … Thus whether a particular loss of life, through the use of a certain weapon in warfare, is to be considered an arbitrary deprivation of life contrary to Article 6 of the Covenant, can only be decided by reference to the law applicable in armed conflict and not deduced from the terms of the Covenant itself.5

The Court has held on to this view, which is observed from one of its fairly recent advisory opinions. In the Advisory Opinion on the Legal Consequences of a Wall in

3.Debates on the relationship between Human Rights Law and International Humanitarian Law tend to focus on civil and political rights in particular with regard to the use of force and deprivation of liberty, more than economic, social and cultural rights even though these latter rights are equally as important as the former ones. Economic, social and cultural rights where humanitarian law is concerned, includes issues such as ensuring adequate food supplies and protecting health during armed conflict. However when these issues are being dealt with, the focus of attention is usually placed on the relevant international humanitarian law rules than the human rights point of view. Article 6 of the Geneva Convention (IV), relative to the Protection of Civilian Persons in Time of War, dealing with a number of welfare provisions, does not apply beyond a year after the general close of military operations. It is likely that in such cases human rights law may fill the gap when the occupying power continues to exercise government functions.

4.These are various international tribunals: the International Court of Justice, the UN Human Rights Committee, the European Court of Human Rights, the Inter-American Commission on Human Rights and national courts.

5.ICJ, Legality of the Threat or Use of Nuclear Weapons, Advisory Opinion, 8 July 1996, ICJ Reports 1996, ¶ 25.

4

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

the Occupied Palestinian Territory:

… the court consider[ed] that the protection offered by human rights conventions does not cease in case of armed conflict, save through the effect of provisions for derogation of the kind to be found in Article 4 of the International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights. As regards the relationship between international humanitarian law and human rights law, there are thus three possible situations: some rights may be exclusively matters of international humanitarian law; others may be exclusively matters of human rights law; yet others may be matters of both these branches of international law.6

There are also international treaties and instruments, such as the Convention on the Rights of the Child of 1989,7 the Rome Statute of the International Criminal Court8 and the Optional Protocol to the Convention on the Rights of the Child on the Involvement of Children in Armed Conflict 2000,9 which have incorporated or drawn from both human rights and international humanitarian law provisions.

III. DEROGATION AND NON-DEROGATION

IHL is non-derogable as it deals with an exceptional situation, namely armed conflict, (the only exception can be found in Article 5 of the Fourth Geneva Convention). Although IHRL applies at all times, that is, during peacetime and in situations of armed conflict, there are some IHRL treaties which permit a State Party to derogate from certain rights in situations of public emergency threatening the life of the nation, which includes situations of armed conflict. This is clear from the wordings of such treaties

6.ICJ, Legal Consequences of the Construction of a Wall in the Occupied Palestinian Territory, Advisory Opinion, 9 July 2004, ICJ Reports 2004, ¶ 106.

7.Art. 38, Convention on the Rights of the Child, 1989, 1577 U.N.T.S. 3. What is peculiar is that this article, which applies in peacetime, also contains provisions, which are applicable in armed conflict situations thus demonstrating the overlap between the law of peace and that of war, and the necessity of taking international human rights law into consideration. Article 77 of Additional Protocol I to the Geneva Conventions which provides that children who have not attained the age of fifteen years do not take direct part in hostilities and, in particular should not be recruited in the armed forces is replicated in Articles 38(2), (3) and (4).

8.Rome Statute of the International Criminal Court, 2002, 2187 U.N.T.S. 3.

9.Optional Protocol to the Convention on the Rights of the Child on the Involvement of Children in Armed Conflicts, 2000, 1577 U.N.T.S. 3.

2011]

International Human Rights & Humanitarian Law in Armed Conflict

5

as the European Convention for the Protection of Human Rights and Fundamental Freedoms and the American Convention on Human Rights, which expressly allows for derogation of certain rights “in time of war or other public emergency.”10 On the other hand, for example, the ICCPR in its Article 4 (which provides for derogation) makes no mention of war. The omission was deliberately made in the course of drafting the Covenant. Where a derogation clause exists a State Party may only derogate from its obligations under the treaty,

to the extent strictly required by the exigencies of the situation, provided that such measures are not inconsistent with their other obligations under international law and do not involve discrimination solely on the ground of race, colour, sex, language, religion or social origin.11

Derogation cannot be invoked lightly as it must be proportional to the crisis at hand and must not be introduced on a discriminatory basis. It must not contravene other international law rules, which includes IHL rules. In the case of Lawless v. Ireland, for example, the applicant who was a member of the Irish Republican Army claimed that his detention was a violation of Article 5 of the European Convention on Human Rights. The court considered the Irish Governments’ specific measures of derogation and found that they could be characterized as measures strictly required by the exigencies of the situation.

There are however certain rights, which are non-derogable, that is they are to be applied in all circumstances, without exception. For example under the ICCPR, Articles 6 (right to life) and 7 (torture or cruel, inhuman or degrading treatment) may not be derogated from.12 It is a requirement that derogations must be officially

10.Article 15, European Convention for the Protection of Human Rights and Fundamental Freedoms; and Article 27, American Convention on Human Rights. Public emergency was defined by the European Commission on Human Rights as “a situation of exceptional and imminent danger or crisis affecting the general public … constituting a threat to organized life of the community … while a different approach, stressing on the term “war” retained a “public emergency” as a situation “tantamount to war.”

See, ECHR, Lawless v. Ireland, 1960-61.

11.Article 4, International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights. See also, Article 15, European Convention for the Protection of Human Rights and Fundamental Freedoms; and Article 27, American Convention on Human Rights.

12.Article 4(2) of the Convention provides a full list of the articles, which may not be derogated from. The Convention for the Protection of Human Rights and Fundamental Freedoms corresponding articles to this are found in Articles 2 and 3 (derogation only allowed in respect of death resulting from lawful acts of war), and the American Convention on Human Rights in Articles 3 and 4.

6

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

proclaimed and notified to the other States Parties to the treaties.13 This provides a means of ensuring compliance with IHL and IHRL where they overlap.

IV. EXTRATERRITORIAL APPLICATION OF HUMAN RIGHTS

OBLIGATIONS

One of the problems in applying human rights law in international armed conflict including situations of occupation is with regard to the extra-territorial obligation of a State, as the State would likely be operating outside its borders. As human rights must continue to apply even after the outbreak of the armed conflict, the question thus arises as to whether human rights obligations can extend to actions of State forces outside the State’s recognized borders.

A. Effective Control over a Territory

There have been a number of cases where human rights obligations have been applied to areas under the effective control of the State. This also includes situations of military occupation and troops taking part in peacekeeping operations. The rationale behind applying human rights law extraterritorially to situations where States have effective control over a territory, is to effectively and practically ensure respect for human rights. Consideration is given as to the application of various human rights treaties where such situations arise. The UN Human Rights Committee has considered the application of Article 2(1) of the ICCPR14 with regard to respecting and ensuring the Covenant rights

13.Article 4(3) International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights, Article 15(3) Convention for the Protection of Human Rights and Fundamental Freedoms, and Article 27(3) American Convention on Human Rights. There may be instances where the human rights bodies concede that the situation on the ground in relation to the case being decided by them called for exceptional measures, yet no declaration of a derogation has been addressed to the appropriate body. This was the situation in the cases of Isayeva,

Yuzupova & Basayeva v. Russia (ECHR, Isayeva, Yuzupova, Bazayeva v. Russia, 57947/00, 57948/00, 57949/00, 24 February, 2005, 129) and Isayeva v. Russia (ECHR, Isayeva v. Russia, 57950/00, 24 February 2005, 128) both of which were decided by the European Court of Human Rights. These cases concerned the conduct of hostilities during military operations and what measures should have been taken to avoid or reduce the risk of incidents involving the civilian population and damage to property. Since no declaration under Article 15 had been addressed to the Council of Europe, the operations which had been conducted by the Federal Army were evaluated by the court as occurring in a normal legal contest.

14.Article 2(1) provides that “each State party to the present Covenant undertakes to respect and to ensure to all individuals within its territory and subject to its jurisdiction the rights recognized in the present Covenant, without distinction of any kind, such as race, colour, sex, language, religion, political or opinion, national or social origin, property or other status.”

2011]

International Human Rights & Humanitarian Law in Armed Conflict

7

to all persons who may be within the State Party’s territory and to all persons subject to the State Party’s jurisdiction. In its General Comment 31, the Committee held that by Article 2(1) of the Covenant, State Parties are required to:

respect and to ensure the Covenant rights to all persons who may be within their territory and to all persons subject to their jurisdiction. This means that a State Party must respect and ensure the rights laid down in the Covenant to anyone within the power or effective control of that State Party, even if not situated within the territory of the State Party.

The enjoyment of these rights is not limited to citizens of States Parties but must also be available to all individuals, regardless of nationality or statelessness, such as asylum seekers, refugees, migrant workers and other persons. The Committee then went on to state that the principle is also applied to those within the power or effective control of the forces of a State Party acting outside its territory, regardless of the circumstances in which such power or effective control was obtained, such as forces constituting a national contingent of a State Party assigned to an international peace-keeping or peace- enforcement operations.15

The Committee has confirmed its position in particular to situations of military occupation,16 and also with regard to troops taking part in peacekeeping operations.17 This was the case in Northern Cyprus and in the occupied Palestinian territories. The International Court of Justice adopted a similar approach to that of the Committee with regard to the ICCPR, in its 2004 Wall Advisory Opinion. In interpreting Article 2(1) of the Covenant, the court found that reference to the object and purpose of the Covenant implied that the Covenant is applicable in respect of acts done by a State Party to the Covenant in exercise of its jurisdiction outside its own territory.18

15.General Comment 31, Nature of the General Legal Obligation on States Parties to the Covenant, UN Doc. CCPR/C/74/CRP/4/Rev.6 (2004), para. 10, available at <www.unhchr.ch/tbs/doc.nsf(Symbol)CCPR.C.21.Rev.1.Add.13.En?Opendocument>, (accessed on 23 March 2009).

16.Concluding Observations on Cyprus, UN Doc. CCPR/C/79/Add 39, Sept. 21, 1994, ¶ 3; Concluding Observations on Israel, 11, UN Doc. CCPR/CO/78/ISR, Aug. 21, 2003.

17.Concluding Observations on Belgium, CCPR/C/79/Add99, Nov. 19, 1998, ¶ 17; Concluding Observations on Belgium, CCPR/CO?81?BEL, Aug. 12, 2004, ¶ 6.

18.Wall case, supra note 6, ¶¶ 108-111.

8

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

1. Extraterritorial Applicability of the European Convention on Human Rights.—In considering if an applicant’s human rights have been violated in an extraterritorial situation, the European Commission of Human Rights and the European Court of Human Rights have considered the meaning of “jurisdiction” under Article 1 of the Convention.19 This is because the exercise of jurisdiction is considered a necessary condition for Contracting States to be able to be held responsible for acts or omissions imputable to it, which gives rise to an allegation of the infringement of rights and freedoms set forth in the Convention.20

The concept of “jurisdiction” for purposes of Article 1 of the Convention is thus taken to reflect its meaning in public international law. From the standpoint of public international law, the European Commission of Human Rights and the European Court of Human Rights have held that the term “within their jurisdiction” would not be equivalent to or limited to the national territory of the High Contracting Parties. Their responsibility can also be engaged because of acts of their authorities producing effects outside their territory. This would depend on whether or not that State had effective control over the territory in question.

The case of Cyprus v. Turkey,21 concerned the occupation of Northern Cyprus by Turkish forces in the aftermath of a large-scale military intervention, which occurred in July 1974. Cyprus claimed that Turkey had violated several rights guaranteed by the Convention when it invaded it in July 1974 and occupied Northern Cyprus. The European Commission on Human Rights held that the Contracting States “are bound to secure the rights and freedoms of all persons under their actual authority and responsibility, not only when that authority is exercised” within their own territory but also when it is exercised abroad. The European Court of Human Rights in cases such as Loizidou v. Turkey22 and Issa & Others v. Turkey23 also applied this principle of effective control. Loizidou v. Turkey concerned human right violations, which arose out of a military occupation. The applicant and the Cypriot government maintained that ever since the Turkish occupation of northern Cyprus, the applicant had been denied access to her property and as a result of this, lost all control over it.24 The court stated:

19.Article 1 of the European Convention on Human Rights states that “the High Contracting Parties shall secure to everyone within their jurisdiction the rights and freedom defined in Section 1 of this Convention.”

20.ECHR, Issa & Ors v. Turkey, App. No. 31821/96 (Final), 30 March 2005, ¶ 66.

21.ECHR, Appl. No. 25781/94, 10 May 2001.

22.ECHR, Preliminary Objections, 23 February 1995, 103 ILR 622, ¶¶ 62-64.

23.See supra note 20.

24.Supra note 22.

2011]

International Human Rights & Humanitarian Law in Armed Conflict

9

Bearing in mind the object and purpose of the Convention, the responsibility of a Contracting Party may also arise when, as a consequence of military action—whether lawful or unlawful—it exercises effective control of an area outside its national territory. The obligation to secure, in such an area, the rights and freedoms set out in the Convention derives from the fact of such control whether it be exercised directly, through its armed forces, or through a subordinate local administration.

The court in Issa & Ors v. Turkey distinguished its own decision from those in Loizidou v. Turkey and Cyprus v. Turkey. The applicants in the Issa case complained of the alleged unlawful arrest, detention, ill treatment and subsequent killings of their relatives in the course of a military operation conducted by the Turkish army in northern Iraq in April 1995. The court found that the armed forces of Turkey in the latter two cases were in total more than 30,000 personnel, which was no less than that alleged by the applicants in the Issa case. However the difference was that in the latter two cases, the troops in northern Cyprus were present over a much longer period of time and stationed throughout the whole territory of northern Cyprus. In addition to this, the area was patrolled and had checkpoints on all the main lines of communication between the northern and southern parts of the island. In the Issa case, on the other hand there was no evidence that the Turkish troops conducted operations in the area where the alleged killings took place.25 This case thus gives support to the fact that effective control does not mean control over every act or part of the territory, but that effective overall control over a territory is sufficient.

In the case of Bankovic v. Belgium,26 the court dismissed as inadmissible an application by the relatives of individuals who were killed in the 1999 bombing of a Belgrade building of the Radio Television of Serbia (RTS) during the North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) air strikes against the Federal Republic of Yugoslavia (FRY). The application was brought against all the European NATO member states, which are also parties to the Convention for the Protection of Human Rights and Fundamental Freedoms. The FRY was not, and is still not, a party to the Convention. The applicants argued that the respondent States’ control over FRY airspace was “nearly as complete as Turkey’s control over the territory of northern Cyprus” and that this brought the RTS strike within the jurisdiction of the respondent States. This

25.ECHR, supra note 20, ¶ 75-76.

26.ECHR, Bankovic & Ors v. Belgium & 16 Other Contracting States, Case No. 52207/99, 12 December 2001.

10

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

argument was dismissed by the Grand Chamber, which held that NATO did not have effective overall control over FRY since the notion of jurisdiction under Article 1 of the Convention was primarily territorial. That a State could not exercise jurisdiction on the territory of another state without the latter’s consent, invitation and acquiescence, unless the former is an occupying State in which case, it can be found to exercise jurisdiction in that territory, at least in certain respects. That in the absence of effective ground control of a territory, precision air strikes and control of airspace did not create responsibility under the Convention.27

Before the decision of the Grand Chamber on subsequent cases regarding jurisdiction on extraterritorial application of the Convention, its decision regarding this issue in the Bankovic case was taken as being restrictive. The post-Bankovic cases such as Iiascu v. Moldova & Russia and Oclan v. Turkey28 clarified this. Iiascu & Others v. Moldova & Russia29 concerned human rights violations in Transdniestria, an area of Moldova subject to a separatist regime supported by Russia. By a majority of 16 to 1 the Grand Chamber held that Russia exercised jurisdiction whilst by 11 to 6 votes Moldova also exercised jurisdiction. Russia was found to be responsible for human rights violations by the court, on the basis of the presence of a small number of its troops. However, since Moldova lacked effective control, it was not held responsible for the human rights violations save to the extent that they arose out of failures by Moldova to comply with its positive obligations:

to take diplomatic, economic, judicial or other measures that it is in its power to take and are in accordance with international law to secure to the applicants the rights guaranteed by the Convention.30

Effective control for purposes of human rights appears to be broader and more flexible than that of occupation in humanitarian law, where the obligations of the occupying

27.Id. This case also illustrates the importance of being a party to a treaty in order to benefit from it. The FRY was not, and is still not a party to the Convention, which meant that its citizens were deprived of any rights that they were previously granted and therefore had no claim to a remedy for human rights grievances. Thus, a particular action taken by a contracting state in the territory of another state would not be governed by the first states Convention obligations if the second state is also not a party to the Convention.

28.Grand Chamber Judgment, 12 May 2005.

29.ECHR 2004-VII. The reason why Russia was found responsible was because it had set up the regime, which remained under its effective authority or decisive influence. Russia also gave that regime military, economic, financial and political support.

30.Referred to in Al-Skeni v. Sec. of State for Defence [2005] EWCA (Civ) 1609, ¶ 116.

2011]

International Human Rights & Humanitarian Law in Armed Conflict

11

State are absolute. From case law decided by the European Court of Human Rights, the degrees of control under human rights law varies and so also the obligations of the State. This was noted in the comparison made between the cases of Issa & Ors v. Turkey, Loizidou v. Turkey and Cyprus v. Turkey.

On the other hand, in the Al-Skeini case,31 though British troops were said to occupy two provinces of Iraq in 2003, they had no effective control in a third province for the purpose of applying the European Convention on Human Rights, as the United Kingdom possessed no executive, legislative or judicial authority in that province. The British troops were only in that province to maintain security in a situation on the verge of anarchy. The appellants in this case were relatives of Iraqi civilians who died by the actions of British soldiers in southern Iraq in the latter part of 2003 (between the cessation of major combat operations and the handover of sovereignty to the Iraqi interim government). Five of the deceased were shot in the course of security operations (one in cross-fire); the sixth deceased died following gross ill treatment whilst in custody in a United Kingdom military detention facility.

2. The Inter-American Commission of Human Rights.—The Commission recognizes jurisdiction over acts committed outside a State’s territory. This is based on the fact that since human rights are inherent to all human beings, it is for the States to guarantee a person under their jurisdiction the protection of their human rights. This includes any person subject to its authority and control.32

B. Power over a Person

Human rights obligations will also apply extraterritorially where state agents have authority and control over an individual. While it is clear that this would cover situations where an individual is abducted, detained or ill-treated, the European Court of Human Rights or the Human Rights Committee are not to decide on if States would be held responsible for extraterritorial killings. Ocalan v. Turkey,33 for example, concerned (in part) the applicant’s arrest by members of the Turkish Security Forces inside a Turkish registered aircraft in the international zone of Nairobi Airport. The Grand Chamber stated the basis upon which it accepted that Turkey had exercised

31.Id., ¶ 119.

32.Inter-Am. CHR, Coard v. the United States of America, Case No. 10,951, OEA/ser.L/V/II.106.doc.3rev (1999), ¶¶ 37.

33.See also, Lopez Burgos v. Uruguay, Comm. No. 52/1979, UN Doc. CCPR/C/13/D/52/1979, 1981, which concerned violations of ICCPR by state agents on foreign territory.

12

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

jurisdiction over the applicant as follows:

It is common ground that, directly after being handed over to the Turkish officials by the Kenyan officials, the applicant was under effective Turkish authority and therefore within the ‘jurisdiction’ of that state for the purposes of Article 1 of the Convention, even though in this instance Turkey exercised its authority outside its territory. It is true that the applicant was physically forced to return to Turkey by Turkish officials and was under their authority and control following his arrest and return to Turkey.34

V. THE APPLICATION OF LEX SPECIALIS IN INTERNATIONAL

HUMANITARIAN LAW

The principle of lex specialis in armed conflict situations applies in instances where human rights law and humanitarian law are incompatible and there is a conflict between them. As already established, IHRL protects individuals at all times from abuse of the State, which also includes armed conflict situations. If the application of IHRL conflicts with that of IHL, one of the rules must prevail. In such a situation the principle of lex specialis, (that is where a rule displaces the more general rule) will apply. Which law displaces the other will depend on how close the situation is to the battlefield. Thus where the use of force is at stake and it could be said that military operations are ongoing and that the armed forces have no real control over the situation and were not conducting a law enforcement operation, IHL would be the more appropriate law to apply, rather than IHRL, for the conduct of hostilities. On the other hand where the situation is remote from the battlefield and the state authorities had enough control over a situation to be able to carry out law enforcement operations, IHRL would be the more appropriate law to apply.

The International Court of Justice in its advisory opinions on the Nuclear Weapons35 and the Wall case36 applied this principle. In the Nuclear Weapons case, it was argued that the use of nuclear weapons violated the right to life laid down in Article 6 of the ICCPR.37 The court was of the view that the right under Article 6 is non-

34.Supra note 28, ¶ 118.

35.ICJ, supra note 5, ¶ 26.

36.ICJ, supra note 6, ¶ 101.

37.Article 6(1) provides that “every human being has the inherent right to life. This right shall be protected by law. No one shall be arbitrarily deprived of his life.”

2011]

International Human Rights & Humanitarian Law in Armed Conflict

13

derogable and thus applies in armed conflict and that even during hostilities it is prohibited to arbitrarily deprive a person of his life. However, the court defined the term arbitrarily according to IHL by recognizing the primacy of IHL over IHRL in armed conflict.

Whilst the Inter-American Commission has also followed the decision of the International Court of Justice, the European Court of Human Rights and the African Commission on Human and Peoples’ Rights are yet to give their own opinion on the matter. The Human Rights Committee, on the other hand, in avoiding to deal with the issue, found both spheres of law to be complementary and not mutually exclusive.38

VI. CAN HUMAN RIGHTS BODIES APPLY INTERNATIONAL HUMANITARIAN LAW WHERE A VICTIM’S HUMAN RIGHTS HAVE BEEN VIOLATED IN AN ARMED CONFLICT SITUATION?

An individual can bring a matter before an independent body with regard to violation of his civil and political rights.39 However, there is no such procedure available where the individual’s rights have been violated under IHL, even though many serious violations of humanitarian law which occur also constitute serious violations of human rights. The question thus arises as to whether the human right bodies have the mandate to make pronouncements on violations of IHL, taking into consideration the fact that the provisions of a treaty appears to limit their mandate as contained in that treaty.40 Consideration as to how these bodies have dealt with such matters will be discussed.

A. The European Convention on Human Rights

The various bodies of the European Convention on Human Rights have been hesitant to make direct reference to IHL in their decisions. In Cyprus v. Turkey,41 though the

38.General Comment 31, supra note 15, ¶ 11.

39.For example, under Article 1 of the (First) Optional Protocol to the International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights, the Human Rights Committee may receive and consider communications from individuals subject to its jurisdiction who claim to be victims of a violation by that State Party of any of the rights set forth in the Covenant. Such an individual must have exhausted all domestic remedies before filing such a complaint to the Human Rights Committee. The Human Rights Committee will then consider whether the individual’s human rights have been violated.

40.Article 1 of the Optional Protocol, for example, limits the Human Rights Committee’s jurisdiction to “any of the rights set forth in the Covenant” which would mean that international humanitarian law cannot be directly applied.

41.Supra note 21.

14

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

European Commission on Human Rights allowed the application of the Third Geneva Convention of 1949, it considered whether there had been a violation of Article 5 of the Convention, which deals with the right to liberty and security.

In Loizidou v. Turkey,42 the applicant’s complaint of refusal of access to her property, was made according to Article 1 of the Additional Protocol 1 to the Convention, that is violation of her right to peaceful enjoyment of her property as well a continued violation of the right to respect for her home under Article 8 of the Convention. Although the court recalled that the Convention should be interpreted in the light of the rules of interpretation set out in the Vienna Convention of 23 May 1969 of the Law of Treaties and that Article 31 paragraph 3(c) of the Vienna Convention indicates that account is to be taken of “any relevant rules of international law applicable in the relations between the parties,” it did not apply international humanitarian law. Judgment was given in the complainants favour applying Article 50 of the Convention.

In Bankovic v Belgium,43 the applicants complained that the bombardment of the RTS headquarters by NATO violated some of their rights under the European Convention on Human Rights.44 They also based their claim on States’ duties arising from IHL, as the NATO States were party to the Geneva Conventions and the relevant rules of the Additional Protocol 1, and contended that both these set of rules contained norms of customary nature. The court did not consider the IHL argument but the notion of jurisdiction under Article 1 of the Convention was preferred.

In the latter cases brought before the European Convention on Human Rights bodies, the trend by the bodies has been to make use of IHL principles to interpret specific situations, without actually referring to them by name as seen in Ergi v. Turkey.45 The issue in this case was whether the killing of a person during a terrorist related ambush operation was necessary. The European Court of Human Rights found that the State had failed to take “all feasible precautions in the choice of means and methods of a security operation”46 involving the placement of an ambush in protecting the lives of the civilian population. The Court used the language of IHL to consider the alleged human rights violations by the Turkish security forces in the Kurdish areas.47

42.Supra note 22.

43.Supra note 26.

44.The right to life under Article 2, freedom of expression under Article 10, and right to an effective remedy under Article 13.

45.ECHR, App. No. 23818/93, 28 July 1998.

46.Id., ¶ 79.

47.See also, ECHR, Gulec v. Turkey, App. No. 21593/93, 27 July, 1998 and ECHR, Engel v. The Netherlands, App. No. 5370/72, 23 November, 1976.

2011]

International Human Rights & Humanitarian Law in Armed Conflict

15

A possible explanation why the Court may have been cautious in applying IHL in their decisions may be because it is an expert in human rights law, rather than IHL. Certain terms used in IHRL and IHL have different meanings, and if the court were not trained to use IHL language, it is possible that a different decision from that which was intended may be reached.

B. The Inter-American Commission on Human Rights

Article 44 of the American Convention of Human Rights provides that:

Any person or group of persons, or any non-governmental entity legally recognized in one or more member states of the Organization, may lodge petitions with the Commission containing denunciations or complaints of violations of this Convention by a State Party.

This implies that only breaches of the Convention can be prosecuted. This would mean that neither the Commission nor the Court might examine alleged violations of other international treaties, as they would fall outside the scope of the Convention. To do otherwise would mean that an obligation is being imposed upon a State without its consent, which would be contrary to Article 34 of the Vienna Convention 1969, which provides that obligations can only be created for a State if that State has expressly accepted them.

There have however been quite a number of reports where the Commission has sought to justify its application of IHL to specific situations, which individuals have brought against State Parties.48 Its report in the Tablada (Abella)49 case is an example of this. This case concerned the attack of the military barracks of La Tablada, in January 1989, for almost thirty hours by 42 armed persons who allegedly feared a new coup d’etat would occur. The surviving attackers, applied to the Commission, complaining that Argentina had violated both HRL and IHL when responding to the assault. The Commission directly applied IHL (in particular Article 3 Common to the four Geneva Conventions of 1949) and did not use it merely as an aid to interpret HRL. Its explanation for applying IHL was because:

48.The case of Disabled Peoples’ International et al. v. United States was the first attempt which the Commission made to deal with this problem. See, Inter-Am.EH.R, App. No. 9213, 184, OEA/Ser.L/V/II.71.doc.9 rev 1IV.C(3), April 17, 1987.

49.Inter-Am.CHR, Juan Carlos Abella v. Argentina, Case No. 11,137, Report No. 55/97, OEA Ser.L/V/II.98.Doc.6.Rev (1998), 18 November 1997.

16

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

… The Commission’s ability to resolve claimed violations of this non- derogable right arising out of an armed conflict may not be possible in many cases by reference to Article 4 of the American Convention alone. This is because the American Convention contains no rules that either define or distinguish civilians from combatants and other military targets, much less, specify when a civilian can lawfully be attacked or when civilian casualties are a lawful consequence of military operations.50

In the Las Palmeras case,51 the Inter-American Court did not follow the Commission’s decision that Colombia had violated Common Article 3 of the Geneva Convention. This case concerned the execution of six unarmed civilians by the Colombian police force. It ruled that neither the Commission nor the mandate allowed it to make direct pronouncements on violations of IHL. In paragraph 33 of its ruling, for example, it stated that the American Convention “has only given the court competence to determine whether the acts and norms of the States are compatible with the Convention itself and not with the 1949 Geneva Convention”. The court left open the possibility of using Common Article 3 of the Geneva Convention as an effective tool of interpretation, when dealing with the violations of HRL norms during armed conflict situations.

In the later cases of Bamaca Velasquez52 and Mapiripan Massacre,53 IHL was used as an effective tool of interpretation in applying HRL rules. The case of Bamaca Velasquez concerned a guerrilla fighter who was tortured and murdered by the Guatemalan military during a battle. The Commission requested that the Inter- American Court should decide on the responsibility of Guatemala for the violations of several articles of the American Convention on Human Rights and also certain articles of the Inter-American Convention to Prevent and Punish Torture and Article 3 Common to the Geneva Conventions. In justifying its decision to use IHL as an effective tool of interpretation to HRL rules the Court stated in paragraph 208 that:

Although the Court lacks competence to declare that a State is internationally responsible for the violation of international treaties

50.Id., ¶¶ 158-61.

51.Inter-Am.CHR, Las Palmeras v. Colombia, Case No. 67, Judgment on Preliminary Objections, 4 February, 2000.

52.Inter-Am.CHR, Bamaca Velasqez v. Gutemala, Case No.70, Judgment of 25 November,

2000.

53.Inter-Am. CHR, Mapiripan Massacre v. Columbia, Case No. 134, Judgment of 15 Sept.

2006.

2011]

International Human Rights & Humanitarian Law in Armed Conflict

17

that do not grant it such competence, it can observe that certain acts of omissions that violate human rights, pursuant to the treaties that they do have competence to apply, also violate other international instruments for the protection of the individual, such as the 1949 Geneva Conventions and in particular, Common Article 3.

The Court then went on to state in paragraph 209:

Indeed there is a similarity between the content of Article 3, Common to the 1949 Geneva Conventions and the provisions of the American Convention and other international instruments regarding non- derogable human rights (such as the right to life and the right not to be submitted to torture or cruel, inhuman or degrading treatment). This court has already indicated in the Las Palmeras case, that the relevant provisions of the Geneva Conventions may be taken into consideration as elements for the interpretation of the American Convention.

VII. CONCLUSION

There is no doubt that over the years the importance of human rights has been recognized in armed conflict situations. Though IHL and IHRL have different origins and are distinct in their application, they share a common goal to protect the lives, health and dignity of persons. However these two bodies of law can no longer be compartmentalized taking into consideration the fact that violations of humanitarian law in most cases also constitute violations of ones human rights at the same time. Since it is unlikely that IHL will be changed in the near future to favour individuals to bring claims for violations in this area of law, it is necessary to overcome the challenges both bodies of law face when making decisions regarding armed conflict situations where such laws are involved, be overcome. One such challenge is the difference between the language of both bodies of law which each would need to comprehend in order to be able to use them.

18

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

MAINSTREAMING HUMAN RIGHTS INTO ALL NGO

WORK

Maria Nassali*

ABSTRACT

This article argues that the governance of NGOs is critical to the strengthening of the human rights movement. It advocates for the rights based approach that advances the moral obligation of NGOs to apply human rights principles to themselves. It urges each NGO to address the power inequalities within its operations, policies and relationships, identify the rights and duty bearers and the nature of the responsibilities. Cognizant that human rights are indivisible and inter-dependent, it challenges the artificial distinction between human rights and development NGOs. Mindful that human rights are universal, it counsels NGOs to learn how ordinary people have appropriated human rights discourse in relation to their culture, knowledge and experiences. Finally, it challenges the human rights mechanisms to provide leadership that will enhance the credibility of the human rights discourse to tame power and offer protection from any abuse of power.

I. INTRODUCTION

Persistent poverty and civil strife have influenced the reconsideration of the development and governance debates in order to re-orient their focus to human rights. Relying on the rights based approach—a mechanism that calls for making all actors accountable for the human rights implications of their actions. This article makes a case for all NGOs to mainstream human rights within their work. Applying human rights principles to NGO day-to-day policies and practices make human rights part and parcel of everyday practices, ultimately catalyzing a human rights culture. The reason for mainstreaming human rights in the work of all NGOs is based on the universality, inter- dependence and indivisibility of human rights. In illustrating the benefits of a rights- based approach in strengthening good governance, this article answers the question: why human rights?

This article begins with a background to the rights-based approach as a tool of good governance and broadly maps the implications of the human rights principles to

* Chief Executive Officer, Uganda Association of Women Lawyers (FIDA-U). Email: <mnassali@fidauganda.org>.

2011]

Mainstreaming Human Rights into NGO Work

19

NGO work in part two. The discussion proceeds with the justification as to why all NGOs should apply rights to their governance in part three. Part four examines the extent to which NGOs have respected the fact that human rights are universal, given that the aspirations and values of human rights exist in all societies.1

Furthermore, the legitimacy of NGOs is also derived from the common norms pursued by the NGO and the specific communities that the NGO works with.2 The discussion focuses on how NGOs have related human rights to the knowledge and experiences of the communities that they work with, in order to promote the ownership of the human rights discourse. Using the example of how Development NGOs (DNGOs) have adopted the right-based principles and how Human Rights NGOs (HURINGOs) have respected the struggles of DNGOs as human rights struggles, I also examine the extent to which NGOs appreciate the point that human rights are inter- dependent and indivisible. The following discussion draws on the rights-based approach as a tool that advances the promotion of moral human rights obligations of NGOs to respect and promote rights. It begins by tracing the genesis of the rights-based approach followed by an articulation of the implication of each principle to NGO governance.

II. THE RIGHTS-BASED APPROACH AS AN INSTRUMENT OF GOOD

GOVERNANCE

The rights-based approach is not a new phenomenon, only its popularity is. The post- cold war period rejuvenated the quest for good governance, which necessitated the linking of rights and development, as well as mainstreaming rights in all processes by all actors.

1. See, V. Leary, The Effect of Western Perspectives on International Human Rights, HUMAN

RIGHTS IN AFRICA: CROSS-CULTURAL PERSPECTIVES (A.A. An-Naim & P.M. Deng eds, 1990), at 30; S.

GUTTO, HUMAN AND PEOPLES’ RIGHTS FOR THE OPPRESSED: CRITICAL ESSAYS ON THE THEORY AND PRACTICE OF HUMAN RIGHTS FROM A SOCIOLOGY OF LAW PERSPECTIVE 160 (1993); C. Heyns & F. Viljoen, Current Developments: An Overview of International Human Rights Protection in Africa, 15 SAJHR 421 (1999); A.A. An-Na’im & P.M. Deng, Introduction, in An-N a’im & Deng eds, supra, at 9; J.C.N. Paul Participatory Approaches to Human Rights in Sub-saharan Africa, in An-Naim & Deng eds, id., at 214; M. MUTUA, HUMAN RIGHTS: A POLITICAL AND CULTURAL CRITIQUE 8 (2002); C.E. Welch,

Human Rights and Francophone West Africa, in An-Na’im & Deng eds, supra, at 206; and C. Heyns & F. Viljoen, The Regional Protection of Human Rights in Africa: An Overview and Evaluation, in HUMAN

RIGHTS, THE RULE OF LAW, AND DEVELOPMENT IN AFRICA 143 (Zeleza & McConnaughay eds, 2004).

2. M. EDWARDS, NGO RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITY: A NEW DEAL FOR GLOBAL GOVERNANCE

7 (2000).

20

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

The application of human rights by all actors became popular following the directive of then UN Secretary General, Kofi Annan in 1997 that all UN agencies and programmes make human rights a core value of their activities.3 This process is popularly referred to as the rights-based approach. The effort of mainstreaming rights was accelerated by the appointment of Mary Robinson as the Human Rights Commissioner in 1997, who developed guidelines for the poverty eradication programmes.4 The OHCHR defines the rights-based approach to development as follows.

A rights-based approach to development is a conceptual framework for the process of human development that is normatively based on international human rights standards and operationally directed to promoting and protecting human rights. … [It] integrates the norms, standards and principles of the international human rights system into the plans, policies and processes of development. … The principles include equality and equity, accountability, empowerment and participation.5

Traditionally, the role of NGOs is to serve as a watchdog of the state’s rights obligations to the individual and to promote good governance. As custodians of good governance, NGOs are not only obliged to monitor and ensure the application of good governance principles by the state and its agencies, but to also observe the principles of accountability, transparency, participation, equity, and non-discrimination in their internal organizations.

The justification for the rights-based approach is traced from 1948, with the recognition by the UDHR, that “the inherent dignity and of the equal and inalienable rights of all members of the human family is the foundation of freedom, justice and peace in the world.”6 This statement is reiterated in the preamble of the International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights (ICCPR)7 and the International Covenant on

3.P. Alston & M. Robinson, The Challenges of Ensuring Mutuality of Human Rights and Development Endeavours, in HUMAN RIGHTS AND DEVELOPMENT: TOWARDS MUTUAL REINFORCEMENT

2 (Alston & Robinson eds, 2005); M. Robinson, What Rights Can Add to Good Development Practice, in

Alston & Robinson eds, id., at 29.

4.Id., at 11-12.

5.See, <http://www.unohchr.ch/development/approaches-01.html>

6.Preamble to the UDHR (1948).

7.G.A. res. 2200A (XXI), 21 U.N. GAOR Supp. (No. 16) at 52, U.N. Doc. A/6316 (1966), 999 U.N.T.S. 171, entered into force Mar. 23, 1976.

2011]

Mainstreaming Human Rights into NGO Work

21

Economic, Social and Cultural Rights (ICESCR).8 The African Charter9 demonstrates the concept of the indivisibility and interdependence of rights by providing for civil and political rights and economic, social and cultural rights in one document. Further, the principles of the rights-based approach have been part of the struggle for social justice, good governance and development.10

The Declaration of the Right to Development of 1986 makes reference to the interdependence and mutually reinforcing relationship between rights and development. It defines development as a “comprehensive economic, social, cultural and political process,” whose objective is the “constant improvement of the well-being of all people on the basis of their active, free and meaningful participation in development and in the fair distribution of the resulting benefits.”11 However, the reality in 46 countries poorer today than in 1990,12 with adverse consequences for peace and development, has compelled the need to re-examine development processes and priorities. Therefore, the rights-based approach places accountability on the recipient country of development aid.13

The Vienna Declaration of 1993 reiterates that the three: rights, democracy and development, are mutually reinforcing and interdependent.14 Similarly, the Copenhagen Declaration of 1995 reaffirms the link between human rights and development by establishing a new consensus that places people at the centre of sustainable development in order to achieve stable, safe and just societies for all. Rights-based approaches can also be traced to women’s efforts of gender mainstreaming, underscoring the indivisibility, inalienability and universality of women’s human rights.15

The article adopts the principles identified by the Office of the High Commissioner for Human Rights, namely: express linkage to rights, accountability,

8.G.A. res. 2200A (XXI), entered into force January 03, 1976.

9.ACHPR, 1981, OAU Doc. CAB/LEG/67/3 rev. 5, 21 I.L.M. 58 (1982), entered into force Oct.

21, 1986.

10.C. NYAMU-MUSEMBI & A. CORNWALL, WHAT IS THE “RIGHTS BASED APPROACH” ALL ABOUT? PERSPECTIVES FROM INTERNATIONAL DEVELOPMENT AGENCIES 7 (2004); I.G. SHIVJI, THE CONCEPT OF HUMAN RIGHTS IN AFRICA (1989).

11.Declaration of the Right to Development (1986), art. 1.

12.UNDP, HUMAN DEVELOPMENT REPORT (2004); Robinson, supra note 3, at 26; M. Darrow

&A. Tomas, Power, Capture and Conflict: A Call for Human Rights Accountability in Development Cooperation, in 27 HUM. RTS Q. 474 (2005).

13.NYAMU-MUSEMBI & CORNWALL, supra note 10, at 12.

14.Vienna Declaration (1993), paras. 8 and 74.

15.Id. See also, Alston & Robinson eds, supra note 3; Charter of Feminist Principles for African Feminists (2006).

22

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

transparency, participation, equality and empowerment16 and outlines their meaning in respect to NGO governance in the following discussion. In consonance with the earlier critiques of the rights-based approach,17 the article urges the self reflection of the different stakeholders to instil human rights principles in their governance. The following sub-section highlights and clarifies the relevance of human rights principles to the governance and organizing of NGOs.

A. The Rights-based Approach to NGO Governance and Organizing

In discussing the principles of the rights-based approach, it is underscored that they are neither mutually exclusive, but are complementary and overlapping, with the common aim of ensuring the cardinal human right principle of respect of the inherent equality and dignity of the human person.

1.The Principle of Express Linkage to Rights.—The principle of express linkage to rights requires that all NGOs mainstream human rights in their work because human rights are universal, inter-dependent and indivisible. Mainstreaming human rights does not change the focus of what an NGO does, but rather entails paying particular attention to the root causes of inequity, exclusion, discrimination and rights violations. It requires each NGO to undertake a right-duty analysis by identifying the rights addressed in its programme, and by demarcating the relevant rights holders and duty bearers as well as the content of the duty.18 Put differently, each NGO has an obligation to articulate the implication to rights of specific policies and practices as well as the roles and responsibilities of the different stakeholders.19

2.The Principles of Accountability and Transparency.—NGO accountability refers to how an NGO holds itself responsible for its actions, beliefs and the utilization of resources. Accountability safeguards against abuse of power and strengthens ethical

16.<www.unohchr.ch/development/approaches-01.html>

17.P. UVIN, HUMAN RIGHTS AND DEVELOPMENT (2004); P. Alston, Ships Passing in the Night: The Current State of the Human Rights and Development Debate Seen Through the Lens of the Millennium Development Goals, in 27 HUM. RTS Q. (2005); Alston & Robinson eds, supra note 3; NYAMU-MUSEMBI

&CORNWALL, supra note 10; Darrow & Tomas, supra note 12.

18.Hugo Slim, By What Authority? The Legitimacy and Accountability of Non-governmental Organizations (Paper presented at the International Council on Human Rights Policy International Meeting on Global Trends and Human Rights—Before and after September 11, Geneva, January 10-12, 2002), at 14, available at <www.jha.ac/articles/a082.htm>

19.Alston, supra note 17, at 802-11.

2011]

Mainstreaming Human Rights into NGO Work

23

behaviour. NGOs have multiple accountability obligations under the law, to the governmental regulatory NGO Boards, NGO governing boards, to the NGOs’ mission and internal rules and procedures, their membership, communities, public, NGO sector- wide self-regulatory Councils and donors. Being accountable requires being transparent by publicizing the NGOs’ mission as well as the methods and resources of achieving it. This entails among others providing timely, accurate and objective information and allowing space for stakeholder’s feedback.

3.The Principle of Participation and Inclusion.—Participation guarantees that the human person is a central subject of human rights and the principal actor in determining his or her welfare and rights. The right to participation is entrenched within international treaty law.20 Participation is a major means by which people collectively determine their interests, priorities, engage in local dialogue, generate diverse ideas and promote collective commitment for the common good.21 Participation must be “active, free, meaningful” and broad involving diverse stakeholders.22 Participation extends “beyond having a right to participate in a given space to include the right to define and shape that space.”23 Given that the people closest to the problem have ingenious experience in solving them, NGOs are required to address the barriers that keep people from participating and exposes them to processes and skills of asking the right questions and contribute diverse ideas to ensure their rights. Instead of acting for the community, NGOs must act with the community to achieve the desired change.

4.The Principles of Equity, Non-discrimination and Empowerment.—The human rights discourse rests on the value system of equity and non-discrimination24 and the inherent equality and dignity of the human person.25 In order to achieve equality, focus is placed on formal equality by treating people alike and on substantive equality by addressing the systemic and underlying causes of discrimination through affirmative

20.UDHR, art. 21, ICCPR, art. 25, CRC, art. 12, CEDAW, arts 7, 13, 14(2), African Charter on Human and Peoples’ Rights (1981), art. 13.

21.African Charter on Popular Participation (1990), para. 10.

22.UN Declaration on the Right to Development (1986); Vienna Declaration (1993), para. 25; African Charter on Popular Participation (1990), paras 6 & 15.

23.J. Gaventa, Strengthening Participatory Approaches to Local Governance, 16 NATIONAL

CIVIC REV. 29 (2004).

24.UN Charter (1945), art. 1; ICESCR, art. 2(2); ICCPR, art. 2(1); UDHR, art. 1, African Charter (1981), art. 2 & 3.

25.UDHR, art. 1; ICCPR, art. 3; ICESR, art. 2(2) & 3; African Charter (1981), art. 5 & 19.

24

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

action.26 Empowerment means the ability of people to claim and exercise their rights in order to improve their lives.27 The concept of empowerment within NGOs is two dimensional. Firstly, empowerment relates to internal empowerment with each NGO obliged to strengthen itself in terms of skills, capacity, resource mobilization, competitive remuneration and supportive working environment for staff. Secondly, empowerment entails addressing power inequities to enable the weaker party to take action themselves. Furthermore, empowerment addresses how the NGO sector addresses societal inequalities accruing from age, gender, ethnicity, race and sexuality among others. In the era of globalization, empowerment also entails the balancing of power inequalities within NNGOs and SNGOs.

B. Why Human Rights Principles in NGO Governance and Management?

Obviously HURINGOs derive their legitimacy from human rights and are therefore obliged to respect human rights.28 The International Council on Human Rights Policy (ICHRP) is on record as stating that, “as organizations that advocate for democracy and justice, HURINGOs need to show that they do not conduct their own affairs in an undemocratic or unjust way.”29 The ICHRP also contends that any organization that does not acknowledge that human rights are universal would not qualify to be a human rights organization.30 The controversy remains as to whether all NGOs that do not define themselves as HURINGOs should also apply human rights principles to their governance.

This article argues that democracy and governance NGOs have to apply human rights because democracy and rights are mutually reinforcing. Human rights form the cornerstone of democracy. At the African level, all African treaties provide for the promotion of democracy and human rights in the same sentence or article, inferring that democracy and rights are inter-related. Thus, for example, the Constitutive Act of the African Union provides for “respect for democratic principles, human rights and the rule of law and good governance,31 as one of its guiding principles. The African Charter on Democracy, Elections and Governance, 2007 commits itself to the principle

26.CEDAW, General Recommendations on Temporary Special Measures, No. 25, para. 8.

27.<http://www.unhchr.ch/development/approaches-01.htm>; KEYSTONE ACCOUNTABILITY SURVEY 13 (2006).

28.ICHRP, DESERVING TRUST (2003), at 2-3, 17 & 49.

29.Id., at 11.

30.Id., at 38-39.

31.African Union Constitutive Act (2000), art. 4 (m).

2011]

Mainstreaming Human Rights into NGO Work

25

of “respect for human rights and democratic principles.”32

NEPAD commits itself to “promoting and protecting human rights and democracy” by developing clear standards of accountability and participatory governance.33 SADC reaffirms “human rights, democracy and the rule of law,” as core principles and gender mainstreaming as a key objective.34 The fundamental principles of the East African Community (EAC) are “good governance, including adherence to the principle of democracy, the rule of law, accountability, transparency, social justice, equal opportunities, gender equality and recognition, promotion and protection of human and peoples’ rights in accordance with the provisions of the African Charter.”35

In a debate on democracy and rights,36 Aina has argued that “asking the question, “democracy for what?” underlines that “democracy is for the promotion and advancement of individual and collective well-being of different people.”37 Therefore, democracy cannot exist without respect of human rights. Applying human rights principles to all NGOs’ policies, processes and programming is in resonance with the indivisible, inter-dependent and mutually reinforcing conception of rights underscored by the Vienna Declaration of 1993. The political elite have also learnt to appropriate the language of rights, much less derived from principled commitment, than from political compromise and self-preservation.38 Nonetheless, human rights are a social science to solve social problems, including and not restricted to taming the state. Hence, human rights is an ideology of mobilization for any struggle against domination, oppression and exploitation to expose and address any abuse of power and privilege that results in the violation of human rights.39

The development of the rights-based approach in the 1990s integrated human rights in all major global issues and by all actors.40 There are numerous benefits of applying human rights principles to all NGOs—popularly known as rights-based approach. The great merit of human rights is that it draws attention to discrimination

32.African Charter on Democracy, Elections and Governance (2007), art. 3(1).

33.NEPAD (2001), para. 49.

34.SADC Treaty (1992), arts 4 & 5.

35.EAC Treaty (1999), art. 6.

36.T. AINA, ELECTRONIC ROUND TABLE: DEMOCRACY AND HUMAN RIGHTS (2000), available at <www.africaaction.org/rtable/rtb2.pdf>.

37.Id., at 41.

38.C. Bell & J. Keenan, Human Rights, Non-governmental Organizations and the Problems of Transition, 26 HUM. RTS Q. 333 (2004).

39.SHIVJI, supra note 10, at 71; B. Ibhawoh, Restraining Universalism: Africanist Perspectives on Cultural Relativism in the Human Rights Discourse, in Zeleza & McConnaughay eds, supra note 1, at 30.

40.<www.unhchr.ch/development/approaches-01.html>

26

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

and tames the exercise of power by all actors.41 Scholarly opinion suggests that the UDHR together with the two UN Covenants have attained the status of customary international law and thus provide a standard of achievement of all nations and peoples.42 Consequently, the application of rights-based principles to development and governance facilitate the establishment of agreed upon minimum standards of achievement for the protection of rights because both governments and members of society are held accountable for the human rights implications of their work.43

Although mainstreaming human rights in NGO work does not impute a consensus on the most appropriate way of integrating human rights in development and governance, it would expand the human rights movement. The task of serving as a watchdog of both the market and state fundamentalism cannot be achieved by human rights NGOs alone. It requires forging strategic alliances with all NGOs and with the broader component of civil society with the aim of infusing the human rights discourse in the policies and practices of NGOs. Conversely an exclusionary approach could block a natural and important growth of human rights movements.

In real life what is defined as the problem and how it is addressed often depends on who has a voice, status and power.44 Consequently, mainstreaming human rights addresses power inequalities by tackling the phenomenon of elite capture. The concept of elite capture is “a process by which the elite skim development resources intended for the legitimate development … and defines politics in a way that protects their own interests.”45 Human rights therefore provide an effective mechanism to overcome arbitrariness in decision-making and in the development processes.46

Furthermore, given that the human rights community has fewer monetary and personnel resources than the development community, rights-based approach would attract more resources to human rights work.47 Thus, with respect to resources on a global scale, by the mid-1990s, the human rights sector attracted only 1% of the US$

41.Robinson, supra note 3, at 36.

42.J. Donnelly, Human Rights, Globalizing Flows and State Power, in GLOBALIZATION AND

HUMAN RIGHTS 229 (Brysk ed., 2002); W. KOREY, NGOS AND THE UNIVERSAL DECLARATION OF HUMAN

RIGHTS: A CURIOUS GRAPEVINE 3 (2001); A. Reinisch, The Changing International Legal Framework for Dealing with Non-state Actors, in HUMAN RIGHTS AND DEVELOPMENT: TOWARDS MUTUAL

REINFORCEMENT (Alston & Robinson ed., 2005), at 39; F. Viljoen, Africa’s Contribution to the Development of International Human Rights and Humanitarian Law, in 1 AHRLJ 19 (2001).

43.Robinson, supra note 3, at 32; Darrow & Tomas, supra note 12, at 487.

44.Id., at 475.

45.Id.

46.Id., at 520.

47.UVIN, supra note 17, at 36.

2011]

Mainstreaming Human Rights into NGO Work

27

50 billion annual revenue of the development sector.48 Similarly, under the NGO sector, the human rights component is comparatively less financially resourced. For example, in 1996, the Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development (OECD) found that 90% of available resources belonged to only 20% of DNGOs.49 In 2005, 50% of the European Commission funding was to DNGOs working in humanitarian and relief services.50 Both OXFAM and CARE generated ten times more revenue than Amnesty International (USA) and more than twenty times that of Human Rights Watch, which are the most resourced HURINGOs.51 Although both South Africa and Nigeria boast of the most dynamic NGO sectors in Africa, in both countries the number of self-professed human rights NGOs is low. HURINGOs constitute about 0.02% of civil society sector in South Africa.52 In a nutshell, mainstreaming human rights would promote a culture of human rights. According to Butler, realization of a human rights culture would mean that:

i) the vulnerable would be better protected from violation, ii) government would promote human rights standards and operate within a human rights framework, iii) public authorities would institutionalize human rights thinking and treat people with fairness and respect thus safeguarding their dignity, iv) wider civil society would popularly accept human rights standards as the principle by which we live and treat each other and by which conflicts are resolved, v) people would recognize and value both their own rights and the rights of others and would genuinely be tolerant of difference.53

The application of human rights principles to NGOs’ work would contribute to a free, equal and equitable world and shift focus from patronage to self-agency. As

48.Id., at 13.

49.I. De Senolissa, A New Age of Social Movements: A Fifth Generation of Non-governmental Development Organizations in the Making? in DEVELOPMENT AND SOCIAL ACTION (Kothari & Eade eds, 1999), at 95.

50.AWID (ASSOCIATION OF WOMEN IN DEVELOPMENT), THE SECOND FUNDHER REPORT:

FINANCIAL SUSTAINABILITY FOR WOMENS MOVEMENTS WORLDWIDE 48 (2007).

51.T.J. Scott, Evaluating Development-Oriented NGOs, in NGOS AND HUMAN RIGHTS: PROMISE AND PERFORMANCE 209 (C.E. Welch ed., 2001).

52.L. Seafield, South Africa: The Interdependence of All Human Rights, in HUMAN RIGHTS

UNDER AFRICAN CONSTITUTIONS: REALISING THE PROMISE FOR OURSELVES (A.A. An-Na’im ed., 2003), at 233-34; C.O. Okafor, LEGITIMISING HUMAN RIGHTS NGOS: LESSONS FROM NIGERIA (2006), at 4 & 6.

53. F. Butler, Building a Human Rights Culture, in HUMAN RIGHTSIN THE COMMUNITY:RIGHTS AS AGENTS FOR CHANGE (Harvey ed., 2005), at 69.

28

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

propounded by Nyamu-Musembi and Cornwall:

[T]he rights-based approach or human rights based approach is a catalyst that can transform the practice of … identifying and meeting needs [of victims] to enabling people to recognize and claim rights that are enshrined in the UDHR. For most, too, this entails 1) work with duty holders-generally the state, but also increasingly non-state actors to strengthen their capacity to respond and be accountable in protecting, respecting and fulfilling human rights … 2) work to build the capacity of citizens to claim their rights, by working alongside them as advocates and by seeking to provide opportunities for people to empower themselves.54

Human rights are strategic in enabling all NGOs and the wider civil society to build a shared perspective and language in order to influence the political and human quality of life in general.55 NGOs have to be exemplars of the human rights practices they demand of the state and market, in order to legitimately monitor the wider civil society, states and the market.56 Put differently, for NGOs to have the moral authority to demand human rights and democratic practices of others, they must practice what they preach. In other words, the building of a human rights culture or a rights-protective society must begin with NGOs.57 Since the “concept of human rights relates to all aspects of human interaction, it is best protected when all people voluntarily observe human rights norms as part of their culture of doing things.”58 The concept of human rights is useful as a discipline to tame power by all actors and at all levels of society. Evans provides an apt definition of discipline as:

a mode of social organization that operates without need for coercion. It is a form of modernist power that imbues the individual with particular ways of thinking, knowing and behaving, thus instilling

54.Nyamu-Musembi & Cornwall, supra note 10, at 45.

55.P. Van Tuijl, Entering the Global Dealing Room: Reflections on the Rights-based Framework for NGOs in International Development, in 21 THIRD WORLD Q. 618 (2000).

56.ICHRP, supra note 28, at 3.

57.J.C. Momba, Civil Society and the Struggle for Human Rights and Democracy in Zambia, in Zeleza & McConnaughay eds, supra note 1, at 230; C.E. Welch, Conclusion, in Welch ed., supra note 51, at 264; S. Dicklitch & D. Lwanga, The Politics of Being Non-political: Human Rights Organizations and the Creation of a Positive Human Rights Culture in Uganda, in 25 HUM. RTS Q. 485 (2003).

58.Heyns & Viljoen (1999), supra note 1, at 422; Heyns & Viljoen (2004), supra note 1, at 130.

2011]

Mainstreaming Human Rights into NGO Work

29

modes of social consciousness that makes social action predictable. Discipline is learned and practiced in the day to day complex of social life, through institutional training received, for example, in the school, the university, the military, the workplace, the church and the prison, where notions of correct and incorrect behaviours and thoughts are clearly delimited. The epithet ‘common sense’ is achieved when a particular mode of thought and conduct is unquestioningly accepted as normal.59

There is a growing appropriation of the human rights language in the mission statements of almost all institutions and organizations. Some organizations have a dual mandate of rights and development. Many traditional DNGOs are concurrently undertaking advocacy to influence policies. Donors and governments have also demanded accountability of NGOs through the legal framework and the funding process. In an effort perhaps of self-preservation, there is a growing trend among NGOs of experimenting and innovating a rights-based approach. This article also documents these efforts as a more accessible format of information sharing. There are many attempts to clarify the human rights principles NGOs should observe. ICHRP identifies the following human rights principles that NGOs should observe— accountability, support to human dignity, universality, non-discrimination, safeguards against abuse of power, belief in the rule of law, commitment to accurate and objective information, effectiveness, and respect for the basic rules of the organization.60

The Charter of Popular Participation urges all NGOs and voluntary organizations to: be fully participatory, democratic and accountable; strengthen institutional structures that bring them together; disseminate successful African and grassroots experiences throughout the continent; establish forum for honest, popular and open dialogue between governments, grassroots organizations and NGOs; give increased support and target their operations within the framework of national economic strategies; give due considerations to initiatives at the grassroots, utilize African expertise, strengthen advocacy nationally and internationally and influence donors in genuine partnership.61

As early as 1991-1995, the Commonwealth Foundation undertook extensive research and consultations that resulted in the “NGO guidelines for good policy and

59. T. Evans, International Human Rights Law as Power/knowledge, in 27 HUM. RTS Q. 1055

(2005).

60.ICHRP, supra note 28, at 9-10.

61.African Charter on Popular Participation (1990), part 111(d).

30

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

practice.”62 Among others, the guidelines outline the values of NGOs as follows: advance and improve the human conditions; respect for the rights, culture and dignity of men and women; devolving the maximum resources to the task at hand, remain true to its mission and objectives; involve beneficiaries as partners, exercise willingness to collaborate and network and maintain high ethical standards at both organizational and personal level.63

Recently the International NGOs (INGOs) adopted an International Non- Governmental Accountability Charter.64 However, only INGOs can become formal signatories to the Charter.65 The Charter is a joint effort of INGOs working globally on human rights, sustainable development, humanitarian responses and other public goods. The purpose of the Charter is to: identify and define shared principles, policies and practices; enhance transparency and accountability both internally and externally; encourage communication with stakeholders and lastly improve INGO performance and effectiveness as organizations.66

The Charter reiterates that transparency and accountability are good for government, business and non-profit organizations and seeks to ensure that the high standards that INGOs demand of others are respected in INGO’s own organizations.67 It articulates a number of principles such as political and financial independence; responsible advocacy that advances shared and defined public interests; effective programming working in genuine partnerships with local communities, NGOs and other stakeholders; non-discrimination that encourages diversity, impartiality and gender equity and balance; transparency, openness, honesty and active communication; compliance with relevant governance, financial accounting and reporting requirements; accuracy of information; good governance by adhering to clear missions, organization structure and decision-making, written values, policies and procedures and ethical fund- raising among others.68

Similarly, humanitarian NGOs have a Code of Conduct, namely, the Humanitarian Charter and Minimum Standards in Disaster Response.69 African women

62.COMMONWEALTH FOUNDATION, NON-GOVERNMENTAL ORGANIZATIONS: GUIDELINES FOR GOOD POLICY AND PRACTICE (1995), at V.

63.Id., Guideline 5.

64.International NGO Accountability Charter (2005).

65.Id.

66.Id., at 3.

67.Id.

68.Id., at 4-6.

69.ICHRP, supra note 28, at 4.

2011]

Mainstreaming Human Rights into NGO Work

31

have developed the Charter of Feminist Principles for African Feminists.70 The Feminist Charter is a tool to monitor institutional development and establish peer review mechanisms.71 The Feminist Charter outlines individual ethics: the indivisibility, inalienability and universality of women’s human rights; networking; solidarity and mutual respect; care of other African feminists; non-violence; freedom of choice and autonomy; critical engagement of culture, tradition and domesticity; respectful personal relationships and documentation of women stories.72 It also prescribed institutional ethics: openness, transparency, equality and accountability; professionalism; egalitarian governance, fair and equal remunerations; creation of spaces to empower and uplift women; responsible leadership and management of organization; taking into account the need for self-fulfilment and professional development of others; leadership of women organizations by women; financial prudence and ethics; self assessment and working in response to real needs expressed by women.

Lastly, the Feminist Charter commits feminists to subscribe to the feminist leadership which is characterized by disciplined work ethics, strengthened multi- generational network; ensuring that the feminists’ movement is recognized as a legitimate constituency; building and expanding knowledge; mentoring and providing opportunities for young feminist in a “non-matronizing” manner and openness in giving and receiving peer reviews.73 It is evident that the policy prescriptions of the above charters signify the necessity of human rights and justify the NGO’s application of human rights principles.

C. The Principle of Express Linkage to Rights and the Universality of Human Rights

The following discussion analyses the extent to which NGOs have respected the universality of human rights. The discussion begins with an examination of how Northern NGOs (NNGOs) respect African NGOs in interpretation and prioritization of the human rights discourse. It is followed by an analysis of the appreciation by African NGOs of ordinary people’s conceptualization of human rights.

1. Conceptualization of Rights Amongst NNGOs and SNGOs.—Human rights are universal and therefore must reflect the changing values, perceptions and different

70.<www.africafeministsforum.org>

71.African Feminist Charter (2006), at 3.

72.Id., at 10-11.

73.Id., at 15-16.

32

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

contextual realities of the world. Despite the recognition of the universality of human rights, human rights are still predominantly understood and expressed in western ideas and language.74 The genesis of human rights is almost exclusively confined to western history which perpetuates the misconception of human rights as a western concept. For example, Rhoda Howard dismisses the presence of human rights in traditional Africa, arguing that it was merely a concept of human dignity.75 On the other hand, Leary argues that while the “atrocities of the Nazi regime in Germany” were the immediate compulsion for the development of an international system of human rights, the contribution of the West in developing human rights “was great, but by no means unique.”76

Secondly, there is a difference in the prioritization of rights. NNGOs prioritized CPRs while SNGO also sought to address ESCRs. The prioritization of CPRs was influenced by the fact that human rights initiatives were predominantly spearheaded by lawyers, journalists and other professionals whose interests and activities are substantially affected by the infringement of CPRs.77 Further, during the Cold War, ESCRs were considered communist in inspiration and content and therefore lacked a comprehensive institutional framework for enforcement.78

Third, is the difference in strategies to advance human rights. Many African NGOs grew out of the overt support from the NNGOs.79 In practice, INGOs occupy such a “high moral plane in the public policy discourse” that questioning them is dismissed as either “naivety or being apologists for repressive governments and cultures.”80 Consequently, most SNGOs initially mirrored the strategies of NNGOs, such as standard setting through legally binding treaties, the documentation of abuses, research, public advocacy and providing assistance to the victims of human rights

74.MUTUA, supra note 1, at 2-4.

75.R. Howard, Group Versus Individual Identity in the African Debate on Human Rights, in

An-Naim & Deng eds, supra note 1, at 166.

76.Leary, supra note 1, at 30; MUTUA, supra note 1, at 16.

77.INTERNATIONAL HUMAN RIGHTS INTERNSHIP PROGRAM (IHRIP) AND THE SWEDISH NGOS

FOUNDATION FOR HUMAN RIGHTS, THE STATUS OF HUMAN RIGHTS ORGANIZATIONS IN SUB-SAHARAN

AFRICA 6 (1994).

78.J. Oloka-Onyango, NGOs struggles for ESCRs in UTAKE: A Ugandan Perspective, in

HUMAN RIGHTS NGOS IN EAST AFRICA: POLITICAL AND NORMATIVE TENSIONS (M. Mutua ed., 2009), at 75-76; MUTUA, supra note 1, at 52-53.

79.S.N. NDEGWA, THE TWO FACES OF THE CIVIL SOCIETY: NGOS AND POLITICS IN AFRICA 32

(1996).

80.MUTUA, supra note 1, at 37.

2011]

Mainstreaming Human Rights into NGO Work

33

abuses.81 While learning from the experience of others is essentially a positive thing in order to avoid repeating the same mistakes, in the 1990s, many SNGOs in addition to employing the strategies of NNGOs began investigating the root causes of the violation of rights.82 Hence, the differences in strategies with NNGOs preferring the apolitical liberal legalism approach to rights and SNGOs preferring a more political advocacy approach that addresses the roots causes of violations, such as bad governance and corruption.

Following the Vienna Conference, the Harvard Retreat highlighted the satisfaction, frustrations and some differences within the human rights movement, shaped by contextual experiences.83 The Harvard Retreat noted that the “… NGO movement has no single inspiration or aspiration, neither a spiritual nor secular authority to define one belief for all within it, no pope and no central committee.”84 Nonetheless, the Harvard Retreat emphasised that the differences between the NNGOs and SNGOs were “superficial relating to priorities and style,” but did not dispute the point that human rights are universal or the existence of an international human rights movement.85 The differences relate to the priorities, strategies and geographical focus of human rights work.

In criticizing NNGOs at the Harvard Retreat, participants from the SNGOs appreciated the fact that advocacy based on individual cases adds the attraction of realism to activism.86 Thus, SNGOs did not advocate for the abandonment of the traditional strategies of remedying individual human rights violations, but sought an expanded role that would also address the root causes of human rights violations.87 Likewise, at the African retreat of Amnesty International (AI) which was aimed at enhancing its “dynamic and effective presence, visibility and strategic direction” in

81.Id., at 37-38; M. Mutua, Introduction: Human Rights NGOs in East Africa: Defining the Challenges, in HUMAN RIGHTS NGOS IN EAST AFRICA:POLITICAL AND NORMATIVE TENSIONS (M. Mutua ed., 2009), at 19; Oloka-Onyango, supra note 78, at 83; W. Mutunga, So What Really Is Non-partisanship? in EYES ON THE PRIZE (2003), at 37; C.E. Welch, Introduction, in NGOs AND HUMAN RIGHTS: PROMISE AND PERFORMANCE (Welch ed., 2001), at 3.

82.M.E. Keck & K. Sikkink, ACTIVISTS BEYOND BORDERS: ADVOCACY NETWORK IN

INTERNATIONAL POLITIC (1998), at 184 & 88; MUTUA, supra note 1, at 37; T.W. Dichter, Appeasing the Gods of Sustainability: The Future of International NGOs in Microfinance, in NGOS, STATE AND

DONORS: TOO CLOSE FOR COMFORT (D. Hulmes & M. Edwards eds, 1997), at 3.

83.H.J. STEINER, DIVERSE PARTNERS: NGOS IN THE HUMAN RIGHTS MOVEMENT (Report of a Retreat of Human Rights Activists, 1999), at 17 & 81.

84.Id., at 8.

85.Id., at 81 & 17.

86.Id., at 23.

87.Id., at 22.

34

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

Africa,88 African participants (while appreciative of AI’s hard hitting advocacy and critical role during dictatorial regimes) found AI’s ostensibly apolitical stance and the rule that barred its members from working in their own countries frustrating.89 The African participants contended that while NNGOs can afford to stay apolitical and detached from politics because they work in foreign lands and therefore have to respect the core principle of sovereignty in international law, African NGOs cannot afford to ignore the political trajectories within their midst.

Fourthly, because of the power imbalance in favour of NNGOs, NNGOs have set the international agenda and concentrated their activism in the South. Ironically, in spite of the human rights movement having been precipitated by the human rights violations in Europe following the 1st World War, it is currently a civilizing crusade” targeted at the South.90 African NGOs accuse NNGOs of prejudice by predominantly portraying Africans as “hopeless and helpless” victims while ignoring the human rights violations in their own countries as well as the negative impact of globalization on the global ecology and economy.91 In contrast, reports on the North are both episodic and insufficiently publicized.92

Ironically, African NGOs have equally ignored the experiences and knowledge of how ordinary people have applied human rights to their experiences, a point that is taken up in the following section of the study.

2. African NGOs and Cultural Interpretation.—African NGOs to a large extent have wrongly packaged human rights as a sophisticated discourse to be transmitted to “ignorant masses.”93 And yet, the legitimacy of NGOs is buttressed by the “…

88.AI Africa Consultative Forum, Entebbe, Uganda, 7-9 July 2005.

89.Id., at 1-5.

90.MUTUA, supra note 1, at 19.

91.F. Manji, Depoliticization of Poverty, in DEVELOPMENT AND RIGHTS (D. Eade ed., 2004), at 28; Mutunga, supra note 81, at 37; Dichter, supra note 82, at 129; J. Oloka-Onyango, Modern-day Missionaries or Misguided Miscreants? NGOs, the Women's Movement and the Promotion of Human Rights in Africa, in THE HUMAN RIGHTS OF WOMEN: INTERNATIONAL INSTRUMENTS AND AFRICAN

EXPERIENCES (Wolfgang, Kisaakye & Oberleitner eds, 2002), at 292; STEINER, supra note 83, at 27–28; D.A. Bell & J.H. Carens, Ethical Dilemmas of International Human Rights and Humanitarian NGOs: Reflection on a Dialogue Between Practitioners and Theorists, 26 HUM. RTS Q. (2004), at 326–327.

92.Id., at 314-315; Mutua, supra note 81, at 19.

93.STEINER, supra note 83, at 74; A.A. An-Na’im, The Legal Protection of Human Rights in Africa: How to Do More with Less, in HUMAN RIGHTS: CONCEPTS, CONTESTS, CONTINGENCIES (A. Sarat

&T.R. Kearns eds, 2001), at 105; A.A. An-Nai’m, Expanding Legal Protection of Human Rights in Africa Contexts, in HUMAN RIGHTS UNDER AFRICAN CONSTITUTIONS: REALIZING THE PROMISE FOR OURSELVES

(A.A. An-Na’im ed., 2003), at 3.

2011]

Mainstreaming Human Rights into NGO Work

35

consistent stand in the interest of the large masses and for human rights values and causes.”94 For human rights to be entrenched as part and parcel of everyday struggle, it must infiltrate the ideological, financial and moral ethics of ordinary communities.95 By implication, NGOs have an obligation to learn how the local people have adapted their traditional culture to human rights principles. Erasing negative cultural norms requires the active participation of the communities in effecting change. As Odinkalu reminds us:

[P]eople are acutely aware of the injustices inflicted upon them. … [T]he real life struggles for social justice are waged despite human rights groups-not by or because of them-by people who feel that their realities and aspirations are not adequately captured by human rights organizations or their language. … People will struggle for their right whether or not the language of human rights is accessible to them. … But they will not build the struggle around the notion of human rights unless the language … speaks directly to their aspirations and survival.96

This article is neither intended to blindly romanticize African-ness nor to belabour the somewhat stale cultural relativism and universalism debate. Instead, the article advocates for the activism of NGOs to deconstruct the concept of traditional culture in order to discard the negative social practices while preserving the positive ones that contribute to the universality of human rights. Presently, respect of people’s knowledge based on their experiences is an exception rather than the norm.

One of the unique contributions of the African Charter is that it promotes “positive cultural values … in a spirit of tolerance, dialogue, consultations to contribute to the promotion of the moral well-being of society.”97 Likewise, the Protocol on Women unequivocally calls for the preservation of African cultures that are positive and based on principles of equality, peace, freedom, dignity, justice, solidarity and

94.I.G. Shivji, Reflections on NGOs in Tanzania: What We Are, What We Are Not, and What We Ought to Be, 14 DEVELOPMENT IN PRACTICE 3 (2004); EDWARDS, supra note 2, at 1.

95.NDEGWA, supra note 79, at 16; M. Mutua, The Complexity of Universalism in Human Rights, in HUMAN RIGHTS WITH MODESTY: THE PROBLEM OF UNIVERSALISM (A. Sajo ed., 2004), at 196;

C.E. WELCH, PROTECTING HUMAN RIGHTS IN AFRICA: ROLES AND STRATEGIES OF NON-GOVERNMENTAL ORGANIZATIONS 297 (1995).

96.C.A. Odinkalu, Why More Africans Don’t Use the Human Rights Language, 2 HUM. RTS

DIALOGUE (1999).

97.African Charter (1981), art. 29(7).

36

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

democracy.98 UNESCO’s Declaration of the Principles of International Cultural Cooperation acknowledges that each culture has dignity and values which must be respected and preserved and all cultures form part of the common heritage belonging to all mankind.99 Reference to culture is most routinely used to mean artistic expressions or its cultural products, such as literature, music, dance, arts, sculpture, theatre, film and sports.100 However culture is a “way of life, encapsulating a people’s identity and wisdom.”101 As substantiated by the Blair Commission:

[C]ulture is also about shared patterns of identity, symbolic meaning, aspirations and about relationships between individuals and groups within a society. Culture is also about the relationship between ideas and perspectives about self-respect and a sense of security, about how individuals are socialized and values are formed and transmitted. It is also deeply intertwined with structures of power and wealth. What it is not—contrary to the views of some—is an expression of unchanging tradition. … Culture is both dynamic and reactive, it both influences economic and political conditions and is influenced by them.102

Similarly, the Human Rights Council defines culture as:

a set of shared spiritual, material, intellectual and emotion features of human experience that are created and constructed within social praxis. As such culture is intimately connected with the diverse ways in which social groups produce their daily existence economically, socially, and politically. It therefore embraces both commonly held meanings that allow for the continuation of everyday practices as well as competing meanings that galvanise change over time.103

98.Preamble to the Protocol on Women (2003).

99.UNESCO Declaration of Principles of Cultural Cooperation (1966), art. 1(1) & I (3).

100.OUR COMMON INTEREST: REPORT OF THE COMMISSION FOR AFRICA (2005) (hereinafter Blair Commission), available at <http://www.commissionforafrica.org/english/report/thereport/english/11- 03-05_cr_report.pdf>

101.MUTUA, supra note 1, at 19.

102.Blair Commission, supra note 100, at 114, ¶ 3.

103.YAKIN ERTÜRK, INTERSECTIONS BETWEEN CULTURE AND VIOLENCE AGAINST WOMEN

(Report of the Special Rapporteur on Violence Against Women, its Causes and Consequences: Implementation of General Assembly Resolution 60/251 of 15 March 2006, A/HRC/4/34 G. 2007), at 8.

2011]

Mainstreaming Human Rights into NGO Work

37

However, due to colonialism African culture is almost exclusively perceived as a source of human rights violations, as regressive and inimical to development.104 The CEDAW Committee depicts culture as a negative impediment to the enjoyment of women’s rights with no possibility of facilitating women’s empowerment.105 Similarly, in considering state reports, the African Commission tends to attribute the denial of women’s human rights to the restrictive construction of culture.106 The hostility against culture is influenced by the fact that the African Charter tends to represent culture as straightforward, monolithic and homogenized.107 Likewise, the African Cultural Charter does not elucidate what African culture actually is but speaks of it as a homogenous entity.108

Using an example of the issue of sexuality, Tamale illustrates the potential of the social legitimacy of African culture as an empowering resource to challenge male domination.109 Placing culture parallel to rights leaves majority of women without redress because it requires them to “strip themselves of culture before enjoying rights.”110 Consequently, women are left with the limited choice of either complying with the negative culture or of joining the dominant human rights discourse that trivializes their cultural experiences.111 Thus the UN Special Rapporteur on Violence Against Women argues that reducing violence against women to a cultural problem isolates it from the political/economic environment, yet “no custom, tradition or religion can be invoked to justify violence against women.”112

The misconception that culture and rights are antagonistic and distinct from each other distances human rights from the realities of African people and therefore frustrates the entrenching of rights as a lived concept. Every culture has notions of

104.Blair Commission, supra note 100, at 116, ¶ 14; OKAFOR, supra note 52, at 215; R. Murray, A Feminist Perspective on Reform of the African Human Rights System, in 2 AFR. HUM. RTS L. J. 224 (2001); S. Tamale, The Right to Culture and the Culture of Rights: a Critical Perspective on Women’s Sexual Rights in Africa, in SEX MATTERS (2007), at 149-51.

105.C. Nyamu, How Should Human Rights and Development Respond to Cultural Legitimization of Gender Hierarchy in Developing Countries? 41HARV.INTL L.J.381(2000); F.BANDA, WOMEN, LAW AND HUMAN RIGHTS: AN AFRICAN PERSPECTIVE (2005), at 249-50; 15 YEARS OF THE

UNITED NATIONS SPECIAL RAPPORTEUR ON VIOLENCE AGAINST WOMEN,ITS CAUSES AND CONSEQUENCES

(2009), at 39.

106.Nyamu, id.; Banda, id.

107.Banda, id., at 251.

108.Cultural Charter for Africa (1976).

109.Tamale, supra note 104, at 158-64.

110.Id., at 157.

111.ERTÜRK, supra note 103, at 17.

112.Id., at 3 & 19.

38

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

human rights.113 The assumption that local practices do not embrace human rights ignores the fluid and transformative potential of local cultural norms as well as the impact of human agency in bringing about change.114 It is therefore incumbent on NGOs as proponents of human rights to demonstrate the relevance of international standards to the local context.115

Granted that culture is a double-edged sword, capable of both enhancing and detracting from human rights, the problem emanates from the blanket rejection or glorification of culture. Rather than using culture as a building block for popularising the human rights movement, many NGOs shunned the reference to culture within the African Charter as amounting to the condoning of human rights abuses.116 Gutto recalls the resistance of most NGOs during the public session of the African Commission to any mention of “African culture, African traditions, African values and African practices.”117 It is noteworthy that eventually a consensus was reached with NGOs recommending that the reference to moral and traditional values in the African Charter be confined to those that enhance the enjoyment of human rights.118 Even at the 43rd session of the Commission in May 2008, the NGO Forum attributed the violation of women’s and children rights to culture.119

Similarly, in Tanzania, NGOs are obliged to respect the cultures and traditions of the communities they work with.120 However, the NGO Task Force in Tanzania complained that obliging them to respect the cultures of the communities within which they operated was retrogressive, imputing culture as exclusively negative.121 Okafor attests to no knowledge of any NGO that has ever bothered to report or conduct a single seminar on the aspects of the Nigerian culture that would support the human rights

113.Leary, supra note 1, at 30; GUTTO, supra note 1, at 160; Heyns & Viljoen, supra note 1, at 421; An-Na’im & Deng, supra note 1, at 9; Paul, supra note 1, at 214; MUTUA, supra note 1, at 8; Welch, supra note 1, at 206; BANDA, supra note 105, at 305; and U. BAXI, THE FUTURE OF HUMAN RIGHT 12 (2002).

114.C. Nyamu-Musembi, Are Local Norms and Practices Fences or Pathways? The Example of Women’s Property Rights, in CULTURALTRANSFORMATIONANDHUMANRIGHTSINAFRICAN (An-Na’im ed., 2002), at 127; Tamale, supra note 104, at 149-52; ERTÜRK, supra note 103, at 9 & 21.

115.An-Nai’m, supra note 93, at 9.

116.GUTTO, supra note 1, at 156.

117.Id.

118.AFRICA COMMISSION, CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS OF A WORKSHOP ON NGO PARTICIPATION IN THE WORK OF THE AFRICAN COMMISSION, GAMBIA (1991).

119.NGO Forum Indaba, SWAZI OBSERVER, 6 May 2008, at 14.

120.Tanzania NGO Act 2002, s.31 (b).

121.Id.

2011]

Mainstreaming Human Rights into NGO Work

39

discourse.122 Hence, the Botswana Council of NGOs (BOCONGO) is unique for having taken a decision to draw from positive Tswana culture.123

Cognisant that human rights is the “most globalized political value of our time,”124 the issue is not to earmark the boundaries of each culture but to understand culture as a dynamic concept that has blended with human rights, religion, modernity, and capitalism to mention but a few. Culture is historically constructed through human action, incorporated into the power structures, and reinterpreted through local understanding and interests.125

In Chiku Lidah v. Adam Omari,126 it was reiterated that Customary Law is not immutable but is a “living law capable of adaptation and development.”127 Therefore, NGOs should build on the positive cultural values that resonate with human rights principles instead of dismissing culture as solely an impediment to the realization of rights.128 The Human Rights Council calls for a “cultural negotiation” that emphasizes positive elements to advance human rights and demystifies the oppressed elements and the hierarchies within.129 Yankin Erturk rightly observes that the “threat to women’s human rights comes from the monopoly over the interpretation and representation of culture by the powerful few, rather than culture per se.”130 The adoption of a cross- cultural perspective that promotes the interplay between cultural norms and universal human rights is crucial in stimulating the mass support of human rights.131 Ngugi-wa- Thiongo argues that culture, “as an embodiment of values in society is a positive social mechanism.”132 He therefore urges the elite to “remember not as prisoners of tradition, but to learn the pluses and minuses of their past experience in order to act in the present and project the future.”133

122.OKAFOR, supra note 52, at 110.

123.BOCONGO CIVIL SOCIETY EDUCATION STRATEGY (2007), at 16.

124.A. Sarat & T.R. Kearns, The Unsettled Status of Human Rights: An Introduction, in Sarat

&Kearns eds, supra note 93, at 4.

125.Id., at 14-15.

126.PC Civil Appeal No. 34 of 1991.

127.Id.

128.Banda, supra note 105, at 256; Nyamu-Musembi, supra note 114, at 126; ERTÜRK, supra note 103, at 19-20.

129.Id.

130.ERTÜRK, supra note 103, at 29.

131.An-Na’im & Deng, supra note 1, at 9 & 12; Paul, supra note 1, at 214; MUTUA, supra note 1, at 8; Welch, supra note 1, at 206.

132.Ngugi wa Thiongo, The role of intellectuals in African University, The Ford Foundation Distinguished lectures, (2004).

133.Id.

40

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

The concept of ubuntu among the Bantu people of sub-Saharan Africa, loosely defined as humanness, respect for the human person and community responsibility towards each other134 provides a basis for linking rights to culture. While its commonality is agreed over among most African languages, critics of ubuntu trivialize it as inherently patriarchal and of limited relevance to the contemporary youth.135 Proponents of ubuntu acclaim it as a “philosophy of … personhood, humaneness and morality.”136 To Fredrick Jjuuko, ubuntu is a more expansive concept than human rights because it obliges mutual responsibility while the rights are demand driven, adversarial and confrontational and their enjoyment depends on an individual’s willingness and capability to claim rights.137 The common rules of African cultures, such as responsibilities towards others, participation, compromise, tolerance of diversity are similar to the human rights principles.138 Likewise, the social values inherent in ubuntu such as solidarity, conformity, compassion, respect, human dignity and collective unity, “… provide an indigenous impetus that aligns age-old African social innovations and historical cultural experiences to present day legal notions and techniques in order to create a legitimate system of law.”139

The Centre for Human Rights at Pretoria has demonstrated the utility of engaging cultural institutions. Since 2003, recognizing that a majority of Southern Africans are subject to the chieftaincy rule particularly over land and inheritance issues, as part of its Community Service Programme, the Centre has organised over twenty workshops targeting SADC cultural chiefs.140 The rationale of the programme is to challenge the chiefs to analyze their cultural civilization and act as advocates for progressive change.141 For example, in its original conceptualization, the estate of the deceased person was not taken as individual property of the heir for private appropriation but the heir served as the trustee of the estate for the collective good of all beneficiaries, akin to the concept of a legal administrator. The dispossession of

134. SOUTH AFRICAN HUMAN RIGHTS COMMISSION, REPORT ON THE SEMINAR ON AFFIRMING A CULTURE OF VALUES IN THE SOUTH AFRICAN HUMAN RIGHTS FRAMEWORK (August 2006), available online at <www.sahrc.org.za/sahrc-cms>.

135.D. Cornell & K. van Marle, Exploring Ubuntu: Tentative Reflections, in 5 AFR. HUM. RTS

L. J. 196 (2005).

136.Y. Mokgoro, Ubuntu and the Law in South Africa, in 4 BUFF. HUM. RTS L. REV. 15 (1998).

137.Interview with Assoc. Prof. Fred Jjuuko , Chairperson, The Free Movement, Uganda, 29 August 2007, at Makerere University.

138.Welch, supra note 1, at 206; An-Na’im & Deng, supra note 1, at 12.

139.Mokgoro, supra note 136, at 17-18 & 21.

140.Interview with Professor Hansungule, Centre for Human Rights, Pretoria, 14 May 2007,

at Pretoria.

141.Id.

2011]

Mainstreaming Human Rights into NGO Work

41

women’s property rights is a result of the introduction of individual property rights. Fareda Banda also uses women’s rights as an analogy to illustrate that human

rights and culture are not opposed to each other but can be complementary.142 Moreover, the reference to culture by states is intended to preserve the unequal cultural interpretations bestowed upon privileged men.143 Likewise, Ifi Amadiume argues that it is colonial rule and the introduction of Christianity which destroyed the traditional power of African women derived from “motherhood,”144 preached “self-sacrifice” and “condemned women’s headstrongness as unfeminine.”145

At the Amnesty International African Consultative Workshop of 2005, participants challenged women to use the positive examples of women’s human agency in pre-colonial and colonial struggles such as Bibi Titi in Tanzania and Femiliao of Nigeria as well as the existence of powerful priestess and goddesses to reinforce the cultural legitimacy of women’s struggles. At the Jinja Retreat of the Uganda Feminist Forum, feminists observed that they were deliberately cast as “culturally alien” in order to alienate them from the social base of their communities.146

However, in the case of Magaya v. Magaya,147 the eldest girl sought to become heir to her father. Fareda Banda observes that the instituting of the case by a “simple, old rural woman” challenges the myth that it is only elite “women who without cultural moorings seek different interpretations of African cultural values.”148 It is redeeming that the Protocol on Women provides that women be consulted about the content of the cultural norms that are to operate within their societies.149 Significantly, the Protocol on Women validates “Africa women’s agency in challenging culture as a concept of power, authority and reshaping of society.”150

Similarly the African Feminist Charter obliges the “critical engagement with discourses of religion, culture, tradition and domesticity with focus on the centrality of women’s rights.”151 Likewise, the Commonwealth Foundation NGO guidelines for

142.Banda, supra note 105, at 262.

143.Id., at 252.

144.I. Amadiume, Gender, Political Systems and Social Movements: A West African Experience in, AFRICAN STUDIES IN SOCIAL MOVEMENTS AND DEMOCRACY (M. Mamdani & Wamba-dia-Wamba eds, 1995), at 38 & 54.

145.Id., at 56; Tamale, supra note 104, at 159.

146.Uganda Feminist Forum, 16 January 2008.

147.1999 (1) TLR 100 [1999] 3lrc 35.

148.Banda, supra note 105, at 37.

149.Preamble to the Protocol on Women (2003), art. 17.

150.Tamale, supra note 104, at 159.

151.African Feminist Charter, available at <www.awdf.org/pages/?p.d=1&s.d=62>, at 11.

42

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

good policy and practice, recommends the “respect for the rights, culture and dignity of men and women.”152

The Ganda proverb, Yiga Ngokola (learn as you work) is based on the African philosophy of community work and learning through community activity.153 Building on the African proverb Amagezi sigomu directly translated to mean “knowledge does not belong to a single person;” activities are initiated by singing, dancing or story- telling to elicit vibrant discussions.154 A case study of the Organization of Rural Associations for Progress (ORAP) in Zimbabwe reveals that for meaningful development to take place, NGO strategies must be rooted in the people’s cultural knowledge.155 ORAP undertook an extensive cultural analysis that identified shared cultural values within the Ndebele language to shape its philosophy: ziqoqe—self mobilization; zenzele—do it yourself/fend for yourself; Ziqhatshe—create self employment; zimele-self reliance (based on interdependence) be independent; qugelela—create savings.”156

Bottom-up approaches anchored in traditional culture build on people’s experiences as a basis for reform.157 The application of human rights education to specific situations enables the retention of what is best in African culture while upholding the universalism of human rights. Respect for the knowledge of ordinary people encourages the framing of everyday experiences in human rights language, ultimately promoting ownership of human rights as part of social debate and practices.158 The issue of how DNGOs and HURINGOs have promoted the principle of the indivisibility of human rights is the focus of the succeeding debate.

III. THE PRINCIPLE OF INDIVISIBILITY OF RIGHTS

In this discussion, we review the traditional relationship that exists between DNGOs and HURINGOs, and critically examine how DNGOs have linked human rights to their

152.COMMONWEALTH FOUNDATION NON-GOVERNMENTAL ORGANIZATIONS: GUIDELINES FOR

GOOD POLICY AND PRACTICE (1995), Guideline 5.

153.D.W. Nabudere, Social transformation in Uganda: A Study of Grassroots NGOs, in Mutua ed., supra note 81, at 246.

154.Id.

155.A.E. Sibanda, Voicing a Peasant Alternative: The Organization of Rural Associations for Progress (ORAP) in Zimbabwe, in PEASANT ORGANIZATIONS AND DEMOCRATIZATION IN AFRICA

(Romdhane and Moyo eds, 2002), at 323.

156.Id., at 324.

157.Tamale, supra note 104, at 164.

158.FIDA-U Organizational Development (2007), at 20.

2011]

Mainstreaming Human Rights into NGO Work

43

work. The discussion also interrogates how HURINGOs appreciate the struggles of DNGOs as human rights struggles.

A. The Traditional Relationship between DNGOs and HURINGOs

The Vienna Declaration recognizes the indivisibility of human rights.159 The indivisibility of human rights provides a conceptual basis to mainstream rights in all the practices and policies of NGOs. Prior to the 1990s, “… development enterprise lived in splendid isolation from human rights, both at the level of discourse and practice.”160 As observed by UNDP:

Until the last decade, human development and human rights followed different paths in both concept and action—one largely dominated by economists, social scientists and policy makers, the other by political activists, lawyers and philosophers. They promoted divergent strategies of analysis and action-economic and social progress on the one hand, political pressure, law reform and ethical questioning on the other.161

Development was considered a combination of goodwill and technical knowledge, devoted to economic growth and addressing poverty, while human rights was concerned with the exposure of abuse of power.162 HURINGOs preferred to stick to CPRs leaving the struggles for ESCRs and social change to the DNGOs.163 Likewise, development was conceptualized as a technical and not a political process, rendering it blind to the dynamics of power and exclusion.164 The principle of express linkage to rights requires each NGO to undertake a right-duty analysis which indentifies the rights addressed in an NGO programme, the relevant rights holders and duty bearers as well as the content of the duty.165 Mainstreaming human rights is strategic because development and

159.Vienna Declaration (1993), ¶ 5.

160.UVIN, supra note 17, at 1 & 47.

161.UNDP, supra note 12, at 2; Robinson, supra note 3, at 27; Nyamu-Musembi & Cornwall, supra note 10, at 8.

162.J. Wolfensohn, Some Reflection on Human Rights and Development, in HUMAN RIGHTS AND DEVELOPMENT: TOWARDS MUTUAL REINFORCEMENT (Alston & Robinson eds, 2005), at 21; UVIN, supra note 17, at 47.

163.Id., at 31; Oloka-Onyango, supra note 91, at 33.

164.UVIN, supra note 17, at 3, 31 & 37; Manji, supra note 91, at 26.

165.ICHRP, supra note 28, at 14.

44

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

human rights share the key common values of inclusion, non-discrimination, ownership, accountability, transparency, participation and empowerment and are committed to promoting the dignity and welfare of the human person.166

In spite of the common goal of promoting the dignity, equality and welfare of the human person, neither the DNGOs nor the HURINGOs embraced the indivisibility of human rights with “enthusiasm or conviction.”167 Alston has likened the relationship between the development and human rights community to “… ships passing in the night, each with little if any sustained engagement with one another.”168

The ambivalence of applying human rights by DNGOs is attributed to a number of factors namely divergent goals, the marketing of rights as an essentially legal discourse and the ambiguous conceptual framework. The major challenge in merging the rights discourse and development discourse is the divergent goals with development essentially preoccupied with economic growth while rights focus on the preservation of the dignity of the person and the exposure of abuses of power.169 On the one hand, HURINGOs prefer to apply the rights-based approach as a normative concept that imposes legal and moral obligations on all actors and all processes and operations, arguing that rights are both a means and an end to development.170 On the other hand, DNGOs use rights-based approach as an instrument to achieve more effective programming.171

In practice, the merging of rights and development is susceptible to controversy, which repeatedly provides a smokescreen for hiding inequities and rights violations from scrutiny.172 This is due to the dismal reality of not automatically applying human rights as the core of good governance.173 Moreover, economic globalization tends to shift the balance of power towards markets, preoccupied with economic gain, to the detriment of a fair distribution of the benefits of economic growth in order to assure minimum rights for all.174 There is also a tendency for DNGOs to

166.Alston, supra note 17, at 825; Alston & Robinson, supra note 3, at 4.

167.Alston, id., at 755; Darrow & Tomas, supra note 12, at 472.

168.Alston, id., at 799.

169.UVIN, supra note 17, at 2.

170.Darrow & Thomas, supra note 12, at 492.

171.Id., at 492-93.

172.J. Donnelly, Human Rights, Democracy and Development, in 21 HUM. RTS Q. (1999), at 162; UVIN, supra note 17, at 118.

173.M. Kjaer & K. Kinnerup, How Does Good Governance Relate to Human Rights, in HUMAN

RIGHTS AND GOOD GOVERNANCE: BUILDING BRIDGES (Sano & Alfredsson eds, 2002), at 14-15; Nyamu- Musembi & Cornwall, supra note 10, at 17.

174.Donnelly, supra note 42, at 232-33.

2011]

Mainstreaming Human Rights into NGO Work

45

simply repackage or add labels without necessarily re-conceptualizing or changing their practice of treating rights as “… gifts, charity or policy blueprints.”175 Generally, DNGOs consider rights as highly specialized legal discourse and not multi- disciplinary.176

Furthermore, DNGOs perceive rights as state-centric, political, adversarial, judgmental, elitist and preoccupied with quick results but impractical in cases of scarce resources and competing demands.177 For example, in the UK for a long time, many voluntary organizations misperceived rights as a “far-fetched luxury,” principally of interest to expensive lawyers and celebrities.178 Others misconceived human rights as a means to advance the interference of European judges in British affairs.179 There is apprehension that the rights-based approach may not address the inequalities in society because of the ability of the powerful to manipulate the rights-based approach to serve their interests.180

Notwithstanding the above, many DNGOs and agencies have adopted the rights-based approach as previously discussed.181 Some development agencies appreciated that applying human rights principles enabled them to address the root causes of poverty in a manner that respects the agency of the people they work with.182 For example, in seeking to infuse a rights based approach in its programming, OXFAM commits itself to strengthening the accountability of duty bearers; support people to claim their rights; promote equality and inclusion in policies, services and programmes; promote provision of effective remedies; allocate resources and budgets equitably; build social norms, attitudes and behaviour and strengthen institutional capacity to base economic policies on human rights.183 Actionaid’s (AA) Accountability, Learning and Planning System (ALPS) strategy has three elements, namely: involving NGOs to manage their programmes with AA playing a supportive role; applying the principles of transparency, participation, learning, awareness of gender and power and accountability to poor people and lastly being a “reflective and reflexive” organization

175.Scott, supra note 51, at 210; UVIN, supra note 17, at 53.

176.Nyamu-Musembi & Cornwall, supra note 10, at 17.

177.Alston & Robinson, supra note 3, at 5; Robinson, supra note 3, at 32-37; F. BUTLER, HUMAN RIGHTS: WHO NEEDS THEM? USING HUMAN RIGHTS IN THE VOLUNTARY SECTOR 49 (2004); Nyamu-Musembi & Cornwall, supra note 10, at 17; Wolfensohn, supra note 162, at 21.

178.Butler, id., at 23.

179.Butler, supra note 53, at 67.

180.Alston, supra note 17, at 806.

181.Part .2.

182.ICHRP, supra note 28, at 74.

183.BUTLER, supra note 177, at 20.

46

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

that allows partners to respond to changing situations and context.184

B. The Indivisibility of Rights: HURINGOs and the Development Agenda

HURINGOs have equally not appreciated DNGOs’ struggles as human rights struggles despite the concept of the indivisibility of rights. Surprisingly, although the rights- based approach grew out of HURINGOs’ efforts, HURINGOs have not taken the lead to apply human rights principles to them.185 Ironically, major HURINGOs have not eagerly embraced the struggles of DNGOs such as the anti-globalization crusade spearheaded by the World Social Forum. And yet, the struggle for ESCRs provides a common ground for HURINGOs and DNGOs to work together. HURINGOs contend that despite the rhetoric of the indivisibility of rights, in practice the state prioritizes economic growth to the detriment of human rights.186 Consequently, HURINGOs are dissuaded from engaging in development struggles in general for fear of marginalizing human rights.187 The ICHRP is on record as stating that joining large campaigns that are united by common values without a legal basis is risky.188 The ICHRP is of the strong opinion that

The two qualities that human rights organizations distinctively bring to advocacy are knowledge of the law and a precise grasp of institutional procedures. Certainly, they can ‘shame and blame’ those who are guilty; but so can others. The rich and passionate campaigning tradition of human rights organizations is often most effective when criticism is accompanied by precise descriptions of legal obligations. Where human rights organizations can use their well-honed capacity for argument to add credibility and effectiveness to an alliance, this will clearly be valuable. On the other hand, if human rights advocates, taken as a whole, were to surrender legal rigour for a more imprecise rhetoric, campaigns for justice would scarcely be stronger but the ability of human rights organizations to

184.R. DAVID & A. MACHINI, GOING AGAINST THE FLOW: THE STRUGGLE TO MAKE

ORGANIZATIONAL SYSTEMS PART OF THE SOLUTION RATHER THAN PART OF THE PROBLEM—LESSONS FOR CHANGE IN POLICY AND ORGANIZATIONS 8 (2004).

185.Alston, supra note 17, at 800 & 827.

186.T. Evans, International Human Rights Law as Power/Knowledge, in 27 HUM. RTS Q. 1057

(2005).

187.Alston, supra note 17, at 761.

188.ICHRP, supra note 28, at 48.

2011]

Mainstreaming Human Rights into NGO Work

47

defend vulnerable people effectively would be much reduced. Once again, in a period of polarization this is a particular challenge. Human rights organizations cannot afford to stand on the edge of events, or be seen to be compulsively parsing law; but they might do harm to the cause of human rights if from weakness or passion, they give themselves up to the forces of polarization and put ‘loyalty to the cause’ before accuracy.189

Mutunga counter-argues that the anti-globalization movements are struggles for economic, social, cultural and political justice, that:

the supercilious dismissal of people struggles for justice in the global economy illuminates the limitation of the dominant human rights discourse. … The human rights movement has failed to acknowledge that the anti-globalization movements are dealing with global forces that have minimal faith in or respect for precise descriptions of the legal obligations.190

Mostly, HURINGOs have not been active in the regional integration process. Yet, the existence of trade relations and diplomatic ties facilitate the successful enforcement of human rights in regional economic blocs.191 Moreover, all regional blocs provide for the active participation of civil society in the development processes.192

At the continental level, the African Union has categorically made human rights a key principle of its operations. The African Union provides for the building of partnerships, solidarity and cohesion between governments and all sectors of CSOs.193 It establishes the Economic, Social and Cultural Council (ECOSOCC),194 which statute was adopted in 2004. The objectives of ECOSOCC are to ensure continuous dialogue between the people of Africa; forge strong partnerships with civil society; promote civil society participation in the implementation of the AU policies and programmes; support and defend peace and security, culture of good governance, democratic principles and institutions, popular participation, human rights, freedoms and social justice; promote

189. Id, quoted in Mutunga, supra note 81, at 21-22.

190.Id., at 22.

191.Heyns & Viljoen, supra note 1, at 423 & 433.

192.African Union Constitutive Act (2000), arts 3(g) & 22; SADC Treaty (1992), art 23; EAC Treaty (1999). art 7, arts 127-129.

193.Preamble to the African Union (2000).

194.African Union Constitutive Act (2000), arts 3(g) & 22.

48

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

gender equality and strengthen the capacities of CSOs.195 Some NGOs have attributed their lack of engagement with the AU to the criteria of observer status of the ECOSOCC. For example, to be an observer, an NGO must derive 50% of its finances from the membership.196 In addition, women’s organizations are likely to be excluded on the ground of discrimination on the basis of gender.197

SADC is yet to have a CSOs policy but works with NGOs out of personal conviction.198 Frequent change in the contact information of NGOs is also a hindrance to effective and continuous communication with NGOs.199 Likewise in East Africa, NGOs have hardly participated in the EAC activities.200 NGOs have not capitalized on the people-centred and people driven principles to demand their participation in and accountability of the EAC. The few NGOs with observer status have hardly articulated alternative agendas that integrate rights into the development discourse. By 2002, only the East African Business Council (EABC) and the East African Trade Union Coordinating Council (EATUC), East African Judges and Magistrate’s Association and Kituo Cha Katiba (KCK),201 had observer status with the EAC. By 2004, ten organizations’ applications were pending.202 By 2008, the Civil Society Forum that allows periodic consultations between the Secretary-General and civil society had not been called.203

The Consultative workshop of 2005204 recommended the establishment of the Economic, Social and Cultural Committee (ESCC) as one of the autonomous structures of the EAC.205 The EAC also noted that there were a number of organizations which

195.Statute of the ESCC of the African Union (2004) ,art. 2.

196.Id., at art. 2, rules v & vi.

197.Id., at art. 2 rule ix.

198.Interview with Madibela and Faye, Director and Technical Advisor, SADC Gender Unit, Botswana, 6 March 2008.

199.Interview with Hembe, Director HIV/AIDs, SADC Secretariat, 8 March 2008.

200.KCK EAC Fact-finding Missions (2004), at 18.

201.Report of the Committee on Fast Tracking East African Federation (2004), at 311,

Appendix X (a).

202.Id., at 312, Appendix IX (b): International Council of Social Welfare, East African Youth Forum, Legal and Human Rights Centre Tanzania, East African Youth Forum (Kenya Chapter), East African Youth Development Association, East African Fine Coffee Association, East African Book Development Association, East African Confederation of Informal Sector Organizations (CISO), and East African Sub-Regional Support Initiative for the Advancement of Women (EASSI).

203.Interview with Betty Kiraso, Deputy Secretary General, EAC, 4 May 2009, Kampala.

204.Report of the Civil Society Workshop Organized by the East African Community Secretariat from 28-29 July 2005, Arusha, Tanzania.

205.Joint Communique of the EAC Summit (2005), para.9, 29-30 May 2005.

2011]

Mainstreaming Human Rights into NGO Work

49

qualified but had not applied for observer status.206 One official wondered: “How come CSOs having powers to demand their inclusion in the debate (over the amendment of the Treaty) did not bother to do so even when some of them share the same building as the EAC Secretariat?”207 The once vibrant East Africa Youth Council has been dormant since 2000.208 Only KCK and East Africa Law Society (EALS) have actively engaged the EAC.209 However, there are many ESCRs that need to be safeguarded while promoting economic development. Moreover, the main objective of legal reform in East Africa is to facilitate economic globalization rather than the enhanced promoting and protection of human rights.210

Human rights NGOs can no longer remain aloof to the globalization and development agendas because existing voluntary codes adopted by businesses are so vague, applied in a discretionary fashion, and avoid human rights issues.211 NGOs can use the tool of litigation to stimulate public debate and prompt consumer boycotts with non-compliant businesses.212 NGOs can also ensure that community consultations take on local concerns and address the barriers to the participation of communities in local processes.213 For example, the Kenya Human Rights Commission (KHRC) successfully organized a consumer boycott of the sale of Kenyan flowers in Italy, resulting in an improvement of the working conditions of export fruit and flower industries.214 Similarly, the community builder of the year award to a company that contributes resources for social corporate responsibility in South Africa is an ideal example of how

206.Report of the Committee on Fast Tracking East African Federation (2004), 313, Appendix IX (c): EA Law Society, EA Council of NGOs, EA Federation of Employers, EA Manufacturers Association, EA Bankers Association, EA Chamber of Commerce and Industry, EA Organization of Trade Unions, EA Industries of Management, EA Media Owners Associations, EA Union of Journalists, EA Editors’ Guild, Rotary Club of EA, Lions Club of EA, EA Broadcasters Association, EA Community Abroad, Marketing Societies of EA, EA Public Relations Society, EA Cooperation Forum, EA Youth Council and EA Media Institute.

207.Member of the Legal and Harmonization Committee, 25 April 2007.

208.Interview with Deya, Executive Director, East Africa Law Society & Convenor of the Civil Society Forum, Arusha, 7 August 2007.

209.KCK EAC Fact-finding Missions (2004), at 28.

210.C.M. PETER & S. MWAKAJE, INVESTMENT IN TANZANIA: SOME COMMENTS AND ISSUES 56

(2004).

211.P. Baehr, Human Rights NGOs and Globalization, in RESPONDING TO THE HUMAN RIGHTS

DEFICIT: ESSAYS IN HONOUR OF BAS DE GAAY FORTMAN (K. Arts & P. Mihyo eds, 2003), at 36.

212.D.D. Bradlow, Differing Conceptions of Development and the Content of International Development Law, 21 SAJHR (2005), at 56 & 69.

213.Id., at 70.

214.B. Maina, Civil Society and the Private Sector, in CIVIL SOCIETY IN THE THIRD REPUBLIC

(Okello ed., 2004), at 60.

50

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

to socialize businesses to promote human rights.215 NGOs have to strengthen the state in order to regulate businesses to guarantee human rights for all.216

At the national level, many NGOs in East and southern Africa have shunned the consultations process of donor-government poverty reduction strategies. NGOs contended that the consultations were manipulative and aimed at making NGOs endorse predetermined positions or only address non-contentious issues.217 The participation of East African NGOs in the consultations was irregular, did not have thorough critiques and consequently failed to hold governments accountable. For example, in Uganda, NGOs did not have facts and figures to support their positions.218 Similarly, in Tanzania NGOs participation was mediocre, because they were not united, and lacked technical expertise in economic and development issues.219

In South Africa, with the exception of the SANGOCO’s Poverty Hearings in 1998, there are hardly any efforts to address the rights dimensions of poverty. Furthermore, while the Mid Term Expenditure Framework was intended to be a participatory process by enabling stakeholders to scrutinize the budget, civil society was “… guilty of last minute, ad hoc responses to the budget rather than a more focused approach.”220 It is such casual participation that marginalizes NGOs from policy formulation, discourse and implementation.

215.Old Mutual, Soweto and SABC 3.

216.T. Halvorsen & G.G. Michelsen, Good Governance and Public Sector Reform: The Human Rights Consequences of Structural Adjustment Programmes, in Sano & Alfredsson eds, supra note 173, at 158; M. Kothari, Globalization, Social Action and Human Rights, in DEVELOPMENT AND SOCIAL

ACTION: SELECTED ESSAYS FROM DEVELOPMENT IN PRACTICE (Kothari & Eade eds, 1999), at 20.

217.Research on Poverty Alleviation (REPOA), Tanzania Non-Governmental Organizations: Their Perceptions of the Relationship with Government of Tanzania and Donors, and Their Role in Poverty Reduction and Development (REPOA Special Paper No. 07.21, 2007), at 18-19; M. WANDIRA, M.

WANYEKI & A. PATEL, THE PROCESS OF INTEGRATING GENDER IN THE POVERTY REDUCTION STRATEGIC PLAN PROCESS IN KENYA AND THE CHALLENGES ENCOUNTERED BY THE GENDER LOBBY GROUPS (2003), at 16 & 20; H. Kotze, Responding to the Growing Socioeconomic Crisis? A Review of Civil Society in South Africa, in THE DEEPENING DIVIDE: CIVIL SOCIETY AND DEVELOPMENT IN SOUTH AFRICA (2003), at 26-27.

218.Interview with Asiimwe-Mwesige, Programme officer, European Union Civil Society Capacity Building, Kampala, 28 August 2007; Interview with Rukare, Head of Party, European Union Civil Society Capacity Building, Kampala, 14 August 2007.

219.REPOA, supra note 217, at 15 & 27.

220.L. Verwey , K. Lefto-Everett & P. Friedman, MEDIUM TERM BUDGET POLICY STATEMENT 2007: SELECTED ISSUES (2007), at 4.

2011]

Mainstreaming Human Rights into NGO Work

51

IV. CONCLUSION

The article has justified why all NGOs should embrace human rights principles in their governance arrangements, irrespective of whether or not they define themselves as HURINGOs. To take the decision to swim off shore requires conviction and preparedness to do so, otherwise it could be misunderstood as recklessness. Requiring all NGOs to mainstream human rights, whether or not in their core mandate has caused considerable confusion in terms of practical steps to take. The tendency has been to settle for cosmetic reforms that do not challenge power inequities within organizational operations, or simply rename old strategies.

Evidently, there are tensions, contradictions and ambivalence in the process of linking human rights to governance. Numerous dilemmas coupled with a lack of crystallized consensus on how governance and human rights can or should complement each other abound. It is this ambivalence and ambiguous status that presents an opportune moment for this paper to contribute to the development of good governance and best practices based on NGO experiences, rather than reacting to already-made models. Subsequently, the plurality of interpretations is both inevitable and necessary for the strengthening of good governance and human rights as integral elements of the global agenda. Mainstreaming rights is important because human rights democratic and development discourses to which all NGOs, directly or indirectly subscribe are mutually reinforcing. In essence, the merits of human rights are that it draws attention to discrimination, tames the exercise of power and provides mechanisms to overcome arbitrariness in decision-making and in the development processes, all of which are critical aspirations of the NGO tradition, irrespective of their priorities, style and belief.

The controversy surrounding the misconception that African culture does not embrace human rights is articulated, but with a caution to desist from either the blanket rejection or the glorification of African culture. African culture is a double-edged sword capable of both enhancing and detracting from human rights. NGOs must build on the positive cultural values that resonate with human rights, rather than dismissing culture entirely as an impediment to the improved protection of human rights. This among others requires NGOs to learn from how ordinary citizens have interpreted human rights in their day to day experiences.

The relationship between DNGOs and HURINGOs is examined making a case for promoting the indivisibility of human rights, which reinforces the relevance of rights in all the policies and practices of NGOs. Just like the DNGOs cannot afford to ignore the centrality of human rights in their advocacy struggles, HURINGOs can no longer remain aloof to the globalization and development agendas of DNGOs. Thus, even HURINGOs can stimulate human rights through advocacy on business-like issues

52

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

such as corporate social responsibility and fair business regulation. The failure to have a more effective framework to hold major actors such as NGOs accountable may erode the credibility of the human rights discourse to offer protection from abuse of power. Although much responsibility is placed upon HURINGOs to respect human rights values, all NGOs have to reflect on the way they mediate unequal power dynamics with other stakeholders, particularly in instances where the NGOs’ stakeholders have weaker social, economic and political voices. Given that there is no a single comprehensive definition of the rights-based approach, each NGO is required to critically reflect on how it has internalized the human rights principles in its policies, programmes and practices.

Consequently, this article advocates for the further evolution of the human rights discourse to codify what can currently be described as moral obligations into legal obligations. Indeed, the ECOSOC recognises the evolving relationship between NGOs and the UN and has suggested reviews to facilitate the effectiveness of the NGOs’ contribution to the UN’s work.221 The OHCHR has already taken the strategic role of articulating the human rights obligation for UN agencies which can easily be stretched to NGOs. Similarly, INGOs have taken the initiative to articulate their responsibilities under the International Accountability Charter. Likewise, the African Feminist Charter is another attempt to that effect. The Charter on Popular Participation also underlines the relationship between popular participation and empowerment and recommends that NGOs are participatory, democratic and accountable.222 The governance of NGOs is critical to the strengthening of the human rights movement. It is only when human rights become part and parcel of everyday practices and vocabulary that a culture of human rights will crystallize.

221.UN Resolution 1996/31 (1996), ¶ 17.

222.African Charter on Popular Participation (1990), part III.

2011]

The OAU Ghost Haunting Africa

53

THE GHOST OF THE ORGANIZATION FOR AFRICAN

UNITY (OAU) HAUNTS AFRICA

Josephine Ndagire*

ABSTRACT

This article examines the compatibility of the African Charter on Human and Peoples’ Rights (Banjul Charter) and the Constitutive Act of the African Union. It posits that the atmosphere that inspired the Banjul Charter in the 1970s and 1980s including the ideology of the Organization of African Unity (OAU) is past. The change in the aspirations of the African peoples ushered in a new political entity—the African Union (AU) which in principle, fundamentally differs from the OAU. At the heart of the Constitutive Act of the AU is a commitment to protect human rights—a sharp contrast with the OAU Charter. The result is a political document aspiring to protect human rights more than a human rights treaty. Much as the OAU is no more, its ‘ghost’ curtails efforts to protect human rights in the contemporary context. It is on this basis that I argue that perhaps, it is time to align the Banjul Charter with the Constitutive Act.

Of all ghosts, the ghosts of our old loves are the worst—Sir Arthur Conan Doyle1

I. INTRODUCTION

The idea of human rights comprises norms, standards and principles which are implemented through institutions.2 From the onset of the human rights movement, it aspired for universal application;3 evident in the drafting process of human rights treaties and declarations such as the Universal Declaration of Human Rights (UDHR).4 Hence, historically, human rights were solely enforced through international institutions

* Doctoral candidate, University of Emory School of Law. E-mail: <jndagire@law.mak.ac.ug> or <jndagire@ymail.com>.

1.ARTHUR CONAN DOYLE, THE VALLEY OF FEAR (2006).

2.HENRY J. STEINER & PHILLIP ALSTON, INTERNATIONAL HUMAN RIGHTS IN CONTEXT: LAW, POLITICS, MORALS 131 (2000).

3.Id., at 57.

4.The preamble to the UDHR refers to the “inherent dignity and of the equal and inalienable rights of all members of the human family” as “the foundation of freedom, justice and peace in the world.”

See also, U. OJI UMOZUKURIKE, THE AFRICAN CHARTER ON HUMAN AND PEOPLES’ RIGHTS 11 (1997).

54

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

such as the United Nations Security Council,5 the Commission on Human Rights6 and other treaty-monitoring bodies.7 The idea of the universality of human rights and international enforcement faces considerable resistance,8 which coupled with cultural relativism paved way for regional human rights systems. Regional systems tend to overcome universal shortcomings such as physical, economic, cultural, administrative and psychological diversity among people.9 This in part demonstrates the advantage regional systems enjoy over international bodies, which are characterized by a general trend of compromise.10

It is worth noting though that the UN Charter anticipated regional systems in the enforcement of international peace and security,11 although it is silent on regional human rights cooperation.12 This explains why the UN initially opposed regional human rights systems on suspicion that their creation was an attempt to oppose the universality of human rights13 by emphasizing regional cultures. The delay in the implementation of the International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights (ICCPR) however forced the UN to encourage the creation of regional human rights systems.14

5.Article 39 of the United Nations Charter (UN Charter) mandates the United Nations Security Council (hereinafter Security Council) to promote, maintain or restore international peace and security. This mandate has been interpreted as including maintenance of human rights since gross violations of human rights are a threat to international peace and security. It is on this basis that the Security Council adopted resolutions establishing the International Criminal Tribunals for the former Yugoslavia and Rwanda. See, Security Council Resolution 955 establishing the International Criminal Tribunal for Rwanda, S.C. Res 955, and 49 U. It was established in 1994 in response to the murder of an estimated 800,000 Rwandans. See also, Security Council Resolution 827 establishing an International Tribunal for the Prosecution of Persons Responsible for Serious Violations of International Humanitarian Law Committed in the Territory of the Former Yugoslavia, S.C.Res. 827, 48 U.N.SCOR, 48th Sess, U.N.Doc. S/Res/827 (1993).

6.This Commission was replaced by the Human Rights Council. See, GA resolution 60/251 establishing the Human Rights Council. Other institutions in this category include the Commission on Crime Prevention and Criminal Justice, the Commission on the Status of Women, and the Sub- Commission on the Promotion and Protection of Human Rights.

7.These include the Committee on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights (CESCR), the Human Rights Committee (HRC), the Committee Against Torture (CAT), the Committee on the Elimination of Racial Discrimination (CERD), and the Committee on the Rights of the Child.

8.STEINER & ALSTON, supra note 2, at 592.

9.Id., at 781.

10.Id., at 783.

11.See, Chapter VII of the UN Charter.

12.STEINER & ALSTON, supra note 2, at 780.

13.Id.

14.Id. Note that the General Assembly adopted a resolution encouraging the creation of regional human rights systems in regions where they did not exist. See, GA Res. 32/127.

2011]

The OAU Ghost Haunting Africa

55

In 1981, four years after the adoption of the General Assembly resolution calling upon states to form regional bodies, the Banjul Charter, as an international human rights instrument was enacted with the intention of promoting and protecting human rights and basic freedoms on the African continent.15 The Banjul Charter is a reflection of post colonial struggles of Africa. It was inter alia inspired by the resolve to obtain utmost independence and state sovereignty through the total liberation of Africa from colonialism, foreign domination and occupation, aggression and apartheid. Although valid causes, Africa has since embraced new aspirations key among which is the protection of fundamental rights and freedoms.

II. THE OAU ‘LIVES ON’ IN THE BANJUL CHARTER

The African Human Rights system has been described as the “… least developed… most distinctive and the most controversial.”16 In order to understand its controversy and distinctiveness, the historical factors that were at play at the time of adoption of the Banjul Charter must be analyzed. Prior to its adoption, African States had already organized themselves politically and had formed the OAU.17 The core mandate of the OAU was to safeguard the newly acquired independence of African states and territorial integrity of member states. The British Broadcasting Corporation (BBC) reported at the time that its mandate was to “decolonize the remaining bastions of white rule.”18 This claim is illustrated by the absence of an effective provision for human rights enforcement.19 It is therefore no surprise that political considerations are depicted in the Banjul Charter and in part explains its distinctiveness.

The OAU faced criticisms throughout its tenure for what most described as double standards.20 True to its mandate, the OAU played a vital role in opposing the apartheid regime in South Africa and supporting liberation movements in Zimbabwe

15.African Charter on Human and Peoples' Rights (Banjul Charter), adopted June 27, 1981, OAU Doc. CAB/LEG/67/3 rev. 5, 21 I.L.M. 58 (1982), entered into force Oct. 21, 1986. See particularly, paragraph 2 of the preamble to the Charter.

16.STEINER & ALSTON, supra note 2, at 920.

17.Charter of the Organization of African Unity (OAU Charter) was adopted on May 25, 1963 by a Conference of Heads of State and Government.

18.African States Unite Against White Rule, BBC, May 25, 1963, available at <http://news.bbc.co.uk/onthisday/hi/dates/stories/may/25/newsid_2502000/2502771.stm> (last accessed on February 6, 2008).

19.PHILIP KUNIG & COSTA RICKY MAHALU, REGIONAL PROTECTION OF HUMAN RIGHTS BY INTERNATIONAL LAW 15 (1985).

20.Id.

56

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

and Mozambique,21 while ignoring human rights atrocities committed in Uganda, the Central African Republic and Equatorial Guinea.22

In 1979, a resolution was adopted obliging member states to protect human rights.23 The underlying reason for the resolution was to strengthen OAU’s strong opposition to the racist regime of South Africa.24 The resolution led to a conference in Banjul, Gambia in 1981 which drafted the Charter that was subsequently approved in Nairobi, Kenya.25 Keba Mbaye; a well respected African scholar and Senegalese judge who led the team that drafted the Charter remarked that Banjul “was the best that could be achieved at the time.” The Banjul Charter was what African States were willing to accept in 1981 and that it would be improved upon later through amendments or revisions.

III. TRACING OAU IDEOLOGY IN THE BANJUL CHARTER

The Banjul Charter is a political statement in many ways. Indeed, the working papers of the OAU during the drafting process bear witness to this claim.26 The distinct and controversial features of the Banjul Charter are discussed in detail below:

A. Peoples’ Rights

The idea of peoples’ rights is not unique to the Banjul Charter.27 What makes it more peculiar to the African Human Rights system is that it was innovated to form the basis

21.BBC, supra note 18.

22.KUNIG & MAHALU, supra note 19.

23.Id. The most instrumental organization in ensuring that a resolution was adopted was the International Commission of Jurists which issued a Lagos Plan in 1961. See, YASSIN EL-AYOUTY, THE OAU AFTER THIRTY YEARS 54 (1993).

24.KUNIG & MAHALU, supra note 19.

25.The OAU decision to establish a human rights Charter was taken at its 16th summit Conference at Dakar, Senegal, Decision 115 (XVI). The subsequent conference elaborated on the Dakar draft at Banjul, The Gambia. This led to the Banjul draft that was subsequently adopted in Nairobi, Kenya July 1981.

26.See, OAU Doc. AHGS/102/XVII, Nairobi, at 22; See also, OAU Doc.CM/112/Part 1,

Nairobi, at 31.

27.Art. 1(1) of the International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights (ICCPR), Art. 2 of the International Covenant on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights (ICESCR), Art. 1(2) of the United Nations Charter all make reference to peoples especially in relation to the right to self determination.

2011]

The OAU Ghost Haunting Africa

57

of a major human rights treaty.28 The Banjul Charter provides for collective or group rights which are referred to as ‘peoples rights’ in the document. The concept of ‘peoples rights’ affirms that it is an “anti-colonial movement or decolonization and liberation movement of then subject peoples.”29

Another interpretation is that individual rights serve to protect individuals against violations from the state30 whereas group rights can only be enjoyed as a group.31 By emphasizing human rights as an aspiration for “African peoples” and not individuals, the Banjul Charter fails to strike a balance between the universality of human rights and the desire to model human rights on the African experience.32 The African understanding of group rights must be distinguished from the socialist approach because the former is built on the dialect between the individual and the community whereas the latter makes human rights dependent on the interests of the State.33

Whereas reference is made to African peoples in the preamble, the term “peoples” is not defined by the Banjul Charter, which makes it problematic. The definition was deliberately avoided because the concept has no uniform meaning, even though it is the foundation of African communities. Note that the concept is used differently in other international covenants.34 Peoples’ rights have been hailed as a tool that could be used to fight and prevent the evils that inflict humanity.35

28.GEORGE WILLIAM MUGWANYA, HUMAN RIGHTS IN AFRICA: ENHANCING HUMAN RIGHTS THROUGH THE AFRICAN REGIONAL HUMAN RIGHTS SYSTEM 211 (2003).

29.N. Barney Pityana, The Challenge of Culture for Human Rights in Africa: The African Culture in a Comparative Context, in THE AFRICAN CHARTER ON HUMAN AND PEOPLES RIGHTS: THE

SYSTEM IN PRACTICE,1986-2000 (Malcolm Evans & Rachel Murray eds., 2002).

30.U.O.Umozurike, The African Charter on Human and Peoples’ Rights: Suggestions for More Effectiveness, 13 ANN. SURV. INTL & COMP. L. 180 (2007).

31.Id.

32.It is clear from the preamble of the Banjul Charter that human rights are viewed as very essential for the attainment of equality, justice and dignity for Africans as a race and not individual Africans. It appears that at the time, Africans sought equality and lost dignity against another group or race. The Banjul Charter was thus another tool to continue with the struggles which the OAU had already began.

33.The major distinction between the Marxist and the African approach to human rights is that the African approach is moralistic or spiritual whereas the Marxist approach is purely based on materialism.

34.The term ‘peoples’ in the ICCPR, ICESCR and the UN Charter, for instance, is used in relation to the right to self-determination to refer to people organized in states or non self governing peoples. See, the Quebec secession case cited in MARK W.JANIS &JOHN E.NOYES,INTERNATIONAL LAW, CASES AND COMMENTARY (American Casebook Series) (2006).

35.L. Sohn, International Law, cited in MUGWANYA, supra note 28, at 214. It should however be noted that the African Commission on Human and Peoples’ Rights has considered this question in relation to the right to self determination, say in the case of Katangalese Peoples’ Congress v. Zaire,

58

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

B. Duties

The insertion of duties in the Banjul Charter is also not unique as so do many other human rights treaties. The Banjul Charter’s uniqueness is that it is the only instrument that details individual duties.36 In fact it has been criticized as being too “state- centric.”37 The duties in the Banjul Charter are a reflection of extreme nationalism and patriotism of newly independent post colonial African States which had resolved to jealously guard statehood.38

Moreover, duties also raise a question of enforcement,39 because the Charter makes no provision for enforcement of duties or remedies that would accrue to an aggrieved State and/or the community. Inclusion of duties in the Charter may lead to the prioritization of duties where the rights and duties are in conflict.40 In the past, several communist regimes in Eastern Europe invoked duties to negate the idea of human rights.41 It is therefore possible that the inclusion of duties was a compromise between several political ideologies which characterized the post colonial era—capitalist, socialist and mixed economy states. The question is whether such compromise is valid in contemporary African politics.

C. Anti-Colonialism Provisions

Almost all African States were colonized,42 and to some extent still face neo- colonialism.43 Paragraph three of the preamble provides that, “Reaffirming the pledge

Eighth Activity Report 1994-1995, Annex VI (Documents of the African Commission). The Commission however did not decide or determine who the peoples were.

36.Pityana, supra note 29, at 64.

37.Olusola Ojo & Amadu Sesay, The OAU and Human Rights: Prospects for the 1980s and Beyond, 8 HUM. RTS. Q. 96 (1986).

38.Another measure taken to guard the newly independent States was the adoption of the principle of non-interference in the internal affairs of another State. The OAU at its 16th summit conference in Monrovia, Liberia, criticized Mr. Godfrey Binaisa (then President of Uganda) for raising the question of human rights violations in the Central African Republic. See also, supra note 25, at 23.

39.Supra note 29, at 65.

40.Supra note 18, at 50. See also, supra note 27, at 229.

41.Id.

42.Liberia and Ethiopia are arguably the only two countries that were not colonized. Ethiopia was colonized by Italy between 1935 and 1936, and regained independence soon after Italy lost in World War II (WW II).

43.Neo- Colonialism is a policy where a major power uses economic and political means to perpetuate or extend its influence over underdeveloped nations or areas: It is commonly manifested in economic relations between rich and poor countries, usually the latter are forced to adopt certain measures,

2011]

The OAU Ghost Haunting Africa

59

… made in Article 2 of the said Charter (OAU Charter) to eradicate all forms of colonialism from Africa …” Paragraph 8 provides that, “Conscious of their (the African member states) duty to achieve the total liberation of Africa, the peoples of which are still struggling for their dignity and genuine independence, and undertaking to eliminate colonialism, neo-colonialism, apartheid and to dismantle aggressive foreign military bases and all forms of discrimination, particularly those based on race, ethnic group, color, sex, language, religion or political opinions …” From the reading of the above paragraphs, it goes without saying that the Banjul Charter was responsive to the political problems of the time. 44

D. Claw-back Clauses

Claw-back clauses have earned the Banjul Charter the most criticisms. The claw back clauses have two major implications: first, the rights enumerated in the charter are subject to the domestic law of the states parties; and second, domestic law which restricts the rights in the Banjul Charter should not be impugned.45 Owing to claw back clauses, some commentators have dismissed the entire Charter as irrelevant to Africa’s political life,46 while others have looked to Article 60 which implies that the Banjul Charter cannot be invoked to avoid state obligations that are enumerated in other international covenants.47 In Legal Resources Foundation v. Zambia, the Commission emphasized that “…no state party to the Charter should avoid its responsibilities by recourse to the limitations and ‘claw back’ clauses in the Charter,” and added that “… the Charter cannot be used to justify violations of sections of it.”48 The Commission’s

for example privatization of government parastatals in exchange of financial aid-this is commonly referred to as “tied aid.” Neo-colonialism has actually forced many former socialist and communist African countries to convert to capitalism. Art.21(5) of the Charter in response to neo colonialism, creates an obligation for member states to eliminate all forms of economic exploitation by international monopolies so as to enable peoples to fully benefit from their natural resources. Zionism was included because of the war between Israel and Arabs. Africa has many Arabs.

44.Namibia was the last African Country to acquire independence in 1990. This marked the end of the struggle against colonialism. The same year saw the release of Nelson Mandela from prison and the 1994 elections in South Africa marked the end of the apartheid regime. Arguably, the OAU had accomplished its major tasks. See also Uzomurike, supra note 53, at 93.

45.See supra note 27, at 268.

46.Weekly West Africa, cited in EL-AYOUTY, supra note 23.

47.Cees Flinterman & Catherine Henderson, The African Charter on Human and Peoples’ Rights, in AN INTRODUCTION TO INTERNATIONAL PROTECTION OF HUMAN RIGHTS 391 (Raija Hanski & Markku Suksi eds, 2000).

48.Communication No. 211/98 (2001), para. 70.

60

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

decisions though authoritative, are not legally enforceable. In this regard, it may not be an easy task to remedy the shortcomings of the Banjul Charter by recourse to claw back clauses.

IV. THE CONSTITUTIVE ACT AND HUMAN RIGHTS

The creation of the African Union was first discussed at the fourth extra ordinary session of the OAU Assembly that was held in Sirte, Libya. Article 6 of the Sirte Declaration reads that:

In order to … effectively address the new social, political and economic realities in Africa and in the world (emphasis added), we are determined to fulfil our peoples’ aspirations for greater unity in conformity with the objectives of the OAU Charter and the Treaty Establishing the African Economic Community. It is also our conviction that our continental Organization needs to be revitalized in order to be able to play a more active role and continue to be relevant to the needs of our peoples and responsive to the demands of the prevailing circumstances. We are also determined to eliminate the scourge of conflicts, which constitutes a major impediment to the implementation of our development and integration agenda.49

The hasty drafting process of the Constitutive Act compared with the years it took to draft the Banjul Charter demonstrates the commitment of African leaders to embrace a new era.50 The Constitutive Act greatly impacted the Africa Human Rights System.51 The objectives of the African Union are broad. Most important for purposes of this scholarship is the express mandate of the Constitutive Act to promote human and peoples’ rights. The tone of the Constitutive Act is less politically inclined than the OAU Charter.52 Article 4(h) provides that member states have a right to intervene in the internal affairs of a member state where there are grave circumstances such as war

49.Sirte Declaration, EAHG/Draft/Decl. (IV) Rev.1 1999 (emphasis added), available online at <http://www.chr.up.ac.za/hr_docs/african/docs/ahsg/ahsg64.doc.> (accessed March 9, 2008).

50.Nsongurua J. Udombana, Can the Leopard Change its Spots? The African Union Treaty and Human Rights, 17 AM. U. INTL L. REV. 1177 (2001-2002).

51.Chidi Anselm Odinkalu, Africa’s Regional Human Rights System: Recent Developments and Jurisprudence, 2 HUM. RTS. L. REV. 99 (2002).

52.Alpha Fall, The Impact of the Constitutive Act of the African Union on Human Rights (LL.M Thesis, University of Notre Dame, 2002).

2011]

The OAU Ghost Haunting Africa

61

crimes, crimes against humanity and genocide. Article 4 (h) when read together with Article 23(2) demonstrates a very big ideological difference between the OAU and the African Union.53

The Constitutive Act makes substantial reference to human rights. Article 3 (h) provides for the promotion and protection of human rights in accordance with the Banjul Charter. Article 4 (m) also makes reference to human rights by providing for the respect of human rights, democratic principles and the rule of law. Other notable developments include the obligations of states parties to promote gender equality and the sanctity of human life.54 The changes introduced by the Constitutive Act have been lauded as a “new theoretical advancement in the democratization of the continent and a rupture to the debilitating concept of non-intervention into the affairs of member countries.”55

A. The Assembly of the Union

The Assembly of the Union has close links to the African Commission on Human and Peoples’ Rights to the extent that Article 52 of the Banjul Charter mandates the former to inform the Assembly of Heads of State (under the OAU) in its report of any human rights violation. Since the Assembly of the Union replaced the Assembly of Heads of State and Government, Article 52 should be read with the necessary modification. In the alternative, the Commission may specifically make a recommendation to the Assembly of Heads of State and Governments (Assembly of the Union).56 One of its major functions in this regard is to direct the Executive Council on how to manage conflicts, wars, and other emergency situations and the restoration of peace.57

53.Article 23 provides that “any Member State that fails to comply with the decisions and policies of the Union may be subjected to other sanctions, such as the denial of transport and communications links with other Member States, and other measures of a political and economic nature to be determined by the Assembly.” Although the principle of non intervention is reaffirmed in the Constitutive Act, it is now clear that African States cannot invoke the Principle at the expense of human rights or national interests.

54.Art. 4(o), Constitutive Act.

55.Fall, supra note 52.

56.Art. 53, Banjul Charter.

57.Art. 1(9)(g), Constitutive Act.

62

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

B. The Executive Council

It comprises ministers of foreign affairs or other ministers from member states.58 It mainly prepares materials for the Assembly of the Union.59 General areas of its focus include, inter alia, social security, agriculture, transport and communications, food, water resources and irrigation, energy, industry and minerals, education and culture insurance and foreign trade.60 When these issues are analyzed, there is no doubt that they are matters of human rights concern.

C. The African Court of Justice

The African Court of Justice of the African Union has its roots in Article 18 of the Constitutive Act which envisages its establishment. The Court was established by the Protocol of the Court of Justice of the African Union. According to Article 19 of the Protocol, the Court shall have jurisdiction over all disputes and applications referred to it in accordance with the Act. From its mandate, it is clear that there is plenty of room for the Court to litigate human rights issues. This is evident in the wording of the Protocol which for instance allows the Court to “interpret any question of international law.”61 Another basis for human rights jurisdiction of the Court under the Protocol is the mandate to “… interpret … matters … in other agreements.”62 The “other” agreements can be said to include the Banjul Charter.

However, the anticipation of the African Court of Justice as a forum for human rights litigation is quite ambitious in light of the Protocol to the Banjul Charter on the establishment of an African Court on Human and Peoples’ Rights. Interestingly, Article 4 mandates the African Court on Human and Peoples’ Rights to make advisory opinions to the OAU (read AU) on any matter relating to the Banjul Charter or any other treaty. In response to the potential duplicity of functions of the two courts, they were merged by the Protocol on the Statute on the African Court on Justice and Human Rights, which is not yet in force.

58.Id., art. 10(1).

59.Id.

60.Id., art. 13.

61.Art. 19(c).

62.Art. 19(e).

2011]

The OAU Ghost Haunting Africa

63

D. The Dilemma

Whereas the Constitutive Act is human rights oriented, it makes little reference to the Banjul Charter. What is even more surprising is the exclusion of the African Commission on Human and Peoples’ Rights from the organs of the African Union. Given the importance of the Commission and the Court on Human Rights, there is need to forge a nexus. Gutto warns that, “the failure to anchor the African human rights system as a principal system of the … AU is likely to reproduce the marginalization of the collective protection and promotion of human and peoples’ rights on the continent.”63 The failure or difficulty in linking the two may be attributed to the difference in the theoretical approaches between the two “systems.” The African Union as a political organ is much needed in human rights to the extent that it can be used as an enforcement mechanism. Possible suggestions or solutions to this problem are considered next.

V. NEW WINE, OLD SKINS: A CASE FOR RETHINKING THE BANJUL

CHARTER

The resolve to safeguard human rights is a milestone in Africa’s history and must not be curtailed by a defective human rights treaty. If not revisited, the repercussions are likely to be twofold: first, efforts to safeguard human rights by new institutions (African Court on Human and Peoples’ Rights or the ‘future’ African Court of Justice and Human Rights) though well intentioned will follow in the footsteps of the African Commission—a trap laid by the OAU; and second, there is a real risk of over- legalization.64 Over legalization takes two forms, that is that it changes the initial treaty bargains and the second is that it improves enforcement mechanisms.65 Enforcement mechanisms should be very cautious because international law, which is essentially consensual,66 and over-legalization may lead to the denunciation of a treaty.

63.Shadrack Gutto, The Reform and Renewal of the African Regional Human and Peoples’ Rights System, 2 AFR. HUM. RTS L. J. 175 (2002).

64.Laurence R. Helfer, Over-legalizing Human Rights: International Relations Theory and the Commonwealth Caribbean Backlash Against Human Rights Regimes, 102 COLUM. L. REV. 1832 (2002).

65.Id.

66.<http://www.law.uga.edu/~bodansky/courses/International_Law/class04.html> (accessed on April 10, 2008). Professor Bondasky explains that Consensualism, also known as voluntarism, is a theory of International law which states that international law is based on the free will of states. The rationale is that states are sovereign entities and hence they can only be bound by that to which they have consented. In other words, the State has a “will, moral authority, the power to consent, to enter into

64

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

A. Exorcizing the OAU Ghost from the Charter

Article 68 of the Banjul Charter provides for amendment. Some however favor reform through institutional practice citing the need for stability.67 Proponents for institutional reform argue that necessary reforms of the Charter can be attained through institutions mandated to interpret it.68 In support of that claim, the Commission’s interpretation of claw back clauses is often cited.69 However, by expansively interpreting the Charter in order to remedy its flaws, the Commission acts ultra vires and strips the Charter of its integrity.70

B. So, Exorcizing What Ghost?

All claw back clauses must be struck out of the Charter because they hinder effective enforcement of human rights. For example, Article 9 provides for the right to receive information and to express and disseminate opinions within the law,71 thus effectively subjecting the Banjul Charter to the national law. While the Commission has interpreted the phrase broadly,72 it in essence usurps the authority of the Charter. Heyns observes that:

This creative, if somewhat desperate move on the part of the Commission to save the Charter from itself, should be succeeded by necessary modification of the Charter, given that the words of the

relations to conclude agreements, to form associations.” When this theory is adapted to the Africa Human Rights System, it would mean that as far as African States are concerned, they are committed to Human Rights Promotion and Protection only as far a as the Banjul Charter provides. This is ironical because it is clear from the Constitutive Act and the Protocol Establishing the African Court that African States are more ready to promote and protect human rights contrary to what they were willing to do twenty one years ago (this is the time lapse between the Banjul Charter and the Constitutive Act).

67.Christof Heyns, The African Regional Human Rights System: In Need of Reform? 1 AFR. HUM. RTS L. J. 157 (2002).

68.Id.

69.Id., at 284 (showing that the Commission derives its authority from other human rights instruments in accordance with Articles 60 & 61 of the Banjul Charter. Through this avenue, the Commission has been able to narrowly construe and claw back clauses).

70.Id.

71.Other rights include the right to property which is subject to the interest of the community (this has roots in the African understanding of society, which is communal) and in accordance with appropriate laws.

72.See, Civil Liberties Organization v. Nigeria, Communication 101/93.

2011]

The OAU Ghost Haunting Africa

65

Charter are no longer understood, at least by the Commission, to have their ordinary meaning … Because the Commission could not follow the provisions of the Charter, the provisions of the Charter now have to follow the Commission.73

The proposal to amend the Banjul Charter in this regard is rooted in the fact that the factors that prompted the claw back clauses, that is, the “jealous” guarding of the newly acquired independence have slowly faded away. The Banjul Charter was borne by an organization immersed in the most radical construction of state sovereignty.74 State sovereignty when coupled with the non-interference principle led to a highly compromised human rights document.

The Banjul Charter excludes some internationally recognized human rights.75 These include: the right to respect of private life, home and correspondence,76 the right to freedom from forced or compulsory labor,77 the right to equality in marriage, during and at dissolution,78 the right to enter marriage with full and free consent of intending spouses,79 the right to form and join trade unions and the right to vote.80 Even the recognized rights such as minimum guarantees of an accused person are by far inadequate.81 The Commission or the Court may have to adopt a very expansive

73.See supra note 67, at 161.

74.Supra note 50, at 1207.

75.Supra note 29, at 344. See also, supra note 47, at 159.

76.Id.

77.Id.

78.Id.

79.Id.

80.Supra note 27, at 159. It should however be noted that the Banjul Charter does make provision for what could reasonably be construed as the right to vote in Art.13 (1). The vagueness or indirectness of the provision has led some to consider the right non-existent in the Charter and to call for a more specific and clear provision.

81.Article 6 of the Banjul Charter merely states that; “Every individual shall have the right to liberty and to the security of his person. No one may be deprived of his freedom except for reasons and conditions previously laid down by law. In particular, no one may be arbitrarily arrested or detained.” Contrast the narrowly constructed Art. 6 above with the broad and elaborate Art. 5 of the European Convention on Human Rights which provides that:

1.Everyone has the right to liberty and security of person. No one shall be deprived of his liberty save in the following cases and in accordance with a procedure prescribed by law:

(a) the lawful detention of a person after conviction by a competent court;

(b) the lawful arrest or detention of a person for non-compliance with the lawful order of a court or in order to secure the fulfillment of any obligation prescribed by law;

(c) the lawful arrest or detention of a person effected for the purpose of bringing him

66

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

interpretation of the right to a fair trial in order to apply the internationally recognized rights of an accused person in accordance with Article 60. The challenge with this approach is that only the Commission and not the Court is empowered to rely on other international instruments to interpret the Banjul Charter.82 The right to life provided for in Article 4 as the basis for the enjoyment of all other rights requires elaboration. The exact incidences when the right should be deprived should be laid down as witnessed in other international and regional human rights instruments.83

before the competent legal authority of reasonable suspicion of having committed and offence or when it is reasonably considered necessary to prevent his committing an offence or fleeing after having done so;

(d)the detention of a minor by lawful order for the purpose of educational supervision or his lawful detention for the purpose of bringing him before the competent legal authority;

(e)the lawful detention of persons for the prevention of the spreading of infectious diseases, of persons of unsound mind, alcoholics or drug addicts, or vagrants;

(f)the lawful arrest or detention of a person to prevent his effecting an unauthorized entry into the country or of a person against whom action is being taken with a view to deportation or extradition.

2. Everyone who is arrested shall be informed promptly, in a language which he understands, of the reasons for his arrest and the charge against him.

3. Everyone arrested or detained in accordance with the provisions of paragraph 1(c) of this article shall be brought promptly before a judge or other officer authorized by law to exercise judicial power and shall be entitled to trial within a reasonable time or to release pending trial. Release may be conditioned by guarantees to appear for trial.

4. Everyone who is deprived of his liberty by arrest or detention shall be entitled to take proceedings by which the lawfulness of his detention shall be decided speedily by a court and his release ordered if the detention is not lawful.

5. Everyone who has been the victim of arrest or detention in contravention of the provisions of this article shall have an enforceable right to compensation. Article 7 of the American Convention on Human Rights is equally elaborate and need not be reproduced and so is Article 9 of the International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights. Therefore, the Banjul Charter would do very well to give states the exact limits within which the right to liberty can be deprived, given the political turmoil in Africa and the rampart un lawful arrests and detentions especially of political opponents. See also, MUGWANYA, supra note 28, at 302.

82. See supra note 47.

83. Article 4 of the Banjul Charter reads: Human beings are inviolable. Every human being shall be entitled to respect for his life and the integrity of his person. No one may be arbitrarily deprived of this right. This should be contrasted with the Article 6 of the International Covenant on Civil and Political rights which provides that:

1. Every human being has the inherent right to life. This right shall be protected by law. No one shall be arbitrarily deprived of his life.

2011]

The OAU Ghost Haunting Africa

67

Still on the normative content of the Banjul Charter, it needs to be strengthened in terms of state obligations and commitment. The new resolve and determination of states to respect human rights should be borrowed from the Constitutive Act. Paragraph 9 of the preamble to the Constitutive Act provides that, “DETERMINED to promote and protect human and peoples’ rights …” This should be contrasted with Paragraph 11 of the preamble to the Banjul Charter which states that, “Firmly convinced of their duty to promote and protect human and people' rights and freedoms taking into account the importance traditionally attached to these rights and freedoms in Africa…” The two paragraphs illustrate a variance in tone and the level of commitment to human rights in both instruments. This runs throughout the Banjul Charter, as noted by Heyns, Article 1 which lays down state obligations needs to be revisited.84

The powers of the African Commission on Human and Peoples Rights need to be broadened and made clear.85 The Commission needs to be free to operate without

2.In countries which have not abolished the death penalty, sentence of death may be imposed only for the most serious crimes in accordance with the law in force at the time of the commission of the crime and not contrary to the provisions of the present Covenant and to the Convention on the Prevention and Punishment of the Crime of Genocide. This penalty can only be carried out pursuant to a final judgment rendered by a competent court.

3.When deprivation of life constitutes the crime of genocide, it is understood that nothing in this article shall authorize any State Party to the present Covenant to derogate in any way from any obligation assumed under the provisions of the Convention on the Prevention and Punishment of the Crime of Genocide.

4.Anyone sentenced to death shall have the right to seek pardon or commutation of the sentence. Amnesty, pardon or commutation of the sentence of death may be granted in all cases.

5.Sentence of death shall not be imposed for crimes committed by persons below eighteen years of age and shall not be carried out on pregnant women.

6.Nothing in this article shall be invoked to delay or to prevent the abolition of capital punishment by any State Party to the present Covenant.

The Banjul Charter by failing to lay down similar boundaries purports to take away the internationally accepted limits within which the right to life can be deprived, this is not withstanding the fact that Art.60 of the Banjul Charter provides for the use of other international instruments.

84.Heyns notes that Art.1 is “a very weak way” of establishing State obligations because it

simply states that, “The Member States of the Organization of African Unity parties to the present Charter shall recognize the rights, duties and freedoms enshrined in this Chapter and shall undertake to adopt legislative or other measures to give effect to them.” Heyns rightly suggests that the language should be much firmer and assertive or certain, say the Article should state , that “states parties undertake…”It should not be a mere promise or anticipatory obligation. See supra, note 67.

85. Id.

68

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

restrictions. Much as this is not the case in practice any more, the mandate of the Commission needs to be reflective of what is done in practice.86 With regard to confidentiality of measures to be taken by the Commission, it has remedied this by publishing its decisions, recommendations and findings.87 While the Commission has undertaken several functions such as monitoring compliance of member states with the Banjul Charter, it is not expressly mandated to do so.88 Additionally, the Commission has developed a practice of remedying human rights violations. The Banjul Charter is however silent on the findings that can be made by the Commission and whether or not it can award remedies and if so, what kind of remedies?89 Even more interesting, the Commission is not authorized by the Banjul Charter to consider state reports90 but was authorized by the Assembly of States at its own request to consider state reports.91

The attempt to amend the Banjul Charter through informal agreements is ineffective because what is of most importance is what the Charter actually states. There is therefore an urgent need to clearly spell out what the Commission can or cannot do, otherwise for the Banjul Charter to say one thing and the Commission to do another, ‘mocks’ its legitimacy.

VI. CONCLUSION

The OAU was indeed “…a symbol and embodiment of age-old Pan-Africa yearnings

...”92 This article acknowledges the achievements of the OAU and recognizes that it arguably executed its mandate—which excluded human rights protection, effectively. Criticism of the Banjul Charter should therefore be grounded in a historical context, heeding the words of Keba Mbaye that it was the “best that could be achieved at the time.” The article traces the “age-old Pan-Africa yearnings” in the Banjul Charter and

86. Article 59 of the Banjul Charter provides that:

1.All measures taken within the provisions of the present Chapter shall remain confidential until such a time as the Assembly of Heads of State and Government shall otherwise decide. . .

2.The report on the activities of the Commission shall be published by its Chairman after it has been considered by the Assembly of Heads of State and Government.

87.Gutto, supra note 63, at 180.

88.See supra note 67, at 162.

89.Id., at 160.

90.Id.

91.Franz Viljoen, Overview of the African Regional Human Rights System, cited in Heyns, supra note 47, at 164.

92.Centre for Human Rights, The African Human Rights System, available online at, <http://www.chr.up.ac.za/centre_publications/ahrs/oau.html> (accessed January 4, 2008).

2011]

The OAU Ghost Haunting Africa

69

holds them responsible for its flaws and challenges facing human rights enforcement in Africa. To its credit, the Charter left room for alteration in the hope that what could not be achieved then could be realized at a future time. The article argues that the time is ripe for alteration. Every last trace of the OAU ideology in the Charter must be replaced with a spirit commensurate with contemporary aspirations of the African peoples and the Constitutive Act so that the OAU ghost haunts Africa no more.

70

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

INTERNATIONAL HUMAN RIGHTS FRAMEWORK ON ACCESS TO CONTRACEPTION FOR ADOLESCENTS IN AFRICA

Ebenezer Durojaye*

ABSTRACT

This article examines threats to adolescents’ lives and physical and mental well-being, which may arise due to lack of access to contraceptive information and services. It then considers the health benefits of ensuring access to contraceptive information and services for adolescents in Africa. More importantly, the article discusses certain human rights that can be invoked to realize access to contraceptive information and services for adolescents. It concludes that in line with their obligations under international law, African governments need to do more than what they are presently doing with regard to meeting the sexual and reproductive health needs of adolescents in the region.

I. INTRODUCTION

Reproductive health eludes many of the world's people because of such factors as: inadequate levels of knowledge about human sexuality and inappropriate or poor- quality reproductive health information and services; the prevalence of high-risk sexual behaviour; discriminatory social practices; negative attitudes towards women and girls; and the limited power many women and girls have over their sexual and reproductive lives. Adolescents are particularly vulnerable because of their lack of information and access to relevant services in most countries.1

Adolescence is a critical period of transition to adulthood. Today, it is estimated that nearly 1.1 billion people of the world’s population (85 per cent of them living in developing countries) are adolescents, half of which will have sexual

* Doctoral Candidate and Research Assistant, Department of Constitutional Law, University of the Free State, South Africa. E-mail: <ebenezer1170@yahoo.com> The author is grateful to Professors Charles Ngwena of the University of the Free State and Akin Oyebode of the University of Lagos for their encouragement, and to Nontobeko Ncinitwa for her kind support.

1. Report of the International Conference on Population and Development (ICPD), UN Doc A/CONF.171/13 (1994), ¶ 7.3.

2011]

Access to Contraception for Adolescents in Africa

71

intercourse by the age of 16 and most of them by 20.2 Apart from grappling with problems such as conflicts and poverty, Africa has continued to bear the greatest burden of sexual and reproductive ill-health in the world. While this region constitutes only 10 per cent of the world’s population, it is home to about 60 per cent of people living with HIV. Recent figures show that of about 33 million people said to be living with HIV worldwide, Africa constitutes 22 million of these figures.3 The majority of the newly infected and mortality resulting from HIV/AIDS complications are found in Africa. The worst affected by these sexual and reproductive health challenges are female adolescents in the region.

In many parts of the world, including Africa, adolescents are grappling with the physical and emotional transformations that usually accompany their change of status. Many of them are becoming sexually active at an earlier age than before. Yet majority of adolescents lack proper access to information and services relating to their sexuality, especially with regard to contraception. Over the years, sexual and reproductive health needs of adolescents have continued to be ignored or treated with levity. This in turn has led to unmet needs of adolescents’ sexual health needs. It is estimated that about 15 million adolescents within the ages of 15-19 give birth annually.4 Many of these births occur in developing countries, where adolescents lack access to comprehensive sexual healthcare services.

The average rate for births per 1000 among young women in sub-Saharan Africa is put at about 143 compared to 25 and 59 in Europe and Central Asia respectively.5 Equally, sexually transmitted infections (STIs), excluding HIV/AIDS, are the second most important cause of loss of health in women especially young women.6 Adolescents remain particularly susceptible to sexual and reproductive health problems due to the fact that they often experience unexpected sex and find access to health services difficult. It is estimated that over 4 million unsafe abortions, especially

2.A. Grunseit, The Impact of HIV and Sexual Health Education on the Sexual Behaviour of Young People: A Review Update 7 (1997). Adolescents are often described as people within the ages of 10-19 while young people are 15-24 years. See, UNDP, UNFPA, WHO AND WORLD BANK, PROGRESS IN REPRODUCTIVEHEALTHRESEARCH (Special Programme of Research, Development and Research Training in Human Reproduction, 2002), at 1.

3.UNAIDS, REPORT ON THE GLOBAL AIDS EPIDEMIC 20 (2010).

4.M. DE BRUYN & S. PARKER, ADOLESCENTS, UNWANTED PREGNANCY AND ABORTION: POLICES, COUNSELING AND CLINICAL CARE 7 (2004).

5.WORLD HEALTH ORGANIZATION, CONTRACEPTION ISSUES IN ADOLESCENTS HEALTH AND DEVELOPMENT 6 (2004).

6.A. Glasier et al, Sexual and Reproductive Health: A Matter of Life and Death, 368 LANCET

1595 (2006).

72

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

among young women, occur in the region every year.7 Moreover, approximately 55 per cent of unmarried adolescents in West Africa, 47 per cent in Eastern and Southern Africa and 32 per cent in Central Africa have an unmet need for contraception.8

It should be noted that in the last 50 or more years, efforts have been made to ensure that access to modern contraception for all women moves from being merely a key element in primary healthcare services to being a basic human rights of women. Thus, at several meetings and fora such as the International Conference on Population and Development (ICPD)9 and the Beijing Platform of Action,10 including their follow- up meetings,11 it has been reiterated that couples and individuals have the right to freely and responsibly decide on matters related to their sexuality. Despite these developments, however, a significant number of adolescents in Africa still lack adequate access to contraceptive information and services.

Against this backdrop, this article examines the importance of ensuring access to contraceptive information and services to adolescents in Africa. The article examines threats to adolescents’ lives and physical and mental well-being which may arise due to lack of access to contraceptive services. Emphasis is paid to two major health challenges—unwanted pregnancy and the HIV/AIDS pandemic. It then considers the health benefits of ensuring access to contraceptive information and services to adolescents in the region. More importantly, the article discusses certain human rights that can be invoked to realize access to contraceptive information and services to adolescents. It equally considers the interpretations given to these rights by treaty monitoring bodies. It concludes that, in line with their obligations under international law, African governments need to do more than what they are presently doing with regard to meeting the sexual and reproductive health needs of adolescents in the region.

7.Id. See, E. Ahman & I. Shah, Unsafe Abortion Worldwide Estimates for 2000, 10 REPRODUCTIVE HEALTH MATTERS (2002), at 13-17.

8.A.E. BIDDLECOM ET AL, PROTECTING THE NEXT GENERATION IN SUB-SAHARAN AFRICA:

LEARNING FROM ADOLESCENTS TO PREVENT HIV AND UNINTENDED PREGNANCIES 17 (2007).

9.ICPD, supra note 1.

10.UN, FOURTH WORLD CONFERENCE ON WOMEN (Beijing, 15 September 1995), A/CONF.177/20.

11.Key Actions for the Further Implementation of the Programme of Action of the International Conference on Population and Development,(ICPD +5), U.N. GAOR, 21st Special Sess., New York, United States, June 30 – July 2, 1999, U.N. Doc.A/S-21/5/Add.1 (1999) (hereinafter ICPD+5 Key Actions).

2011]

Access to Contraception for Adolescents in Africa

73

II. THE IMPORTANCE OF ACCESS TO CONTRACEPTION FOR

ADOLESCENTS

Contraception provides important options for sexually active adolescents to avoid unwanted pregnancies and sexually transmitted infections (STIs), including HIV. Ensuring access to information and services in relation to contraception to adolescents, not only reduces their risk of exposure to serious sexual harms, it could also promote their educational, occupational and social opportunities.12 While it has been noted that contraception use across the world has increased over the years, disparity still exists in terms of regions and groups having access to contraception. Many parts of developing countries, particularly Africa, still lack adequate access to contraception and young women among all others are often denied access to contraceptive information and services.

Without access to modern contraception, adolescents’ (especially female adolescents) ability to develop their full human potential is retarded, and the public health suffers.13 As mentioned earlier, unmet need for contraception remains high, and unintended pregnancies are a major contributor to the overall burden of disease in the developing world.14 A report has shown that the proportion of currently pregnant women under the age of 20 in Ghana, Kenya and Namibia who reported that there pregnancies were mistimed or unwanted was 46 per cent, 50 per cent and 55 per cent respectively.15 In a country as Nigeria, a report as far back as 1998 indicated that almost one million girls in the country became pregnant each year and most of these pregnancies were either unwanted or unintended.16 More recent studies have shown that the situation has not changed. For instance, a study conducted among women, majority of whom were under 30 years in about eight states in Nigeria, has revealed that about 28 per cent of them had experienced an unwanted pregnancy at some point in their lives. Of this figure, the majority of these pregnancies occurred among unmarried

12.CENTER FOR REPRODUCTIVE LAW AND POLICY (CRLP) & CHILD AND LAW FOUNDATION (CLF), STATE OF DENIAL: ADOLESCENTS REPRODUCTIVE HEALTH IN ZIMBABWE 17 (2002) (hereinafter CRLP & CLF).

13.See, M.J Welsh, J. Stanback & J. Shelton, Access to Modern Contraception, 3 BEST

PRACTICE AND RESEARCH IN CLINICAL OBSTETRICS AND GYNECOLOGY (2006), at 325.

14.J. Ross & W. Winfrey, Unmet need for Contraception in the Developing World and Former Soviet Union: An Updated Estimate, 28 INTERNATIONAL FAMILY PLANNING PERSPECTIVES (2002).

15.See, C. PARKER, ADOLESCENTS AND EMERGENCY CONTRACEPTIVE PILLS IN DEVELOPING

COUNTRIES 1 (2005).

16.UNFPA, STATE OF THE WORLD POPULATION REPORT (1998).

74

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

women.17 Similarly, a study among adolescents in South Africa has shown that about 40 per cent of adolescents in the ages of 15-19 had ever been pregnant.18 This percentage varies from one province to another and from rural areas to urban areas.

There are several health consequences that often arise as a result of early or unwanted pregnancies among young people. It has been shown that pregnancies among adolescents within the ages of 15-19 can be very risky as they are more likely to die due to pregnancy-related complications compared to adolescents in their 20s. Also, it has been noted that if maternal illnesses are included, unintended births result in the loss of 4.5 million disability-adjusted life years each year.19 The burden of maternal mortality is greatest where resources are most scarce, with 99 per cent of the estimated half a million maternal deaths each year occurring in developing countries. It has been reported that approximately 45 million unintended pregnancies end in abortion each year. More than 40 per cent of these occur among young women aged 15-24 and under unsafe conditions, which can lead to loss of fertility and even death.20 Early or unwanted pregnancy among adolescents is not only dangerous for the young mother but can also endanger the life of the unborn child since the infants of teenagers have higher rates of premature birth, lower weights and higher mortality rates.21

Apart from the risk to the health of adolescents, unwanted pregnancy also brings along with it adverse social and economic consequences for an adolescent. Because premarital pregnancy is usually frowned upon in many African communities, unmarried adolescent girls who get pregnant may likely experience violence or even be disowned by their parents.22 Pregnancy among female adolescents may severely limit their opportunity to pursue their education and render them economically dependent on partners or family members. Access to comprehensive information and services on contraception can avoid these deleterious consequences to adolescents.

17.G. Sedge et al, Unwanted Pregnancy and Associated Factors among Nigerian Women, 32 INTERNATIONAL FAMILY PLANNING PERSPECTIVES (2006).

18.DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH, SOUTH AFRICAN DEMOGRAPHIC AND HEALTH SURVEY 1998

(1998), at 143.

19.M. COLLUBIEM, M. GERASSU, & J. CLELAND, NON-USE AND USE OF EFFECTIVE METHODS

OF CONTRACEPTION:COMPARATIVE QUANTIFICATION OF HEALTH RISKS,GLOBAL AND REGIONAL BURDEN OF DISEASE ATTRIBUTABLE TO SELECTED RISK FACTORS (2004).

20. WORLD HEALTH ORGANIZATION, REPRODUCTIVE HEALTH STRATEGY TO ACCELERATE PROGRESS TOWARDS THE ATTAINMENT OF INTERNATIONAL DEVELOPMENT GOALS AND TARGETS 7(2004).

21.PARKER, supra note 15, at 2.

22.See, C. ALISTER ET AL, ADOLESCENT SEXUAL AND REPRODUCTIVE HEALTH IN MALAWI: A SYNTHESIS OF RESEARCH EVIDENCE (Allan Guttmacher Institute Occasional Report 15, 2004), at 14.

2011]

Access to Contraception for Adolescents in Africa

75

In addition to the problem of unwanted pregnancies among adolescents in Africa, there is also the challenge of STIs, including HIV/AIDS. The negative impacts of unprotected sex among adolescents are more serious among the females compared to their male counterparts. This is because women are more susceptible to HIV infection than men due to the fact that the greater area of a woman’s mucous membrane is often exposed during sex.23 This usually accounts for the higher prevalence of STIs other than HIV among women than men. A report on the analysis of HIV prevalence in Ghana revealed that the HIV positive sero-status among young women was due to their engagement in sexual activities at a young age. A study in Malawi found that about 20 per cent of Malawian young people aged 15-24 (with young women five times more likely than men) are HIV positive.24

In South Africa, a report indicated that the high HIV prevalence among young women compared to their male counterparts.25 This high prevalence among young women cannot be isolated from the high rate of sexual violence in South Africa. Indeed, it has been reported that South Africa has one of the worst incidences of sexual violence in the world.26 With this great challenge posed by the HIV/AIDS pandemic, the role of effective contraception in the primary prevention of mother-to-child transmission outlined by the World Health Organization (WHO) provides yet another compelling rationale to expand access to contraception for all women, especially young women.27 At the level of an individual woman, lack of access to contraception or the empowering knowledge that leads to its use has frustrated the aspirations of generations of women, especially young women worldwide, and has robbed societies of their potential intellectual contributions.28

23.A.E. Biddlecom et al, Women, Gender and HIV/AIDS: Women Bear the Heaviest HIV/AIDS Burden, COUNTDOWN 2015: SEXUAL AND REPRODUCTIVE HEALTH AND RIGHTS FOR ALL (2004), at 65-68.

24.See, H. Chendi, HIV/AIDS Life Skills Progammes in Southern Africa: The Case of Malawi (unpublished working paper), cited in ALISTER et al, supra note 22.

25.See, DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH, SOUTH AFRICA NATIONAL HIV AND SYPHILIS PREVALENCE

SURVEY 2006 (2007), at 7.

26.HUMAN RIGHTS WATCH, SCARED AT SCHOOL: SEXUAL VIOLENCE AGAINST GIRLS IN SOUTH AFRICAN SCHOOLS 13 (2001).

27.H.W. Reynolds et al, Contraception’s Proved Potential to fight HIV, 81 SEXUALLY

TRANSMITTED INFECTIONS 184 (2005).

28.WORLD HEALTH ORGANIZATION, STRATEGIC APPROACHES TO THE PREVENTION OF HIV INFECTION IN INFANTS (2003).

76

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

III. BARRIERS TO ACCESS TO CONTRACEPTION FOR ADOLESCENTS

In Africa, there are various barriers to access to contraceptive information and services. Some of the factors responsible for high teenage pregnancies and HIV prevalence in Africa include lack of access to accurate sexual and reproductive health information and services, incidences of unprotected sex and poor contraceptive use among sexually active adolescents, gender inequality and unfriendly nature of the health care setting. This section of the article now considers some of these factors.

A. Limited Access to Sexual and Reproductive Information

One of the major barriers to access to the use of contraception in Africa is ignorance on the part of adolescents. Many adolescents lack adequate knowledge and information with regard to their sexuality. Thus, when they are growing up and becoming sexually active they tend to know little or nothing about contraception. They are, therefore, unable to prevent unwanted pregnancies or STIs.

In many parts of Africa, discussions about sex or sexuality is regarded as taboo. Therefore, most parents shy away from discussing such an issue with their children. Hence, rather than relying on information from parents or guardians, studies have shown that most adolescents look elsewhere for information as regards their sexuality.29 For instance, a study has shown that most adolescents’ source of information about sexuality is from either their peers or the media.30 Most parents forget to realise the fact that they are the primary sexuality educators of their children. Oftentimes, in the name of tradition or religion, parents deliberately eschew talking to their young ones about their sexuality. Sometimes parents even deliberately pass wrong messages across to adolescents that may rather confuse or even mislead them.31 But the truth remains that adolescents want to be talked to by their parents or guardians.

A compilation of data from Demographic and Health Surveys since 1990 has shown that quite a substantial number of adolescent women in about 37 countries in the

29.O. Alubo, Adolescent Reproductive Health Practices in Nigeria, 5AFR.J.REPROD.HEALTH

(2005), at 117.

30.A.M. Sunmola et al, Reproductive Knowledge, Sexual Behaviour and Contraceptive Use Among Adolescents in Niger State of Nigeria, 6 AFR. J. REPROD, HEALTH (2002), at 82-92.

31.J. Hughes & A.P. McCauley, Improving the Fit: Adolescents’ Needs and Future Programmes for Sexual and Reproductive Health in Developing Countries, 29 STUDIES IN FAMILY

PLANNING 233 (1998).

2011]

Access to Contraception for Adolescents in Africa

77

world can at least identify one form of contraception.32 The compilation similarly reveals that in about 21 countries, eight out of ten or more adolescent women are aware of one method of contraception. However, this study shows great disparity in the level of knowledge found among adolescents in sub-Saharan Africa. For instance, knowledge is found to be lowest in a country as Madagascar, where fewer than half of all adolescent women know of one method, whereas knowledge is highest in countries such as Kenya, Rwanda and Zimbabwe, where at least close to 90 per cent of adolescent women show familiarity with some contraceptive methods.33

Even when adolescents are aware of or have knowledge of contraception, many of them do not use contraception regularly. For instance, a study among adolescents between the ages of 16-19 who had had sex in the last three months in Ghana, indicated that only 64 per cent of males and 54 per cent of females not in a union, and 38 per cent of females in a union reported using a modern contraceptive method. This provides an indication that general knowledge of contraception on the part of adolescents is not the same as having a deep understanding of the use of contraception.

B. Gender Inequality

Gender is a critical issue in ensuring access to preventive health goods and services such as contraception. Gender-based inequalities limit access to preventive health care information, goods and services such as contraception. It equally makes it difficult for girls to negotiate contraceptive use with their partners. All over the world, and especially Africa, boys and girls are treated differently. Girls generally, unlike boys who can flaunt their sexuality, are expected to be sexually passive and are not expected to exhibit any knowledge about their sexuality. Cultural norms are widely held in many African societies that women should be inexperienced and naive about sexual matters and that pleasing men is the primary goal of sex.34 Therefore, most parents do not discuss about sex with their adolescent girls nor do they allow them to seek information related to their sexuality.

Thus, gender-based inequalities may put girls and young women at increased risk of acquiring STIs, including HIV, and may damage their physical and mental

32.A.K. Blanc & A.A Way, Sexual Behaviour and Contraceptive Knowledge and Use Among Adolescents in Developing Countries, 29 STUDIES IN FAMILY PLANNING (1998).

33.Id.

34.See e.g., ALISTER ET AL, supra note 22, at 13. See also, C. HICKEY, FACTORS EXPLAINING OBSERVED PATTERN OF SEXUAL BEHAVIOUR: PHASE 2 LONGITUDINAL STUDY FINAL REPORT (1999).

78

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

health.35 Mensch et al have succinctly captured the disadvantage position of girls in many societies as follows:

During adolescence, the world expounds for boys and contracts for girls. Boys enjoy new privileges reserved for men, girls endure new restrictions for women. Boys gain autonomy, mobility, opportunity and power (including power over girls’ sexual and reproductive lives), girls are systematically deprived of these rights.36

In addressing these inequalities, it is important to consider the different needs and constraints of young women, and to design interventions accordingly.37 Social, educational, religious and economic inequalities underlie the reasons why girls and young women often do not seek or use contraceptive services. Moreover, in many African countries, socio-cultural factors often limit access to sexual health including information on contraception to girls. Thus, they do not know about them, are not allowed by their families to use them, or do not have money to pay for them.38

Understanding the social position of girls and young women within societies and population sub-groups is crucial to identifying strategies for the effective provision of contraceptive services to all adolescents, especially female adolescents. In many African societies where a belief in male supremacy co-exists with restrictive social structures that limit women's economic, social and legal independence, men often maintain strong control over female sexuality.39 The result is that even when contraception is available, a female adolescent may be unable to use it because of power imbalance. This is particularly true in the case of condoms, which often requires the cooperation of men. Thus, there has been a call in recent times for a woman-centered contraception such as the microbicides in the fight against HIV/AIDS in Africa.40

35.G. SEN ET AL, UNEQUAL, UNFAIR, INEFFECTIVE AND INEFFICIENT GENDER INEQUALITY IN HEALTH: WHY IT EXISTS AND HOW WE CAN CHANGE IT 1 (2007).

36.B.S. MENSCH ET AL,THE UNCHARTED PASSAGE:GIRLS’ADOLESCENCE IN THE DEVELOPING

WORLD 2 (1998).

37.K.L. DEHNE & G. RIEDNER, SEXUALLY TRANSMITTED INFECTIONS AMONG ADOLESCENTS: THE NEED FOR ADEQUATE HEALTH SERVICES (2005), at ix.

38.A. Germain, Reproductive Health and Human Right, 363 LANCET (2004), at 65–66.

39.M.N. Kisekka, The Culture of Silence: Reproductive Tract Infections Among Women in the Third World, available online at <http://www.iwhc.org/docUploads/CULTUREOFSILENCE.PDF > (accessed on 11 March 2009).

40.See e.g., E.T. Durojaye & A. Muchiri, Addressing the Link between Gender Inequality and Access to Microbicides in HIV/AIDS Response in Africa, 16 AFR. J. INTL & COMP. L. (2008).

2011]

Access to Contraception for Adolescents in Africa

79

C. Challenges in the Health Care Setting

Many adolescents in developing countries including Africa avoid using the health setting for fear of stigma or unwelcoming attitudes on the part of health care providers. Moreover, adolescents, particularly female adolescents are often uncertain whether their visits to health care setting to seek sexual health services, such as contraceptive services, will be made known to their parents. Adolescents are quite sensitive to their surroundings especially when they have become sexually active, hence, they tend to show some discomfort when they are not certain this fact will be kept away from their parents or guardians.41 While commenting on the challenges in the health care sector limiting access to emergency contraception (EC) in developing countries, Shiappacasse and Diaz have observed that lack of privacy; unfriendly attitudes towards adolescents and high cost of the EC often act as stumbling blocks to adolescents’ access to the product.42

Hobcraft and Baker have identified four major barriers to adolescents’ access to sexual and reproductive treatment in the health care setting. These are poor remuneration of health care providers, a working environment poorly equipped to deal with young people, personal biases of health care providers and uncoordinated parallel programmes in the health care system.43 Thus, even when many adolescents have indicated that their preferred source of contraceptive services is either a public clinic or hospital most of them do not use either of these medium.

A study among sexually experienced adolescents in Ghana, who knew a source for contraceptive or STI treatment, has shown that 53 per cent reported that feelings of shyness, or embarrassment were a barrier to obtaining contraceptives.44 These concerns are neither limited to EC nor to developing countries alone, they apply to other forms of sexual health services and to developed countries as well.45 For instance, a study among middle high school students in Los Angeles, US found that though there is a

41.See e.g., A.S. Erukhar et al, What is Youth-Friendly? Adolescents’ Preference for Reproductive Health Services in Kenya and Zimbabwe, 9 AFR. J. REPROD. HEALTH 52 (2005).

42.V. Shiappacasse & S. Diaz, Access to Emergency Contraception, 94 INTL J. GYN. & OBST.

302 (2006).

43.G. Hobcraft & T. Baker, Special Needs of Adolescent and Young Women in Accessing Reproductive Health: Promoting Partnership between Young People and Health Care Providers, in 94 INTL J. GYN. & OBST. 352 (2006); D. Breaken et al, Access to Sexual and Reproductive Health Care: Adolescents and Young People, 98 INTL J. GYN. & OBST. (2007), at 172-74.

44.L. HESSBURG ET AL, PROTECTING THE NEXT GENERATION IN GHANA: NEW EVIDENCE ON ADOLESCENTS SEXUAL AND REPRODUCTIVE HEALTH NEEDS 25 (2007).

45.Id.

80

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

significant increase in knowledge, this has not translated into better sexual behaviour or increase in contraceptive use.46

Furthermore, in some situations it has been found that healthcare providers often lack adequate knowledge and skills with regard to contraceptive services. For instance, a study among healthcare providers in Nigeria indicated that a considerable number of those surveyed, exhibited lack of adequate knowledge with regard to EC.47 The implication of this is that health care providers are unlikely to give advice or prescribe such contraception to adolescents. Sometimes health care providers are faced with the ethical issue of whether to seek parental consent before providing sexual health services such as services related to contraception to adolescents. This has remained a very controversial issue in many African countries as some parents believe that their responsibility to cater for their children extends to knowing the kind of treatment they seek.

Experience has shown that many health providers are more readily inclined to seek parental consent before providing treatment for adolescents. However, a judicial pronouncement by the English House of Lords would seem to have clarified this contentious ethical issue. The Court held in the Gillick case that a doctor could lawfully give contraceptive advice and treatment to a girl under the age of 16 without parental consent if it was established that she had ‘sufficient maturity and intelligence’ to understand the nature and implications of the proposed treatment sought provided that certain conditions were fulfilled.48

The situations described above capture the nature of sexual and reproductive health challenges facing adolescents in Africa, thus confirming that gaps exist in realizing the health needs of adolescents in the region. This situation calls for a drastic change and requires the commitment of African governments in advancing the sexual health needs of adolescents in the region. One way of doing this is to invoke principles and standards contained in international and regional human rights instruments.

46.D. Kirby et al, An Impact of Evaluation Project SNAPP: An AIDS and Pregnancy Prevention in Middle School Programmes, AIDS EDUC. & PREVENTION SUPP. (2007), atA 44-61.

47.O.M Ebuche et al, Health Care Provider’s Knowledge of Attitudes Towards and Provision of Emergency Contraceptives in Lagos, Nigeria, 32 INTERNATIONAL FAMILY PERSPECTIVES 83 (2006).

48.Gillick v. West Norfolk and Wisbech Health Authority and Department of Health and Social Security [1986] 1 AC 112.

2011]

Access to Contraception for Adolescents in Africa

81

IV. SPECIFIC HUMAN RIGHTS IN RELATION TO ACCESS TO

CONTRACEPTION FOR ADOLESCENTS

The assertion that children and women are subjects of rights and not merely objects of charity implies that benevolent and charitable actions, while good, are insufficient from a human rights perspective. A rights-based approach is premised on the fact that shared interests exist between rights holders and those working to help realize rights. It accepts that the state is normatively required to work consistently towards ending denials or violations of human rights, and that the empowerment of rights holders is in itself an important result of various processes. This is particularly true as in the case of access to contraception for adolescents in Africa. Several international and regional human rights instruments contain important fundamental rights that impose obligations on African governments to ensure access to information and services related to contraception for adolescents in the region. Some of these rights are considered here together with the clarifications provided by treaty monitoring bodies. In addition, some consensus documents relating to the sexual and reproductive needs of adolescents are discussed.

A. The Right to Health

The right to health is one of the most important rights that can be invoked to ensure access to contraception for adolescents. According to the WHO, health is broadly defined as a state of complete physical, social and mental well being and not merely absence of disease or infirmity.49 It is further stated that the enjoyment of the right to health is a fundamental right of all. Though criticized for being too aspirational and utopian in nature,50 this definition has provided a solid foundation for the recognition of the right to health in subsequent human rights documents that emerged after the WHO Constitution. For instance, Article 25(1) of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights (UDHR)51 provides that ‘everyone has the right to a standard of living adequate for the health and well-being of himself and of his family, including food, clothing, housing and medical care and necessary social services.’ Perhaps the most

49.The Constitution of the WHO was adopted by the International Health Conference, New York, 19-22 June 1945, opened for signature on 22 July 1946 by the representatives of 61 states. See, 14 UNTS 185.

50.See e.g., T. Evans, A Human Right to Health? 23 THIRD WORLD Q. 198 (2002) (arguing that if the definition of health as provided by WHO in its Constitution is taken at a face value, then we may end up in an absurd claim to eliminate disease, infirmities brought by aging and even mortality).

51.GA Res 217 A (III), UN Doc A/810 (10 December 1948).

82

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

comprehensive recognition of this right is contained in Article 12 of the international Covenant on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights (ICESCR)52 where it is provided that ‘States Parties to the present Covenant recognize the right of everyone to the enjoyment of the highest attainable standard of physical and mental health.’ Article 12(2) further contains among others, important determinants of the right to health such as prevention and treatment of diseases, essential for the enjoyment of the right.

It should be noted that the right to health as contained in these instruments does not by any means guarantee perfect health for all.53 It is not in contention, however, that this right encompasses an obligation on a state to ensure access to preventative health services for all.54 In other words, states are legally obligated to ensure access to preventive health services, such as access to contraception, for adolescents. The Committee on ESCR in its General Comment 14, while clarifying the content of the right to health, has urged states to provide access to comprehensive sexual and reproductive health care services (including access to contraception) for adolescents.55 This is no doubt an implicit recognition of the fact that adolescents should be assured unimpeded access to contraceptive information and services.

With specific regard to the health of adolescents, Article 24 of the Convention on the Rights of the Child (CRC)56 recognizes the right of children to the enjoyment of highest attainable standard of health. Article 24(f) further enjoins states to develop preventive health care guidance for parents and family planning services. A careful look at this provision does not seem to explicitly refer to adolescents. Packer observes that this provision is worded in such a way as to give room for ambiguity.57 According to her, the provision is capable of two possible interpretations. It could mean ensuring access to family planning services for the parents of an adolescent. Alternatively, it could imply ensuring access to family planning services for an adolescent in order to prevent unwanted pregnancies. The latter interpretation is more plausible. Clearly, the

52.Adopted 16 December 1966; GA Res 2200 (XXI), UN Doc A/6316 (1966) 993 U.N.T.S 3 (entered into force 3 January 1976).

53.B.C. TOEBES, THE RIGHT TO HEALTH UNDER INTERNATIONAL HUMAN RIGHTS LAW 19

(1999).

54.CRLP & CLF, supra note 12, at 40.

55.UN Committee on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights, The Right to the Highest Attainable Standard of Health, General Comment 14, UN Doc. E/C/12/2000/4 para 23.

56.Adopted in 1989, U.N. Doc. A/44/49, entered into force 2 September 1990.

57.See, C.A. PACKER, THE RIGHT TO REPRODUCTIVE CHOICES 85 (1996); and D. Fottrel, One Step Forward or Two Steps Sideways? Assessing the First Decade of the Children’s Convention on the Rights of the Child, in REALIZING CHILDRENS RIGHTS: 10 YEARS OF THE CONVENTION ON THE RIGHTS OF THE CHILD (D. Fottrel ed., 2000), at 4 (castigating the drafting style of the Convention as being broadly

framed to the extent that their meanings are ambiguous and/or they fail to improve on existing standards).

2011]

Access to Contraception for Adolescents in Africa

83

intention of the drafters of this article could have been made more explicit to avoid this unnecessary ambiguity.58 The poor use of language here is a reflection of opposition to sexual health education and services for adolescents. Based on this, Packer submits that this provision neither includes nor excludes adolescents from preventive health care services.59

However, in its General Comment 4, the Committee of the CRC has urged states to develop and implement programmes that ensure provision of sexual and reproductive health services, including access to contraception, for adolescents.60 The Committee further imposes obligations on states to ensure that health facilities, goods and services (including contraception) are of good quality and are sensitive to the specific needs of adolescents.61 Also, in one of its Concluding Observations to Belize, the Committee has noted with great concern the high teenage pregnancies existing in the country and therefore urged the government of Belize to ensure comprehensive and appropriate access to sexual and reproductive health care services for all adolescents in the country.62 A health care service that is sensitive to the needs of adolescents must no doubt respect their autonomous decision-making powers to seek preventive treatment such as contraception.

Furthermore, the right to health has been guaranteed under Article 12 of the Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of Discrimination against Women (CEDAW),63 which provides that states shall take all necessary measures to eliminate discrimination against women in the field of health care in order to ensure access to treatment for women on equal basis with men. This provision is very important in ensuring access to contraception for female adolescents and improving their health. As shown above, lack of access to contraception can compromise the health of adolescents. In addition to this provision, Article 16 guarantees the right to family planning services for all women. Also, Article 14 specifically guarantees access to family planning

58.See, S. Toope, The Convention on the Rights of the Child: Implications for Canada, in M. CHILDRENS RIGHTS: A COMPARATIVE PERSPECTIVE 33 (Freeman ed., 1996), at 43 (where the provisions of the Convention have been criticized for being ‘loosely, if not sloppily’ drafted). See also, D. Gomien,

Whose Rights (and whose duty) Is it? An analysis of the Substance and Implementation of the Convention on the Rights of the Child, 7 N. Y. L. SCH. J. HUM. RTS 162 (1989).

59.PACKER, supra note 57, at 85.

60.Committee on the Rights of the Child, Adolescent Health and Development in the Context of the Convention on the Rights of the Child, General Comment No. 4, CRC/GC/2003/4 Thirty-Second Session, May 2003, ¶ 31.

61.Id., ¶ 39(c).

62.Committee on CRC Concluding Observations: Belize UN Doc CRC/C/146 2005, ¶ 347.

63.Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of Discrimination Against Women, GA Res 54/180 UN GAOR 34th Session Supp. No 46, UN Doc A/34/46 1980.

84

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

services for women in rural areas. These provisions of CEDAW are one of the most explicit and perhaps broadest recognitions of the general right to family planning treatment (including access to contraception), for women especially female adolescents.64

In its clarification of the content of CEDAW, the CEDAW Committee has observed that its provisions guarantee access to health care services, including services on contraception and STIs prevention to adolescents.65 In what appears to be an affirmation of the sexual autonomy of adolescents, the Committee in its General Recommendation 24 has urged states parties to ensure access to sexual and reproductive health care services, without prejudice for all women and girls.66

At the regional level, the right to health is guaranteed in the major human rights instruments under the African human rights system. For instance, Article 16 of the African Charter on Human and Peoples’ Rights (African Charter)67 provides that every individual shall have the right to the best attainable state of physical and mental health. This provision is broad enough and would seem to encompass access to sexual health services including contraception. Indeed, in the Purohit case the African Commission on Human and Peoples’ Rights (African Commission) has held that ‘Enjoyment of the human right to health as it is widely known is vital to all aspects of a person's life and well-being, and is crucial to the realization of all the other fundamental human rights and freedoms.’68 It states further that this right includes the right to health facilities, access to goods and services to be guaranteed to all without discrimination of any kind. In a similar vein, Article 14 of the African Charter on the Rights and Welfare of the Child (African Children’s Charter)69 provides that every child shall be entitled to the best attainable standard of physical and spiritual health. It further guarantees the right to preventive health care services for children.

The Protocol to the African Charter on the Rights of Women (Women’s Protocol),70 the most recent of the human rights instruments in the region, contains, in

64.CRLP & CLF, supra note 12, at 40.

65.General Recommendation 24 of CEDAW on Women and Health, UN GAOR, 1999, Doc A/54/38 Rev 1.

66.Id., para 21.

67.OAU Doc CAB/LEG/67/3/Rev 5, adopted by the Organization of African Unity, 27 June 1981, entered into force 21 October 1986.

68.Purohit & Moore v. The Gambia, Communication 241/2001 decided at the 33rd Ordinary Session of the African Commission held from 15th – 29th in Niamey, Niger, May 2003.

69.OAU Doc. CAB/LEG/24.0/49 (1990), entered into force Nov. 29, 1999.

70.Adopted by the 2nd Ordinary Session of the African Union General Assembly in 2003 in Maputo, CAB/LEG/66.6 (2003), entered into force 25 November, 2005.

2011]

Access to Contraception for Adolescents in Africa

85

its Article 14, elaborate and explicit provisions recognizing the right to health, including sexual and reproductive health of women. This important article further provides that states should respect and promote a woman’s right to control her fertility, decide the number and spacing of her children, choose any method of contraception, self- protection from sexually transmitted infections including HIV/AIDS, legal abortion in certain situations and family planning.

Also, the provision enjoins states parties to take appropriate measures to ‘provide adequate, affordable and accessible health services, including information, education and communication programmes to women especially those in rural areas.’ By these unique and radical provisions, the Women’s Protocol has become a pace-setter under international human rights law, as the first human rights instrument that clearly recognizes women’s sexual and reproductive health as human rights and contains specific provisions on women’s protection in the context of HIV/AIDS and access to contraception.71 Banda submits that by these provisions, the Women’s Protocol has blazed the trail in terms of explicit recognition of sexual and reproductive rights of women.72 It should be noted that the Women’s Protocol applies to all women including girls. Therefore, it becomes one of the strongest human rights instruments that can be invoked to support female adolescents’ right to access contraceptive information and services. It clearly accords female adolescents the autonomy with regard to their sexual health needs.

In addition to the above mentioned human rights instruments, there are various non-binding consensus statements and resolutions useful in realizing access to contraceptive services for adolescents. For instance, at the ICPD it was agreed that states should ensure adolescents’ access to health care services so as to prevent unwanted pregnancies and STIs.73 At the five-year review of the ICPD, it was further reiterated that states should guarantee adolescents’ access to sexual and reproductive health care services.74 At Beijing, states reaffirmed the right to the enjoyment of the highest attainable standard of health for women, including the promotion and protection of the health of girls. At the follow-up meeting to the Millennium Development Goals

71.See, Center for Reproductive Rights (CRR), Protocol on the Rights of Women in Africa: An Instrument for Advancing Reproductive and Sexual Rights (Briefing Paper, 2005), at 4-7. See also, E. Durojaye, Advancing Gender Equity in Access to HIV Treatment Through the Protocol on the Rights of Women in Africa, 6 AFR. HUM. RTS L. J. (2006).

72.See, F. Banda, Blazing a Trail: The African Protocol on Women’s Rights Comes into Force, 50 J. AFR. L. 81 (2006); C.M. Danwood, Reclaiming (Wo)manity: The Merits and Demerits of the African Protocol on Women’s Rights, 53 NETHERLANDS INTL L. REV. (2006).

73.ICPD, supra note 1, ¶ 7.41.

74.ICPD+5 Key Actions, supra note 11.

86

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

(MDGs) in 2005, it was reiterated that to achieve the health- related targets of the MDGs, it would be necessary to ensure universal access to sexual and reproductive health care services for all by the year 2015.75 This will surely include access to information and services related to contraception.

The Maputo Plan of Action, which was the brain child of African ministers of health, has recognized that facilitating access to sexual health services including contraceptive services for adolescents is imperative for attaining universal access to sexual and reproductive health services in the region.76 It particularly urges African governments to implement policies and measures that support provision of sexual and reproductive health care services (including those related to contraception) addressing the needs of adolescents in the region. Undoubtedly, such policies and measures must recognize the autonomous decision- making capability of adolescents to seek sexual health services

B. The Right to Information and Education on Sexual Health

The right to freedom of information is a well recognized right under international law. For example, Article 19 of the Covenant on Civil and Political Rights77 guarantees the right to information of all. More specifically, in relation to sexual health information, Articles 10(h) and 16.1(e) of CEDAW recognize the rights of women to access to information related to family planning generally, including those in rural areas. These provisions are broad enough as to include access to contraceptive information to adolescents, especially female adolescents.

Adolescents require accurate information with regard to their sexual health, including information related to contraception; otherwise they may take decisions which could be injurious to their health and lives.78 Indeed, the Committee on CEDAW has urged states to provide without prejudice, access to information and education on sexual health information (including those related to contraception) to girls within their

75.See, The Draft Resolution of the High-Level Plenary Meeting of the General Assembly on the World Summit, 15 September 2005, ¶ 57(g).

76.Maputo Plan of Action for the Operationalization of the Continental Policy Framework for Sexual and Reproductive Health and Rights 2007–2010 (Special session at the African Union Conference of Ministers of Health on the Universal Access to Comprehensive Sexual and Reproductive Health Services in Africa, September 2006), Sp/MIN/CAMH.

77.G.A. Res. 2200, U.N GAOR, Supp. NO. 16 at 52, U.N DOC. A/6316 (1966), 999 U.N.T.S. 171, 174 (entered into force on March 23, 1976) (hereinafter ICCPR).

78.See, CRR, supra note 71, at 4.

2011]

Access to Contraception for Adolescents in Africa

87

countries.79 The Committee further explains that access to sexual health information and education forms an integral part of the enjoyment of the right to health. According to the Committee, states are obligated to ‘ensure the rights of female and male adolescents to sexual and reproductive health education by properly trained personnel in specially designed programs that respect their rights to privacy and confidentiality’.80 Similarly, the Committee in its General Recommendation 21 has noted as follows:

In order to make an informed decision about safe and reliable contraception measures, women must have information about contraceptive measures and their use, and guaranteed access to sex education and family planning services as provided in article 10(h) of the Convention.81

In relation to children and adolescents, Article 13(1) of the CRC specifically guarantees to young people, the right to ‘seek, receive and impart information and ideas of all kinds’. This provision is broad enough to accommodate information related to contraception for adolescents. Under Article 13(2)(b) it is further provided that the right of a child to seek, receive and impart information may be limited for the sake of public health or morals. This provision easily provides a fertile ground for opposition to adolescents’ access to sexual health information, including access to contraceptive information. This can be particularly true for many African countries, as shown above, where deep religious and cultural norms on sexuality forbid premarital sex for young people. Adherents of these norms may rely on the provision of Article 13(2)(b) to justify their opposition to access to sex education or information on contraception for female adolescents in their countries.

But such an interpretation should not be permitted as it would be inconsistent with the spirit of the CRC, which is aimed at ensuring children’s and adolescents’ physical and mental well being. Freeman argues that if states were to take children’s rights seriously, then all actions taken with regard to them must be for their interests and not to their detriment.82 Thus, this provision deserves a purposive interpretation which must be to the benefit of children and adolescents. Indeed, the Committee on

79.See General Recommendation 24 of CEDAW, supra note 65, ¶ 18.

80.Id.

81.Committee on CEDAW, General Recommendation 21 on Equality in Marriage and Family Relations, Thirteenth Session, General Assembly Report Supp. No. 38 (A/49/38) paras 1-10.

82.M. Freeman, The Limits of Children’s Rights, in THE IDEOLOGIES OF CHILDRENS RIGHTS

29 (M. Freeman & P. Veerman eds., 1992), at 38.

88

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

CRC in its General Comments 383 and 484 has urged states to guarantee access to sexual health information and education (including those related to contraception) for adolescents. According to the Committee, states parties to the Convention should refrain ‘from censoring, withholding or intentionally misrepresenting health-related information, including sexual education and information.’85 The Committee further notes that this will be consistent with realizing the right to the highest attainable standard of physical and mental health and the right to life, survival and development for adolescents.86 Similarly, the Committee has noted, in its General Comment 4 as follows:

Adolescents have the right to access adequate information essential for their health and development and for their ability to participate meaningfully in society. It is the obligation of States parties to ensure that all adolescent girls and boys, both in and out of school, are provided with, and not denied, accurate and appropriate information on how to protect their health and development and practise healthy behaviours.87

Furthermore, in its General Comment 1 on the Aims of Education, the Committee has adopted a holistic approach to education so as to encompass certain life skills needed by children to develop a healthy lifestyle, good social relationships and responsibility, which are crucial to their pursuits of life options.88 Also, Article 24 of the CRC dealing with the right to health of children can be invoked to ensure access to contraceptive education and information for adolescents.

The Committee on ESCR, in its General Comments 14 on the right to health and 13 on the right to education, provides a good basis for ensuring access to contraceptive information for adolescents. For example, in its General Comment 14 the Committee notes that the enjoyment of the right to health can only be realized if access to health- related information, including sexual health information, is guaranteed.89

83.Committee on the Right of the Child, HIV/AIDS and the Right of the Child, General Comment No. 3, CRC/GC/2003/3 Thirty-Second Session 2003, ¶ 15.

84.General Comment 4 of CRC, supra note 60, ¶ 28.

85.General Comment 3 of CRC, supra note 83, ¶ 16.

86.Id.

87.General Comment 4, supra note 60, ¶ 26.

88.Committee on CRC, The Aims of Education, General Comment 1, CRC/GC/2001/1 April

2001, ¶ 9.

89.General Comment 14, supra note 55, ¶ 23.

2011]

Access to Contraception for Adolescents in Africa

89

Also, in its General Comment 13 on the right to education, the Committee reasons that education must be provided for all and must adapt to the changing societies. This can be interpreted to imply ensuring access to health education needed for the development of adolescents.90 Indeed, the Committee in some of its Concluding Observations has interpreted the provision on the right to education to also include sexual health education.91 Similarly, the Committee has linked lack of sexual health education to high incidence of unwanted pregnancies and abortions.92

As noted earlier, the right to freedom of information is explicitly guaranteed under Article 19 of the ICCPR. Although this provision is generally worded, it has been interpreted by the Human Rights Committee to request governments to provide sexual health, including contraceptive education, to their citizens.93 Coliver has explained that women need basic information about their reproductive physiology including the ways diseases can be transmitted sexually, the ways risk of transmission can be minimized, the benefits and risks of various methods of contraception, and safe options to adopt when those methods fail.94 She notes further that without information, an individual is unable to make crucial decisions with regard to matters concerning his/her reproductive health, thus resulting in violation of an individual’s rights to liberty and dignity.95

Under the African Children’s Charter, Article 14(f) enjoins states to take measures to realize the right to health of children by developing preventive health care and family life education and provision of services. No doubt this provision is an improvement on the ambiguous provision of Article 24 of the CRC. It clearly obligates states to ensure that information and education in relation to sexual health is made available to children and adolescents. Also, under Article 11 of the Charter the right to education for children is guaranteed. This can similarly be relied on to facilitate

90.See, C.A. Packer, Preventing Adolescent Pregnancy: The Protection Offered by International Human Rights Law, in 5 INTL J. CHILD. RTS (1997), at 65.

91.See e.g., Concluding Observations of the Committee on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights: Cameroon, 41st-43rd mtgs., para. 45, U.N. Doc.E/C.12/1/Add.40 (1999) (hereinafter Concluding Observation CESCR: Cameroon).

92.CRLP & CLF, supra note 12.

93.For example, in one of its Concluding Observations to Poland, the Committee asked the state party to ‘introduce policies and programmes promoting full and non-discriminatory access to all methods of family planning and reintroduce sexual education at public schools.’ Concluding Observations of the Human Rights Committee: Poland, 66th Sess., 1764-1765th mtgs., para. 11, U.N. Doc. CCPR/C/79/Add.110 (1999) (hereinafter Concluding Observations HRC: Poland).

94.See, S. Coliver, The Right to Information Necessary for Reproductive Health and Choice under International Law, 44 AM. UNIV. L. REV. (1995).

95.Id., at 1288.

90

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

access to information on sexual health to adolescents. Thus, it has been argued that the Charter’s holistic view and approach to rights to health and education of children easily provides a platform for ensuring access to sexual health information, including information related to contraception for adolescents.96

In a similar version as the ICCPR, the African Charter in its Article 9 equally provides for the right to information for all. This, as earlier stated, can be broadly interpreted to apply to providing sexual health information, especially information related to contraception for adolescents. The Women’s Protocol in Article 12(2) enjoins states to promote literacy among women. This, no doubt, will include sexual health education including education related to contraception. Since a strong correlation exists between girls’ access to education and literacy and capacity to protect themselves from sexual ill-health,97 this provision will ultimately be useful in advancing the sexual and reproductive health of adolescents in the region. Specifically, Article 14(f) of the Protocol requires states to provide family planning education for all women, including young women. This explicit provision for family planning education readily provides a strong justification to compel states to make available to all women, including adolescent girls, sexual health information and education, particularly information related to contraception.

The right to information and freedom of expression over the years has evolved as to impose concrete and immediate obligation on states to provide access to information and to refrain from interfering with the communication of information that is essential for the promotion and protection of sexual health and choices.98 Clarifying the nature of this right, the European Court of Human Rights in Open Door Counseling & Dublin Well Woman Centre v. Ireland99 has held that any attempt by a state to hinder access to sexual health information will amount to a violation of the right to information under international law. While recognizing the fact that this right is not absolute, the court further held that any restriction on this right must be justifiable at law. In the same manner, the African Commission on Human and Peoples’ Rights has held that the freedom of expression is a basic right that is essential to an individual’s personal development.100 Coliver argues that the obligation created by this right is both positive and negative. That is, governments are duty-bound to provide information related to

96.CRLP & CLF, supra note 12, at 42.

97.R.J. COOK ET AL, REPRODUCTIVE HEALTH AND HUMAN RIGHTS: INTEGRATING MEDICINE, ETHICS AND LAW 211 (2003); Center for Reproductive Rights, supra note 71.

98.See, Durojaye & Muchiri, supra note 40.

99.Eur. Ct. H.R. (ser. A) (1992) 246.

100.See, Constitutional Rights Project and Others v. Nigeria (2000) AHRLR 227 (ACHPR

1999).

2011]

Access to Contraception for Adolescents in Africa

91

sexual and reproductive health for their citizens and at the same time governments must not hinder access to this form of information.101

In addition to the provisions of these binding human rights instruments, there are also consensus statements and resolutions supporting the need for sexual health information for adolescents. For instance, at the ICPD it was agreed that sexual health information should be made available to adolescents so as to help them understand their sexuality and protect them from incidences of sexually transmitted infections and unwanted pregnancies.102 Similarly at Beijing, governments of the world recognized the peculiar vulnerability of adolescents to sexual and reproductive ill-health; therefore, states were urged to provide them with access to comprehensive information and education with regard to their sexuality and health needs.103 Although specific reference to contraception was not made, nonetheless, it is argued that the reference to sexual health education necessarily includes contraceptive education.

At the regional level, the Maputo Plan of Action agreed to by African health ministers in Maputo in 2006, emphasized the importance of creating an enabling environment for women and adolescents and empowering them so as to safeguard their sexual and reproductive health.104 This will obviously include guaranteeing access to health related information, particularly contraceptive information, which will help adolescents protect themselves from STIs including HIV/AIDS. A state may be in violation of the right to health if it distorts health-related information or prevents access to such information among its people.

C. The Right to Life

Lack of access to sexual health services, especially contraceptive services for adolescents can lead to deleterious consequences. As shown above, inaccessibility to comprehensive information and services on sexual health including information and services related to contraception may endanger the lives of adolescents. It is no longer contestable that issues of sexual and reproductive health are matters of life and death.105

101.Coliver, supra note 94, at 1293.

102.ICPD, supra note 1, ¶ 7.41.

103.UN, supra note 10, ¶ 106(2) (m).

104.Special Session: The African Union Conference of Ministers of Health, Universal Access to Comprehensive Sexual and Reproductive Health Services in Africa: Maputo Plan of Action for the Operationalization of the Continental Policy Framework for Sexual and Reproductive Health and Rights, 2007-2010, Sp/MIN/CAMH/5(1), September 2006.

105.See, A. Glasier et al, Sexual and Reproductive Health: A Matter of Life and Death, 368

LANCE (2006).

92

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

Indeed, it is now settled at international law that a denial of health care services will impugn on the right to life of an individual.106 The right to life is adequately guaranteed in virtually all international and regional human rights instruments. The UDHR in its Article 3 guarantees the right to life of all. Similarly, the ICCPR in its Article 6 provides for the right to life.

The Human Rights Committee monitoring states’ compliance under the ICCPR in its General Comment 6 on the right to life has explained that the right to life should be broadly understood as to intersect with health issues such as maternal mortality and treatment and prevention of diseases.107 In the Committee’s view, the right to life is not only the most fundamental of all human rights but it is also non-derogable. The Committee has equally noted in one of its Concluding Observations that lack of access to reproductive health care services including services related to contraception for women is a violation of their right to life.108 In particular the Committee has consistently expressed grave concern over high rates of maternal mortality, framing it as a violation of women’s right to life 109

In the same manner, the Committee on CESCR in its General Comment 14 has explained that the violation of the right to health can interfere with the enjoyment of other rights such as life, dignity, liberty and non-discrimination. Cook et al have observed that an effective protection of the right to life and survival will necessarily require a state to take adequate measures in order to ensure that appropriate health care services (including access to contraception) are provided to women and adolescent girls.110

Yamin has similarly hinted that non-provision of life-saving medications and other health facilities to people in need would result in the violation of the right to life.111 These interpretations would seem to impose positive obligations on states to avoid unnecessary loss of lives. They coincide with the decisions of international

106.See, General Comment 14, supra note 55; see in particular, Pachim Banga Khet Majoor Samity v. State of West Bengal (1996) 4 SCC 37 (where a denial of emergency medical treatment has been held to be in violation of the right to life).

107.UN GAOR Human Rights Committee 37th session Supp. No. 40.

108.See, Human Rights Committee Concluding Observation: Chile 30/3/99 UN Doc CCPR/79/Ad. 104, 15.

109.See, e.g, Human Rights Committee Concluding Observations: Bolivia 01/04/97 UN Doc CCPR/79/Ad. 74, 22; Concluding Observation: Guatemala 27/08/2001 UN Doc CCPR/CO/72GTM, 19.

110.Cook et al, supra note 97, at 162.

111.A.E. Yamin, Not Just a Tragedy: Access to Medication as a Right under International Law, 21 BOSTON UNIV. INTL L. J. 334 (2003). See also, V. Leary, The Right to Health in International Human Rights Law, 1 HEALTH & HUM. RTS 27 (1994).

2011]

Access to Contraception for Adolescents in Africa

93

tribunals such as the European Commission on Human Rights. In Tavares v. France,112 for example, the Commission has held that the right to life guaranteed under the European Convention extends beyond a state’s duty to abstain from intentional killing but also includes taking necessary steps to protect unintentional loss of life.

In a region where adolescents bear the greatest burden of STIs, unwanted pregnancies, incidences of unsafe abortions and deaths resulting from early pregnancies, all due to lack of access to contraception, it will amount to an understatement to say that adolescents’ lives are threatened. Evidence abounds to show that each year millions of young women die due to sexual and reproductive ill health.113 The sad aspect of these deaths is that most of them are avoidable. Where an adolescent cannot get access to the treatment or means of treatment he/she needs most, death is likely to be the necessary consequence.

More importantly, with respect to contraceptive services, inability of a state to ensure confidential services to adolescent patients may not only hinder access to sexual health treatment to adolescents, but may also make them forego such treatments. The likely consequences of this will be risk of pregnancy, STIs, including HIV, and perhaps resort to unsafe abortion. Indeed, it is a well known fact that each year tens of thousands of young women lose their lives or suffer from morbidity due to lack of confidential sexual health treatment.114 Comprehensive access to contraceptive information and services can avoid some of these deaths or morbidities.

Under the CRC, the right to life, survival and development of a child is guaranteed in Article 6. The Committee on CRC has observed that the obligation of states to realize the right to life of adolescents include paying attention to their sexuality and eliminating all conditions that may be injurious to their health needs.115 Also, in order to ensure the health and survival of adolescents, it is imperative that they must be assured access to comprehensive sexual health care, including contraceptive services, peculiar to their needs. In this regard, the Committee has noted that ‘effective prevention programmes are only those that acknowledge the realities of the lives of adolescents, while addressing sexuality by ensuring equal access to appropriate information, life skills and to preventive measures.’116

112.App. No. 16593/90 Euro. Comm. HR.

113.See, e.g., Glasier et al, supra note 105.

114.R.J. Cook & B. Dickens, Recognizing Adolescents’ Evolving Capacities to Exercise Choice in Reproductive Healthcare, 70 INTL J. GYN. & OBST. 17 (2000).

115.Committee on CRC General Comment 3, supra note 83, ¶ 11.

116.Id.

94

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

At the regional level, the right to life of all individuals including children and adolescents is explicitly guaranteed under Article 4 of the African Charter. Article 4 provides that every human being shall be entitled to the respect for his/her life and the integrity of his/her person. Whereas Article 5 of the African Children’s Charter declares that: ‘Every child has an inherent right to life. This right shall be protected by law.’ In a language similar to that of the African Charter, the Women’s Protocol in its Article 4 equally guarantees the right to life and security of all women. The African Commission has affirmed the interrelatedness of all human rights when it found in the SERAC case that the Nigerian government was in violation of the rights to health, life, clean environment and so on due to pollution caused by the activities of multi-national oil companies in Ogoniland.117 This decision can be interpreted to mean that non- provision of health care services and facilities, including contraception to adolescents, will impair their enjoyment of their right to life.

D. The Right to Non-discrimination

The concept of non-discrimination implies that an individual should not be treated differently from others in an adverse manner. The right to non-discrimination is protected in virtually all human rights instruments. With regard to adolescents, discrimination may arise where laws and polices bar access to information and services in relation to their sexuality, simply based on their age. More specifically, it can amount to discrimination if access to information and services on contraception are deliberately denied to female adolescents or adolescents in rural areas due to religious or cultural reasons. Articles 2 of both the ICCPR and the ICESCR provide that everyone is equal before the law and that no one should be subjected to discrimination based on sex, race, religion, political belief or other status.

Explaining the importance of Article 2 of the ICCPR, the Human Rights Committee118 has noted that ‘Non discrimination together with equality before the law and equal protection of the law without discrimination constitutes a basic and general principle relating to the protection of human rights’. Similarly, the Committee in some of its Concluding Observations has noted that lack of access to contraception to women

117.See, Social and Economic Rights Action Centre (SERAC) and Another v. Nigeria (2001) AHRLR 60 (ACHPR 2001).

118.General Comments of the Human Rights Committee on the Non-Discrimination Clauses of the ICCPR (adopted on 9 November 1989). See also, J. Möller, Article 7, in THE UNIVERSAL DECLARATION OF HUMAN RIGHTS: A COMMENTARY 115 (A. Eide et al eds, 1992).

2011]

Access to Contraception for Adolescents in Africa

95

amounts to discrimination.119 The CEDAW in its Article 2 urges states to take measures to eliminate all forms of discrimination against women. Article 12 specifically provides for access to health care services to women on equal basis with men. This provision no doubt can be invoked to ensure access to contraceptive information and services for female adolescents.

Indeed, as mentioned earlier, the Committee on CEDAW has interpreted this provision to apply to the needs of girls.120 The Committee has urged states to eliminate discrimination in health care services to women and girls in their country. In the same manner, the Committee on CESCR has noted that access to health care services, including sexual and reproductive health services, should be guaranteed to all without discrimination as to sex or age.121 These clarifications would seem to cover elimination of discrimination to female adolescents seeking contraceptive information and services.

Virtually all the above mentioned instruments proscribe discrimination on prohibited grounds that may impair an individual’s rights to enjoy the fundamental rights guaranteed under these instruments. The term ‘other status’ contained in almost all of these instruments has been explained to include age, economic or marital status.122 One of the core principles underlining the CRC is non-discrimination. This principle is guaranteed under Article 2 of the CRC which forbids discrimination against children. A purposive interpretation of the CRC would suggest a proscription of discriminatory practices against adolescent girls with regard to access to health care services, including contraceptive services. But the provisions of the CRC have been criticized for failing to contextualize the challenges encountered by female children and adolescent girls in their daily lives. Fottrel for instance, has argued that the provisions of the CRC are essentially drafted to soothe the needs of white male children and are insensitive to the disadvantages and challenges encountered daily by female children in developing regions such as Africa.123 This is because the CRC does not explicitly address issues such as harmful traditional practices like female genital cutting/mutilation (FGC/FGM) nor does it deal with early marriage prevalent in most parts of Africa. Moreover, the CRC fails to specify measures that should be taken by

119.See, e.g., Concluding Observations of the Human Rights Committee: Georgia, 1564-1566th mtgs., para. 12, U.N. Doc. CCPR/C/79/Add.75 (1997); Concluding Observation HRC: Poland, supra note 93, ¶ 11; Concluding Observations of the Human Rights Committee: Argentina, 17th Sess., 1883rd-1884st mtgs., para. 14, U.N. Doc. CCPR/CO/70/ARG (2000).

120.General Recommendation 24 of CEDAW, supra note 65, para 18.

121.General Comment 14 of Committee on ESCR, supra note 55.

122.See, e.g., Committee on ESCR in its General Comment 20 on Non-Discrimination in Economic, Social and Cultural Rights, E/C.12/GC/20 25 May 2009; CRLP & CLF, supra note 12, at 46.

123.Fottrel, supra note 57, at 10.

96

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

states to address the needs of girls in many developing countries. She argues further:

The main protection offered girls is found in article 2, which guarantees equality and non-discrimination, but the reality of many girls’ lives is beyond the scope of such declaratory provisions and this must be viewed as an oversight by the drafters. Paper equality cannot be considered cure-all for the effects of centuries of discrimination.124

While this argument would seem valid and not to be taken lightly, it should, however, be noted that the Committee on CRC has tried as much as possible to give attention to gender issues in its interpretations of the provisions of the Convention. For instance, the Committee has explained that discrimination against girl children often leads to denial of access to sexuality information and services to them. It further expresses concern about gender-based discrimination combined with taboos or judgmental attitudes to sexual activities of girls, which potentially limit access to information and preventive health care services such as contraception to them. States are therefore, urged to take adequate measures with a view to eliminating gender-based discrimination which makes the girl child more vulnerable to STIs and HIV infection.125

Under the African human rights system, Article 3 of the African Children’s Charter proscribes discrimination against every child irrespective of the child’s or his/her parents’ race, religion, sex, ethnic group, language, birth and other status. Equally, Article 2 of the Women’s Protocol specifically calls for states to eliminate all forms of discrimination against women in the region. The Protocol broadly defines discrimination in the following way:

Any distinction, exclusion or restriction or any differential treatment based on sex and whose objectives or effects compromise or destroy the recognition, enjoyment or the exercise by women, regardless of their mental status, of human rights and fundamental freedoms in all spheres of life.126

Additionally, Article 5 of the Protocol urges states to take adequate steps and measures to eliminate harmful traditional practices which entrench discrimination against women and girls in the region. Article 3 of the African Children’s Charter is not different from

124.Id.

125.Committee on CRC General Comment 3, supra note 83, ¶¶ 7 & 8.

126.Article 1 of the Women’s Protocol, supra note 70.

2011]

Access to Contraception for Adolescents in Africa

97

Article 2 of the CRC. Therefore, the criticism referred to above with regard to the gender insensitivity of the CRC equally applies to the African Children’s Charter. Given the fact that the African Children’s Charter came after the CRC, and bearing in mind the peculiar challenges faced by adolescent girls in Africa, one would have thought that the drafters would avoid the mistakes of the CRC and give more attention to the needs of adolescent girls in the region.

Unfortunately, this is not the case. The African Children’s Charter is silent on important issues, such as prevalence of child marriages in Africa, which is potentially harmful to the health of girls. However, the Women’s Protocol, unlike the African Children’s Charter, contains broad and radical provisions relating to the sexual and reproductive health needs of women and girls in Africa. For instance, as argued earlier, the Protocol explicitly guarantees women’s sexual and reproductive rights, provides that women should be protected from STIs including HIV/AIDS, recognizes women’s and girls’ rights to seek contraceptive services and forbids marriage of a girl under the age of 18. One may unarguably conclude that the provisions of the Women’s Protocol are by far the most gender-sensitive human rights instrument in the region which is potent in protecting the sexual health needs, including contraceptive needs, of adolescent girls.

The African Charter in its Article 2 provides that every one is equal before the law and that no one should be discriminated against on grounds such as gender, religion, political beliefs or other status. Article 3 similarly guarantees to every individual the right to equality and equal protection of the law. The African Commission on Human and Peoples’ Rights in the case of Legal Resource Foundation v. Zambia127 has explained the relevance of Articles 2 and 3 of the African Charter dealing with non-discrimination and equal protection of the law. According to the Commission:

The right to equality is very important. It means that citizens should be expected to be treated fairly and justly within the legal system and be assured of equal treatment before the law and equal enjoyment of all the rights available to all other citizens. The right to equality is important for a second reason. Equality or lack of it affects the capacity of one to enjoy many other rights.

127. (2001) AHRLP 84 (ACHPR 2001), ¶ 63.

98

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

This decision provides a strong basis for arguing that adolescents, particularly adolescent girls, should not be denied access to contraceptive information and services on the grounds of gender, age or marital status. Governments will need to strive to remove all forms of barriers to access to sexual health services for adolescents in their countries.

At both the ICPD and the Beijing conferences, it was agreed that if improvements were to be brought to women’s health, there will be need to address gender inequality across the globe. The Beijing conference particularly recognized that some customary practices are harmful to the health of women and perpetuate discrimination against them.128 Both conferences also resolved that women should enjoy their sexual and reproductive rights without coercion, violence or discrimination.129 One of the targets of the Millennium Development Goals (MDGs) is to address the pervading gender inequality worldwide. In this regard, goal No 3 of the MDGs emphasizes the importance of promoting gender equality and women’s empowerment as an effective pathway to combat poverty, hunger and disease and to stimulate truly sustainable development.130 At the World Summit on Children it was affirmed as follows:

We are determined to eliminate all forms of discrimination against the girl child throughout her life cycle and to provide special attention to her needs in order to promote and protect all her human rights including her right to be free from coercion and from harmful practices and sexual exploitation. We will promote equal access to basic social services such as … health care including sexual and reproductive health care….131

The Solemn Declaration on Gender Equality in Africa132 enjoins African countries to accelerate the implementation of gender specific economic and social programmes so as to prevent the spread of STIs, including HIV/AIDS, among women. In addition states are to ensure ‘the active promotion and protection of all human rights for women

128.UN, supra note 10.

129.Id., ¶ 91 and ICPD, supra note 1, ¶ 7.8.

130.UN Millennium Declaration and Millennium Development Goals, 2000 A/RES/55/2.

131.UN General Assembly Resolution, A World Fit for Children, adopted at the Twenty- Seventh Special Session held on 11 October 2002, AR/RES/S-27/2, ¶ 23.

132.Solemn Declaration on Gender Equality in Africa, adopted at the AU Assembly of Heads of State and Government meeting in Addis Ababa in July 2004.

2011]

Access to Contraception for Adolescents in Africa

99

and

girls to development…’133 This can be interpreted to

mean addressing

discrimination relating to access to contraceptive information and services for adolescents in the region. Furthermore, at the Grand Bay Declaration and Plan of Action, African governments were urged to work ‘assiduously towards elimination of discrimination against women and the abolition of cultural practices which demean and dehumanize women and children.’134

E. The Right to Autonomy

This right encompasses the right of an individual to determine his or her sexual and reproductive autonomy. Although nowhere is this right specifically guaranteed in any human rights instruments, the right nonetheless is intrinsically linked with other rights such as rights to privacy, security, liberty and dignity. These combinations of rights form the basis of an individual’s rights to make choices with regard to his or her sexuality. They also support the fact that adolescents are entitled to seek confidential contraceptive information and services without the need for parental consent.

As stated earlier, unless the privacy and confidentiality of adolescents is guaranteed, they may avoid seeking necessary help with regard to their sexual health. It must be noted that the right to independent decision-making on the part of adolescents in the context of sexual health services, inextricably intersects with their ability to exercise their right to health and dignity.135 Several provisions of international human rights instruments can be relied on to uphold adolescents’ right to self- determination with regard to their sexual health. For instance, Article 3 of the UDHR, which guarantees the right to liberty of person and Article 9 of the ICCPR relating to the right to liberty, support adolescents’ right to sexual and reproductive self- determination. This necessarily includes the exercise of adolescents’ self-determination in relation to issues such as access to contraceptive information and services.

Indeed, the Human Rights Committee has observed that failure on the part of a government to enact appropriate legislation and ensure access to contraception and sexual health information amounts to a violation of the right to sexual and reproductive self-determination.136 In one of its Concluding Observations to Argentina, the Committee has recommended that the state party take adequate measures and steps with

133.Id., ¶ 6.

134.The first OAU Ministerial Conference on Human Rights held from 12-16 April, 1999, at Grand Bay, Mauritius.

135.Cook & Dickens, supra note 114, at 20.

136.CRLP & CLF, supra note 12.

100

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

a view to enacting laws that will facilitate access to comprehensive family planning services, including contraceptive services, so as to provide women with options.137

Under the CRC there is no clear-cut provision conferring autonomous decision making power on adolescents. Rather, the CRC strives to strike a balance between parental rights and adolescents decision-making power through the twin principles of ‘evolving capacities of the child’ and ‘the best interests of the child.’138 This subtle approach by the CRC can be attributed to the paternalistic view often expressed by most states that children and adolescents are incapable of ‘rational’ decision-making power. Indeed, it has been argued that the provisions which seek to enhance the autonomy of the child under the Convention are one of its weakest.139 However, Article 16 does recognize adolescents’ right to privacy.

In some of its Concluding Observations to states parties to the Convention, the Committee on CRC has affirmed the need to guarantee adolescents’ right to privacy while seeking sexual health information and services. For example, the Committee in its Concluding Observations to Djibouti observed that lack of confidentiality can be a barrier to adolescents’ access to sexual health services.140 The Committee has equally advocated that adolescents’ health care services are assured without the need for parental consent.141 In its General Comment 3, the Committee specifically urges states parties to ensure children’s and adolescents’ right to privacy and confidentiality in the context of HIV/AIDS services.142 Similarly, the Committee in its General Comment 4 has noted that for the health and development of adolescents to be promoted, states are enjoined to respect strictly their confidentiality and privacy, particularly with regard to health related matters.143

In addition to the above, Article 16(1) of CEDAW guarantees a woman’s right to decide freely and responsibly the number and spacing of her children and access to information and the means to do so. This provision would seem to be one of the important provisions affirming an individual’s right to sexual and reproductive health autonomy. Indeed, the Committee on CEDAW in its General Recommendation 24 has emphasized on the need for women and girls to be assured their right to sexual and

137.Concluding Observation: Argentina, supra note 119.

138.CRLP & CLF, supra note 12, at 44.

139.T. Hammerberg, The UN Convention on the Rights of the Child and How to Make it Work,

12 HUM. RTS Q. 100 (1990).

140.See, Concluding Observation of CRC: Djibouti, UN. Doc CRC/C15/Add.131.¶ 46.

141.General Comment 4, supra note 60.

142.General Comment 3, supra note 83, ¶ 24.

143.Id., ¶ 11.

2011]

Access to Contraception for Adolescents in Africa

101

reproductive self-determination.144 This will also include assuring to adolescent girls self-determination to seek contraceptive information and services. The Committee has similarly, in some of its Concluding Observations to states, called on states to recognise women and girls as autonomous decision-makers by refraining from taking any action that will obstruct their health goals.145 Also, the Committee has pointed out the need to respect the free and informed decision-making of adolescents by constantly recommending to states parties to increase their access to sexual health information and services.146

More importantly, the Committee has interpreted the provision on the right to health of CEDAW as guaranteeing confidential sexual and reproductive health information and services.147 The Committee has called on states parties to ensure, through properly trained personnel, the right of male and female adolescents to sexual health services and information. It equally calls on states to design programmes that will respect adolescents’ privacy and confidentiality in health care services (including contraceptive services).148

Even though the ICESCR contains no provision on the right to privacy, the Committee on CESCR has equally interpreted the right to health guaranteed under the Covenant, to include the freedom of an individual to exercise his or her sexual and reproductive choices and the right to have access to ‘safe, effective, affordable and acceptable methods of family planning of their choice as well as the right of access to appropriate health-care services. . . .”149 The Committee has progressively recognized the right of adolescents to participate in decisions affecting their health care and has emphasized on the need to respect their confidentiality and privacy in sexual and reproductive health services, including contraceptive services.150

144.General Recommendation 24 of CEDAW, supra note 65, ¶ 14.

145.See, e.g., Concluding Observations of the Committee on CEDAW: Belize, 21st Sess., 432nd-433rd, 438th mtgs., paras. 56-57, U.N. Doc.CEDAW/A/54/38, paras. 31-69, (1999); Concluding Observations of the Committee on CEDAW : Greece, 20th Sess., 415-416th mtgs., para. 207, U.N. Doc. A/54/38, paras. 172-212 (1999); Concluding Observations of the Committee on CEDAW: Mauritius, 268th

&271st mtgs., para. 211, U.N. Doc. A/50/38, paras. 160-217 (1995).

146.See, Concluding Observations of the Committee on CEDAW: Indonesia, 377th mtg., para. 284(c), U.N. Doc. A/53/38 (1998); and Concluding Observation s of the Committee on CEDAW: Turkey, 16th Sess., 318-319th mtgs., paras. 184, 196, U.N. Doc. A/52/38/Rev.1, paras. 151-205 (1997).

147.General Recommendation 24 of CEDAW, supra note 65, ¶ 18.

148.Id.

149.General Comment 14 of the Committee on ESCR, supra note 55, ¶ 23

150.Id.

102

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

The American Supreme Court in Casey v. Population Services International,151 while relying on the Fourteenth Amendment of the US Constitution to strike down a legislation which criminalizes the distribution of contraception to adolescents, has held that minors have the fundamental right to choose ‘whether or not to beget a child.’ In another case involving the constitutionality of a legislation proscribing the use of contraception to unmarried persons, the court held that ‘If the right to privacy means anything, it is the right of the individual, married or single, to be free from government intrusion into matters so fundamentally affecting a person as the decision whether to bear or beget a child.’152 These decisions clearly demonstrate willingness on the part of the courts to uphold adolescents’ autonomous decision-making powers with regard to contraception.

Under the African regional human rights system, the African Children’s Charter guarantees the right to privacy for children in its Article 10. While there is no specific provision on the right to privacy in the African Charter, Article 5 of the Charter does recognize an individual’s right to dignity. Also, Article 3 of the Women’s Protocol guarantees women’s rights to human dignity.

It should be noted that when adolescents are prevented from seeking information and services with regard to their sexual health, particularly access to contraception, their dignity as human beings is impugned. Margalit has explained that dignity, unlike honour, is not a positional good. It is supposed to be accorded to everybody, by virtue of the most universal common denominator of being human.153 Shalev has similarly argued that the right to autonomy in making health decisions, particularly sexual and reproductive health decisions, is founded upon an individual’s fundamental right to liberty.154 All individuals, including adolescents, have the liberty to make choices with respect to their sexual health. That is, one is entitled to the recognition of one’s capacity as a human being to exercise choices in the shaping of one’s life.155

During the ICPD, it was affirmed that all individuals shall have the freedom to decide freely without restriction regarding their sexual and reproductive health needs. More particularly, this consensus statement further made reference to the fact that

151.(1977) 678433 US (SC).

152.Eisentadt v. Bard (1973) 405 US 438.

153.A. MARGALIT, THE ETHICS OF MEMORY 220 (2003).

154.C. Shalev, Rights to Sexual and Reproductive Health: The International Conference on Population and Development and the Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of Discrimination against Women, 4 HEALTH & HUM. RTS 46 (2000).

155.I. Berlin, Two Concepts of Liberty, in FOUR ESSAYS ON LIBERTY (I. Berlin ed., 1969), at

120-123.

2011]

Access to Contraception for Adolescents in Africa

103

adolescents needed to be assured of respect for informed consent, confidentiality and privacy so as to address issues of sexual abuse and other sexual and reproductive health matters.156 This position was reiterated at the ICPD+ 5 when governments were called upon to guarantee access to appropriate youth-friendly health care services, including sexual and reproductive health care, for adolescents.157 It was further agreed that such services should respect the confidentiality and privacy of adolescents.

A similar position was taken at Beijing where it was agreed that respect for adolescents’ confidentiality and privacy in health care services is essential in guaranteeing their equality and securing their future.158 At the World Summit for Children, world leaders resolved to take action to protect the rights of children and adolescents by respecting their dignity and securing their well-being.159 These statements confirm the need to assure to adolescents confidential and autonomous contraceptive services.

V. CONCLUSION

This article has shown that adolescents, especially female adolescents in Africa, continue to face threats to their health and lives due to lack of access to contraceptive information and services. Death and morbidities arising from sexual and reproductive ill health among adolescents in the region are preventable if adolescents have access to comprehensive sexual and reproductive heath services. It would appear that African countries are not paying enough attention to the health needs of their adolescents. Much more would need to be done in order to advance the sexual and reproductive health of adolescents in the region. More importantly, African governments must show commitment to the health of the young people by increasing their spending on the health of their population generally and young people in particular.

It would be recalled that at the Abuja Declaration160 African leaders agreed to commit not less than 15 per cent of their annual budgets to the health sector to address challenges posed by HIV/AIDS and other diseases in the region. However, several

156.ICPD, supra note 1, ¶ 7.45.

157.ICPD+5, supra note 11, ¶ 73(a).

158.UN, supra note 10, ¶ 93; Report of the Secretary-General on the Implementation of the Outcome of the Fourth World Conference on Women and of the Special Session of the General Assembly entitled: WOMEN 2000: GENDER EQUALITY, DEVELOPMENT AND PEACE IN THE TWENTY-FIRST CENTURY

(2000), A/55/341, ¶ 79(f).

159.UN General Assembly Resolution, supra note 131, ¶ 4.

160.African Summit on HIV/AIDS, Tuberculosis and other Related Infectious Diseases, Abuja- Nigeria, April 24-27 2001, OAU/SPS/ABUJA/3.

104

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

years after this promise, only few African countries are meeting this target. Africa must realize that if it must meet the health-related targets of the MDGs, then it needs to take more seriously the sexual and reproductive health needs of its adolescents. A step in this direction will be to integrate comprehensive sexual and reproductive health, services including access to contraception into primary health care services. This will be in line with the Maputo Plan of Action as agreed upon by African health ministers. The young people of today are tomorrow’s leaders; therefore African governments need not be reminded that failure to ensure their good health will have serious implications not only for young people but the region as a whole.

2011]

Civil Society Participation in Uganda’s Health Sector

105

CIVIL SOCIETY PARTICIPATION IN HEALTH SECTOR PLANNING, BUDGETING, AND MONITORING IN SELECTED DISTRICTS IN UGANDA

Sandra Kiapi*

ABSTRACT

This article highlights some of the findings of a survey carried out by Action Group for Health, Human Rights and HIV/AIDS (AGHA) Uganda on health sector transparency, accountability and civil society participation in health sector budgeting and planning in selected districts of Uganda. It examines some components of participation including the right of access to information and the obligation of the state to seek the active and informed participation of the public in decision making. Uganda has embraced a participatory approach to developing plans and budgets for the health sector. However, some components of the right to participation in health-related decision making have not been fully embraced. The Ministry of Health has not taken adequate steps to ensure the active and informed participation of individuals and communities in health-related decisions. Health budgeting and planning is largely seen as a province for health planners and a few selected stakeholders. Moreover, limited information sharing and lack of capacity also undermine the ability of CSOs to meaningfully participate. This is magnified by the uncoordinated representation in planning even where there is an opportunity. These factors have been a major obstacle to meaningful participation.

I. INTRODUCTION

Public participation in decision making is an essential component of a rights-based approach to decision making and may result in a more accountable and transparent public sector. In the context of the right to health, the Committee on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights has reiterated that an important aspect of the right to health is, “the participation of the population in all health-related decision making at the community,

* Former Executive Director, Action Group for Health, Human Rights and HIV/AIDS (AGHA), based in Kampala, Uganda. Email: <maliamaks@gmail.com>

106

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

national and international level.”1 Individuals and communities affected by health policy decisions are entitled to participate in the identification of priorities and targets that guide policy formulation.2 This requires the active and informed participation of individuals and communities in health decisions that affect them with Government taking steps to facilitate effective participation of communities, by ensuring the right to seek and receive health-related information, the right to express views which are respected and the right to basic health education.3 Meaningful participation also requires that special attention be given to the views and needs of the more vulnerable members of society including women, children, the elderly, persons with HIV/AIDS and other groups.4

Transparency within the health sector is a prerequisite for public participation. In the context of health sector planning and budgeting, transparency is defined as the full disclosure of all relevant policy and fiscal planning information in a timely and systematic manner.5 The availability of information means decisions made will be backed by evidence. Civil society organizations (CSOs) in Uganda have a key role to play in monitoring the right to health by participating in health sector planning and budgeting at both the national and district levels. CSOs are important for public participation because in most cases they serve communities and various interest groups such as women, children, and people living with HIV/AIDS, among others. Their role and mandates put them in a unique position as they are often directly in touch with the communities they serve and therefore in position to effectively represent community interests.

The 1995 Constitution of Uganda underscores the importance of the active participation of all citizens at all levels.6 Civil society organizations were involved in the development of the Poverty Eradication Action Plan (PEAP).7 The Ministry of

1.Committee on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights, General Comment 14, The Right to the Highest Attainable Standard of Health: E/C.12/2000/4, CESCR 11/08/2000 (hereinafter General Comment 14), para. 11.

2.PAUL HUNT, MISSION TO UGANDA: REPORT OF THE SPECIAL RAPPORTEUR ON THE RIGHT OF

EVERYONE TO THE ENJOYMENT OF THE HIGHEST ATTAINABLE STANDARD OF PHYSICAL AND MENTAL

HEALTH, E/CN.4/2006/48/Add.2 at 12.

3.HELEN POTTS, ACCOUNTABILITY AND THE RIGHT TO THE HIGHEST ATTAINABLE STANDARD OF HEALTH 10 (2008).

4.Id.

5.Daisy Owomugasho, Uganda, in BUDGET TRANSPARENCY AND PARTICIPATION: NINE

AFRICAN CASE STUDIES ( 2007), at 282.

6.UGANDA CONST.(1995), art. 176(2)(b), and National Objectives and Directive Principles of

State Policy.

7.GOVERNMENT OF UGANDA, POVERTY ERADICATION ACTION PLAN 6 (2000).

2011]

Civil Society Participation in Uganda’s Health Sector

107

Health recently took steps to allow civil society organizations to participate in health sector planning, budgeting and monitoring at the national level. In 2005, owing partly to limited public participation in health planning, budgeting and monitoring, some Uganda Government officials mismanaged grant money from the Global Fund to Fight AIDS, Tuberculosis and Malaria (GFTAM).8 Funds for AIDS, TB and malaria programs were misappropriated, creating skeptism from both donors and the international community on Uganda’s ability to manage its grants.9 As a result, the GFTAM required countries to have civil society representation in the Country Coordination Mechanisms (CCM) to participate in planning, but also to act as a watch dog on the use of resources.10

In 2007, the Action Group for Health, Human Rights and HIV/AIDS (AGHA) Uganda, launched a targeted campaign to build the capacity of selected Ugandan CSOs to advocate for government accountability and transparency in the health sector. AGHA and its partners developed a tool with a set of indicators and questions addressed to health planners and CSOs to monitor both the use of health resources and the level of civil society participation in health planning, budgeting, and monitoring at the national and district level. The questions were geared towards exploring the level and effectiveness of participation, as well as the barriers to CSO participation in the health sector in Uganda. The questions explored procedures taken in developing the national plan and district annual work plans, the parties involved in the planning process, the number and type of meetings attended by CSOs, whether CSOs were adequately prepared for meetings and if views were listened to, as well as the availability of health policy documents in lower level facilities, among others.

This article discusses the findings of this data collection process and explains some of the limitations which affect the level of civil society participation in health sector planning, budgeting and monitoring. First, this article gives a background to the survey and lays out the methodology used. Second, it provides a brief overview of the legal and policy framework for CSO participation in health decision making. Third, it explains the findings of the survey. Fourth, it briefly discusses the implications of the findings and finally draws conclusions. The findings reveal that health sector planning process at the national level is a collaborative process including various stakeholders

8.Charles Wendo, Why Global Fund Whip is Cracking Now, THE NEW VISION, November 1, 2008, at 10; C. Natukunda, Who is Responsible for What? THE NEW VISION, November 1, 2008, at 11.

9.Wendo, id.

10.INTERNATIONAL TREATMENT PREPAREDNESS COALITION,MAKING GLOBAL FUND COUNTRY COORDINATING MECHANISMS WORK THROUGH FULL ENGAGEMENT OF CIVIL SOCIETY (Uganda Country Report, 2008), at 53.

108

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

which gives opportunity for CSO participation and allows health priorities and budgets to be influenced. However, the structures for CSO representation at the national level do not allow for democratic representation as there is no democratic process in place for selecting representatives.11

At the district level, although there are structures and policies in place to encourage CSO participation in health sector planning, budgeting and monitoring, the implementation of these policies and structures remains weak. The results suggest a variety of reasons for weak participation including a lack of open and transparent access to information regarding health budgets, resources, and policies, limited capacity of civil society in Uganda, a lack of coordination within civil society, and a lack of trust between CSOs and the political leadership. The Ministry of health and district planners have not taken adequate steps to facilitate effective participation of CSOs by ensuring the right to seek and receive health-related information, and the right to express views which are respected. Unless there is investment in a rights based approach to effective participation, CSO participation in health sector planning, budgeting and monitoring will remain minimal.

II. BACKGROUND

A. About AGHA

The Action Group for Health, Human Rights and HIV/AIDS (AGHA) is a non- governmental organization (NGO) founded in July 2003 to mobilize health professionals and health consumers to address issues of human rights as they relate to health, with a specific focus on HIV/AIDS.12 AGHA brings together doctors, nurses, other health professionals, and NGOs and other institutions interested in promoting the right to health, to create local and national networks dedicated to global health advocacy.

Uganda is one of the poorest countries in the world and has a heavy burden of preventable infectious diseases.13 Malaria constituents 15.4 percent of the total disease

11.The Health Policy Advisory Committee has 2 elected civil society representatives. However, the procedure by which they were voted remains unclear to CSOs that do not belong to their coalitions.

12.For more information, see Action Group for Health, Human Rights and HIV/AIDS (AGHA) Uganda at <www.aghauganda.org>.

13.The Government of Uganda has reaffirmed its commitment to achieving the Millennium Development Goals (MDGs), which show extensive overlap with National Poverty Eradication Action Plan (PEAP). Through the Health Sector Strategic Plan (HSSP) I and II, Uganda has prioritized its

2011]

Civil Society Participation in Uganda’s Health Sector

109

burden in the country.14 About 100,000 children are HIV infected and 50,000 in need of Anti Retroviral Therapy (ART), but only 26 percent of those in need receive ART.15 As of February 2009, about 160,000 patients had been initiated on ART which represents only 50 percent of those that are eligible for treatment.16 Uganda has a fertility rate of 7.1, one of the highest in the world.17 Neonatal and maternal conditions constitute the highest percentage of the burden of disease in the country at 20.8 percent.18 Greater resources than available are needed to deal with the ever increasing population and high disease burden.

Corruption continues to be a problem in Uganda’s health sector. The scandal over the mismanagement of GFTAM grants combined with less globally publicized but no less critical mismanagement of HIV, TB, and malaria medicines, threaten the health rights of the population. Weak monitoring systems in the government structures and laxity by the civil society and the public to aggressively monitor health sector spending have facilitated mismanagement of health sector funds. As a result, AGHA launched a targeted campaign to promote transparency and accountability in the health sector.

B. The Monitoring Tool

In order to better understand the engagement of civil society in health budgeting and monitoring in Uganda, AGHA developed a set of indicators for monitoring the use of health sector resources and civil society participation in Uganda. These indicators and the resulting data collection instruments were developed through participatory approaches involving other CSOs under the umbrella of Voice for Health Rights (VHR), a coalition of civil society organizations in the health sector. The purpose of the indicators was to assess the current status of accountability, transparency, and participation of civil society in the health sector in Uganda, in order to generate

allocation of the limited resources for health as a commitment to progressively achieving the milestone of 15% of national budget for health by 2010, and the amount per capita that needs to be spent to meet the Uganda National Minimum Health Care Package. See, HSSP II, 2005/6-2009/10 (July 2005), at 1.

14.Id., at 2.

15.Save the Children/Ministry of Gender, Labour and Social Development, Calling for the Realization of the Rights of Orphans and Other Vulnerable Children, THE NEW VISION, Friday November 21, 2008, at 38-39.

16.Ministry of Health, Press Statement on the Cut-off of CD4 Cell Count for Initiating New AIDS Patients on Anti-retroviral Treatment, February 10, 2009.

17.MINISTRY OF HEALTH, ANNUAL HEALTH SECTOR PERFORMANCE REPORT, 2006/2007; GOVERNMENT OF UGANDA, UGANDA DEMOGRAPHIC HEALTH SURVEY (2006).

18.Id.

110

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

information and data that could be used to inform and promote dialogue between health sector leadership and civil society, as well as the advocacy efforts by CSOs. The indicators and the resulting data collection tool focused on five areas of inquiry (i) Planning and financial accountability; (ii) Timeliness in release of funds; (iii) CSO meaningful participation; (iv) Access to information and (v) General management. The focus of discussion for this paper however is limited to health sector planning, CSO engagement and access to information which are directly linked to participation.

C.Methodology

1.The District Health System.— AGHA and its partners collected data in eight districts and at the national level. There are over 80 districts in Uganda each of which is individually responsible for management of its health services. The district is the key administrative unit in Uganda, with lower administrative units known as County, Sub- counties, parishes and villages.19 The District Health System consists of various tiers under the overall direction of the District Health Officer (DHO).20 Each district usually has a District Hospital and the district is sub divided into health sub-districts (HSDs). Each HSD has a Health Centre level IV (HC IV) and the head of the HSD is usually the officer in-charge of the HC IV. At a lower level, there are HC IIIs and HC IIs.21 The DHO sends resources to the head of each HSD for use of all HCs in that HSD.

2.The Pilot-Test and Data Collection.—After the indicators and the data collection tool were developed by AGHA in consultation with its CSO Partners, it was piloted in Mukono district in March 2008. After the pilot phase, data was collected from seven other districts that were selected to represent each region of the country. The districts that participated were Bushenyi, Kitgum, Lyantonde, Mukono, Pallisa, Rakai, Soroti and Tororo. Whenever possible, AGHA and its partners worked with health sector civil society groups which were already active in these districts to help set appointments and collect the necessary data. Two methods were used to collect the data. First, at each district, one-on-one interviews were conducted with the District Health Officer (DHO) and the Accounts Officer at the District Health Office. The purpose of the personal interviews was to elicit responses from the district planners on

19.Other departments include the District Educational Office and the District Forest Office.

20.The District Health System comprises a well-defined population living within a clearly delineated administrative and geographic boundary and includes all actors in the recognized spheres of health within the district. See, HSSP II, supra note 13, at 15.

21.Id.

2011]

Civil Society Participation in Uganda’s Health Sector

111

the procedures for district planning and budgeting, and to get financial figures on the planned and actual funds available for implementing programs in the financial year 2006/2007. These interviews also helped to assess the availability and accuracy of information. Interviews were also conducted with two CSO representatives to the national Health Policy Advisory Committee, as well as the Assistant Commissioner Planning/Health Services at the Ministry of Health.

Second, Focus Group Discussions (FGDs) were conducted in seven districts with about 10 to 12 members of CSOs including one or two lower level health center managers. The intention of the focus groups was to develop a broad and deep understanding of the opinions of the CSO staff, healthcare managers at the health sub- district about the district planning process, particularly in relation to CSO participation in planning, and access to health information. The notes from the interviews and FGDs were then transcribed and compiled according to districts in a database designed in line with the various thematic areas. The research theme then identified the emerging ideas or patterns. The emergent patterns and connections within and between the categories were identified, and the relative importance of the different themes and interconnections highlighted.22 The research team also collected and reviewed supplementary materials, from Government publications including the National Health Policy, Health Sector Strategic Plan II, and the 2007 Ministry of Health Transfers to the districts.

3. Challenges and Limitations of the Data.—Like any other research process, the data collection and data itself faced a number of challenges. First of all, the research team focused its efforts and interviews on the District Health Officer (DHO) and the Accounts staff in the DHOs office, as well as with CSOs in the district. The research team did not visit the office of the Chief Administrative Officer (CAO) who is the district accounting officer and the custodian of the district development plan and budget. Secondly, the research did not focus on the Health Unit Management Teams and the Village Health Teams which are supposed to be the structures at the health sub- districts that facilitate the involvement of communities in managing their health. This is largely because these structures are not yet functional and therefore could not be consulted in many districts. Collecting information about and from these teams would have provided another insight into the structures at the district level available to provide oversight and enhance public participation in health sector management.

22. ELLEN TAYLOR-POWELL&MARCUS RENNER,ANALYZING QUALITATIVE RESEARCH (2003).

112

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

III. LEGAL AND POLICY FRAMEWORK GOVERNING PUBLIC

PARTICIPATION IN DECISION MAKING

Although Uganda’s legal and policy framework that governs the health system has put in place measures to allow the public to participate in fiscal and policy planning and have access to public information, in practice there is greater public participation at the national than at the district level.

A.Legal Framework for Civil Society Participation at the National Level

1.Public Participation.—Under the 1995 Constitution and the 1997 Local Governments Act, responsibilities and power has been given to the people at the lower levels so that they can participate in governance by managing their own affairs.23

2.Access to Information.—Access to information in government possession is one of the ways of strengthening the culture of transparency and accountability in the public sector, and is a pre-requisite for public participation in decision making. In furtherance of public participation, the 1995 Constitution also guarantees the right of access to information. Article 41 (1) guarantees the right of access to public information.24

3.The Right to Health.—Uganda’s legal framework does not expressly provide for either the right to health, or public participation in health related decision making, but some provisions in the law make reference to the right to health. The 1995 Constitution obliges the state to take practical measures to ensure the provision of basic

23.Article 176 (1) of the Constitution states that decentralization shall be based on the district as a unit under which there shall be such lower local and administrative units as Parliament may by law provide. The lower administrative units on which the health sub districts are based—the county, sub county, parish and village are created by the Local Government Act, 1997.

24.Article 41 provides: “Every citizen has a right of access to information in the possession of the State or any other organ or agency of the State except where the release of the information is likely to prejudice the security or sovereignty of the State or interfere with the right to the privacy of any other person.” The Access to Information Act, 2005 was enacted to promote an efficient, effective, transparent and accountable Government. The Act also seeks to promote transparency and accountability in all organs of the state by providing the public with timely, accessible and accurate information. This will empower the public to effectively scrutinize and participate in government decisions that affect them. However, the rules of procedure to regulate the procedures of this Act have however never been made hence delaying the effective operationalization of the law.

2011]

Civil Society Participation in Uganda’s Health Sector

113

medical services to the population.25 Article 39 recognizes the right of every Ugandan to a healthy and clean environment. Article 45 recognizes that all those rights, including the right to health, which are not mentioned explicitly shall not be disregarded. Uganda is a party to the International Covenant on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights which recognizes the right of individuals and communities to participation in health-related decision-making.

B. The Policy Framework

The Ministry of Health (MoH) has created structures and policies which allow civil society to participate in health planning. The National Health Policy (NHP) calls for a sector wide approach (SWAp) to health policy formulation.26 The Health Sector Strategic Plan (HSSP) II (2005/06–2009/10), which provides the strategy for implementing the National Health Policy was developed through an intensive and interactive process that involved all key stakeholders in health development in Uganda. There are key structures and processes that facilitate the participation of various stakeholders including civil society representatives in health sector planning. The major one is the Health Policy Advisory Committee (HPAC). HPAC provides policy guidance to the sector and allows for civil society representation through two civil society organizational representatives. The heads of department at MoH have been proactive in involving CSOs in HPAC, but civil society organizations also advocated for representation on this committee. The Civil Society representatives were formally selected to sit on HPAC by the MoH, and HPAC currently doubles as the Country Coordination Mechanism (CCM) for the GFTAM.27

There is a growing recognition and appreciation of the role of CSOs in health sector planning at HPAC. As a result, CSOs are increasingly influencing policy at the national level. One CSO representative on HPAC felt that representation was effective because her views are taken into consideration, and the views of the CSO representatives are increasingly considered in decision-making.28 At the moment, a CSO representative is the Vice Chairperson of HPAC lending credibility to CSO representation at this forum.29 However, civil society is starting to question the mode

25.Objective XX of the 1995 Constitution of Uganda.

26.MINISTRY OF HEALTH, NATIONAL HEALTH POLICY 7 (1999).

27.Interview with Enid Wamani, Vice Chairperson, HPAC September 22, 2008. See also,

INTERNATIONAL TREATMENT PREPAREDNESS COALITION, supra note 10.

28.Interview with Enid Wamani, id.

29.Interview with Robinah Katiritimba, Uganda National Health Consumers Organization,

October 2008.

114

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

by which the current representatives were selected.30 The two persons on HPAC represent over 1000 CSOs carrying out health related activities. The MoH required CSOs at the national level to select their representatives and then forward the names to the MOH with evidence in form of minutes of the meeting. The names forwarded came from only two constituencies—CSOs working in malaria related activities and a coalition known as Voice for Health Rights.31 Other organizations outside these networks did not get a chance to participate in this decision making process.

The Annual Government of Uganda (GoU)/Development Partner (DP) Joint Review Mission (JRM) is another mechanism for civil society participation in health sector planning. Through the JRM, the MOH invites CSOs and other stakeholders to review the Annual Health Sector Performance Report and determine whether overall performance has been satisfactory. The JRM also sets the priorities for the following year at the strategic level, through the identification of priority technical programmes, agreeing to undertakings and determining broad allocations for the budget cycle. AGHA participated in the JRMs in 2007 and 2008, and also contributed to a report on health sector performance in Kitgum district in 2008. Lastly, there is the National Health Assembly (NHA) which was created to provide an annual forum for the central and local governments, civil society, and development partners to review sector policy, plans and performance.

Although there is an increasing recognition of the role of CSOs in policy formulation at the national level, CSOs still face a number of challenges. Firstly, CSOs generally do not have a single voice. Each CSO, even while representing civil society in HPAC, has a mandate it adheres to, and a constituency it represents which is generally narrow. CSOs therefore do not speak as one voice. As one of the HPAC CSO representative stated, “I remain accountable to my constituency … the few issues I have raised have been listened to….”32 This is largely because there is no set criteria for selecting CSO representatives at these structures. Selection is based on prominence or visibility of a particular CSO within the Ministry of Health and a few selected coalitions.33 Secondly, although the CSOs that participate in these fora are required to

30.Minutes of AGHA meeting with CSO representatives, November 6, 2008.

31.Malaria and Early Childhood Illness NGO Secretariat (MACIS), UNHCO. By virtue of their nationwide scope of work, other representation comes from The AIDS Support Organization (TASO), African Medical Research Foundation (AMREF), and the Private Not for Profit Institutions like the Uganda Catholic Medical Bureau, the Uganda Protestant Medical Bureau, Uganda Muslim Medical Bureau and the Private sector including Uganda Manufacturers Association.

32.Id..

33.Interview with Dr. George Bagambisa, Assistant Commissioner Health Services/Planning, Ministry of Health, September 28, 2008.

2011]

Civil Society Participation in Uganda’s Health Sector

115

provide feedback to the people they represent, this does not always happen. The feedback that is provided is usually only given to the smaller constituency that the CSO represents, and not to civil society as a whole. Thirdly, CSOs are very many in number, diverse in mandate, most of them uncoordinated, and struggling even to keep their projects running due to limited resources. Compared to the Development Partners (DP) who are said to be well coordinated, the majority of the CSOs lack the human resource and financial capacity to engage in public policy formulation.

During a consultative meeting AGHA held with CSO representatives from Kitgum District, they raised the concern that development partners have a stronger voice in decision making because they provide technical and financial support both at the district and national level.34 One CSO representative at HPAC reiterated the need for her constituency to build their technical capacity by familiarizing themselves with working documents like the National Health Policy, the HSSP, the Millennium Development Goals, and other guiding documents.35 There is a growing recognition and visibility of CSOs at the national level, which provides a good opportunity to make involvement effective. The window is open for CSO participation at the national level. The challenge is therefore for CSOs to effectively coordinate themselves to ensure transparent and democratic representation.

C. Framework for Public/CSO Participation at District Level

Whereas the mechanism for CSO participation at the national level has been somewhat streamlined through structures and processes, there is still need for greater operationalization and restructuring of the mechanisms for collaboration between districts, health sub-districts and CSOs. The National Health Policy broadly provides for a collaborative mechanism between communities and local health authorities, but does not explicitly lay down procedures for consultation and collaboration.

At the district level, the District Health Teams (DHTs) were established as a technical group charged with the responsibility of planning, budgeting, coordinating resource mobilization, and monitoring of overall district performance.36 The DHTs, alongside the diverse partners including CSOs and DPs develop the District Health Sector Strategic Plan, which in turn is an integral part of the rolling District Development Plan. The Chief Administrative Officer (CAO) holds an annual conference to review the district budget which is passed by the District Council. In

34.AGHA-CSO Meeting, supra note 30.

35.Interview with Robinah Kaitiritimba, CSO Representative on HPAC, October 2008.

36.HSSP II, supra note 13, at 19.

116

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

some districts, CSOs are allowed to passively participate in the annual budget conference. The NHP established the Health Sub-District (HSD) as a functional sub- division or service zone of the district health system to bring quality essential care closer to the people, allow for identification of local priorities, and more importantly involve communities in the planning and management of health services and increase responsiveness to local needs.37 Each HSD management team is expected to provide overall day to day management oversight of the health units and community level health activities under its jurisdiction.38 Community participation at village level is supposed to be coordinated by a network of functional Village Health Teams (VHTs) who facilitate the process of community mobilization and empowerment for health action.39 Each village is supposed to have a VHT comprised of 9-10 people selected by the village (LCI).40 The VHT is responsible for: mobilization of additional resources and monitoring of utilization of all resources for their health programs including the performance of health centres.41 In reality, these teams are not yet in place in most districts due to lack of resources for training and supporting these teams.

IV. FINDINGS

A.District Health Planning

1.Procedures for District Development Plans.—According to the data collected through the survey, there were no clearly set standard procedures for developing the district development plans and therefore involving stakeholders like CSOs. The procedures varied from district to district. On the whole, district priorities are developed through meetings organized by planners from the District Technical Planning Committee (DTPC). The DTPC calls budget planning meetings to develop a work plan. Generally the districts have a bottom-up approach. Views are collected from lower level committees at the sub district and parish levels. Four DHOs reported that views are also obtained from staff of various departments who meet under different sectors. While in four of the districts it was reported that the budget meetings are attended by sub county leaders, in the other four, only the heads of the various district departments attend. The criteria used in identifying stakeholders for the planning

37.NHP, § 5.3.

38.Id., HSSP II, supra note 13, at 19.

39.Id., at 20-21.

40.Id.

41.Id.

2011]

Civil Society Participation in Uganda’s Health Sector

117

process varied from district to district. One DHO said the CAO identifies a team and the Chief Finance Officer (CFO) chairs the meeting. Another DHO said it was the DTPC. Yet another DHO said identification of stakeholders is based on the guidelines set by the Ministry of Local Government. There was a general feeling that little or no representation of CSOs exists at the lower levels because most CSOs do not have branches at the lower levels. Furthermore, there may be no funds to support such meetings at the lower levels: “At the sub-county, they [CSOs] are not there because they [the sub-county leaders] may not have funds to facilitate these meetings.”42

Respondents did note that at the lower levels, there are supposed to be village health teams (VHTs) which comprise of community members who participate in the management of health facilities, but these VHTs are not functional which limits civil society participation. The variation in the procedure highlights the need to develop standard guidelines for development of district plans, particularly priorities for health. There is also need to develop clear standards or criteria to identify stakeholders who should be involved in the development of the district plan and to hold district leadership accountable to following these standards. These stakeholders should include CSOs that carry out health-related activities in the districts concerned.

2. Staff Involvement in Planning.—Health Unit management staff have considerable expertise about community needs because of their experience within the health centers. These key stakeholders must be involved in the planning cycle early enough to ensure that the budgets and work plans address the needs they identify in their work. In all the districts surveyed, health facility staff were involved in planning and budgeting, but lower-level health unit staff who are closest to the community were only involved in the planning process at a later stage. A FGD Participant from Kitgum said, “I think the district should conduct studies so that the planning process is informed by current information.”43 Health unit staff from all levels could help bring this current information to the planning process.

B. CSO Meaningful Participation

According to one CSO representative, meaningful participation is defined as, “Participating to understand and to contribute, as well as to monitor implementation.”44 By definition, meaningful participation should also include the ability to participate in

42.FGD, Soroti.

43.FGD, Kitgum

44.Interview with Robinah Kaitititimba, supra note 35.

118

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

a way that actually influences policy. The data collected at the district level provided little evidence that civil society is able to influence policy, contribute to or even monitor implementation of policies.

1.The Number of Interest Groups.—In terms of the number of interest groups represented, there was a general feeling that the numbers (1-2 people) of CSOs represented on district health planning meetings and lower council level was small. There is a secretary for health who sits on the District Council and is supposed to act as a community representative. However, CSO representatives felt that many other interest and vulnerable groups such as people living with HIV/AIDS, youth, the elderly were not adequately represented on the district health committee.45 Yet meaningful participation requires that special attention be given to the views of vulnerable groups and information should be shared with the more vulnerable members of society to enhance participatory methods.

2.Number of Planning Meetings—Concerning the number of meetings, FGD participants indicated that the number of District Council and Sub County council health related meetings were high (average of eight per year). Although the number seemed high, some FGD participants felt that measuring the proportion of the meetings they attended was a challenge, given that there were some meetings to which they were not invited: “When we are not invited, we can’t even know that meetings take place.”46

However some respondents reported that they successfully attended all the scheduled meetings. “I think for HIV Committee, I was able to attend all the meetings planned in that financial year.”47 There are no clear benchmarks or guidelines on the number and even the type of meetings that CSOs should attend in a year. The District AIDS Committee (DAC) was often cited by respondents as a committee where there is good CSO representation and participation.48 Yet recently the DACs have been crippled by lack of resources for coordination of meetings: “These District AIDS Committees were active when they were funded by Uganda AIDS Commission but since it closed we have not had any meetings because of funds.”49

45.FGD.

46.FGD Participant, Lyantonde.

47.FGD Participant, Lyantonde.

48.However, there was some concern about insufficient provision for participation of PLHA

on the DACs.

49.FGD Participant, Tororo.

2011]

Civil Society Participation in Uganda’s Health Sector

119

3. Notice for Meetings.—While CSOs are sometimes invited to the annual budget conference, this is the last stage of the district planning process and does not give ample opportunity for influencing priorities. In some districts, CSOs are given very short notice of the meetings limiting their ability to prepare adequately. Even the District Councillors may receive the district budget the day before the Budget Conference, limiting their time to adequately prepare for deliberations.50 In some cases, even when notice is sufficient, members of the community and CSOs do not want to attend the meeting because they do not recognize or understand their role in budgeting or in monitoring the spending of funds: “I think the public is involved but it’s not maximum as some of them are not aware, they don’t know what is being planned and budgeted. Those who know may participate at parish level but when it comes to implementation, they don’t see where the money goes. So when it comes to calling people to come and plan, they [the community] say, ‘Why should I go? After all I don’t see where the money goes.”51

The audit also found that meaningful participation and engagement of CSOs is limited by mutual mistrust between some of the organizations and district planners. Some district officials were implicated in the misuse of monies from the Global Fund, and in some cases district officials have been found to divert public drugs to private clinics. CSOs in Kitgum were frustrated by the fact that a number of government staff arrested for stealing drugs have been released without trial.52 CSOs also complained that they are not involved in the management of funds received after they have been disbursed. Their limited involvement ends at the planning process. On the other hand, it was mentioned that CSOs too had elements of corruption. District officials pointed out that some CSOs are reluctant to share their work plans and budgets with district officials. CSOs also do not engage Government in the planning and management of their resources

Generally, there is limited CSO engagement in implementation. For progress to be achieved in the government obligation to enhance public participation in decision making, there is certainly strong need to engage CSOs in implementation, given their networks of resource persons at the grassroot level. If CSO participation is to be meaningful, those involved must be adequately informed and facilitated to participate. CSOs and indeed all public officials involved in health planning must be aware of the number and type of planning meetings they are to attend in a year, the agenda for these meetings, the relevant documents that facilitate these meetings, and must be given all

50.AGHA-CSO Meeting, supra note 30.

51.FGD Participant, Kitgum.

52.Id.

120

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

the relevant information in adequate time to prepare for these meetings. This is what active and informed participation entails otherwise participation will amount to mere representation that does not influence decision making.

4. Challenges Faced.—Challenges to effective CSO participation cited included lack of information, lack of coordination amongst CSOs, inadequate skills to advocate and lobby, and mistrust between CSOs and public/civil servants. In order to achieve meaningful participation, there must be transparency and accountability to build trust, proper and timely communication, training in lobbying and advocacy skills, and an emphasis on the principal of participatory methods where civil society is represented and consulted at all levels. The existing mechanism of public engagement must be strengthened and based on participatory approaches, which includes routine meetings, joint planning right from the onset of the planning cycle, and joint implementation.

C. Access to Information

Access to health related information is a crucial aspect of meaningful participation. The majority of respondents reported that there was some access to information either on request or voluntarily, but capacity constraints such as inadequate or lack of human resources, infrastructure, equipment and logistics were also identified to be hampering the flow of information. Respondents also stated that some stakeholders guard the information in a jealous manner, instead of sharing it broadly with others. There is certainly a strong need for the districts to develop clear information dissemination strategies, ideally leveraging the existing mechanisms. FGD respondents from Bushenyi said, “The government should always give information, and we shouldn’t struggle for the information. For example, the district has not bothered to tell us that at such a health centre there are ARVs so that people can go there for treatment.”53

Staff in the health facilities did not have adequate access to relevant policies such as Human Resource and Financial Policies, National Health Policy and the Health Sector Strategic Plan. Inaccessibility to relevant policies and documents can contribute to poor conceptualization and misinterpretation of issues, which will greatly impact on the quality of service delivery. Health sector staff and stakeholders must be oriented on the existing policies that affect their work.

53. FGD, Bushenyi.

2011]

Civil Society Participation in Uganda’s Health Sector

121

V. DISCUSSION OF FINDINGS

Uganda has embraced a participatory approach to developing plans and budgets for the health sector. Considerable progress has been made in implementing the decentralization strategy envisioned in the Constitution and National Health Policy. However, some components of the right to participation in health-related decision making have not been fully embraced. The human rights approach to participation requires the active and informed participation of individuals and communities in health decisions that affect them. Government is obliged to take steps to facilitate the effective participation of communities, by ensuring the right to seek and receive health-related information, the right to express views which are respected, and the right to basic health education.

The findings of this survey however suggest that the Ministry of Health has not taken adequate steps to ensure the active and informed participation of individuals and communities in health decisions. Not much has been done to educate the public, District Council Members, and CSOs about the right to participation in planning, the right to seek and receive health planning information, and the right to express views that are respected. This is manifested by the fact that many health facility staff do not have access to basic planning documents such as the HSSP, NHP, as well as by the mistrust between CSOs and District Health Planners. Health planning is largely seen as the role of health planners and a few selected stakeholders. Moreover, limited information sharing and lack of capacity also undermines the ability of CSOs to meaningfully participate, magnified by the uncoordinated representation in planning even where there is an opportunity. These factors have been major obstacles to meaningful participation.

A. Lack of Active and Informed Involvement

Although the structures for CSO representation at the national level have been set out through processes such as HPAC and its working groups, these structures have not yet been developed at the district level. Some CSOs have participated in meetings at the Districts but have not been officially elected by other CSOs as their representatives. The number and type of meetings to be attended by CSOs has also not been defined. In some districts, CSO involvement in budgeting comes too late because by the time they get involved, decisions about the budgets have already been made.

122

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

B. Limited Information Sharing

Participation requires that information should be available and not withheld if tangible health-related decisions are to be taken. Yet, not much has been done to educate the planners at the district and CSOs about the importance of information sharing in health- related decision making. Joint planning at the districts is limited by the lack of trust between CSOs and District Health Officials and the exchange of allegations of corruption. As a result, there is limited information sharing between CSOs and District Health Officials. CSOs and DHOs should share information that will facilitate the plans for the communities that they serve.

C. Lack of Technical Capacity

Another limitation affecting participation is the lack of technical capacity on the part of some CSOs. At both the district and national level, some CSO representatives lack the capacity to understand technical issues of health policy planning including health priorities and strategies in the MDGs, PEAP, the NHP and the HSSP. Moreover, CSOs are diverse, understaffed, and poorly facilitated. This limits their ability to fully participate in health sector planning. Yet where information is guarded jealously, CSOs will remain under capacitated, and unable to engage in meaningful discussions with health planners.

D. Uncoordinated Representation

There are no set criteria or guidelines for CSO representation in health sector planning both at the national and district level. Therefore, there is a general problem of uncoordinated representation. At the national level, CSOs are selected on the basis of prominence and visibility of their leadership.

Additionally, inadequate feedback mechanisms hinder civil society representatives from truly representing broader civil society in health sector planning and decision making. CSO representatives are supposed to bring information back to their constituents—some are better at this than others. However, because CSOs at health planning processes are not representative of all the CSOs, there is a problem of giving feedback to those they are supposed to represent. This limits not only the ability of the represented to understand their role in health sector planning, but also raises the question as to who is being represented. The process for choosing these representatives is not clear or transparent, which also contributes to concerns within the sector about how they are being represented at the policy level. All this is magnified by the fact that

2011]

Civil Society Participation in Uganda’s Health Sector

123

coordination of civil society is still weak in Uganda, and CSOs still do not have a unified voice while representing others. This is largely because CSOs have varied mandates and are diverse except for the UAC Partnership committee. Without a common forum for consultation and providing feedback, there is a risk that the few CSOs involved in health sector planning represent only very limited constituencies or interests.

VI. CONCLUSION

A policy and legal framework for public participation in planning and governance exists in Uganda. But this framework does not comprehensively embrace a human rights perspective. This is because Government officials in the health sector, particularly at the district level, have not taken steps to facilitate effective participation of communities. Not much has been done to ensure the right to seek and receive health- related information, and the right to express views which are respected. As a result, health planners and CSOs have not understood the need for CSO engagement and therefore information sharing. This is magnified by the fact that CSOs remain uncoordinated, diverse and with varying interests. The district level planners need to take steps to actively engage CSOs in planning by providing them with information on time, and engaging them at the onset of the planning process. CSOs on their part must devise means of coordinating their activities so as to ensure that representation is democratic, feedback to others is provided, and that they have a unified voice. CSO representatives must also enhance their capacity to understand technical issues in health planning to enable them to meaningfully influence health decision making.

124

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

HUMAN RIGHTS-BASED ACCOUNTABILITY FOR

HEALTHCARE IN UGANDA

Tenywa Aloysius Malagala*

ABSTRACT

The promotion of the right to the health of the people involves, among other things, the eradication of injustices such as the discrimination and stigmatization of patients by health services providers. This article argues that a human rights-based accountability promotes health as a human right proper to every human being, for which all duty-bearers must be held accountable. It establishes that progress lies in enabling people to have a say in the matters of their health, and in demanding that they be treated with dignity and respect for all their rights. It is shown that the rights-based accountability for health calls for design and implementation of health-related programmes that reflect ten key principles of a right to health analytical framework. These include: (a) the recognition of the international, regional and national human rights laws, norms and standards; (b) Resource constraints and progressive realization; (c) Obligation of Immediate Effect;

(d) Freedoms and Entitlements; (e) Available, Accessible, Acceptable and Quality; (f) Respect, Protect and Fulfil; (g) Non-discrimination, Equality and Vulnerability; (h) accountability; (i) Active and Informed Participation; and

(j)Empowerment and International Assistance and Cooperation.

I.INTRODUCTION

Health is a fundamental human right closely related to the right to life and necessary for the full realization of other human rights, including economic rights.1 Article 1 of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights provides that ‘all human beings are born free and equal in dignity and rights;’ and Article 25(1) provides that ‘Everyone has the right to a standard of living adequate for the health of himself and of his family, including food, clothing, housing and medical care and the necessary social services.’ It follows, therefore, that every human person is entitled to be treated with dignity. Consequently,

* Graduate of the University of Essex. Email:<aloysiusmalagala@yahoo.co.uk>. I thank my supervisor, Professor Paul Hunt and his colleague, Professor Kevin Boyle (RIP) for their insights, erudite supervision and contribution to my training.

1. See, article 6 of the International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights (ICCPR) as interpreted by the Human Rights Committee General Comment No.6 (189).

2011]

Human Rights-based Accountability for Healthcare in Uganda

125

one of the attributes of a life of dignity that everyone aspires to is health, which ‘is a state of complete physical, mental and social well-being and not merely the absence of disease or infirmity.’2 Thus, the right to health means a right to a functioning, effective and integrated health system, which encompasses healthcare and other determinants of health.3 Good health increases the productivity of the population, which is essential for economic development and stability of the nation.4

This article argues that the promotion of the right to health of the people involves more that than provision of medical facilities, prevention, and treatment of ailments. It involves addressing the injustices such as discrimination, stigmatization and abuse of patients by health service providers. The most victims of such abuses are vulnerable members of society in Uganda, such as women, children, lepers and all the victims of neglected diseases. To promote this right to health of the people, it is incumbent on all the duty-holders to design and implement health-related programmes using at least ten key principles of a right to health analytical framework. These include among others: (a) the recognition of the international, regional and national human rights laws, norms and standards; (b) Obligations under the right to health; (c) Resource constraints and progressive realization; (d) Freedoms and Entitlements; (e) Available, Accessible, Acceptable and Quality; (f) Non-discrimination, Equality and Vulnerability;

(g) Accountability; (h) Active and Informed Participation; and (i) Empowerment; and International Assistance and Cooperation.

From 1986 to 1993, the current Ugandan Government under President Yoweri Museveni began a period of rehabilitation and reconstruction of the country. Many multilateral and bilateral donors increased their levels of aid to support the rehabilitation effort. Although improvement of healthcare service-delivery to all people was a key element in many aid programmes, this was not the main concern of the Government. It concentrated instead on hospital rehabilitation as reflected in its national health plan at the time.5 No wonder, therefore, that numerous vertical programmes were created by various donors to fill the policy vacuum. For instance, the United Nations Children’s Fund (UNICEF) had child survival programmes; USAID had family planning; DANIDA—essential drugs; and the World Bank—physical rehabilitation. At this stage, health in Uganda was not treated from a human rights

2.See, the Opening text of the WHO Constitution (1946).

3.See, A.H. Khan, Health and Human Rights, in DAILY STAR, Thursday December 20, 2007.

4.Amartya Sen notes that ‘good health and economic prosperity tend to support each other. Healthy people can more easily earn an income, and people with a higher income can more easily seek medical care, have better nutrition, and have the freedom to live healthier lives.’ Cited in id.

5.See, J.MACRAE,AIDING RECOVERY:THE CRISIS OF AID IN CHRONIC POLITICAL EMERGENCES

(2001).

126

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

perspective either by the Government or by the donors. In fact, even though Uganda’s Poverty Reduction Strategic Plan (PRSP) recognizes health as key to poverty reduction, and thus contributes greatly to the growth and development of people and the country at large. The health sector does not apply a right to health analytical framework to promote health, and not all its policies are fully pro-poor in the true sense of the word.

II. DEFINITION OF HUMAN RIGHTS-BASED ACCOUNTABILITY

A human rights-based accountability for health can refer to a ‘process which requires government to explain and justify how it has discharged its obligations regarding the right to health.’6 It is also an opportunity for the rights-holders ‘to understand how the government and other duty-holders have discharged their right to health obligations.’7 It calls for identification of human rights obligations of all duty-holders in the health sector and making use of the human rights law8 to advance the right to health of all the people in Uganda. It does not seek to punish duty-holders for the violation of the right but redress in view of improving performance to promote the right to health. It is motivated by a conviction that ‘giving people a say in their own future, and demanding that they be treated with dignity and respect for their rights is the way to make progress.’9

III.THE TEN KEY RIGHT TO HEALTH ANALYTICAL FRAMEWORK

A. Human Rights Laws on the Right to Health

Uganda is signatory to a number of international and regional human rights treaties that give rise to the legal basis of the right to health. The human rights obligation to promote the right to health of all people in Uganda stem from these international and regional human rights instruments. These instruments ought to guide Uganda in its legislation and policy on the right to health.

6.See, H. POTTS, ACCOUNTABILITY AND THE RIGHT TO THE HIGHEST ATTAINABLE STANDARD OF HEALTH 13 (2007).

7.Id., at 4-5.

8.See, Toebes Brigit, Human Rights and Health Sector Corruption, in GLOBAL HEALTH AND

HUMAN RIGHTS: LEGAL AND PHILOSOPHICAL PERSPECTIVES (J. Harrington et al, 2009).

9.See, IRENE KHAN, THE UNHEARD TRUTH: POVERTY AND HUMAN RIGHTS 5 (2009).

2011]

Human Rights-based Accountability for Healthcare in Uganda

127

1.International Human Rights Laws.—These include the International Covenant on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights;10 the Convention Against Torture and Other Cruel, Inhuman or Degrading Treatment or Punishment;11 the UN Convention on the Rights of the Child;12 the International Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of Discrimination against Women;13 the International Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of Racial Discrimination;14 and the International Convention on the Protection of the Rights of All Migrant Workers and Members of their Families.15

2.Regional Human Rights Instruments.—These instruments include the African Charter on Human and Peoples’ Rights;16 the African Charter on the Rights and Welfare of the Child;17 and the Protocol to the African Charter on the Rights and Welfare of Women.18 Other regional instruments which recognize the right to health, but to which Uganda is not a signatory, include the European Social Charter,19 and the Additional Protocol to the American Human Rights in the Area of Economic, Social and Cultural Rights.20

However, of all the human rights instruments, it is the ICESCR in particular which articulates most broadly the legal foundation of the right to health by providing

10.Adopted and opened for signature, ratification and accession by the General Assembly resolution 2200A (XXI) of 16 December 1966; entry into force 3 January 1976, in accordance with article 27; hereinafter ICESCR.

11.Adopted by the UN General Assembly on 10 December 1984 (resolution39/46); entered into force on 26 June 1987; hereinafter CAT.

12.Adopted and opened for signature, ratification and accession by the UN General Assembly resolution 44/25 of 20 November 1089; entry into force 2 September 1990, in accordance with article 49; hereinafter CRC, art. 24.

13.Adopted in 1979 by the General Assembly, hereinafter CEDAW, art 11(1) (f) and 12.

14.Adopted and opened for signature and ratification by the General Assembly resolution 2106

(XX)of 21 December 1965; entry into force by 4 January 1969, in accordance with article 19; hereinafter ICERD, art. 5(e)(iv).

15.Adopted by the General Assembly resolution45/153 of 18 December 1990, art. 28.

16.Adopted June 27, 1981, OAU Doc. CAB/LEG/67/3 rev. 5, 21 I.L.M.58 (1982), entered into force October 21, 1986, art. 16.

17.OAU Doc. CAB/LEG/24.9/49 (1990), entered into force Nov. 29, 1999, art. 14.

18.Protocol of 2003, art. 14.

19.Council of Europe treaty, adopted in Turin on 18 October 1961 and revised 1996. The revised Charter came into force in 1999 and is gradually replacing the initial 1961 treaty. See art. 11 (Revised).

20.Protocol of San Salvador, O.A.S. Treaty Series No. 69 (1988), signed November 17, 1988, reprinted in Basic Documents Pertaining to Human Rights in the Inter-American System, OEA/Ser.L. V/II.82 doc.6 rev. 1 art 67 (1992), art. 10.

128

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

that everyone has the right ‘to the enjoyment of the highest attainable standard of physical and mental health.’21 However, the scope and meaning of the right to health has been clearly explained by the Committee on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights that oversees the implementation of the ICESCR.22 While in its General Comment No. 3 the Committee reiterates the state parties’ core obligation to ensure the satisfaction of minimum essential levels of each of the right enunciated in the Covenant, it leaves the minimum essential level of each right to the discretion of the incumbent state party;23 although the Alma-Ata Declaration described as essential ‘primary healthcare’ for the right to health.24

3. The Ugandan National Legal Framework.—The supreme law of Uganda expressly provides for the protection and promotion of human rights of all peoples.25 Accordingly, Uganda is required to take all practical measures to ensure the provision of basic medical services to the entire population, and also to promote access to the underlying determinants of health such as food, water, shelter and proper sanitation.26

Precisely, the Constitution of Uganda upholds the human rights principle of non-discrimination and equality of all peoples. It states that ‘… all Ugandans enjoy rights and opportunities and access to education, health services, clean and safe water, work, decent shelter, adequate clothing, food security and pension and retirement

21.See, art. 12.

22.See, General Comment 14, adopted in May, 2000. The Committee on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights publishes its interpretation of the content of human rights provisions in the form of General Comments on thematic issues. Although these general comments are not legally binding documents, they offer authoritative interpretation of the meaning and content of a particular right for the benefits of the States parties to the ICESCR, in order to assist them implement the covenant; and to help the States parties in fulfilling their reporting obligations. See, The Purpose of General Comments, U.N. Doc. E/1989/22, Annex III (1989), at 87, reprinted in Compilation of General Comments and General Recommendations, adopted by Human Rights Treaty Bodies, U.N. Doc. HRI/GEN/1/Rev.6 (2003), at 8. See also, Fact Sheet No. 16 (Rev.1): Committee on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights, available at <http://www.unhchr.ch/html/menu6/2/fw16.htm#5>.

23.See, General Comment No. 3, ¶ 10.

24.See, The 1978 Declaration of Alma Ata. Although this declaration is not legally binding like human rights treaties, its message on the right to health is widely recognized in other international and regional human rights instruments as above.

25.See, UGANDA CONST. (1995), arts 21 (equality and non-discrimination), 22 (right to life), 33 (right to education), 34 (rights of children), 35 (rights of disabled people), 39 (right to clean and health environment), and 40 (economic rights).

26.See id., Preamble, ¶¶ XX (on medical services), XXI (on clean and safe water), and XXII (on food security and nutrition).

2011]

Human Rights-based Accountability for Healthcare in Uganda

129

benefits.’27 However, as noted by the Uganda Human Rights Commission (UHRC) in its research on health rights, the provisions of this Constitution ‘reflect a commitment but do not amount to an obligation since they fall outside the substantive provisions of the Constitution.

Consequently, ‘the right to health is neither appreciated nor understood within the medical and legal circles.’28 It is not therefore surprising that there appears to be no court decisions existing in which judicial review has taken place on the basis of the right to health and yet enormous incidences of violation of this right have occurred and continue to occur. However, in an effort to actualize the constitutional provisions on the right to health, the Constitution of Uganda and the Local Governments Act29 downsized, restructured and decentralized the services of the Ministry of Health (MoH). Responsibility and authority for delivery of health services were brought down to the level of the district and other local authority entities such as municipalities. Since then, the MoH has introduced a sector-wide approach (SWAP) as the guiding principle in health planning and resource mobilization.30 The intention of the SWAP is to promote transparency, ease securing funds needed for capacity building, and decision-making procurement based on priorities.31

While the Constitution of Uganda and the Local Governments Act are steps in the right direction to promote the right to health in Uganda, they are not enough to guarantee the same. The Uganda National Health Policy of 1999 has provisions on the legal aspects of health but it lacks any enforcement mechanism. Its policy objective is to ‘review and develop the relevant legal instruments that govern and regulate health and health-related activities in the country, in order to ensure that principles and objectives of this policy are attained.’32 In this line, the policy commends the Government to update, formulate, and disseminate laws, regulate and put in place enforcement mechanisms for a number of health-related issues.33 However, the

27.See, National Objectives and Directive Principles of State Policy, objective XIV(b).

28.See, UGANDA HUMAN RIGHTS COMMISSION (UHRC), THE VOICE OF PATIENTS: THE STATE

OF THE RIGHTS OF PATIENTS AND THEIR ATTENDANTS IN UGANDA (2005), at x.

29.Cap. 243.

30.See, MINISTRY OF HEALTH, REPORT OF UGANDA HEALTH FACILITIES SURVEY (UHFS) 1

(2000).

31.Id.

32.See, MINISTRY OF HEALTH, NATIONAL HEALTH POLICY (1999), § 13, available online at <http://www.health.go.ug/docs/NationalHealthPolicy.pdf> (accessed on December 28, 2007).

33.See id. These include laws regarding (a) the development and control of the National Heath Service, (b) traditional medicine, including traditional midwifery, (c) the training in and conduct of medical and health research, (d) the importation, manufacture, use and disposal of hazardous materials,

(e)the protection of employees against health hazards related to their employment in liaison with relevant

130

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

Government of Uganda has not accomplished much. The existing regulatory framework to monitor the health service-delivery in Uganda is inevitably weak. The National Drug Authority, which performs this function, is inefficient due to lack of a clear legal framework. While it is its responsibility to control the procurement and distribution of drugs in Uganda, the National Drug Authority (NDA) is not effective in controlling the sale and buying of medicines in the country. Many people, especially the poor, can buy any medicine from any drug shop without consulting a doctor. This has grave consequences, as people may buy expired drugs or overdose or under dose, as the case may be. This has led to increased antibiotic resistant bacteria in Uganda.

In a 2005 newspaper article, one Kibuuka reported the confiscation of 500 containers of fake drugs by Phoebe Mukasa, the District Drug Inspector.34 He also reported the instant death of John Ssenfuka 17, a resident of Magalagata village in Galiraaya sub-county, after taking the drugs he bought in a shop. A post-mortem carried out in Kayunga hospital indicated that Ssenfuka had taken expired drugs. It is also common for people to buy strong drugs freely from the clinics. There is therefore, probably, a need for some positive health laws in the country to regulate a number of health-related issues, including the provision and maintenance of the determinants of health. Uganda needs laws relating to various aspects of health such as epidemic diseases like ebola, the prevention of malaria, eye surgery, quality of food, women and children’s health, etc require legal regulation. Similarly, laws that deal directly with the rights of patients are urgently required.35

4. Other Jurisdictions.—Uganda needs to emulate the examples of other national constitutions that categorically defend and promote the right to health. For instance, article 27 of the Constitution of South Africa clearly recognizes the right to health. It reads:

organizations, (f) food hygiene and safety, (g) Government Notice No. 245 of 1961 that governs and regulates the Religious Medical Bureaux, (h) Environment Health Control, (i) consumer protection, especially for the vulnerable groups including women, children and persons with disability, and (j) stigmatization and denial due to ill health or incapacity.

34.See, L. Kibuuka, Drugs Authority Raids Fake Shops in Kayunga, THE NEW VISION, December 10, 2005.

35.See, MINISTRY OF HEALTH, HUMAN RESOURCES FOR NATIONAL HEALTH POLICY (2006), available online at <http://www.health.go.ug/docs/HRH_Policy_Final.pdf> (accessed December 28, 2007). The Policy invites the Government of Uganda to ensure that roles, mandates and responsibilities of various bodies dealing with regulation, standards and maintenance of ethical conduct are clearly defined, and regularly communicated; [and also to] ensure that effective legal and monitoring mechanisms for dealing with patient/client grievances are in place, while deploying appropriate advocacy to educate patients/clients on their rights.

2011]

Human Rights-based Accountability for Healthcare in Uganda

131

a.Everyone has the right to have access to healthcare services, including reproductive healthcare; sufficient food and water; and social security, including, if they are unable to support themselves and their dependants, appropriate social assistance must be accessible.

b.The State must take reasonable legislative and other measures, within its available resources, to achieve the progressive realization of each of these rights.

c.No one may be refused emergency medical treatment.

Such clear provisions on the right to health in the national constitution make it easy for the victims whose rights have been violated to be defended in the courts of law. Already, the South African Constitutional Court has recorded at least two cases on the right to health.36 In the Soobramoney case,37 the court had to decide whether a local hospital had violated the right to healthcare, expressed in article 27 above, by refusing to provide the plaintiff, Mr Soobramoney, with periodical renal dialysis treatment necessary to maintain his life. Unfortunately, the court ruled in favour of the Minister of Health, stressing the need for non-interference of the court in rational decisions taken in good faith by the political organs and medical authorities at both political level in fixing the health budget, and, functional level in deciding upon priorities to be met.38 It, however, raised the profile of the right to health in South Africa.

Article 196 of the 1988 Constitution of Brazil details the right to health in the following words: Health is a right of everyone and a duty of the State, guaranteed by social and economic policies aimed at reducing the risk of illness and other hazards and at universal and equal access to the actions and services for its promotion, protection and recovery. Consequently, the Brazilian courts have been able to defend the right to health. For instance, more often than not in cases involving the State’s denial of access to HIV/AIDS treatment to patients, the courts have often generally interpreted the right to health and ruled against the State and ordered it to provide medical treatment to the public.

36.See, Soobramoney v. Minister of Health Kwazulu-Natal, Const. Court of South Africa, Case CCT 32/97; and Minister of Health v. Treatment Action Campaign, available at <www.concourt.gov.za> (accessed October 20, 2007).

37.Id.

38.Id.

132

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

In Dina Rosa Vieira v. Municipality of Porto Alegre,39 the plaintiff claimed that she was entitled to receive free HIV treatment from the local government as a corollary of her right to healthcare according to article 196 cited above. Although the defendant gave lack of resources as the reason for this, the Supreme Federal Tribunal rejected the defendant’s argument, and found it to have violated the rights to life and healthcare guaranteed in the Brazilian Constitution. The Tribunal ordered the State to provide all treatment needed by the plaintiff.40

In Choose v. Byrne,41 the Supreme Court of New Jersey contested the legality of a statute, which prohibited the medical funding of abortions except where it was medically proved necessary for preserving the woman’s life. The plaintiffs claimed that the denial of medical funds violated the human rights assured by the due process and equal protection clauses of the New Jersey and US Constitutions. The Supreme Court concluded that this statute violated the ‘fundamental right to health under both constitutions.’42

The European Court of Human Rights has given a ruling on non-interference with information related to family planning services and pre-and postnatal care. In

Open Door and Dublin Well Women v. Ireland,43 the European Court of Human rights ruled that there had been an interference with the right of the applicant counselors to impart information and the right of Mrs X and Ms Geraghy to receive information in the event of pregnancy. There was a violation of article 10 of ECHR.44 It is therefore clear that a number of countries take the right to health seriously by putting in place a legal framework to protect and promote it. Why should Uganda be an exception?

5. The Role of the UN Special Rapporteur.—The UN Special Rapporteur on the right of everyone to the highest attainable standard of physical and mental health (the right to health) plays an important role in explicating the legal basis of this right in many of his country mission reports to the UN General Assembly and to the Commission of Human Rights.45 These reports offer a viable source of law and

39.Decision No. RE-271286.

40.Id.

41.Supreme Court of New Jersey, 91 N.J. 287; 450 A. 2d 925, 18 August 1982.

42.Id.

43.See, ECHR, judgment of 29 October 1992, A.246.

44.Id. See also, The Right to Know, Human Rights and Access to Reproductive Health Information, in ARTICLE 19 (S. Coliver ed., 1995), at 329.

45.On 22 April 2002, at the 49th meeting, the Commission on Human Rights in resolution 2002/31, appointed Paul Hunt, as Special Rapporteur on the right of everyone to the highest attainable standard of physical and mental health. He was mandated to gather, request, receive and exchange right

2011]

Human Rights-based Accountability for Healthcare in Uganda

133

guidance on the practical implementation of the right to health.46 For instance, in his report from the Ugandan Mission, 17-25 March 2005, on the issue of neglected disease, he identified key features on the right to health approach to neglected diseases. These included the government’s legal duty to provide access to health information and education for all people, on the prevention and health promoting behaviour, as well as on how to access health services;47 the right of individuals and communities to informed and active participation in health decision-making which affect them48 (which Uganda encourages in the Preamble of its Constitution [Article II(i)] and promotes in practice through involving civil society organizations in the preparation of Uganda’s PRSP/PEAP49 and through its new policy on decentralization in the health sector);50 Uganda’s legal requirement to devise a coherent strategy and a cost plan of action to train and maintain health professionals in the health sector, to alleviate the deprivation of the most disadvantaged communities in remote areas of their right to healthcare services.

The Special Rapporteur also reiterates that the principle of non-discrimination and equal treatment in relation to the right to health has a legal foundation in international law and is an obligation of immediate effect. He encourages Uganda to take measures to ensure that health policies and practices promote equal access to health services, and to integrate a gender-perspective throughout its policies and programmes.51

to health information from all relevant sources; dialogue and discuss possible areas of cooperation with relevant actors, including governments, relevant United Nations bodies, specialized agencies and programmes, in particular the WHO, and the Joint United Nations Programme on HIV/AIDS, as well as non-governmental organizations, and international financial institutions; Report on the Status, throughout the world, of the right to health, including laws, policies, and good practice and obstacles; and make recommendations on appropriate measures that promote and protect the right to health.

46.The Missions he has undertaken include: Mission to Uganda, 17-25 March 2005, see E/CN.4/2006/48/Add.2; Mission to Mozambique, December 2003, see E/CN.4/2005/51/Add.2; Mission to Peru, June 2004, see E/CN.4/2005/51/Add.3; Mission to Romania, August 2004, see E/CN.4/2005/51/Add.4; Mission to the World Trade Organization, 16-23 July 2003 and 27-28 August 2003, see E/CN.4/49/Add.1.

47.See, E/CN.4/2006/48.Add.2, ¶¶ 33 and 34.

48.See, E/CN.4/2006/48.Add2, ¶ 36.

49.See, PEAP 2000, summary and objectives, at 12; PRSP, Resource Allocation to the Health Sector in Uganda, Paper No. 7, 2004, at 16.

50.See, Village Health Committees (Health Centres I to IV), in the HSSP of Uganda’s PRSP.

51.See, Report of the Special Rapporteur on the Right to Health Mission to Uganda, 17-25 March 2005 (E/CN.4/2006/48/Add.2) ¶ 54.

134

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

B. Uganda’s Legal Obligations under the Right to Health

Like any other State that has ratified these binding international human rights instruments, Uganda has an obligation to ensure the right of every one to the enjoyment of the highest attainable standard of health.52 There are mainly three types of obligations for Uganda under these instruments. These are: respect, whereby it must refrain from directly or indirectly interfering with people’s right to the enjoyment of the highest standard of physical and mental health;53 protection, whereby through legislation it provides laws that prevent third parties such as corporations or investors from interfering with people’s enjoyment of the right to health;54 and fulfilment, for instance, by taking positive and effective measures to facilitate the progressive realization of all human rights in general, and the right to health in particular. The obligation to ‘respect’ requires a State to refrain from actions that endanger the health of an individual, as explained by Bothe.55 In a way, and according to Toebes, the obligation to respect is a ‘negative obligation’ for the State.56 On the same point, Eide also had the following to say:

The obligation to respect requires the State, and thereby all its organs and agents, to abstain from doing anything that violates the integrity of the individual or infringes on his or her freedom, including the freedom to use the material resources available to that individual in the way she or he finds best to satisfy the basic needs.57

It is incumbent on the Uganda Government to provide access to healthcare facilities and to health-related information for the individual. At the same time, it is Uganda’s obligation not to infringe on an individual’s health, in the ‘field of environmental health

52.UN Doc. A/60/348, at 7.

53.The right to health is violated when government agents torture people physically or mentally, as it has been reported in many instances by the Uganda Human Rights Commission Reports.

54.For instance, a number of investors (international or national) may dispose of industrial wastage that unless caution is taken, can be hazardous to people’s health.

55.See, Bothe Michael, Les Concepts Fondamentaux du Droit à la Santé: Le Point de Vue Juridique, in LE DROIT À LA SANTÉ EN TANT QUE DROIT DE L’HOMME (René-Jean Dupuy ed., 1979), at 14.

56.See, C.A.B. TOEBES, THE RIGHT TO HEALTH AS A HUMAN RIGHT IN INTERNATIONAL LAW

312 (1999).

57.See, A.EIDE,THE NEW INTERNATIONAL ECONOMIC ORDER AND THE PROMOTION OF HUMAN

RIGHTS (1987), UN Doc.E/CN.4/Sub.2/1987/23, July 1987, § 67.

2011]

Human Rights-based Accountability for Healthcare in Uganda

135

and physical integrity.’58 In short, Uganda’s obligation to respect the right to health and the underlying determinants of health involves respect for equal access to healthcare facilities by all people, especially in remote and unprivileged areas,59 respect for equal access to family planning services and pre and postnatal care, respect for equal access to water and sanitation, abstention from environmental and industrial policies detrimental to health, abstention from traditional practices detrimental to health and information on such practices, non-interference with the provision of healthcare, healthcare related services, such as water and sanitation, or information on water and sanitation and non-interference with environmental and industrial health-related information.

Uganda’s legal obligation not to discriminate in the provision of access to healthcare and underlying determinants of health also includes actions that have the intention or effect of nullifying or impairing the equal enjoyment or exercise of the right to health. Discrimination can occur mainly if all people do not equally access safe and portable water, adequate sanitation, a healthy environment, health education, adequate supply of food, nutrition, and adequate housing. The obligations to protect and to fulfil are of a positive nature. Both require the Uganda Government to take certain measures to protect and assist its people realize their rights. According to Eide, the obligation to protect requires the State and its agents to take ‘measures necessary to prevent other individuals or groups from violating the integrity, freedom of action, or other human rights of the individual—including the prevention of infringement of the enjoyment of his material resources.’60 Hoof Van is more specific when he argues that the obligation to protect means ‘to take steps—through legislation or otherwise—which prevent or prohibit others (third persons) from violating recognized rights or freedoms.’61 Uganda is under a legal obligation to protect citizens against certain practices imposed by private healthcare providers, traditional healers, in order to safeguard the quality and

58.TOEBES, supra note 56, at 313.

59.The reporting practice of ICESCR mentions people living in remote rural areas (the minorities and indigenous populations, women, children, the elderly, the mentally ill, disabled persons, persons with HIV/AIDS, and drug and alcohol addicts) as those usually denied access to healthcare facilities. See, TOEBES, supra note 56, at 116.

60.EIDE, supra note 57.

61.See, G.J.H. Van Hoof & K.D.V. Mestdagh, Mechanisms of International Supervision, in

SUPERVISORY MECHANISMS IN INTERNATIONAL ECONOMIC ORGANIZATIONS (P. Van Dijk ed., 1984), at 106. See also, Article 12 of the ICESCR; General Comment No. 3, 1990, ¶¶ 3, 4, and 7; and the Limburg Principles on the Implementation of the International Covenant on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights, UN Doc. E/CN.4/1987/17, ¶¶ 17 and 18.

136

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

the accessibility of the healthcare services provided.62

However, most important of all, Uganda has a core legal obligation to ensure the satisfaction of, at the very least, the minimum essential levels of each right enunciated in the Covenant, including essential primary healthcare.63 The following sum up the core legal obligations of Uganda’s right to health, according to General Comment No.14:

(a)obligation to ensure the right of access to health facilities, goods and services on a non-discriminatory basis, especially for vulnerable or marginalized groups;

(b)obligation to ensure access to the minimum essential food which is nutritiously adequate and safe, to ensure freedom from hunger to everyone;

(c)obligation to censure access to basic shelter, housing and sanitation, and an adequate supply of safe and clean water;

(d)obligation to provide essential drugs, as from time to time defined under the WHO Action Programme on Essential Drugs;

(e)obligation to ensure equitable distribution of all health facilities, goods and services; and

(f)obligation to adopt and implement a national public health strategy and plan of action, on the basis of epidemiological evidence, addressing health concerns of the whole population; the strategy and plan of action shall be devised, and periodically reviewed, on the basis of a participatory and transparent process; they shall include methods, such as rights health indicators and benchmarks, by which progress can be closely monitored; the process by which the strategy and plan are devised , as well as their content, shall give particular attention to all vulnerable or marginalized groups.64

It is Uganda’s legal obligation to establish an integrated health system responsive to local priorities, according to the report on the Uganda Mission by the UN Special Rapporteur on the right to health.65 Such a system should be flexible enough

62.TOEBES, supra note 56, at 328.

63.See, CORE OBLIGATIONS:BUILDING A FRAMEWORK FORECONOMIC,SOCIALAND CULTURAL

RIGHTS (Chapman and Russell eds., 2002), especially the different articles on the minimum core obligations under each of the rights recognized in the Covenant. See also, D. Bilchiz, Giving Social- Economic Rights Teeth: The Minimum Core and its Importance, 118S.AFR.L.J.(2002), at 484 (defending the principle of minimum core obligation based on the moral principles of priority and basic needs).

64.See, General Comment No.14, ¶ 43.

65.See, Report of the Special Rapporteur, supra note 51, ¶¶ 55, 59.

2011]

Human Rights-based Accountability for Healthcare in Uganda

137

to cater for neglected diseases, outbreaks of communicable diseases (e.g. HIV/AIDS, tuberculosis, and malaria).

C. Resource Constraints and Progressive Realization of the Right to Health

It is true that the right to health cannot be realized immediately and overnight because of resource constraints and time needed to put the infrastructure in place. However, the progressive realization principle in the ICESCR recognizes the limits of availability of resources. The ICESCR cannot absolve Uganda for not advancing the right to health on grounds of limited resources. It imposes an immediate obligation on Uganda to ensure that it constantly moves towards improving the health and well-being of its people. Uganda must take deliberate, concrete and targeted steps towards the full realization of the right to health of the people under its jurisdiction. Many advocates of the right to health place great emphasis on developing indicators and benchmarks as tools to monitor and account for the progressive realization of the right to health. General Comment No. 14 stresses the same.66

The UN Special Rapporteur on the right to health is very explicit about the use of indicators in his 2003 and 2004 reports to the Committee on Human Rights and the General Assembly. His 2006 report to the Human Rights Commission is particularly important for it sets out a framework for considering health indicators from a human rights perspective. He lays emphasis on the importance of health indicators, but warns that they should be disaggregated on grounds such as sex, race and ethnicity. He specifies three types of indicators: structural, process and outcome.67

D. Obligation to Seek International Assistance

It is Uganda’s obligation to seek international assistance and cooperation in order to access more resources needed to achieve the progressive realization of the right to health.68 Nevertheless, other states have an international obligation under articles 55

66.See, General Comment No.14, ¶¶ 57-58.

67.See, Reports of the Special Rapporteur on the Right to Health to the General Assembly (2003) A/58/427; (2004) A/59/422; and to the Commission on Human Rights (2006) E/CN.4/2006/48.

68.See, P. Hunt, Using Rights as a Shield, in 6 HUM. RTS L. & PRACTICE (2002) (encouraging developing countries to use the Covenant to demand international assistance from the developed States).

See also, O.FERRAZ &J.MESQUITA,THE RIGHT TO HEALTH AND THE MILLENNIUM DEVELOPMENT GOALS

IN DEVELOPING COUNTRIES: A RIGHT TO INTERNATIONAL ASSISTANCE AND COOPERATION 12 (2006); S.

SKOGLY, BEYOND NATIONAL BORDERS: STATES’ HUMAN RIGHTS OBLIGATIONS IN INTERNATIONAL

COOPERATION (2006), at 17-18 (observing that although the debate on whether there is a right to

138

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

and 56 of the UN Charter, to cooperate in the development and realization of all human rights.69 In particular, in order to abide by the international obligation in relation to article 2(1) of the ICESCR, states parties have to aid Uganda in promoting the right to health whenever Uganda puts that request to them. They are under an obligation at all times not to impose embargoes or similar measures that may restrict Uganda’s supply of adequate medicines and medical equipment (in line with General Comment No. 14).70 What if those other countries also have resource constraints and hence may not be in position to help Uganda? To such a question, one could argue, like UN Special Rapporteur Passim, that these countries should endeavour to help Uganda realize at least the minimum core obligation relating to the right to health as a matter of duty of international assistance and cooperation.71

The donor community deserves credit for supporting Uganda’s health sector. The Health Policy Statement 2003/04 acknowledged that donors contributed 81 per cent of the 2003/04 development health budget that is managed through a sector-wide approach. However, as noted by the UN Special Rapporteur on the right to health, there is still a ‘wide gap between the cost of a national minimum health care package in Uganda and the funds that are presently made available for this purpose.’72 According

international assistance and cooperation is not yet concluded, all countries, rich and poor, have obligations in their foreign relations to the extent that they influence the enjoyment of human rights for individuals in other countries).

69.For more detailed information on extra-territorial, trans-boarder or trans-national obligations, see S. Skogly, The Obligation of International Assistance and Cooperation in the International Covenant on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights, in HUMAN RIGHTS AND CRIMINAL JUSTICE FOR THE

DOWNTRODDEN: ESSAYS IN HONOUR OF EIDE (Morten Bergsmo ed., 2003); R. Künnemann,

Extraterritorial Application of the International Covenant on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights, in

EXTRATERRITORIAL APPLICATION OF HUMAN RIGHTS TREATIES (F. Coomans & M.T. Kamminga eds, 2004); Magdalena Sepulveda, The Nature of the Obligations under the International Covenant on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights, INTERSENTIA (2003); and Koen De Feyter, World Development Law, INTERSENTIA (2001).

70.General Comment 14, ¶ 39 concludes: “… States parties have to respect the enjoyment of the right to health in other countries and to prevent third parties from violating the right in other countries

... States should facilitate access to essential health facilities, goods and services in other countries, whenever possible, and provide the necessary aid when required … to ensure that the right to health is given due attention in international agreements … that their actions as members of international organizations take due account of the right to health. Accordingly, States parties that are members of international financial institutions pay greater attention to the protection of the right to health in influencing the lending policies, credit agreements and international measures of these institutions.”

71.See, D. Lyons, The Correlativity of Rights and Duties, 4 NÔUS (1970), at 44-55. If the recipient countries have a right to international assistance and cooperation, then the more developed nations have a corresponding duty.

72.See, Report of the Special Rapporteur, supra note 51, ¶ 74.

2011]

Human Rights-based Accountability for Healthcare in Uganda

139

to the Health Sector Strategic Plan, US $28 per person per year is needed to finance Uganda’s national minimum health care package. This is too little according to the WHO’s Report of the Commission on Macroeconomics and Health which puts US$30 to $40 per person per year as minimum financing to cover essential health interventions for a low-income country like Uganda.73 Uganda’s public expenditure from both the Government and donors is only US$9 per person per year, in addition to US$7 per person per year from households and employers.74 No wonder a UN report described Uganda as ‘a basket case in chronic under-financing of the health sector.’75 This under- funding of the health sector stifles the HSSP priorities, including reproductive services, human resources and health infrastructure.

E. Freedoms and Entitlements

Like other human rights, the right to health contains the freedom to make decisions about one’s own health’76 including the right to consent before medical treatment and the right not to be discriminated against. It contains entitlements that include the existence of ‘a health system protection,’77 which provides a minimum level of access to water and sanitation, and health care.

F. Available, Accessible, Acceptable and Quality

The right to health analytical framework requires that all health care services, goods and facilities be made available, accessible and culturally responsive to the health needs of the people concerned. In most African countries, including Uganda, information on sexual and reproductive health is largely unavailable. Hunt et al have explained that it is the practice in many countries for sexual and reproductive services to be ‘geographically inaccessible to communities living in rural areas, or it is provided in a form that is not culturally acceptable to indigenous peoples and other non-dominant groups.’78 Accessibility and the cost of health care services may be an issue in

73.See, WHO, REPORT OF THE COMMISSION ON MACROECONOMICS AND HEALTH (2001), ¶ 16.

74.Id.

75.OFFICE OF THE UN RESIDENT COORDINATOR, UGANDA: PROMISE, PERFORMANCE AND CHALLENGES: ATTAINING THE PEAP AND MDGS 50 (2003).

76.See, POTTS, supra note 6, at 4.

77.Id.

78.See, Paul Hunt et al, The Right to the Highest Attainable Standard of Health, in OXFORD

TEXTBOOK OF PUBLIC HEALTH (R. Detel et al eds, 2009), at 344.

140

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

determining the extent to which women in poor conditions can seek care.79 It is also true that the quality and outcome of care can influence women’s decision whether or no to seek it. Therefore, all the conditions are vital in tackling maternal and infant mortality and in the general promotion of the right to health.

G. Non-discrimination, Equality and Vulnerability

The right to health analytical framework is particular on the issue of non-discrimination, equality and vulnerability. All policies, programmes and projects that aim for the right to health must avoid discriminatory tendencies. As Hunt et al have pointed out, ‘stigmatization and discrimination heighten people’s vulnerability to ill health.’80 In the absence of accurate information about a disease, myths, misconceptions and fears may accrue around victims who eventually shun ‘diagnosis, delay in seeking treatment and hide the diseases from the family, employers and the community at large.’81 Victims of neglected diseases can end up becoming physically disabled. There are socioeconomic consequences for the victims of discrimination and stigmatization, which the WHO has indicated, may include ostracism, rejection and abandonment.82 A study carried out by Coreil et al concluded that women disfigured by lymphatic filariasis sometimes experience more social discrimination than men.83 The state has a duty to ensure that there are health-related laws and policies to fight discrimination and unequal treatment.

H. Active and Informed Participation

The right to health analytical framework requires that all stakeholders in health matters be given a chance to participate actively and in an informed manner in all health policy- making processes. The right to participation is recognized in international human rights law as one of the core human rights principles.84 Hunt et al have argued that ‘while it

79.UNITED NATIONS MILLENNIUM PROJECT, WHOS GOT THE POWER? REPORT OF THE TASK FORCE ON CHILD HEALTH AND MATERNAL HEALTH (2005).

80.See, supra note 78, at 9.

81.Id.

82.See, WHO, A HUMAN RIGHTS APPROACH TO TUBERCULOSIS 12 (2001).

83.See, COREIL ET AL, SUPPORT GROUPS FOR WOMEN WITH LYMPHATIC FILARIASIS IN HAITI

42 (2003).

84.See, Article 25 of the International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights; General Comment 25; Articles 8 (on Freedom of Association), 13 (on Education), and 15 (on Cultural Life) of the International Covenant on Economic Social and Cultural Rights. The 1986 UN Right to Development and

2011]

Human Rights-based Accountability for Healthcare in Uganda

141

is not suggested that affected communities should participate in all the technical deliberations that underline policy formulation, their participation can help to avoid some of the top-down, technocratic tendencies often associated with old-style development plans and policy implementation.’85

Participation builds people’s capacity to demand their rights and positively influences the enjoyment of the right to health.86 Provisions must be made to sensitize the masses and enlist their support. Village health teams in Uganda are a good example of effective participation in the promotion of the right to health. The teams are formed by villagers who receive basic training and are deployed to help in the identification of local health needs and form grassroots delivery mechanisms, including giving advice and the administration of medicine where possible. However, the government must provide resources and support to these vehicles in order to ensure effective participation.87 Front Line (the International Foundation for the Protection of Human Rights Defenders) argues that:

[i]ndividuals, groups and communities hold a human right to be involved in decision-making, planning and implementation processes affecting their ESCR and are entitled to information that enables the decision-making process to be meaningful. It follows that states and non-state actors, particularly development agencies have a duty to enable people affected by a development activity to participate in ways capable of transforming their social, political and economic conditions.88

I. Empowerment

The outcome of empowerment is self-determination and full actualization even in matters of health. People should able to take control of their health. Empowerment as a constitutive element in a human rights-based accountability for health can be based on Sen’s model of substantive freedoms, which are both the primary end and the means of development.89 He looked at substantive freedoms as involving a process in which

the 1993 Vienna Declaration and Programme of Action have clear provisions on participation.

85.See, Hunt et al, supra note 78.

86.Id.

87.Id.

88.See, The Right to Participation, available at <http://www.frontlinedefenders.org/node/701> (last accessed 18 August 2009).

89.See, AMARTYA SEN, DEVELOPMENT AS FREEDOM (1999).

142

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

freedom of action and decisions must be allowed; and where people have opportunities and capabilities, for instance, to escape premature mortality, preventable morbidity or involuntary starvation,90 all of which need empowerment if people are to achieve substantive freedoms to live a life they have reason to value.91

J. Monitoring and Accountability

According to Yamin, accountability is a central feature of any rights-based approach to health because it converts passive beneficiaries into claims–holders and identifies states and other actors as duty-bearers that can be held responsible for their discharge of legal, and not merely, moral obligations.92 She argues that while national authorities have the primary obligation to realize the right to health, ‘donor states and other actors have parallel obligations’93 and should be held accountable. She further maintains that both ‘[g]overnments and donor states alike should be held accountable for ensuring structural and institutional measures to prevent de facto discrimination in health programmes, including the use of disaggregated indicators that provide incentives to consider distributional effects and not merely aggregate advances.’94

Hunt et al have highlighted that ‘accountability mechanisms provide rights- holders (individuals and groups) with an opportunity to understand how duty-bearers have discharged their obligations, and it also provides duty-bearers (e.g ministers and officials) with an opportunity to explain their conduct.’95 Thus, monitoring and accountability encourage the effective use of resources, since they help to ‘ensure that health policies, programmes and practices are meaningful to those living in poverty.’96

In summary, any effort aimed at the promotion of the right to health must be respectful of the above ten elements of the right to health analytical framework. Hunt et al caution that ‘states are required to conform to the key features as a matter of binding law. Moreover, they are to be held to account for the discharge for their right- to-health responsibilities arising from these legal obligations.’97

90.Id.

91.Id., at 18.

92.See, A.E. Yamin, Beyond Compassion: The Central Role of Accountability in Applying a Human Rights Framework to Health, in 10 HEALTH & HUM. RTS J. (2008), at.1.

93.Id.

94.Id., at 13.

95.Hunt et al, supra note 78, at 347.

96.Id., at 338.

97.Id.

2011]

Human Rights-based Accountability for Healthcare in Uganda

143

IV. APPLYING A HUMAN RIGHTS-BASED ACCOUNTABILITY FOR

HEALTH IN UGANDA

A human rights accountability to promote health can be considered at both the macro and micro levels. First of all it is important to realize that health is a human right with its foundation in international human rights law which regulates States’ obligations and people’s entitlements. Thus, all States are obliged to promote health as a human right under international human rights law, which bases itself on international treaties, which the States sign and ratify, and on international conventions and various mechanisms that operate in the UN and at the national level.98

At the macro level, a human rights accountability for health prescribes that Uganda provides adequate funding for health; that Ugandapromotes non-discrimination and equity in accessing health facilities; provides communication, transport, roads and ambulances; controls communicable diseases such as tuberculosis, Malaria, and HIV/AIDS; that Uganda tackles environmental issues such as air pollution (due to dust, noise, industrial toxic gas); Uganda takes seriously the issue of neglected diseases; that Uganda fights maternal and infant mortality; that Uganda enacts a health law; creates laws regulating the procurement and distribution of drugs and other medical equipment; cares for the elderly; trains, recruits and retains health professionals in the country; and that Uganda promotes all other determinants of health.

The micro level is when human rights are considered as a conceptual system that analyses and guides the process of realizing the right to health, other than naming and shaming States that violate human rights. At the micro level, a human rights accountability for health adopts a critical evaluation of the relationship between the healthcare providers and the patients. It requires Uganda to examine the efficacy of the health laws in addressing such matters as discriminatory practices in the provision of healthcare services; the approach requires Uganda to provide accurate healthcare information to the people, about when and where to turn for appropriate and timely healthcare; and at micro level delays in receiving care at the healthcare facility. It tackles rights-based problems, including the dismissive attitude of healthcare providers, the high market prices for hospital equipment; healthcare insurance and traditional health care providers.

The human rights-based accountability for health calls for all stakeholders in the promotion of the right to health to consider in the highest esteem, both the process and human interactions that are so crucial to the full realization of this right. Thus,

98. See, L.P. Freedman, Using Human Rights in Maternal Mortality Programs: From Analysis to Strategy, in 75 INTL J. GYN. & OBST. (2001), at 51 & 53.

144

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

dignity in health concerns both being free from avoidable diseases and the way individuals, communities and societies engage in the process of obtaining and maintaining the highest attainable standard of health.99 At both the macro and micro levels, human rights principles guide the analysis, design, implementation, monitoring and evaluation of health-related programmes.

V. THE RIGHT TO HEALTH IN UGANDA

The right to health in Uganda is provided for under the Uganda Poverty Reduction Strategic Plan (PRSP) that was first designed in 1999, as directed by the World Bank and IMF. A desk review of Health Sectors, I and II in the Uganda PRSP reveals a considerable amount of information about the measures taken to implement the right to health in Uganda. On the one hand, Uganda has registered tremendous progress in the design and implementation of programmes, which contribute to the full realization of the right to health. For example, there was a reduction in the HIV prevalence rate from 6.8% in 1999 to 6.2% in 2000. There was also an increase in the number of health facilities. The abolition of user fees in 2001 also led to an increase in health service utilization, especially the out patient department (OPD) attendance from 41% in 1999 to 84% in 2002.

The Uganda Government has also made remarkable progress in its campaigns to control malaria, TB, and measles. Despite improvements, problems remain. Thus, infant, child and maternal mortality rates are still high. A case study done by the Uganda Debt Network in 2003 revealed that infant mortality among the poor is 80% higher than among the non-poor,100 and it remains high now. The quality of healthcare service-delivery is still poor due to lack of qualified staff and there is a shortage of drugs, especially in rural remote areas. The poor are not able to access health facilities. Poor women are less able to access care for the problems associated with childbirth. Generally, the poor outlying rural districts have shown little improvement in basic social and economic conditions. In many areas, particularly the north that was ravaged by conflict, the essential facilities that support livelihoods have still not been restored.101 Investment in social sectors such as education and health, have failed to improve the

99.Id., at 55.

100.See, Uganda Debt Network, The Poverty Reduction Strategy Papers (PRSP) and Resource Allocation to the Health Sector in Uganda (Discussion Paper No. 7, April 2004), available online at <www.eldis.org/static/Doc16789.htm>

101.See, Report of the Special Rapporteur, supra note 51, ¶ 51.

2011]

Human Rights-based Accountability for Healthcare in Uganda

145

overall level of service delivery.102

The Uganda Poverty Eradication Action Plan (PEAP) is widely praised as a comprehensive and realistic poverty-reduction strategy, grounded in the Medium-term Expenditure Framework (MTEF). However, the strategy does not qualify to be pro- poor, as it does not properly follow a human rights-based approach. Despite its recognition of improved health as the key to poverty reduction, ‘the basic health services as presented in the primary health care package and disease control programmes are not poverty focused and do not focus on the poor and most vulnerable members of society.’103

The HSSP ought to have disaggregated data and a detailed discussion on the causes of health inequality and the financial barriers that hinder the poor from accessing healthcare services. It must also articulate the issues of non-communicable diseases and the concerns of disabled persons among the poor communities. The PEAP does not consider health as a fundamental human right. No wonder, therefore, there are no measurable indicators to monitor short-term progress in the implementation of the right to health. A critical evaluation of the PRSP health sector reveals a limited discussion of financial barriers to care, the impoverishing impact of catastrophic illnesses like HIV/AIDS, or accidents. It also reveals the lack of focus on people with disabilities often the poorest of the poor; no discussion on non-communicable diseases such as those caused by smoking,104 together with a failure to address the problem of neglected diseases.

A human rights-based accountability for health obliges the primary healthcare policy to provide for a clear outreach framework for reaching all the communities especially those lacking adequate health facilities. It must provide for the training of healthcare workers, the construction of health units in underserved areas, the development of health services at the community level and the facilitation of effective outreach. This would create an effective platform for launching prevention and control messages and approaches. However, there seems to be little evidence of pro-poor targeting or attempts to adopt a national strategy to meet the needs of the poorest in the health component of the Uganda PRSP. The strategy to improve health services in rural areas in Uganda is not yet viable. Although the HSSP has registered some progress in the provision of health services and the improvement in health infrastructure, the Plan has not achieved one of its primary objectives, that is, achieving 80% of the entire

102. See, KREIMER ET AL,UGANDA POST-CONFLICT RECONSTRUCTION:COUNTRY CASE STUDY

(2000).

103.See, Uganda Debt Network, supra note 100.

104.Id., at 9.

146

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

population having access to health facilities by 2005 was not achieved. Not every sub- district in Uganda (serving approximately 100,000 people) has a health centre staffed by a doctor with a small theatre for operations such as caesarean sections and hernia repair.105

Generally, the health services are still poor especially in remote areas due to understaffing, poor terms and conditions of work, and low salaries which are sometimes delayed. While the trained staff concentrate in urban centres, they lack supervision and because of this, their quality of service is below the average standard.106 To reduce discriminatory tendencies in the health sector, there is a need to make reproductive health services accessible by all people in rural areas. The ministry of Health should provide for an efficient emergency maternal referral system at the health sub-district level. It should also facilitate village health units to render delivery care services to the women who cannot afford hospitals. To achieve this, the HSSP must consider incentives to train and retain skilled health workers107 at these hard-to-reach health units. It must also increase efforts to sensitize communities on the value of the delivery care.

Although it is true that the HSSP in the Uganda PRSP faces a number of challenges (mainly, a gap in funding due to the expenditure ceiling imposed on by MFET and inadequate human resources),108 there is a need for intensive health promotion, education and coordination by all stakeholders. In a country like Uganda where health insurance companies are just coming onto the market, there is need to control those who might be inclined to exclude persons such as the elderly, the disabled, or others with certain diseases, or those who cannot afford to pay, since these companies are after maximizing profits. Charles Bwogi reported that many insurance companies had been excluding coverage for people living with HIV/AIDS despite the fact ‘insurance policies are meant to offer social-health protection to all groups of people.’109 A number of healthcare insurances have appeared in Uganda, including Microcare; OracleMed, a South African-based company; and Health Maintenance

105.Id.

106.See, UPPAP II.

107.Id. The UPPAP II report highlighted lack of adequate qualified staff generally, mainly doctors, anaesthetic staff and laboratory technicians.

108.Id., at 11.

109.See, C. Bwogi, HealthCare Insurance Schemes Taking Shape, THENEWVISION, September 28, 2005 (citing Dipankar Mahaalanobis, Managing Director of Microcare).

2011]

Human Rights-based Accountability for Healthcare in Uganda

147

Organizations (HMOs) like IAA and AAR who offer health insurance products.110 The current Insurance Act,111 which created the Uganda Insurance Commission that regulates health insurances, does not have provisions for regulation of the Health Maintenance Organizations (HMOs).

Unlike the proper insurance companies, the HMOs do not have to deposit one billion Uganda shillings with the Uganda Insurance Commission before registration. The implication of this is that in the case of a big claim or an act of insolvency on part of the HMOs, the client loses out completely.112 Uganda should revise its insurance legislation to include provisions that govern the operation of HMOs, otherwise they should operate as proper insurance companies. The New Vision of 7 June, 2006 reported that the long-awaited social health insurance scheme (SHI) was to start operating in July 2007. However, as it was to target employees of the formal and informal sectors first, the poor and most vulnerable would be left out. According to Dr. Francis Runumi, Commissioner for Health Planning, the social health insurance cover was ‘to start with those who earn salaries from either the formal or informal sector.’113 So could it possibly be maintained that this health insurance scheme is discriminative? Despite the potential environment for the protection and promotion of the right to health in Uganda, the truth of the matter is that a great deal needs to be done before it can be claimed that a right to health exists.

A. The Uganda Ministry of Health and the Right to Health

The Uganda Ministry of Health has its mission as ‘to provide a network of functional, efficient and sustainable health infrastructure for effective health care service delivery to all the people of Uganda, thus bringing about the full realization of the right to health. However, there are serious concerns as to whether this mission is being realized. Among the various reasons is the fact that the Ministry of Health has not fully considered a human rights-based accountability for healthcare in Uganda. This

110.The HMOs have been operating as risk-bearing entities, insurers and healthcare providers whereby they take fees from the clients which they use to pay medical expenses, while retaining what is left at the end of the year as profit to clinics that agree to provide unlimited services for an annual fee to community-based financing schemes.

111.Cap. 213.

112.See, Bwogi, supra note 109.

113.Dr. Francis Runumi, the Commissioner for Health Planning at the Ministry of Health announced that the new scheme would begin on 1 July 2007. He made this announcement on Monday, 5 June, 2006, while presenting a paper on the principles of social health insurance to a stakeholders meeting in Mbale, Uganda.

148

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

accounts for the continued existence of discrimination and stigma among the poor members of society, most especially those suffering from neglected diseases. The poor and the most vulnerable are far from realizing their right to health since not many are yet able to access adequate medical care. The construction of new health centres, and the rehabilitation and upgrading of existing health facilities has not yet been accomplished to satisfy the demand.

The very poor state of the roads up-country worsens accessibility to health units especially when it rains heavily. There are very limited ambulance services, if any at all, to transport the seriously ill patients to higher levels of care. Among the various reasons for this continued occurrence is the lack of sufficient funds available to the Ministry of Health to execute its obligations, as has already been seen above. There is, however, a serious reason accounting for the lack of sufficient funds to the ministry of Health. The Ministry of Finance, Planning and Economic Development (MFPED), supported by IMF and the World Bank, controls the aid that goes to the health sector. It urges that since Uganda depends much on donor aid, further increases in aid will lead to an overvaluation of the Uganda currency and hence the ‘Dutch disease’ effect of aid which will result in inflation, lower growth, and inhibit development of the tradable goods sector.114

In order to prevent this situation, the MFPED places a ceiling on budget expenditures to any ministry and to donor aid to Uganda in general. However, this is an unfounded fear as regards the Ministry of Health expenditure. In fact ‘growth in budget expenditures are necessary to achieve the country’s commitments under the PEAP,’ and moreover, the Ministry of Health can properly absorb more aid without causing inflation in Uganda, since it uses the funds overseas to import drugs and medical equipment which are not manufactured in Uganda. It needs more funds to set up more health facilities in order to combat crises such as HIV/AIDS and other infectious diseases. Sachs has argued—and I concur—that:

Artificial ceilings on health expenditure, in the name of macroeconomic stability, are a false economy. There is no true stability without health, and the Ugandan economy can fully absorb [any] massive increases in foreign grants for health than [what the] donors are likely to make available.115

114.For a detailed explanation of the ‘Dutch Disease,’ see C.S. Adam & D.L. Bevan, Aid, Public Expenditure and the Dutch Disease, 2003, available online at <http://econwpa.wustl.edu/ eps/dev/papers/0409/040927.pdf> (accessed December 18, 2005).

115.J.D. Sachs, Open Letter to the Government of Uganda, THE NEW VISION, 23 May 2002.

2011]

Human Rights-based Accountability for Healthcare in Uganda

149

One might conclude that ‘the IMF, World Bank and Ugandan Finance Ministry have decided that protecting against inflation is more important than protecting people’s lives.’116 The Uganda Debt Network once reported that there were instances where the donors’ funds were rejected by the MFPED, citing macroeconomic concerns.117 However, it is imperative to assert that the link between health status and economic growth is very strong. As Bloom says, ‘a healthy population leads to a productive labour. When people are healthy, they increase their life cycle savings for further investments.’118 The Uganda Government should address the shortage of funds to the health sector by increasing domestic resource mobilization and by appealing to bilateral donors to increase their support to the Ministry of Health. The World Bank cancelled Uganda’s debt worth US$3.764B (about shs. 7 trillion). This is a good practice which should be emulated by other donors. It is assumed that a portion of that money will go a long way in uplifting the standard of health care services in Uganda.

B. Monitoring and Evaluation

The HSSP in the Uganda PRSP used mortality rates and identified process indicators: the DPT3 immunization rate; the percentage of health centres with qualified staff; the percentage of health units without stock outs; and perception of services. It is very important the Government of Uganda makes all efforts to find out whether or not the health strategy benefits the poor and the most vulnerable. The monitoring indicators used to measure progress do not measure the impact of the strategy on the poor people or regions. For instance, the indicators used (e.g. the per capital level and age-specific outpatient department utilization; the percentage of children under one year with DPT3 immunization according to schedule; and the proportion of health centres with minimum staffing norms) do not actually reveal whether the poor and the most vulnerable members of society are benefiting or not from the health strategy.

The Government needs to set up indicators that will measure the percentage of vulnerable people affected by its health strategy. It should aim at having statistical data on the percentage of the population affected by any health intervention in a final report distributed to all stakeholders periodically. Such a report would provide the basis for

116.See, Omaswa, quoted in W. Nyamugasira & R. Rowden, New Strategies, Old Loan Conditions, 2002, available at <http://www.brettonwoodsproject.org/topic/adjustment/ Ugandaanalaysis. pdf> (accessed December 18, 2005).

117.See, Uganda Debt Network, supra note 100, at 8.

118.See, D.E. Bloom, D. Canning, and J. Sevilla, The Effect of Health on Economic Growth: Theory and Evidence (National Bureau of Economic Research Working Paper No. 8587, 2001).

150

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

policy reform and the improvement of health intervention to improve the health situation of the most vulnerable. But in order to monitor Government progress in this direction, it is necessary to have a ‘right to health unit’ or a body that constantly advises, guides and reminds the Government and all the development partners of their commitment to the realization of the right to health in Uganda. The right to health unit that was launched by the Uganda Human Rights Commission in January 2007 is highly commendable and should be supported by the Uganda Government and the international community.

C. Accountability Mechanism

In a human rights-based accountability, rights imply duties and duty demands accountability. This approach identifies duty bearers (the State) who are responsible for ensuring that the right to health is realized. The approach also identifies the poor and the most vulnerable as the rights claimants who hold the States accountable for any failure in their duties. Accountability procedures extend to the recipient governments as well as to the donor community, intergovernmental organizations, international NGOs and to transnational corporations whose actions can violate or promote the right to health of the poor.119

There are a number of proper and effective mechanisms to hold the duty bearers (including donors), accountable for failure to secure programmes that contribute to the progressive realization of the right to health. The Paris Declaration on Aid Effectiveness provides a good example that should be emulated in this regard. At the international level, it established mechanism whereby donors and recipient governments are held mutually accountable to each other.120 At the national level, the Paris Declaration encourages partners and donors to take a joint mutual assessment of the progress made in the implementation of the agreed commitments on aid effectiveness using local mechanisms such as consultative groups.121

In Uganda, there are both judicial and quasi-judicial means that the poor could use to pressurize the duty bearers to bring about progressive realization of the right to

119.See, Paris Declaration on Aid Effectiveness: Ownership, Harmonization, Alignment, Results and Mutual Accountability (2005). This Declaration created strong mechanisms for mutual accountability.

120.Id., ¶ 9.

121.Id., ¶ 50.

2011]

Human Rights-based Accountability for Healthcare in Uganda

151

health. The judicial means include the national courts of law,122 while the quasi-judicial include the Uganda Human Rights Commission, human rights organisations (like Human Rights Network (HURINET), the Uganda Women Lawyers Association (FIDA- U)) and political devices like Parliament. However, there is not much evidence in Uganda to show that the poor are using these mechanisms to hold the State and other duty bearers to account for the little progress made over the years in bringing about the full realization of the right to health. Documented court cases are not available yet. There are very few cases, if any, reported by the Uganda Human Rights Commission regarding the compensation of victims whose right to health is violated, implying that there are no such incidences. An accountability mechanism is not for blame and punishment only. On the contrary, it can lead to the discovery of what does and does not work and why, thereby identifying where improvement is needed.123 Uganda needs to set up a right to health accountability mechanism that will establish which health policies and institutions promote the right to health of the poor and which do not.

Furthermore, there is an urgent need to educate people about their human rights in general and the right to health in particular. They should be made aware of the available complaint mechanisms to resort to in case their human rights are violated, including the right to health. Health education needs to be properly streamlined, and there is need to provide information on prevailing health problems and measures taken to prevent and control them.124 It should also have health activities for parents to help them ensure the proper development of their children. It should also have health education for young people aimed at exposing the dangers of alcohol and drug abuse as well as eating disorders.125 Moreover, health education is found to be one of the most

122.The Constitution of the Republic of Uganda provides for the enforcement of Rights and Freedoms by Courts. Article 50(1) says that any person who claims that a fundamental or freedom guaranteed under this Constitution has been infringed or threatened is entitled to apply to a competent court for redress, which may include compensation; and article 50(2) provides that any person or organization may bring an action against the violation of another person’s or group’s human rights. Article 50(3) provides that any person aggrieved by any decision of the court may appeal to the appropriate court, while clause (4) of the same article requires Parliament to make laws for the enforcement of the rights and freedoms under this Chapter (Chapter 4).

123.See, POTTS, supra note 6, at 5.

124.See, Guidelines, UN Doc. E/1991/23/ SUPPL. No. 3, at 105; UN Doc. E/C. 12/ 1994/W, QUESTION 25, at 14.

125.See, Second Report of the Federal Republic of Germany, UN Doc. E/1986/A/ASS.10, ¶

124.

152

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

effective tools in the fight against HIV/AIDS.126 The curriculum for training health professionals should contain human rights education, including education on the right to health of both the health professionals themselves and those of the patients. It is argued that if health professionals know their human rights and those of the patients, they will be in a better position to contribute effectively to the promotion of the gradual realization of the right to health in Uganda.

Until recently, in Uganda, health education for adolescents, especially on sexual and reproductive health, has been very restricted. It is traditionally a taboo for parents to talk openly about sex in front of their children. Young people were normally left alone to discover by themselves all about this important aspect of human life. Such practices have resulted in a number of problems for the young (including teenage pregnancies that may result in unsafe abortion, early marriages, and street children), all of which have adverse implications for the right to health. The most affected by this lack of sex education are girls and women who become vulnerable to violation from men.

D. Participation

Active participation is one of the major principles in a human rights accountability to promote the right to health. All the stakeholders must take an active part in both the design and implementation of a healthy strategy that affects their lives. It is imperative that any effort to bring about the progressive realization of the right to health considers the importance of achieving health-related objectives and the process by which such objectives are achieved.127 In the Uganda HSSP, the poor do not actively participate in the design, implementation or monitoring of the process aimed at bringing about the realization of the right to health ‘even though UPPAP reports suggest that Health Unit Management Committees (HUMCs) can be used to ensure accountability and monitoring by the community.’128 In this regard, the health component of the Uganda PRSP is discriminatory as far as the right to health of the poor is concerned. Thus, there exists a serious violation of the right to health of the poor.

126.Representative of Netherlands, UN Doc. E/C. 12/1989/SR.15 ¶ 59. The importance of health education for the people was emphasized a long time ago in history. Sigerist maintains that the French philosophers, for example, recommended health education for the people. See, H.E. SIGERIST, MEDICINE AND HUMAN WELFARE 80 (1941); G. ROSEN, A HISTORY OF PUBLIC HEALTH 109 (1993).

127.See, REPORT OF THE UN SPECIAL RAPPORTEUR ON THE RIGHT TO HEALTH, UN DOC A/60/348, submitted in accordance with Commission Resolution 2005/24, at 12.

128.See, Uganda Debt Network, supra note 100, at 8.

2011]

Human Rights-based Accountability for Healthcare in Uganda

153

VI. CIVIL SOCIETY AND A HUMAN RIGHTS ACCOUNTABILITY FOR

HEALTH IN UGANDA

Civil Society Organizations (CSOs) make a great contribution in any development work. They are very innovative in service delivery, building local capacity, and can efficiently and effectively advocate for the poor. However, to be able to play this constructive role in society, CSOs need to work hand in hand with the Government. However, the reality is that the Government of Uganda seems to pay little attention to the role of the private sector (profit and non-profit making), who are often the main health providers for the poor. This is shown by the fact that the Government provides little finance to the private sector. The CSOs should actively participate in the articulation, design and implementation of health-related programmes in Uganda. In Peru, for instance, Local Health Administration Committees (Comites Locales de Administracion de salud, CLAS) participate fully in government health programmes and contribute meaningfully to the progressive realization of the right to health.

Sometimes the challenging political situation in which CSOs operate becomes a hindrance to their work, because the government may perceive their work to be a threat to its policies. It is true that CSOs sometimes act on their own, or in opposition to government ventures, thereby causing tension and conflict. In such a situation, the work of CSOs has a limited impact on public policy and practice. However, it is time to realize that policy engagement can often have a greater impact than contestation and that policy advocacy by CSOs can spur more widespread benefits than their service delivery effort left alone.129 Research has shown that by getting the fundamentals right—assessing the context, engaging policymakers, getting rigorous evidence, working with partners, communicating well—CSOs can overcome key internal obstacles.130

VII. MULTINATIONAL FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS AND A HUMAN RIGHTS ACCOUNTABILITY FOR HEALTH IN UGANDA

Based on the legal obligation of its members to respect, protect and fulfil the right to health, the policies of the World Bank ought to foster the progressive realization of the right to health. However, in Uganda, as we have already seen, funding the Ministry of Health is constrained due to macro-economic concerns of the World Bank and the IMF;

129.See, J. COURT ET AL, POLICY ENGAGEMENT: HOW CAN CIVIL SOCIETY ORGANIZATIONS

BE MORE EFFECTIVE? (2006), at 1, available at <www.odi.org.uk/Rapid> (accessed 4th July 2006).

130.Id.

154

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

yet the World Bank is aware of the interconnectedness between the rights to health, education, and freedom from non-discrimination. According to a 2005 World Bank study:

Mothers’ illiteracy and lack of schooling directly disadvantage their children. Low schooling translates into poor quality of care for children and then higher infant and child mortality and malnutrition. Mothers with more education are more likely to adopt appropriated health-promoting behaviours, such as having young children immunized. Supporting these conclusions are careful analyses of household survey data that account for other factors that might improve care practices and related health outcomes.131

Sometimes the policies of the World Bank and IMF cause a shortage of funds in other areas that are determinants of the right to health, such as the education, clean water, sanitation and adequate housing, in which case these policies lead to a violation of the right to health. By supporting the Uganda PRSP that does not treat health as a human right, the World Bank and IMF also violate the right to health in Uganda. They ought to constructively criticize and influence the redesign of the PRSP to better articulate the right to health concerns.

However, some critics argue that the decision to fix a budget ceiling in Uganda is mainly political. They maintain that the perceived influence of the international financing institutions cannot be proved in Uganda. Nevertheless, they agree that these financial institutions support this policy (of budget ceiling).132 There is great need for these institutions to look beyond macroeconomic stability. The IMF should allow increase in concessional aid, in the form of grants that can have little impact on the macroeconomics of the country. Although, already, the IMF is supporting the call for donors to meet the 0.7% of their gross domestic product and provision of aid over a long-term, it should provide analyzes of how much additional aid could be absorbed by a low-income country such as Uganda, before upsetting a macro-economy of such a country. Otherwise, increased funding to the health sector should be a priority, if the

131.See, WORLD BANK,ENGENDERING DEVELOPMENT THROUGH GENDER EQUALITYINRIGHTS, RESOURCES AND VOICE (2005).

132.See, J. Odaga & P. Lochoro, Budget Ceilings and Health in Uganda, CARITAS UGANDA, January 2006, at iii.

2011]

Human Rights-based Accountability for Healthcare in Uganda

155

right to health is to be promoted in Uganda.133 The international trade practices of pharmaceutical companies may have an adverse effect on the realization of the right to health in Uganda. This is more so when these companies value market perspectives that regard health care as a commodity to be sold like any other good and not as a public good to be distributed to all, including the poor and most vulnerable.

VIII. THE WAY FORWARD

Uganda, like any other State, is obliged ‘to adopt legislation and to take other measures to assure that the health care providers do not disadvantage or exclude individuals or groups.’134 Uganda must design a comprehensive strategy to meet the obligation to fulfil the right to health. It is not enough, for instance, to arrest and imprison drug dealers without a proper education programme for the youth and the public about the dangers of using drugs. Toebes argues that the US authorities violated an obligation to fulfil the right to health.135 The authorities failed to respond adequately to an outbreak of cocaine use in the US by mounting a national health campaign to counteract drug-related morbidity and mortality but only imprisoned drug users which, inter alia, led to increased cases of HIV/AIDS in the prisons.136

Under the obligation to fulfil, Uganda should take measures necessary to ensure that each person within its jurisdiction has opportunities to obtain satisfaction of those needs, recognized in the human rights instruments, which cannot be secured by personal efforts.137 Uganda may implement this obligation ‘progressively’ and to the maximum of its resources.138 This means an obligation to progressively improve the level of healthcare facilities, such as dispensaries, clinics, hospital transport and services. It involves taking concrete and immediate steps to improve the healthcare infrastructure. From a human rights perspective, and according to WHO, the basic essentials of the right to health entail a number of elements. The first is primary healthcare, which includes at least education concerning health problems and the methods of preventing and controlling them. The second is the promotion of food supply and proper nutrition.

133.The Commission for Macroeconomics and Health 2001 recommended an increased flow of donor aid to low income countries, in a sustained, well-targeted, efficient, equitable and transparent manner.

134.See, TOEBES, supra note 56, at 328.

135.See also, B.X. Waltkins et al, Arms Against Illness: Crack Cocaine and Drug Policy in the United States, 2 HEALTH & HUM. RTS (1998), at 48-58.

136.See, TOEBES, supra note 56.

137.Id., at 332.

138.See, Article 2(1) ICESCR.

156

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

The third one is the adequate supply of safe water and basic sanitation and, the fourth covers maternal and child health care, which includes family planning; immunisation against the major infectious diseases. Lastly, it includes the appropriate treatment of common diseases and injuries and the provision of essential drugs.139

In providing these healthcare services to people, the principle of non- discrimination must be upheld.140 That is, there must be equal access to health services by vulnerable groups, and the services ought to be sufficiently available and their quality has to be considered. Thus, the doctors and nurses must be skilled;141 and the equipment and drugs must be adequate for all the people in Uganda.142 Surprisingly, although discrimination may not be expressly rooted in the laws of Uganda, it is exercised in access to healthcare and to the underlying determinants of health (safe drinking water, housing, nutritious food, and a healthy environment).143 Failure to ensure access to safe and adequate drinking water in villages across the country; failure to provide family planning and pregnancy-related services to all women (article 12 of CEDAW) all constitute a violation of the right to health of the people.

Uganda must take action to improve the health situation of prisoners. The prisons are very congested, and have poor sanitation. Sometimes prisoners sleep on the floor without blankets. They have no opportunity for physical exercise and recreation, and often have poor nutrition. However, it may actually be hard to improve the prisoners’ health condition when that of the prison warders and other law enforcement agents like the police also leaves much to be desired. Crucially, any effort to improve the health situation should therefore be comprehensive enough to cater for all the

139.See, World Health Organization, Declaration of Alma Ata on ‘Health for All and Primary Healthcare strategies’ (International Conference on Primary Healthcare, Alma Ata, September 6-12, 1978). It is important to note that ‘definitions of the core and/or supplemental contents of the civil and political rights are being shaped continually. The search for similar clarity with respect to economic, social and cultural rights will continue to rapidly advance…’ See, S. Leckie, Violations of Economic, Social and Cultural Rights, in THE MAASTRICHT GUIDELINES ON VIOLATIONS OF ECONOMIC,SOCIAL AND CULTURAL

RIGHTS (T.C. van Boven et al eds., 1998), at 60. The same message is quoted by TOEBES, supra note 56, at 288.

140.See, ICESCR, arts 2 & 3; CEDAW, arts 1 & 2.

141.See, UN Doc. E/1991/23, Suppl. No. 3, indicators 4(f)-(h) on proportions of population/pregnant women/infants having access to trained personnel for care.

142.See, UN Doc. E/C.12/1995/SR.14, ¶ 55; UN Doc. E/1986/4/Add. 9, at 9; UN Doc.E/1990/5/Add. 13, ¶ 107.

143.A similar form of discrimination happened in Serbia. See, FIDH,SERBIA: DISCRIMINATION AND CORRUPTION—THE FLAWS IN THE HEALTHCARE SYSTEM (International Fact-finding Mission Report to the Committee on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights in Application of the International Covenant on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights, May 2005), at 15.

2011]

Human Rights-based Accountability for Healthcare in Uganda

157

people including prison warders and other law enforcement agents. Measures to promote a healthy environment include those that conserve natural reserves, prevent deforestation and clean up chemical dumps.144 This is in line with the provisions of paragraph 2(b) of article 12, namely that ‘States parties have to improve all aspects of environmental and industrial issues that affect human health. However, most important of all for the Government is a serious political commitment to promote the right to health; such a commitment is manifested through national policies and legislation aimed at fostering the achievement of the progressive realisation of the right.145

The good thing is that there is already Government will in Uganda to promote the right to health of the people. In a speech at the 4th Conference of African National Human Rights Institutions held in Kampala in 2002, the President of Uganda showed that he was fully aware of the fact that in Uganda, just like in other African countries, the realization of the right to health is still elusive.146 He was convinced about the central role that issues of health play in any meaningful development strategy. He now and again reiterated his commitment to truly advance human rights and development through the promotion of good governance and the rule of law. He supported the advancement of basic economic, social and cultural rights, namely, the right to education, and showed interest in the promotion of the right to health and other determinants of health, such as clean water, adequate food and safe sanitation. He showed that he values the efficient use of available resources through proper planning and implementation, and the elimination of corruption by democratically empowering all the people to participate fully and actively in matters regarding their health and development aid generally.147

In a way, the President of Uganda appreciates the central importance of the State in building an environment that supports the adoption of a rights-based approach to the right to health in particular, and to development in general. However, efforts to implement Uganda’s commitments and obligations in relation to the right to health through national poverty-reduction strategies, national health policy and national health sector strategic plans have not been very successful as seen above.

However, in its commitment the Government must set up a timeframe in which to realize the right and also set up health-related indicators and measurable targets that

144.See, Second Report of Canada, UN Doc. E/1990/6/ADD.3, ¶ 23.

145.See, CEDAW, art. 2 (obliging States parties to take legislative measures to promote and protect the right to health). Article 3, on the other hand, recommends measures other than legislative ones.

146.See, Speech by His Excellence, Yoweri Museveni, at the Opening of the 4th Conference of African National Human Rights Institutions, Kampala, August 14, 2002, at 8 (available online at <www.nhr.net/pdf/African4thNhri>).

147.Id.

158

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

help in the evaluation of whether the progressive realization of the right to health is being achieved or not.148 The right to health indicators can be considered as the ‘quantitative or qualitative abstracts of information that can be used to describe’ the right to health situation and context and to measure the changes or trends in the enjoyment of this human right over time.149 Nonetheless, since the right to health requires the development of an effective and inclusive health system of good quality, according to the UN Special Rapporteur on the Right to Health, Uganda must invest in human resources for health if it is to bring about the progressive realisation of the right to health. It must devise proper means to train and retain health professionals, as an effective and efficient solution to the devastating problem of ‘skill drain’ to the health sector in Uganda.150

In a similar vein, in a transparent and participatory manner, the Government of Uganda, through the Ministry of Finance, Planning and Economic Development, in collaboration with the Ministry of Health, and other development partners, should design a National Policy Framework that views health from a human rights perspective, in the general context of the Uganda Poverty Eradication Action Plan (PEAP). Particularly, the Ministry of Finance, Planning and Economic Development should increase budgetary allocations to the Ministry of Health, to effectively, improve on the terms and conditions of health workers, especially of those working in rural and remote areas. This motivation strategy could include provision of better accommodation with good facilities like electricity and water for healthcare workers; and, increased salaries and the timely payment of healthcare workers, as recommended by the Uganda Human Rights Commission research on health rights.151

148.See, YOUR RIGHTS (J.M. Waliggo et al eds., 2005), at 5, available at <www.uhrc.org>

149.See, B. ANDERSASSEN & H.O. SANO, WHATS THE GOAL? WHAT IS THE PURPOSE? OBSERVATIONS ON HUMAN RIGHTS IMPACT ASSESSMENT 15 (2004).

150.The human rights approach to the right to health demands, as expressed by the UN Special Rapporteur on the Right to Health, that the solution to the problem of ‘skill drain must be locally determined, with meaningful ‘active and informed participation of representatives of poor and rural communities, healthcare workers and civil society.’ See, UN Doc. A/60/348, at 17.

151.YOUR RIGHTS, supra note 148, at xvii. The research recommended the following to the Ministry of Health: increased salaries to health workers in order to check on rampant corruption; constant and timely supply of drugs in all health facilities; provision of cost-effective running water (spring protection, harvesting rainwater and boreholes); provision of a balanced diet for patients to enhance their body immunities; provision of electricity and laboratory services to rural health units; the construction and expansion of some health units in order to solve the problem of congestion; securing ambulance services to transport referral cases; employment of more trained staff to all health facilities (and the staff should have chances for refresher courses); and giving priority to the needs of vulnerable groups, like PLHA, PWDs, children, and poor pregnant women. However, I think that a human rights based accountability

2011]

Human Rights-based Accountability for Healthcare in Uganda

159

Uganda must devise a health system that focuses on the disadvantaged, the most vulnerable in society and those living in poverty. Until recently, the people of northern Uganda have been living very desperate health conditions. The health condition of the internally displaced persons (IDPs) in Gulu, Kitugm and Pader is appalling. The northern conflict between the Uganda People’s Defence Forces (UPDF) and the Lord’s Resistance Army (LRA) led by Kony forced people into camps with no adequate shelter, no adequate safe water, no quality sanitary provisions and no access to timely healthcare services. There is a need for an effective national health law to regulate the importation and distribution of medical equipment, the sale of drugs, the relationship between health care providers and patients, patient admission and administration procedures, pharmaceutical companies, etc.

In short, the use of a human rights-based accountability to promote health is not an option. Uganda must pay attention to its obligations in relation to the minimum core content of the right to health, which include the recognition of and commitment to a right to health for all citizens and residents. It has to adopt a national health policy based on the ten key right to health analytical framework mentioned above, if the full realization of the core minimum of the right to health is to be achieved. The Ministry of Health must improve its ability to monitor health policies and evaluate health outcomes so as to be able to judge whether the progressive realization of the right to health is on course or not.

Uganda urgently needs an essential public health infrastructure that will protect and promote the health of the people equally, through the provision of adequate, safe and clean water and sanitation for all. Crucially, the Ministry of Health must adopt measures to control and prevent the transmission of major epidemic and endemic diseases such as ebola, diphtheria, tetanus, poliomyelitis, tuberculosis, whooping cough, and measles. The fight against HIV/AIDS is not yet over. Uganda must do more to prevent the scourge. To this end, it is essential to invest in health and reallocate resources in a cost-effective way, and make reproductive and family planning information and services readily available to all persons. At the same time, Uganda needs international assistance and co-operation in a spirit of shared responsibility. Thus, all Uganda’s development partners need to ensure that both international trade agreements and humanitarian assistance promote the right to health other than having adverse effects on it and on all other human rights.

for health better summarizes these recommendations.

160

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

COURTS AND THE NEED FOR DYNAMISM IN THE PROMOTION OF REPRODUCTIVE HEALTH RIGHTS: A NIGERIAN PERSPECTIVE

Babafemi Odunsi* & Folake Olaleye**

ABSTRACT

Courts have played, and can always play important roles in the protection, fulfillment and respect of reproductive health rights as a genre of human rights. In their roles of judicial law-making, courts can ingeniously and pragmatically adapt existing legal provisions to address emerging or novel reproductive health matters, without waiting for legislative interventions. Along this axis, in entrenching the rights of women to terminate unwanted pregnancies, the widely reported American case of Roe v Wade offers a remarkable illustration of how courts can courageously and creatively advance the frontiers of reproductive health rights. However, failure of courts to be dynamic in approach can suppress reproductive health rights, especially where there are no clear-cut legislative provisions affirming the guarantee of reproductive health rights, as is the case in Nigeria. Against this background, this article flags the need for dynamism on the part of Nigerian courts in engaging reproductive health rights issues.

I. INTRODUCTION

While we celebrate the promise of a new administration that understands the importance of reproductive health care in women’s lives and the role of government in ensuring access to care, we know that the courts continue to be an important avenue for restoring and protecting reproductive freedom.1

Reproductive health rights, as human rights, consist of two main components-individual freedoms and social entitlements. Realization of these components depends on

*Senior Lecturer, Faculty of Law, Obafemi Awolowo University; McArthur Fellow, Faculty of Law, University of Toronto; Formerly, Research Associate, AIDS and Human Rights Research Unit, (Centre for Human Rights and Centre for the Study of AIDS) Faculty of Law, University of Pretoria. Email:< Femiodunsi2002@yahoo.com>

**McArthur Fellow, University of Toronto. Email: <folakeolaleye1967@yahoo.com>.

1. ACLU (AMERICAN CIVIL LIBERTIES UNION), REPRODUCTIVE RIGHTS IN THE COURTS (2009), available online at <http://72.3.233.244/reproductiverights/38611res20090202.html>, (accessed on 13 October 2009) (emphasis added).

2011]

A Nigerian Perspective on Courts & Reproductive Health Rights

161

responsibilities on the part of stakeholders that include individuals, communities, social institutions and more particularly the government as the custodian of State resources and protector of collective interests.2

For emphasis, international treaties, national legislations and constitutions, consensus decisions at international conferences as well as international organizations have echoed and emphasized the sanctity of reproductive health rights.3 The obligations of stakeholders, especially governments, to create an enabling social, economic and legal structure for the realization of reproductive health rights have resonated in the various international treaties and other mediums. Yet, there remains the important task of ensuring that stakeholders carry out their obligations in the global drive to make the enjoyment of reproductive health rights a reality, rather than the ‘paper rights’ it seems to be, especially in the developing countries of Africa such as Nigeria. Courts have crucial roles to play in the drive to achieve practical realization of reproductive health rights.

Against this background and from a Nigerian perspective, this article reflects on the roles of courts in promoting reproductive health rights (or undermining it—in the event of failure to act appropriately). Among others, the article highlights the global efforts to establish reproductive health rights as valid basic rights which the government and others owe an obligation to respect, fulfil and protect. The article also considers pertinent international human rights treaties that constitute the legal launching pad for the promotion of reproductive health rights across the world. In a more contextual vein, the article examines the validity of reproductive health rights claim in light of the Nigerian constitutional position on the right to health as a non-justiciable right.

It is argued that there is valid legal basis to claim the right to health, and by the same token, reproductive health rights in Nigeria despite the constitution’s silence on it. At necessary points, the article draws on pertinent cases to underscore the remarkable roles which courts have played (and still need to continue playing) in the promotion of reproductive health rights in Nigeria and beyond. The role of the courts is considered in relation to the plethora of factors that affect the promotion of reproductive health rights.

2.Ruth Dixon-Mueller et.al, Towards a Sexual Ethics of Rights and Responsibilities, 17 REPRODUCTIVE HEALTH MATTERS 111 (2009).

3.Id.

162

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

II. THE PROMOTION OF REPRODUCTIVE HEALTH RIGHTS AND THE

COURTS: AN OVERVIEW

In a comprehensive scope, ‘promotion’ of reproductive health rights connotes the three- piece obligations to respect, protect and fulfil human rights in the specific context of reproductive health, as well as taking measures to attain these goals. The obligation to respect dictates that governments and non-governmental entities refrain from interfering directly or indirectly with the enjoyment of the right to reproductive health. The obligation to protect requires the government or the system to prevent third parties from interfering with the rights or freedom of the people to enjoy the right to reproductive health. The obligation to fulfil requires the government or the system to ensure that people have access to a system of reproductive health care that provides equal opportunity to everyone.4 It would be unrealistic to expect that governments and other people would summarily uphold or safeguard reproductive health rights or any other basic rights. Rather, the reality, as various sources indicate, is that transgression and suppression of reproductive health rights and other rights abound across the world. The attainment of an acceptable level of respect, protection and fulfilment of rights remains a struggle, especially in developing countries of Africa where inconsiderate political leadership and harmful socio-cultural norms have morbidly collaborated in emasculating human rights.

As various decided cases reflect, the courts in different contexts have played (and will continue to play) vital roles in the unceasing struggle for the promotion of human rights. Through courageous decisions and imposition of sanctions in deserving cases, courts have curtailed inordinate transgression of human rights. Also by means of dynamic and pragmatic utilization of judicial mechanisms, courts have also used existing or established rules and principles to sustain emerging or novel human rights issues. It is through this approach that the courts, inter alia, have expanded the frontiers of human rights to accommodate reproductive health as distinct from the generic right to health.

Tacitly and explicitly, series of international treaties, national constitutions and legislations have recognized and given credence to the sanctity of reproductive health rights.5 Courts at high levels in different parts of the world have also upheld the rights

4.See, R.J. COOK, B.M. DICKENS & M. FATHALLA, REPRODUCTIVE HEALTH AND HUMAN RIGHTS, INTEGRATING MEDICINE, ETHICS AND LAW 37 (2003).

5.See e.g., NIGERIA CONST. (1999); International Covenant on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights, U.N.G.A. Res. 2200A (XXI) of 16 December 1966, entry into force 3 January 1976, in accordance with article 27 (‘Economic Covenant’); African [Banjul] Charter on Human and Peoples’ Rights, 27 June

2011]

A Nigerian Perspective on Courts & Reproductive Health Rights

163

of citizens to reproductive health on different fronts.6 Consensus decisions of high- calibre global conferences such as the International Conference on Population and Development (ICPD) held in Cairo, Egypt in 19947 and the Fourth World Conference on Women (FWCW) held in Beijing, China held in 19958 have further strongly affirmed the inviolability of reproductive health rights. A wide spectrum of learned writers, activists and stakeholders also agree on the importance of promoting reproductive health rights.9 Despite all these, the acceptance of reproductive health rights in its different dimensions as legitimate human or basic right remains a contentious issue in different parts of the world. This makes unfettered enjoyment of the right a challenging task, even in developed countries such as the USA, where reproductive health rights seem to have been taken for granted.10

Religious, socio-cultural and other norms and mores are among the factors that militate against the realization of reproductive health rights. Law as a tool of social control and regulation has a crucial role to play in addressing these elements. But law usually is a reflection of the prevailing norms and mores in a society. Thus, the norms in a society may precipitate or aid laws that support the suppression of reproductive health rights. In such a scenario the courts in their ultimate “lawmaking” capacities can intervene to reconcile the unfriendly domestic legal situation with the prevailing international legal order on reproductive health rights, thereby creating an enabling legal framework for the effective promotion of reproductive health rights.

In another vein, promotion of reproductive health rights may be hampered because of ambiguity in the laws touching on reproductive health. Due to uncertainty, the government and policy makers may find it difficult to take required measures for promoting reproductive health rights. In such a situation the courts can also intervene to clear the ambiguity and thus create a legal atmosphere helpful to the promotion of reproductive health rights. Indeed the courts at different times have acted creditably in

1981, OAU Doc. CAB/Leg/67/3 Rev. 5, 21 ILM 58 (1982), entered into force 21 Oct. 1986 (now domesticated in Nigeria as African Charter on Human and People’s Rights Act, Cap. A9 Laws of the Federation of Nigeria, 2004)

6. See e.g., Roe v. Wade (1973) 410 US 113, and R v. Morgentaler (1988) 4 DLR (4th ) 385

(Canada).

7.UNITED NATIONS, REPORT OF THE INTERNATIONAL CONFERENCE ON POPULATION AND

DEVELOPMENT (Cairo, Egypt, 5-13 September 1994, United Nations Doc. N.Y. A/Conf. 171/13 Rev.1, U.N. Sales No. 95. XIII.I8 [hereinafter the Cairo Programme]1994).

8.UNITED NATIONS, REPORT OF THE FOURTH WORLD CONFERENCE ON WOMEN [THE BEIJING

DECLARATION AND PLATFORM FOR ACTION], (United Nations Doc., New York, N.Y, A/Conf. 177/20, 1995).

9.See generally, COOK, DICKENS & FATHALLA, supra note 4.

10.See, ACLU, supra note 1.

164

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

upholding the sanctity of reproductive health rights in the face of unfriendly societal norms and ambiguous laws.11

III. REPRODUCTIVE HEALTH RIGHTS: EVOLUTION AND

INTEGRATION

Reproductive health is a state of complete physical, mental and social well-being and not merely the absence of disease or infirmity, in all matters relating to the reproductive system and to its functions and processes. Reproductive health therefore implies that people are able to have a satisfying and safe sex life and that they have the capacity to reproduce and the freedom to decide if, when and how often to do so. Implicit in this last condition are the right of men and women to be informed and to have access to safe, effective, affordable and acceptable methods of family planning of their choice, as well as other methods of their choice for regulation of fertility which are not against the law, and the right of access to appropriate health care services that will enable women to go safely through pregnancy and childbirth and provide couples with the best chance of having a healthy infant.12

The above stated definition was entrenched and given prominence at the Fourth United Nations International Conference on Women held in Beijing in 1995.13 The definition is a modification of the broader concept of right to health.14 Moreover, reproductive health is a genre of health as a whole. Building on the definition, the Beijing Conference further elaborated on reproductive health rights:

These rights rest on the recognition of the basic right of all couples and individuals to decide freely and responsibly the number, spacing and timing of their children and to have the information and means to do so, and the right to attain the highest standard of sexual and reproductive health….It also includes their right to make decisions concerning reproduction free from discrimination, coercion and

11.See generally, LAW STUDENTS FOR REPRODUCTIVE JUSTICE, MAJOR U.S. SUPREME COURT

RULINGS ON REPRODUCTIVE RIGHTS (2008). See also, Adam Easton, Award for Poland Abortion woman, BBC NEWS, <http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/europe/8271895.stm> (accessed on 13 October 2009).

12.UN DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC INFORMATION, PLATFORM FOR ACTION AND BEIJING

DECLARATION (1995), ¶ 94.

13.UNITED NATIONS, REPORT OF THE FOURTH WORLD CONFERENCE ON WOMEN [THE BEIJING

DECLARATION AND PLATFORM FOR ACTION], U.N. Doc., N.Y, A/Conf. 177/20, 1995.

14.See, WORLD HEALTH ORGANIZATION CONSTITUTION, 1988.

2011]

A Nigerian Perspective on Courts & Reproductive Health Rights

165

violence as expressed in human rights documents.15

It bears mentioning that while the Beijing Conference in 1995 gave remarkable attention and significance to reproductive health rights, international appreciation of the right to make reproductive health choices can be traced back to long before the Conference.16 For instance, in 1968, participants at the First International Conference on Human Rights held in Tehran accepted, among others, that “parents have a basic human right to determine freely and responsibly the number and spacing of their children and a right to adequate education and information to do so.”17 Along similar lines, the Alma Ata Declaration of 1978,18 in the definition of primary health care encompassed family planning as well as maternal health.

The U.N. Decade for Women (1976–1985) spawned some notable development in the area of reproductive health rights with the adoption of the Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of Discrimination against Women.19 In one respect, the Women’s Convention enjoined State parties to “take appropriate measures to eliminate discrimination against women in the field of health care in order to ensure on a basis of equality of men and women, access to health care services, including those related

15.Para. 95, repeated in large part in para. 223 of the Beijing Platform.

16.In 1968, the First International Conference on Human Rights held in Tehran recognized that “parents have a basic human right to determine freely and responsibly the number and spacing of their children and a right to adequate education and information to do so.” The International Conference on Population (ICP) held in Mexico City in 1984 reformulated the right and proclaimed that “all couples and individuals have the basic right to decide freely and responsibly, the number and spacing of their children and to have the information, education and means to do so.” CEDAW, which was adopted in 1979 provides in Article 16(1)(e) that “States Parties shall ensure on a basis of equality of men and women … The same rights to decide freely and responsibly on the number and spacing of their children and to have access to the information, education and means to enable them to exercise these rights.” In 1992, the UN Conference on Environment and Development held in Rio de Janeiro in its Agenda reaffirmed the right to decide on the number and spacing of one’s children and further affirmed that governments should provide health facilities, including “affordable, accessible services, as appropriate for the responsible planning of family size.” In 1993, the World Conference on Human Rights held in Vienna recognized “On the basis of equality between women and men, a woman’s right to accessible and adequate health care and the widest range of family planning services, as well as equal access to education at all levels.”

17.Final Act of the International Conference on Human Rights, Tehran, Iran, 12 May 1968, Res. XVII, U.N. Doc. A/Conf.32/41 (1968), reproduced in U.N. Department of Public Information, United Nations and the Advancement of Women 1945–1995, at 167-69, U.N. Doc. DPI/1679, U.N. Series No. E.

95.1.29(1995).

18.For full text of the Alma Ata Declaration see, Achieving Reproductive Health for All: The Role of the WHO, in A.L. Waddell (ed.) WHO /FHE/95, at 2.

19.Adopted by the United Nations General Assembly on 18 December 1979, entered into force on 3 December 1981 (hereinafter the Women’s Convention).

166

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

to family planning.”20 The Committee on the Elimination of All Forms of Discrimination against Women (CEDAW Committee), the United Nations body that monitors compliance with the Women’s Convention, in different respects has expatiated on State parties’ obligations under the Convention vis-à-vis reproductive health care. In its General Recommendation on Women and Health, the Committee directed States Parties to ensure universal access for all women to a full range of high-quality and affordable health care, including sexual and reproductive health services. Generally, the Women’s Convention offers a strong legal support for the right to reproductive health and choice.

The United Nations Conference on Environment and Development held in Rio de Janeiro in 1992, though not specifically on health or reproductive health, still addressed reproductive health rights, urging governments to provide health care facilities, including “affordable and accessible reproductive and sexual health services, as appropriate for the responsible planning of family size.”21 In 1993, at the Vienna World Convention on Human Rights, member states recognized “on the basis of equality between women and men, a woman’s right to accessible and adequate health care and the widest range of family planning services, as well as equal access to education at all levels.”22

The Cairo International Conference on Population and Development (ICPD) of 1994 can be described as another landmark in the international attention on reproductive health and its integration in the framework of human rights. Women’s reproductive health was given significant attention at the Conference where the globally recognized definition of reproductive health right, as earlier stated in this article, was adopted before it was expanded and amplified at the Beijing Conference in 1995. These earlier foundations set the tone for the declarations and injunctions on reproductive health at the Beijing Conference in 1995.

Beyond Beijing, there have been other international drives to integrate reproductive health and the appurtenant rights. For example, at a regional level, the African Regional Strategy on Reproductive Health was devised in September 1997.23 In the Strategy, African member countries committed themselves to “implement the reproductive health concept for the next twenty five years.”24 The hope is that within

20.Art. 16 (1)(e) [emphasis added].

21.The Rio De Janeiro Declaration and Agenda 21, United Nations Conference on Environment and Development, Rio De Janeiro, June 1992.

22.U.N. Doc.A/CONF.157/23 (1993) (emphasis added).

23.African Regional Strategy on Reproductive Health, part 1, 1997.

24.Id.

2011]

A Nigerian Perspective on Courts & Reproductive Health Rights

167

this period, “all people in the region should enjoy an improved quality of life through a significant reduction of maternal and neonatal morbidity, unwanted pregnancy and sexually transmitted infections including HIV/AIDS, and the elimination of harmful practices and sexual violence.”25

IV. LEGAL FRAMEWORK OF REPRODUCTIVE HEALTH RIGHTS—

NIGERIA AS AN ILLUSTRATION

Generally, rights to reproductive health can be set in and would fit into the well established and internationally accepted framework of human rights. Reproductive rights in various respects are off-shoots of broadly established rights, such as the rights to dignity, privacy, health and freedom from discrimination.26 In light of this, it can be reasonably concluded that reproductive health rights are, by extension, human rights that have been entrenched in human rights instruments and therefore ought to be respected and enforced by state actors.

The legal framework of reproductive health rights can be illustrated with specific reference to the Nigerian legal structure. Having noted earlier that reproductive health is a branch of the broad concept of health, analysis of the legal framework in Nigeria would proceed primarily from the point whether health as a whole is an enforceable human right in Nigeria. The centre-point or ‘code’ of Nigerian human rights law is the Nigerian Constitution, 1999.27 Chapter IV of the constitution sets out the human rights to which the people are constitutionally entitled. In addition, the people can lay claim to some human rights guarantees under international human rights treaties to which Nigeria is a party, such as the International Covenant on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights,28 and the African Charter on Human and Peoples’ Rights (which Nigeria has domesticated as African Charter on Human and Peoples’ Rights Act).29

Prima facie, the right to health, and by same token, reproductive health, is not a justiciable fundamental right in Nigeria, as it is not listed among the constitutionally guaranteed rights.30 The ‘right’ only finds expression in the constitution as a non-

25.Id., part 2(1) a.

26.N.I. Aniekwu, Before Beijing and Beyond: A Reflection on the Emergence of Women’s Rights as Human Rights, KNUST L. J. (2005).

27.Constitution of the Federal Republic of Nigeria, 1999 (hereinafter referred to as ‘Nigerian Constitution’).

28.Supra note 5.

29.Id.

30.See generally, Chapter IV (sections 33-46) Nigerian Constitution 1999.

168

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

justiciable ‘fundamental objective and directive principle of state policy’.31 Along that axis, reproductive health in Nigeria, at best would stand as a fundamental objective and directive principle of state policy that cannot be legally enforced in the country. Inferring from cases such as Festus Odafe & Ors v. Attorney-General of the Federation & Ors,32 there has been tacit judicial endorsement of the non-justiciability of the right to health in Nigeria.

However, the fact that the right to health is not a guaranteed or enforceable right under the Nigerian Constitution does not conclusively establish that the right has absolutely no legal basis in Nigeria. The right to health is guaranteed and can be claimed under pertinent international human rights treaties to which Nigeria is signatory. For example, article 12 of International Covenant on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights provides:

1.The States Parties to the present Covenant recognize the right of everyone to the enjoyment of the highest attainable standard of physical and mental health.

2.The steps to be taken by the States Parties to the present Covenant to achieve the full realization of this right shall include those necessary for: …

(3) The prevention, treatment and control of epidemic, endemic, occupational and other diseases…

One limitation to the operation of the Economic Covenant as a basis for the right to health claim in Nigeria is that the treaty is yet to be domesticated in the country.33 The issue of non-domestication of this covenant therefore raises a potent question of its legal potency as a guarantee of the right to health and reproductive health. Furthermore, based on the doctrine of privity of contract, only parties to a contract or a treaty can legally compel another party to the contract or treaty to perform an obligation arising

31.See Chapter II, section 17(3) c & d of the 1999 Constitution: “The State shall direct its policy towards ensuring that (c) the health, safety and welfare of all persons in employment are safeguarded and not endangered or abused; (d) there are adequate medical and health facilities for all persons.

32.Suit No. FHC/PH/CS/680/2003

33.That is, it has not been incorporated into Nigerian legal system as a part of the country’s domestic laws.

2011]

A Nigerian Perspective on Courts & Reproductive Health Rights

169

under the contract.34 In that light, inasmuch as Nigerian citizens in their capacities as individual citizens are not parties to the Economic Covenant, they are hindered from enforcing the treaty obligation of the Nigerian government with regard to the right to health.

While appreciating the above reasoning, the issue of non-domestication of the Economic Covenant does not neutralize the fact that the Nigerian government acquires a legal duty to safeguard citizens’ health under that treaty. Legally, the states parties which are co-privies to the treaty with Nigeria can enforce this duty against Nigeria in the interest of Nigerian citizens, the ultimate beneficiaries of the treaty provisions. As Lush L.J stated in the old case of Lloyds v Harper,35 “it is an established rule that, where a contract is made with A for the benefit of B, A can sue on the contract for the benefit of B and recover all that B could have recovered if the contract had been made with B himself.” Along that line, the Economic Covenant still offers a strong legal footing for a right to [reproductive] health claim in Nigeria.

Apart from the Economic Covenant, Nigerians can also assert the right to health under the African Charter on Human and Peoples’ Rights. This Charter, as earlier noted, has been domesticated as a Nigerian legislation by means of the African Charter Act.36 The African Charter Act stands on a level higher and above other statutes in the Nigerian legal system, being subject to only the constitution.37 This legal arrangement puts the right to health on a formidable legal footing in Nigeria and creates a legitimate pedestal to assert a claim to reproductive health rights in Nigeria. The relationship between the African Charter Act and the Nigerian Constitution raises a fundamental legal issue that needs to be flagged. Being an Act of the legislature, the African Charter Act remains subordinate to the Nigerian Constitution. The Nigerian Constitution is supreme and if any other law including an Act of the National Assembly is inconsistent with the constitution, the constitution would prevail and the other law shall be void to the extent of the inconsistency.38

Applying this principle to the context of discourse, in situations of conflict between the African Charter Act and the Constitution vis-à-vis the justiciabilty of the

34.In simple terms, the doctrine of privity of contract connotes that generally no one would be entitled to or be bound by the terms of a contract to which he is not a party. See, Price v. Easton (1833) 4B & Ad. 433, and Tweedle v. Atkinson (1861) 1B&S 393. For a further reading on the doctrine of privity of contract, see M. FURMSTON, CHESHIRE AND FIFOOTS LAW OF CONTRACT (1981), at 404-420.

35.(1880) 16 Ch.D 290.

36.See supra note 5.

37. See generally, Abaribe v. Abia state House of Assembly [2000] 9 W.R.N 1 together with Abacha v. Fawehinmi, 2 SCQR 489.

38. NIGERIA CONST., supra note 5, § 1(1) & (3).

170

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

right to health, the Constitution would prevail over the African Charter Act. Put simply, the Constitution can override or neutralize the right to health guaranteed under the African Charter Act. This suggests that the government may legitimately escape the burden to protect, respect and fulfill the right to health or reproductive health of the people. However, the issue of right to health in Nigeria cannot be summarily foreclosed on the jurisprudential ground of supremacy of the constitution without careful scrutiny of some other facts. Primarily, it needs to be considered whether there is even a conflict between the Nigerian Constitution and the African Charter Act on the issue of right to health. It is the view of these writers that there is no conflict. Rather, there is a case of complementarity between the Act and the Constitution with regard to health rights. This issue is further addressed below.

In the ‘fundamental objective’ provisions, the Nigerian Constitution has expressed a strong intent to ensure the overall good health of citizens with an aspiration that “there are adequate medical and health facilities for all persons.” Through policy declarations, the Nigerian government has reaffirmed the desire to facilitate this intention. For example, the Nigerian HIV/AIDS Policy (2003) declares: “Nigeria recognizes its responsibility to provide access to health care for all its citizens.”39 Along this axis, the domestication of the African Charter in Nigeria without removal or curtailing of the health right provision in it must be perceived as a statutory affirmation of Nigeria’s aspiration to make access to healthcare a right instead of a mere privilege. Therefore, the African Charter Act provision on health is simply putting in statutorily enforceable terms an aspiration that has been expressed in the Constitution. In this light, the issue of conflict cannot arise. Put simply, the Act and the Constitution share and complement each other on a common positive ground that the health of the people is of utmost importance.

Summing up, there is ample legal ground to support the validity of the right to health including reproductive health in Nigeria. Apart from the foregoing, the right to reproductive health in Nigeria can be further sustained by placing the right in the structure of some basic rights that are constitutionally guaranteed and therefore justiciable in Nigeria. Analysis of reproductive health in the context of some established rights is undertaken in the following section.

39. NIGERIAN HIV/AIDS POLICY (2003), at 19.

2011]

A Nigerian Perspective on Courts & Reproductive Health Rights

171

V. REPRODUCTIVE HEALTH RIGHTS IN THE SCOPE OF ESTABLISHED CONSTITUTIONAL RIGHTS IN NIGERIA

To recap briefly, reproductive health encompasses all measures relating to the mental, physical and social well-being of persons in matters connected with reproduction. Reproductive health rights can be set in the sphere of some rights that have been guaranteed as justiciable rights under the Nigerian Constitution. Such rights include the right to receive and impart information, the right not to be subjected to inhuman and degrading treatment and the right to life. The discourse on this point shall be undertaken with reference to advertisements of condoms and abortion of unwanted pregnancies.

It is widely accepted that condoms are among, if not the least complicated means of preventing unwanted pregnancies and sex-related diseases and infections. The prevention of unwanted pregnancies manifestly falls within the purview of reproductive health. Access to information pertaining to use of condoms thus constitutes a component of reproductive health. Flowing from this, any attack on advertisements of condoms or any other measure that can affect access to condoms as a preventive measure, though a reproductive issue can be challenged as a transgression of the right to receive or impart information relating to preventive devices.

The right to terminate unwanted pregnancies remains a controversial issue in reproductive health right discourse, even in places like the United States of America where, many years back, the popular case of R v. Wade40 has held that the right to abort falls within the frame of a woman’s right to privacy.41 The ‘Right to abort’ in Nigeria remains within the restricted scope of R v. Edgal,42 which followed on the heel of then binding43 English case of R v. Bourne.44 In that vein, the relevance of R v. Wade’s perception of reproductive right to Nigeria may appear debateable. Moreover, the Nigerian constitutional provision on the right to privacy does not seem to have the elastic ability to accommodate the revolutionary dimension of R v. Wade. This is because the constitution sets out in itemized form the situations in which the right to privacy is constitutionally guaranteed.45 Notwithstanding, the claim to reproductive

40.(1973) 410 US 113.

41.See, LAW STUDENTS FOR REPRODUCTIVE JUSTICE, supra note 11, at 1.

42.(1938) 4 WACA 133.

43.The case of R v. Edgal was decided when Nigeria was still a colony of Britain. Cases decided in English Courts then applied as binding precedents as against persuasive precedents in Nigeria.

44.[1938] 3 All E.R 195.

45.See, NIGERIAN CONST., supra note 5, ss. 33 on the Right to Life and 37 on Privacy and

Family Life.

172

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

health rights to terminate an unwanted pregnancy can be set within the structure of some other constitutional rights. Pertinent in this respect are the right to life and the right not to be subjected to inhuman and degrading treatment.46

Despite the criminalization of abortion by the Nigerian Criminal Code,47 abortions occur on a large scale. However, due to the criminal law barrier, people are compelled to recourse to unsafe abortion with dire consequences in terms of huge losses of human life and horrendous injuries and trauma that usually accompany unsafe abortion procedures.48 It is arguable that erection of criminal law barrier which impedes access to safe abortion in Nigeria creates a situation where women who inevitably seek abortion are railroaded to loss or deprivation of their lives or subjected to inhuman and degrading treatment due to injuries resulting from unsafe abortions. Put differently, the criminal law provisions criminalizing abortion indirectly infringe on (or cause to be created a situation where) the constitutional rights to preservation of lives and non- subjection to inhuman and degrading treatment.

VI. THE COURTS AND REPRODUCTIVE HEALTH RIGHTS AT

NATIONAL LEVELS

To reiterate, there is a strong body of legal instruments to sustain the protection, fulfillment and respect of reproductive health rights across the world. This consists mainly of international human rights treaties reinforced with consensus decisions of various international conferences and other assemblies.49 The international human rights instruments constitute very useful resources of advocacy by activists and basis for adjudication of reproductive health issues by the courts.50 However, the impact of these international human rights laws on the promotion of reproductive health rights, especially in the developing countries of Africa, is debatable. One can therefore reasonably question the manifest inertia of these laws vis-à-vis the roles of courts in promoting reproductive health rights.

One reason that can be adduced for the inertia is that courts are creations of laws and hence have to operate within defined scope of powers granted by the enabling laws. Flowing from this is that the courts can only apply ‘valid laws’ that constitute

46.Id., s. 34 relating to the Right to Dignity of Human Person.

47.Criminal Code Act Cap. C38, Laws of the Federation of Nigeria 2004, ss. 227-230.

48.See, W.O. Chukudebelu & P.C. Nweke, Abortion and the Law, in MEDICAL PRACTICE AND THE LAW IN NIGERIA (B.B. Umerah ed., 1989), at 62-63.

49.UNFPA, STATE OF THE WORLD POPULATION 2 (1997).

50.Id. See also, Easton, supra note 11.

2011]

A Nigerian Perspective on Courts & Reproductive Health Rights

173

parts of the country’s legal system, having been made by the designated legislative bodies. It needs to be remembered too that it is not the primary duty of the courts to make or reform laws51 but to apply valid and subsisting laws. With undomesticated treaty-based international human rights law being ‘soft laws,’ the courts may lack a basis to apply them in adjudication of reproductive health rights disputes, even if cited by litigants.

Another factor that may account for the lethargy of the international human rights laws in domestic courts is that aggrieved or affected persons lack the basic legal capacity to litigate on account of the laws. As noted earlier, international treaties operate between State parties. It is only such State parties that can take legal measures to enforce obligations under such treaties or to hold non-compliant parties accountable for breaches on behalf of citizen-beneficiaries. However, due to various factors, there may not be any zeal on the part of the State parties to enforce compliance with international human rights treaties or redress for breaches.52 In light of the above factors, it becomes difficult for the courts to uphold the tenets of international reproductive health law at domestic court forums.

While the above noted constraints on the part of the courts are germane concerning upholding of international human rights law, they do not connote that the courts can maintain a hands-off attitude on the promotion of reproductive health rights. Apart from the ‘soft’ treaty-based international human rights, reproductive health rights can be enforced in the framework of domesticated international human rights law such as the African Charter Act which offers a statutory guarantee of the right to health and by extension the right to reproductive health. Similarly, as equally shown, reproductive health rights can be grounded in well established constitutional human rights based on the interconnection of reproductive health with such rights. To put in a nutshell, there are pertinent ‘hard laws’ in whose structures the courts can judicially uphold a claim to reproductive health rights at the national level.

Through systematic and pragmatic utilization of these resources by the courts, a strong jurisprudential basis for enforcing reproductive health rights can evolve or be entrenched. In one respect, by pragmatic application and interpretation of pertinent laws, rights to [reproductive] health in Nigeria can be firmly created based on settled

51.Through the application and interpretation of existing laws which at times define the exact scope of the laws (which may even be different from the anticipation of the lawmakers) courts are said to make laws through the process of ‘judicial lawmaking.’ This is however within very narrow limits and does not amount to vesting legislative functions in the courts.

52.See A. An-Naim, State Responsibility Under international Human Rights Law to Change Religious and Customary Laws, in HUMAN RIGHTS OF WOMEN: NATIONAL AND INTERNATIONAL

PERSPECTIVES (R. J. Cook ed., 1994).

174

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

human rights principles. To sum up, the courts can create an infallible body of reproductive health rights laws from the ‘hard laws’ enshrined in the Constitution and the African Charter. In the course of this, the seemingly inconsistent positions of the Constitution and the African Charter Act with regard to health rights can be resolved. It is very much within the powers of the courts to expand the frontiers of law in Nigeria by the application of relevant established rules to the nascent issues of reproductive health rights. As Lord Lloyd of Hampstead noted,

[T]he general consensus of opinion at the present day is that, within certain narrow and clearly defined limits, new law is created by the judiciary…Thus it is realized that in a sense whenever a court applies an established rule or principle to a new situation or set of facts (or withholds it from these new facts) new law is being created.53

As illustrated in some cases considered above, it is along this line that courts in some countries have played prominent and historic roles in making legal reforms that facilitated the transformation of reproductive health rights into enforceable human rights.54

VII. COURTS AND REPRODUCTIVE HEALTH RIGHTS REFORMS: A

GLANCE AT LEGAL HISTORY

The promotion of reproductive health rights requires a firm legal foundation on which the people can proceed to make the government or any other transgressor accountable. However, in many respects, the required firm legal foundation may be lacking due to factors that include existence of laws that do not support the promotion of reproductive health rights or laws that are uncertain in content and thus relatively unhelpful.

Over time, in exercise of their limited but potent law-making powers, courts have intervened in creating the desired legal environment that is conducive for the promotion of reproductive health rights. Quite remarkably, the courts have done this by the vibrant adaptation of established laws as contained in constitutions and statutes. The judicial approach will be illustrated by some prominent judicial decisions relating to abortion in Nigeria and elsewhere. Abortion is chosen as a reference point because

53.Lord Lloyd of Hampstead, Introduction to Jurisprudence (4th ed., 1979), at 850.

54.See generally, Sanda Rodgers, The Legal Regulation of Women’s Reproductive Capacity in Canada, in CANADIAN HEALTH LAW AND POLICY (Jocelyn Downie, Timothy Caulfield & Colleen Flood eds, 2002), at 331-365.

2011]

A Nigerian Perspective on Courts & Reproductive Health Rights

175

it is one reproductive health issue that has attracted continual agitation for reforms in Nigeria55 while also remaining an emotive and contentious issue in other countries judging by the spate of litigations.56 All the same, other reproductive health issues such as access to contraception, artificial reproductive technologies are also important and there have also been significant judicial intervention in those areas too.57

Leaving aside the conflicting moral positions on the practice, abortion is essentially a family planning or population control option and is readily resorted to in situations where people are confronted with unwanted pregnancies due to failure of preventive measures or other factors. In the context of reproductive health rights, abortion amounts to an exercise of the “freedom to decide if, when and how often” to reproduce.58 However in Nigeria and other places, access to abortion has been made unlawful by operation of the criminal laws.59 An inferable effect of criminal law prohibition is that people faced with unwanted pregnancies are compelled by threat of sanctions to carry such pregnancies to term against their will. The criminalization thus amounts to an infringement on the rights of such people to decide whether or not to reproduce. In different parts of the world the courts have courageously intervened to strike down such anti-reproductive right abortion laws thereby creating conducive legal atmosphere for interested persons to exercise their reproductive rights by means of voluntary option of abortion. One case that has resonated round the world and remains the hallmark in the judicial sanctification of reproductive right to abort an unwanted pregnancy is the American case of Roe v. Wade60 which was decided by the U.S. Supreme Court on January 22, 1973.

Roe v. Wade is the historic Supreme Court decision which overturned Texas state abortion law thereby making abortion legal in the United States. The alias “Jane Roe” was used for Norma McCorvey on whose behalf the suit was originally filed, contending that the abortion law in Texas (which proscribed procuring or attempting an abortion except on medical advice for the purpose of saving the mother's life) violated her constitutional rights and the rights of other women. The defendant was the District Attorney of Dallas County, Texas, Henry B. Wade. The U.S Supreme Court held among others, in the case that a woman with her doctor could choose abortion in

55.Chukudebelu & Nweke, supra note 48, at 67; Sonnie Ekwowusi, Nigeria: The Defeat of Imo Abortion Bill, THIS DAY, June 9, 2009.

56.See e.g., LAW STUDENTS FOR REPRODUCTIVE JUSTICE, supra note 11, at 1-8.

57.See, Roxanne Mykitiuk & Albert Wallrap, Regulating Reproductive Technologies in Canada, in Downie, Caulfield & Flood eds, supra note 54; and ACLU, supra note 1.

58.See supra note 15.

59.See, Criminal Code Act, Cap. C38, Laws of the Federation of Nigeria 2004, ss. 227-230.

60.See supra note 40.

176

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

earlier months of pregnancy without any restriction. The decision was based on the long-recognized constitutional right to privacy enshrined in the Ninth Amendment to the United States Constitution, a part of the Bill of Rights.

The major impact of the case was that all state laws in the U.S limiting women's access to abortions during the first trimester of pregnancy were invalidated and a new legal ground was created permitting abortion. Through Roe v. Wade, the U.S Supreme Court legalized abortion in the United States which was not legal at all in many states and was limited by law in others prior to the decision. With the revolutionary R v. Wade decision, U.S courts set a strong legal platform on which stakeholders have stood to safeguard reproductive health rights in different ramifications over the ages.61

Another significant and ground-breaking case which was decided on grounds of constitutional rights just like Roe v. Wade was the Canadian case of R. v. Morgentaler62 which was decided on January 28, 1988 by the Supreme Court of Canada. In the case, the abortion provision in the Criminal Code of Canada was found to be unconstitutional, as it violated a woman's right to “security of person” under section 7 of the Canadian Charter of Rights and Freedoms. Ever since this ruling, there have been no laws regulating abortion in Canada.63

Prior to this ruling, section 251 of the Canadian Criminal Code allowed for abortions to be performed at only accredited hospitals with the proper certification of approval from the hospital’s Therapeutic Abortion Committee. This made it possible to indict a physician providing abortion services, or a woman seeking an abortion without complying with the provision of the Code. Three doctors, Henry Morgentaler, Leslie Frank Smoling and Robert Scott set up an abortion clinic in Toronto for the purpose of performing abortions on women who had not received certification from the Therapeutic Abortion Committee as required under subsection 251(4) of the Criminal Code. In so doing, they were creating a basis to challenge the constitutionality of section 251 of the Criminal Code being convinced that a woman should have complete control over the decision on whether to have an abortion. Following a conviction for violating the Criminal Code provision pertaining to unlawful abortion, an appeal was lodged. The Court of Appeal for Ontario found in favour of the government. On further appeal to the Canadian Supreme Court, the main issue for resolution was whether section 251 of the Criminal Code violated section 7 of the Charter relating to

61. See, ACLU, supra note 1; LAW STUDENTS FOR REPRODUCTIVE JUSTICE, supra note 11, at

1-8.

62.[1988] 1 S.C.R. 30.

63.R. v. Morgentaler, available online at <http://en.wikipedia.org.wiki/R._v._Morgentaler> (accessed 19 October 2009).

2011]

A Nigerian Perspective on Courts & Reproductive Health Rights

177

right to security of the person. The Court ruled 5 to 2 that the law violated section 7. The law was struck down as unconstitutional and Morgentaler's conviction was overturned.

The case of R v. Edgal,64 offers an insight into the role which Nigerian courts can also play in the promotion of reproductive health rights in Nigeria especially with regard to reforming the country’s restrictive abortion laws. It was courtesy of R v. Edgal that it became legal to commit abortion where the pregnancy poses a threat to the health or life of the mother. Prior to the case, abortion was absolutely unlawful and not permissible on any ground whatsoever. In the case some people were charged with conspiracy to commit abortion under the Nigerian Criminal Code Nigeria. Their contention was that the attempted abortion was undertaken to preserve the life of the mother. Following the English case of R v. Bourne,65 the West African Court of Appeal held that it was permissible to carry out abortion for the preservation of life or health of the mother. In that vein, WACA whittled down the strict provisions of the Nigerian Criminal Code and created an exception for abortion done for the preservation of life or health. To put R v. Edgal in reproductive health context, a woman who wishes to terminate a pregnancy for the reason of her health can legitimately do so instead of being forced to keep the pregnancy because of the previous criminal law position.

R v. Edgal and the other abortion law reforming cases are instructive to reproductive health right activists and other groups in Nigeria and elsewhere who have continually agitated for the liberalization of restrictive abortion laws. The typical approach of the protagonists of liberalization is pursuit of direct amendment of the Criminal Code provisions on abortion66 or the enactment of a counter-statute that would indirectly amend or circumvent the provisions of the Criminal Code on abortion.67 R v. Edgal and the other cases should strike a chord that the courts, perhaps better than the legislature offer a more plausible hope of striking down Nigeria’s restrictive abortion laws. It is the courts that brought about liberalization of abortion in the USA and Canada while the only abortion law reform so far made in Nigeria was fashioned by the courts via R v. Edgal. Furthermore, efforts over the ages to attain reform in Nigeria through legislative intervention have not been fruitful. Along this line, it is advisable that protagonists of abortion law reforms explore the judicial avenue through constitutional challenge of Nigeria’s abortion laws. The hope of liberalization that has so far remained unfulfilled at the legislative realm may be realized through the courts.

64.(1938) 4 WACA 133.

65.[1938] 3 All E.R 195.

66.Chukudebelu & Nweke, supra note 48, at 67.

67.Ekwowusi, supra note 55.

178

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

VIII. THE PROMOTION OF REPRODUCTIVE HEALTH RIGHTS

WITHIN AND BEYOND THE COURTS

Courts, no doubt have crucial roles to play in the promotion of reproductive health rights by dynamic application and adaptation of relevant domestic and international human rights laws, as this article has strived to show. But before the courts can productively perform their roles, some structures must exist. Reproductive health rights cannot be enjoyed or effectively enforced in an environment where there is lack of other basic economic and social rights and facilities that are important in the lives of the people. Of particular importance in the promotion drive is the right of access to court68 by citizens to enforce reproductive health rights. Where people do not have access to the courts for enforcement of reproductive rights, the courts would not have the opportunity of performing their roles in facilitating changes.69 As a prominent Nigerian Jurist, Hon. Justice Oputa put it, “he who cannot even reach the courts cannot talk of justice from the courts.”70

Section 36 of the Nigerian Constitution guarantees access to court for citizens. But the issue of access to court goes beyond the theoretical constitutional guarantee. There must be practical access to court backed-up with assurance of fair-hearing. There are various factors that militate against practical access to court and chances of fair hearing. These include financial incapacity in meeting legal expenses, corrupt justice system, insensitivity of the government and so on.71 For the courts to be empowered to perform their roles in the promotion of reproductive health rights, all the non-legal factors that militate against realistic access to courts by aggrieved persons must be addressed.

To sum up the foregoing analysis, for the courts to effectively assist the promotion of reproductive health rights, there must be realistic access to and unassailable fair-hearing in courts. Along this line, reproductive health activists and other stakeholders must intensify efforts to assist aggrieved parties who are handicapped by factors such as financial constraints in seeking redress in court. Particularly, lawyers must be willing to act pro bono on behalf of deserving people and as friends of the courts to facilitate adjudication of reproductive health rights issues.

68.For a discussion of ‘right of access to court’ see Babafemi Odunsi, Unfair Fair Hearing and Unequal Religious Equality: The Facts and Fictions of Constitutional Guarantee of Equality in Nigeria,

35 INDIAN SOCIO-LEGAL J. (2009).

69.D.A. Ijalaye, Justice as Administered by the Nigerian Courts (Justice Idigbe Memorial Lecture Series Five, University of Benin, 1992), at 9.

70.Attorney General of Kaduna State v. Hassan (1985) 2 N.W.L.R 483, at 522.

71.See, Ijalaye, supra note 69, at 9-10. See also, Odunsi, supra note 68, at 61-66.

2011]

A Nigerian Perspective on Courts & Reproductive Health Rights

179

Judicial officials too should strive to be above board in adjudication of reproductive health matters. Principally, judicial officers must exercise restraint and tolerance to advocates of reproductive health rights issues in courts. True, reproductive health rights cases, due to the nature of issues involved may be dramatic, emotive, unusual and may even seem to be an affront to the religious and socio-cultural leanings of judicial officers; yet, they must still be dispassionate in addressing and adjudicating the legal issues without prejudices. In essence, the courts would only be able to effectively perform their roles in promoting reproductive health rights when personal biases of judicial officers do not supplant societal expectation and trust in them as unbiased arbiters. If this scenario does not subsist, then litigants would not be having practical access to court or fair hearing therein.

Generally, judicial officers can play positive as well as negative roles in the promotion of reproductive health rights or other rights. The negative roles naturally would frustrate safeguarding of rights, and in addition impose extra burden on aggrieved persons. The case of Ahamefule v Imperial Medical Centre and Molokwu72 illustrates how the negative roles of a court can compound the woes of aggrieved persons whose rights have been transgressed.

In the case, the plaintiff, Georgina Ahamefule, an HIV positive person had instituted action against the defendants for the termination of her employment on grounds of her HIV status. Before trial in the case commenced, lawyer for the defendants asked for assurances that other persons in court would not be infected with HIV if the plaintiff was allowed to come into the court room to give evidence. The defendants’ lawyer further urged the court to require the plaintiff to produce a medical expert who would testify on oath that other occupants of the court would not be infected with HIV if the appellant was allowed in. The learned trial judge immediately ordered that an expert opinion be heard on the Subject-matter either from Nigeria or from abroad. For clarity the short ruling of the judge is reproduced below:

Having listened to the arguments of both counsel on the issue of the risk of an H.I.V. patient-plaintiff giving evidence in court.… I am of the opinion that the view of the learned counsel for the defendants should be respected in law in view of the fact that life has no duplicate and must be guaranteed jealously. It is hereby ordered that an expert opinion be heard on the subject-matter either from an expert in Nigeria or from any other part of the world where research had been fully

72. Suit No. ID/1627/2000 (Ikeja Judicial Division of the Lagos High Court, Nigeria).

180

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

carried out.73

One impact of the judicial position in Ahamefule is that the aggrieved person who had faced one level of discrimination in being dismissed from work due to her health status was again judicially subjected to another level of discrimination in terms of being deprived of unencumbered access to court.

The first Nigerian incident of HIV infection was officially recognized in 1986.74 In 2000 (about 14 years after), when the Ahamefule case came up, through public awareness campaigns and government policies, there was sufficient information on the modes of transmission of HIV. Someone of the calibre of a High Court Judge can thus be reasonably presumed to have rudimentary information on the modes of transmission as to be able to conclude that HIV could not summarily “jump at” people in the courtroom. It is thus arguable that the position of the court was motivated more by personal prejudices than empirical knowledge.

Unfortunately, the unwarranted judicial emasculation of rights displayed at the High Court was not redressed, but rather tacitly approved at the Court of Appeal which elected to scuttle the matter by means of forensic technicality. Ahamefule remains an uncomfortable reminder that the courts can take positions that have adverse effects on the promotion of human rights, including reproductive health rights.

HIV positive status touches on reproductive and sexual rights. An area where HIV positive status touches on reproductive health rights is the increasingly controversial issue of the right of HIV positive women to bear children.75 In the shadow of Ahamefule, if a HIV positive woman’s right to bear children is transgressed by forceful sterilization or a prohibitive legislation, there is the possibility that such a woman may still have to confront other burdens at the court level. Happily, many courts in different parts of the world have not taken the Ahamefule route. In cases of similar nature, the courts have taken stances beneficial to the promotion of

73.Adapted from the Court of Appeal Ruling in Ahamefule v. Imperial Medical Centre & Molokwu, CA/L/514/2001 delivered on 21 April, 2004.

74.UNGASS, NIGERIA: PROGRESS REPORT (January 31, 2008), at 15-16; FEDERAL GOVERNMENT OF NIGERIA, NATIONAL HIV/AIDSPOLICY (2003), at 1-5 (hereinafter Nigeria’s HIV/AIDS Policy).

75.See, David Smith, African Women with HIV ‘Coerced into Sterilisation,’ THE GUARDIAN, Monday 22 June 2009, online at <htpp://www..guardian.co.uk/world/2009/jun/22/Africa-hiv-positive- women-sterilisation>, at 1-2 ( accessed 15 October 2009).

2011]

A Nigerian Perspective on Courts & Reproductive Health Rights

181

reproductive, sexual and other rights of people living with HIV.76 Hopefully, Nigerian courts will associate with the rights-friendly dispositions of these courts in the event of another case similar to Ahamefule.

IX. CONCLUSION

Realization of reproductive health rights remains a continuous struggle across the world. There are many fronts to prosecution of the struggle with different stakeholders having roles to play. This article has attempted to show the judicial front in the struggle, identifying the vanguard position of courts in the promotion of rights equation. Courts generally have played and will always have crucial roles to play in the promotion of reproductive health rights. Equally, as shown by Ahamefule, courts can complicate or frustrate the drive to promote reproductive health rights through unfavourable decisions.

There are various legal instruments by which courts can carry out their tasks. Also, through policy declarations77 and the ratification of international human rights instruments Nigeria and other countries have shown increasing willingness to promote reproductive health rights. In light of this development, it should be relatively easy for the courts to perform their roles. All the same, there is the requirement of the will power to perform the required roles. Remarkably, various court decisions in different parts of the world indicate that courts are more willing to stand on the side of protection, fulfillment and respect of human rights, including reproductive health rights. This poignantly explains why the court remains an attractive avenue for agitators of reproductive health rights in different parts of the world.

76.See .e.g., Diau v. Botswana Building Society (BBS), Case No. IC 50/2003 (Industrial Court of Botswana, 2003); Hoffmann v. South African Airways (2000) 11 BCLR 1235 (CC); Nymbani Children’s Home v. The Ministry for Education and The Attorney General, Kenya High Court at Nairobi, Application No. 1521 of 2003 (OS); Van Biljon & Ors v. Minister of Correctional Services & Ors (1997) 50 BMLR 206, High Court of Cape of Good Hope Provincial Division, para 51.

77.Some examples of such policies in Nigeria are the Nigerian National Health Policy and Strategy 1988, 1998, the Nigerian National Reproductive Health Policy and Strategy 2001, and the Maternal and Child Health Policy 1994. Other Federal Agencies and parastatals associated with strengthening reproductive health are the National Primary Health Care Development Agency (NPHCDA) Act 1992 , the Population Activities Fund Agency (PAFA), the Department of Community Development and Activities (DCDPA), and the National Health Insurance Scheme Act 1991.

182

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

THE QUEST FOR POVERTY ALLEVIATION IN NIGERIA: THE NEED FOR A RIGHTS-BASED APPROACH

O.A. Orifowomo*

ABSTRACT

The article closely examines the concept and meaning of poverty, being inclusive though not restricted to income poverty, but embracing the wider construct of human poverty, finding expression in the requirements of human development. It situates the fight against poverty across the globe within the Millennium Declaration and the Millennium Development Goals of the United Nations. In particular, Nigeria appears to be fighting a losing battle against poverty, over the last three decades, despite committal of considerable resources, due to insidious failure to engage beyond mere programmes and strategies. It advocates a shift in conception and implementation on the entire platform of household, civil society, development partners and the apparatus of governance.

I. INTRODUCTION

We will spare no effort to free our fellow men, women and children from the abject and dehumanizing conditions of extreme poverty, to which more than a billion of them are currently subjected. We are committed to making the right to development a reality for everyone and to freeing the entire human race from want. We resolve therefore to create an environment—at the national and global levels alike—which is conducive to development and to the elimination of poverty.1

Poverty has its origin in human existence and it has been with society in various degrees from time immemorial. Its meaning and extent has changed over time with civilization, economic development and human perception of things. For instance, most people in ancient societies were poor, and this was accepted as natural and unavoidable. The current understanding, on the contrary, is that the condition of poverty is unacceptable, and should therefore be eradicated. This is based on the human rights

* Senior Lecturer, Department of Jurisprudence & Private Law, Faculty of Law, Obafemi Awolowo University. Email: <orifowomo@oauife.edu.ng> or <oorifowo2003@yahoo.co.uk>.

1. United Nations Millennium Declaration, General Assembly Resolution 55/2 of 8 September 2000, available at <http://www.un.org/millennium/declaration/ares552e.htm> (accessed 19 June 2008).

2011]

A Rights-based Approach to Poverty Alleviation in Nigeria

183

notion that all human beings are equal, and should be entitled not only to civil and political rights, but also to social, economic and cultural rights such as food, shelter, education and personal security.2

There appears to be a bewildering ambiguity in the use of the term “poverty.” The term poverty is susceptible to various meanings which may cover a wide range of issues such as lack of adequate income, or human resources, sustainable livelihood, social inclusion, current consumption or future security. Different concepts imply different interventions. Poverty means more than the condition or quality of being poor, in need, indigent, or lacking means of subsistence. The meaning of poverty extends to “deficiency in necessary properties or desirable qualities or in a specific quality, inferiority, or inadequacy.”3 The pertinent questions, therefore, are these: is poverty simply about the level of income obtained by households or individuals? Is it about lack of access to social services? Or, better still, is it more correctly understood as the inability to participate in society, economically, socially, culturally or politically?4 These issues are analyzed in this article.

II. THE CONCEPTUALIZATION OF POVERTY

It is widely accepted among scholars that the word “poverty” may be defined in many ways; in fact, experts in the field are yet to agree upon a single definition of the term.5 Poverty can be defined as an inability to meet basic needs due to lack of resources. It is a condition in which resources are not adequate to meet basic needs.6 Poverty is the substantive lack of means or resources.7 Broadly speaking, poverty may be conceived both in the sense of income poverty and in the sense of human poverty. Earlier, poverty was understood largely in terms of income poverty. In recent times, however, its scope

2.S. Schwartzman, The Statistical Measurement of Poverty (Summary of the work of the Expert Group on Poverty Statistics, set up by the UN Statistical Commission in 1995), available at <http://unstats.un.org/unsd/statcom/doc99/rio.pdf>, (accessed 21 June 2008).

3.Culled from Mission Statement of Journal of Poverty: Innovations on Social, Political & Economic Inequalities, School of Social Work, Loyola University Chicago, Illinois.

4.Simon Maxwell, The Meaning and Measurement of Poverty (Odi Poverty Briefing No. 3, 1999), available at <http://www.odi.org.uk/publications/briefing/pov3.html> (accessed 21 June 2008).

5.M. Mowafi, The Meaning and Measurement of Poverty: A Look into the Global Debate, available at <http://www.sas.upenn.edu/~dludden/Mowafi_Poverty_Measurement_Debate.pdf> (accessed 19 June 2008).

6.P. Saunders, Towards a Credible Poverty Framework: From Income Poverty to Deprivation (SPRC Discussion Paper No. 131, January 2004), available online at <http://www.sprc.unsw.edu.au/media/File/DP131.pdf>, (accessed 26 February 2011).

7.G. Fajth & K. Holland, Poverty and Children: A Perspective (UNICEF Working Paper, July 2007), at 4–5.

184

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

has extended to some other forms beyond lack and deprivation to include inadequate human resources referred to as human poverty. Poverty was treated as a lack of income; this could be on household or individual basis, engendering a failure to meet minimum nutrition or subsistence levels. However, the concept of poverty has broadened to accommodate a wider set of “basic needs”, extending beyond lack of income, to lack of access to health, education and other services.8

Human poverty refers to a multidimensional concept of poverty going beyond income poverty and including deprivations in areas of health, knowledge, child mortality, malnutrition, and so on. The United Nations Development Programme (UNDP) defined poverty in its multi-dimensional nature. According to the UNDP, human poverty indicates lack of basic human capabilities, including illiteracy, malnutrition, abbreviated life span, poor maternal health, illness from preventable diseases.9 Indirect measures are lack of access to goods, services and infrastructure—energy, sanitation, education, communication, and drinking water—necessary to sustain basic human capabilities.10

The UNDP Human Development Report, 1997 introduced the concept of human poverty. It argued that if income is not the sum total of well-being, therefore, lack of income cannot be the sum total of poverty. Human poverty does not focus on what people do or do not have, but on what they can or cannot do. It is deprivation in the most essential capabilities of life, including leading a long and healthy life, being knowledgeable, having adequate economic provisioning and participating fully in the life of the community.11

A. Absolute and Relative Poverty

Contemporarily and in universal terms, income poverty is treated under two broad heads. One is the concept of absolute poverty understood as the minimum set of resources a person needs to survive. The other is the concept of relative poverty, that is, a measurement of the resources and living conditions of parts of the population in relation to others.12 According to the World Bank, absolute poverty relates to the ability of the individual to provide himself with the basic needs such as food, clothing, shelter, portable water, health service, education, public transport, and so on. This type of

8.Maxwell, supra note 4.

9.UNDP, OVERCOMING HUMAN POVERTY (2000).

10.Id.

11.UNDP, HUMAN DEVELOPMENT REPORT (1997).

12.G.M. Fisher, Is There Such a Thing as an Absolute Poverty Line Over Time? <http://www.census.gov/hhes/povmeas/publications/povthres/fisher3.html> (accessed 23 February 2011).

2011]

A Rights-based Approach to Poverty Alleviation in Nigeria

185

poverty leads to deprivation, non-participation in decision-making affecting one’s life.13 Absolute poverty is designated as the line below which existence becomes a matter of acute deprivation, hunger, premature death and suffering. In practice, it may

be difficult to measure it in a consistent way, since the dividing line between acceptable and unacceptable deprivation is not just biological, and can change from society to society. The consensual understanding, however, is that absolute poverty is an intolerable situation requiring prompt corrective action.14 In other words, absolute poverty refers to lack of the set of resources a person should acquire in order to maintain a “minimum standard of living.”

Relative poverty, on the other hand, is concerned with how well off an individual is with respect to others in the same society. Relative poverty relates to the inability of a certain section of the community or individuals to satisfy their basic needs.15 In theory, therefore, while an absolute poverty line is a measure that could, adjusting for price fluxes, remain stable over time, a relative poverty line is one that could be expected to shift with the overall standard of living in a given society.16

B. Characterization of Poverty

Poverty is “a multifaceted, dynamic and contextualized form of adversity in which material lack interacts with and is mediated and compounded by social exclusion, inequity and powerlessness, with multiple effects.”17 Poverty is hunger, lack of shelter, a state of being sick and not being able to see a doctor, not having access to school and not knowing how to read, not having a job. Poverty is powerlessness, lack of representation and freedom.18 Poverty erodes or nullifies economic and social rights such as the right to health, adequate housing, food and safe water, and the right to education. The same is also true of civil and political rights, such as the right to a fair trial, political participation and security of the person.19 It is clear from the above that poverty is widely understood today as a multidimensional phenomenon, where income

13.WORLD BANK, POVERTY: WORLD DEVELOPMENT REPORT (1990).

14.Schwartzman, supra note 2.

15.B. Bulama, Economic Growth, Inequality and Poverty in Nigeria, at 19, available online at <http://www.lulu.com/items/volume_27/429000/429916/1/print/429916.pdf> (accessed 26 July 2008).

16.Mowafi, supra note 5.

17.Fajth & Holland, supra note 7.

18.See, World Bank reports on poverty, available online at <http://www.worldbank.org/> (accessed 13 June 2008).

19.Office of the United Nations High Commissioner for Human Rights, available at <http://www.ohchr.org/english/issues/poverty/index.htm> (accessed 12 June 2008).

186

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

or material deprivation—is a very important dimension.20

C. Determining the Poverty Line

“Poverty line” indicates the income level below which poverty exists, thus defining those who are in income (or primary) poverty.21 A person is considered poor if his or her consumption or income level falls below some minimum level necessary to meet basic needs.22 This minimum level is usually called the “poverty line”; the most formally recognized being the “Henderson Poverty Line.”23 Put differently, poverty line is the income level beneath which a person cannot buy goods and services that constitute a socially acceptable minimum standard of living.24 Benjamin Rowntree, who popularized the concept of poverty line, defines it as “a standard of bare subsistence rather than a living.”25 What is necessary to satisfy basic needs varies across time and societies. Therefore, poverty lines vary in time and place, and each country uses lines which are appropriate to its level of development, societal norms and values.26

The concept of a poverty line depicting a global minimum standard for a socially acceptable minimum standard of living for the whole world came into existence only after 1945 when, for the first time, the concept became an object of policy attention.27 In an effort to measure global poverty by the standards of what poverty means in poor countries, the World Bank has adopted a method whereby all persons could be evaluated equally based on a single threshold of real consumption. Rather than accepting national poverty lines that would treat poverty as a relative concept, and

20.Fajth & Holland, supra note 7.

21.Saunders, supra note 6, at 2.

22.Id., at 7.

23.The Henderson Poverty Line is a measure developed in the early 1970s by Professor Ronald Henderson, while undertaking the Australian Government Commission of Inquiry into Poverty. The poverty line estimates the amount of money people need in order to cover their basic costs and maintain a minimum standard of living. See, Poverty Line Update, available at <http://www.bsl.org.au/pdfs/poverty_line_update_Aug07.pdf> (accessed 26 February 2011); The Poor in Australia: Who Are They and How Many Are There? available online at <http://www.aph.gov.au/library/intguide/sp/poverty.htm> (accessed 26 February 2011).

24.Saunders, supra note 6, at 5.

25. See, C.L.P. Nunes, The Evolution of the Economic Thought about Poverty Measurement, available online at <http://www.hull.ac.uk/php/ecskrb/GDP2007/Celso.22647.1177930319/>, (accessed 13 June 2008).

26.Poverty Net, Overview: Understanding Poverty, available at <http://web.worldbank.org/...> (accessed 19 June 2008).

27.Poverty: Elements of Historical Definition, available online at <www.sas.upenn.edu/>, (accessed 5 June 2008).

2011]

A Rights-based Approach to Poverty Alleviation in Nigeria

187

recognizing the merits of establishing a common measure to evaluate consumption poverty across countries, the Bank devised what is known as the “$1/day poverty line” in 1990,28 denoting the common international poverty line.

The $1/day definition reflects what is known as “purchasing power parities” (PPPs), essentially basing the poverty line as the equivalent of what a person could buy with one dollar in the United States. It is important to note, therefore, that the $1/day definition does not reflect “how far a dollar could go” in local currency, but rather, is an indication of what a dollar could purchase in the United States adjusted for differences in domestic price levels.29 However, in 2008, the World Bank came out with a revised figure of $1.25 at 2005 purchasing-power parity. This figure is based on the results of the 2005 International Comparison Program (ICP).30

III. THE FACE OF POVERTY IN NIGERIA

The national incidence of relative poverty increased sharply, both between 1980 - 1985, and 1992 - 96 in Nigeria. The national incidence of relative poverty dropped from 65.6 per cent in 1996 to 54.4 per cent in 2004 representing 11.2 per cent decline over the period.31 The dollar per day gave a national poverty incidence of 51.6 per cent. The urban poverty incidence was 40.1 per cent compared with rural poverty incidence of 60.6 per cent. The subjective measure of poverty, which is a self-assessment, indicates a national incidence of poverty of 75.5 per cent, which disaggregated into 70.7 per cent for urban areas, and 79.2 per cent for rural areas. This measure generally increased poverty results because it is based on the perception of the people.32

In clear terms, the National Economic Empowerment and Development Strategy (NEEDS)33 stated that “although Nigeria is rich in natural and human

28.Mowafi, supra note 5.

29.Id.

30.WORLD BANK, 2008 WORLD DEVELOPMENT INDICATORS, POVERTY DATA: A SUPPLEMENT TO WORLD DEVELOPMENT INDICATORS (2008); New Data Show 1.4 Billion Live on Less than US$1.25 a Day, But Progress Against Poverty Remains Strong, available at <http://web.worldbank.org/> (accessed 26 February 2011).

31.NATIONAL BUREAU OF STATISTICS, POVERTY PROFILE FOR NIGERIA (2006). The findings of the report cover the magnitude, nature, character and dimensions of poverty in Nigeria in 2004. Noticeably, the report failed to distinguish between absolute poverty and relative poverty. It rather generalized poverty in Nigeria during the period under review as relative poverty. This would be inappropriate considering that during this period, the income of some proportion of Nigerians fell below the “poverty line” of $1 a day.

32.Id.

33.NATIONALPLANNING COMMISSION OF NIGERIA,NATIONAL ECONOMIC EMPOWERMENT AND DEVELOPMENT STRATEGY (NEEDS) (2004).

188

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

resources, 7 out of every 10 Nigerians live on less than $1 a day.”34 Furthermore, “more than two-thirds of the Nigerian people are poor, despite living in a country with vast potential wealth. Although revenues from crude oil have been increasing over the past decades, Nigerians have been falling deeper into poverty. In 1980, an estimated 27 percent of Nigerians lived in poverty. By 1999, 70 percent of the population had income of less than $1 a day, and the figure has risen since then.”35 With per capita income falling significantly to about $300 between 1980 and 2000 (well below the sub- Saharan average of $450), it is noted that approximately, 90 million of Nigeria’s 133 million people are living in absolute poverty, on less than one dollar a day.36

Since 1990, the UNDP in its Human Development Report has been publishing the Human Development Index (HDI) which looks beyond Gross Domestic Product (GDP) to a broader definition of well-being. The HDI measures the average progress of a country in human development with reference to: living a long and healthy life (measured by life expectancy), being educated (measured by adult literacy and enrolment at the primary, secondary and tertiary level) and having a decent standard of living (measured by purchasing power parity, PPP, income). Out of the 177 countries with data, Nigeria is ranked the 158th with HDI of 0.470.37 The Human Poverty Index for developing countries (HPI-1) focuses on the proportion of people below a threshold level in the same dimensions of human development as the human development index—living a long and healthy life, having access to education, and a decent standard of living. By looking beyond income deprivation, the HPI-1 represents a multi- dimensional alternative to the $1 a day (PPP US$) poverty measure. Nigeria has HPI-1 value of 37.3, ranking 80th among the 108 developing countries for which the index has been calculated.38

A. Causes of Poverty

The fundamental question about poverty has always been who or what causes it. The Western thinking on this question has oscillated between placing the responsibility for poverty squarely on poor people and locating it in systemic conditions beyond the control of individuals. Poor people are in their unfortunate condition due to circumstances beyond their control. Due to the fact that the source of poverty lies in

34.Id., at ix

35.Id., at xiii.

36.WORLD BANK, JIS (2004), at 8-9; but see also <http://www.dfid.gov.uk/pubs/files/nigeria- cap-1-b.pdf> (accessed 22 July 2008).

37.See, UNDP, HUMAN DEVELOPMENT REPORT 2007/2008 (2008).

38.Id.

2011]

A Rights-based Approach to Poverty Alleviation in Nigeria

189

the socioeconomic system, the solution to it must also be at the societal level: large- scale interventions to rectify systemic inequities. On the other hand, some have insisted that poverty is an individual problem. It is argued that able-bodied poor should take responsibility for their own lives and extricate themselves from poverty by getting and holding a job. Large-scale interventions such as the government programmes of war on poverty only make the situation worse by fostering dependence of poor people on handouts.39

Suggestively, the Nigerian thought seems to align with the attributes of a systemic failure as provocateur for poverty in the land. According to the NEEDS,40 one source of poverty is the lack of basic services, such as clean water, education, and health care. Another is the lack of assets, such as land, tools, credit, and supportive networks of friends and family. A third one is the lack of income to enable one access food, shelter, clothing, and empowerment (political power, confidence, dignity, etc). Discrimination on the grounds of gender, race, disability, age, or ill health increases vulnerability to poverty; so do natural or human-caused shocks such as market collapses, conflicts, droughts or floods.41

It would then appear that the nature of poverty in Nigeria is a combination of income and human poverty. The poor in Nigeria is destitute of virtually every utility for human capabilities, though it could be conceded that there may not necessarily be an aggregation of all the factors in one particular case. Considering that the majority of Nigerians were categorized as living in abject poverty, at that time,42 despite the country’s great natural wealth, it would not be far-fetched to submit that Nigeria is likely to come within the definition of a failed nation, that is, a nation that has failed its people. There are a number of other factors which have contributed to increased poverty in Nigeria, which are discussed below.

1. Macro-economic Distortions.—Poor macro-economic and monetary policies resulted in low economic growth rate and continuous slide in the value of the naira, which depreciated from one Naira (N1.00) to a Dollar at around June 1986 to one hundred and fifty three Naira (N153.00) to a Dollar in March, 2011 in the parallel market. Similarly, other macroeconomic indicators such as the inflation rate, the interest rate, the GDP growth rate, unemployment and income distribution among

39.F.A. Hanson, How Poverty Lost Its Meaning, 17 CATO J. (1997), at 189-209, available at <http://www.cato.org/pubs/journal/cj17n2/cj17n2-5.pdf> (accessed 23 June 2008).

40.See supra note 33.

41.Id., at xiv.

42.The period until the inception of the NEEDS and thereafter, though there has been gradual amelioration of the situation. By then, about 70 percent of the population had income of less than $1 a day. See, NATIONAL PLANNING COMMISSION OF NIGERIA, supra note 33, at xiii.

190

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

others, have continued to show negative trends, which ultimately translated to worsening poverty incidence.

2.Weak Productive Base.—The Nigerian economy has experienced some changes since independence, but as of today, it is still characteristically monolithic, depending on one primary product, that is, oil for over 90 per cent of its exports and government revenue. At independence, the Nigerian economy was largely agrarian, until the 1970s, when oil took over. This trend has narrowed down considerably the employment generation capabilities of the economy.

3.Bad Governance.—Over many years, Nigeria had been plagued by bad governance, bringing about a failure in harnessing the nation’s resources to enhance the welfare of the citizenry. Governance placed little or no premium on openness, transparency and accountability, probity and effective leadership. According to the Department for International Development (DFID), poor governance is a cause of poverty. People suffer when governments do not allow participation in political life, provide access to justice, deliver adequate public services or control corruption. It opines that serious problems with governance still exist in most African countries, including Nigeria.43

4.Corruption.—This comes in different forms and differs from country to country. In Africa, illegal take-over of government through military coups, embezzlement, nepotism, looting, bribery, vote buying and abuse of office are very common. The manifestation of corruption in Nigeria progressed marginally among individuals and, thereafter, assumed an institutional and later national dimension. The incidences of corruption had resulted in low inflow of foreign investment, massive capital flight and warped reward system leading to inefficient allocation of scarce resources, and ultimate, worsening poverty incidence. According to the World Bank Africa Regional Vice President, Obiageli Ezekwesili, “corruption is a cancer stunting development of the country [Nigeria].”44 She stressed the need to ensure prudent management of financial resources in ways that impact positively on the lives of ordinary Nigerians, especially the majority who live in the rural areas such as the Niger

43.DFID, Nigeria, available at <http://www.dfid.gov.uk/pubs/files/nigeria-factsheet.pdf>, (accessed 21 March 2008).

44.World Bank Vice President Praises Nigerian Government for Reforms, available at <http://web.worldbank.org/wbsite/external/countries/africaext/nigeriaextn/0,,contentmdk:21648598~pa gepk:141137~pipk:141127~thesitepk:368896,00.html> (accessed 21 July 2008).

2011]

A Rights-based Approach to Poverty Alleviation in Nigeria

191

Delta which is lagging far behind having gone through a number of civil unrest.45

5.Policies of International Institutions.—Many developing nations are in debt and poverty partly due to the policies of international institutions such as the International Monetary Fund (IMF) and the World Bank. Their programmes have been heavily criticized for many years for resulting in poverty. In addition, for developing or third world countries, there has been an increased dependency on the richer nations. This is despite the IMF and World Bank’s claim that they will reduce poverty. Following an ideology known as neo-liberalism, and spearheaded by these and other institutions known as the “Washington Consensus” (for being based in Washington D.C.), Structural Adjustment Policies (SAPs) have been imposed to ensure debt repayment and economic restructuring. However, the way it has happened has required poor countries to reduce spending in sectoral areas like health, education and development, while debt repayment and other economic policies have been made the priority. In effect, the IMF and the World Bank have demanded that poor nations lower the standard of living of their people.46

6.Debt Burden.—This had been one of the drawbacks to Nigeria’s development efforts. The debt portfolio, which was about US$14.28 billion dollars in 1980, had risen to about US$32.9 billion in the year 2003.47 The debt stock was reduced from US$46.26 billion in 2004 to US$20.48 billion in 2005 and to US$3.54 billion at the end of 2006. In 2005, Nigeria secured a significant debt relief from the Paris Club amounting to US$18.0 billion. With the payment of the balance of US$12.4 billion to the creditors, Nigeria exited the Paris Club debt in March 2006. Nigeria also exited the London Club debt on 4th April, 2007 after paying off outstanding Par Bonds and Promissory Notes.48

The servicing of the debt had encroached on the volume of resources needed for socioeconomic development. Productive sectors of the economy like agriculture, industry, manufacturing and so on were equally constrained leading to low productivity, low capacity utilization, under-employment and low purchasing power, thereby throwing majority of Nigerians into abject poverty. However, the country has also taken a couple of other loans, for various other projects. The external debt of the

45.Id.

46.A. Shah, Structural Adjustment—A Major Cause of Poverty, available online at <http://www.globalissues.org/TradeRelated/SAP.asp>, (accessed 9 June 2008)

47.Nigerian Debt Management Office.

48.NIGERIA:POVERTYREDUCTIONSTRATEGYPAPER—PROGRESSREPORT(IMF Country Report No. 07/270, August 2007), at 8.

192

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

country was US$3.3 billion at the end 2007, this is largely to multilateral creditors, but external reserves exceeded US$54 billion at the end of January 2008.49 Also, the nation’s domestic debt profile increased from N4, 229 trillion in September to N4.55 trillion in December 2010. However, according to a statement credited to the Director- General, Debt Management Office (DMO), Dr Abraham Nwankwo, the debt to gross domestic product (GDP) of 19 per cent was quite in order when compared with the global acceptable standard of 40 per cent for countries in the same peer group with Nigeria.50 Fears have been expressed over the country’s rising debt portfolio,51 with its potential of soon becoming a debt over-hang on the nation.

7.Unemployment.—Unemployment in Nigeria assumed crisis levels in the late 1980s and early 1990s especially among primary/secondary school leavers and graduates of tertiary institutions. It should be noted that the high incidence of unemployment has not abated, but compounded by pockets of retrenchment in various sectors. Joblessness engenders lack of income, capable of degenerating into poverty.

8.Poor Human Resources Development.—Formal education ensures the full development of human personality and citizenship. Initial training develops a person’s skills, and professional competence that enables him to perform in employment. This, when complemented with life long experience would ensure continued appreciation and/or adaptation to changes in the global environment. In developing countries, Nigeria not being an exception, the challenge of human resource training and development should go beyond the need to secure relevance in a modern society to the application of acquired skills for self or paid employment.52

49.IMF Executive Board Concludes 2007 Article IV Consultation with Nigeria, Public Information Notice (PIN) No. 08/16, February 15, 2008, at 2.

50.Nigeria’s Debt Profile Healthy – DMO &. Nigeria Not Utilizing Opportunities in AfDB, NIGERIAN TRIBUNE, January 28, 2011, available at <http://www.tribune.com.ng/index.php/front-page- news/16802-nigerias-debt-profile-healthy-dmo-nigeria-not-utilizing-opportunities-in-afdb> (accessed 28 February 2011).

51.Id.

52.See, G. Buwai, The Role of the Public Service in Poverty Reduction Strategies: Challenges and the Way Forward (Country Paper Presentation at the 25th Annual African Association for Public Administration and Management (AAPAM) Round Table Conference, Banjul, Gambia, April 2004), available at <http://unpan1.un.org/intradoc/groups/public/documents/AAPAM/UNPAN025671.pdf> (accessed 22 June 2008). See also, Anup Shah, Causes of Poverty, available online at <http://www.globalissues.org/TradeRelated/Poverty/Corruption.asp> (accessed 3 June 2008).

2011]

A Rights-based Approach to Poverty Alleviation in Nigeria

193

IV. POVERTY AND THE MILLENNIUM DEVELOPMENT GOALS

In September 2000, 189 countries signed the Millennium Declaration which led to the adoption of the Millennium Development Goals (MDGs). The MDGs are a set of eight goals for which 18 numerical targets have been set and over 40 quantifiable indicators have been identified. The goals are: eradicating extreme poverty and hunger; achieving universal primary education; promoting gender equality and empower women; reducing child mortality; improve maternal health; combating HIV/AIDS, malaria, and other diseases; ensuring environmental sustainability; and developing a global partnership for development. The first MGD calls for halving the proportion of people living in extreme poverty, and those suffering from hunger, between 1990 and 2015. Coinciding with this commitment, the World Bank focused its 2000/01 World Development Report on exploring best practices for reaching this goal, repositioning poverty alleviation as the single greatest mission guiding the Bank’s policies and programs.

There had been various programmes and strategies aimed at poverty alleviation in Nigeria. It is remarkable to note that the budget for Nigeria in 2000 was dubbed as one “to relieve poverty.” Indeed, before the National Assembly even passed the 2000 budget, the government got an approval to commit N10 billion to poverty alleviation programme. In the 2001 budget, the government had increased the allocation to poverty alleviation programme by 150%.53 The first poverty eradication programme in Nigeria was the National Accelerated Food Production Programme and the Nigerian Agricultural and Co-operative Bank set up by General Yakubu Gowon led government in 1972. In 1976, General Olusegun Obasanjo introduced Operation Feed the Nation. The program delegated university students to the rural areas to teach the rural farmers on how to use modern farming tools. The civilian administration of Alhaji Shehu Shagari introduced the Green Revolution Programme in 1979. The objectives of the programmes were to reduce food importation while boosting local food production. General Muhammadu Buhari later introduced the “Go Back to Land” Programme after coming into office in 1983.

General Ibrahim Babangida took over the reign of government in 1986 and established the Directorate of Food, Roads and Rural Infrastructure (DFRRI). The Peoples’ Bank of Nigeria and the Community Bank of Nigeria (which were part of the programme) were set up to give out small loans to the rural poor. The wife of the President, Mrs Maryam Babangida came up with her own poverty reduction program, “Better Life Programme,” to improve the lives of rural women. General Sani Abacha who took over power from the interim administration of Chief Ernest Shonekan in 1993

53.F.O. Ogwumike, An Appraisal of Poverty Reduction Strategies in Nigeria, 39 CBN ECON.

&FIN. REV. (2002).

194

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

set up the Family Support Programme and the Family Economic Advancement Programme.54 The Obasanjo regime also established the National Poverty Eradication Programme (NAPEP) in 2001 with a start-up grant of 6 billion Naira. Under this, schemes such as Youth Empowerment Scheme (YES), Rural Infrastructure Development Scheme (RIDS), Social Welfare Services Scheme (SOWESS), Capacity Acquisition Programme (CAP), and Natural Resources Development Conservation Scheme (NRDCS) came up and were expected to rid Nigeria of its perennial and increasing poverty.55 The latest poverty reduction strategy in Nigeria is the NEEDS.

A. Poverty Reduction Strategy Papers (PRSPs)

Since the late 1970s, Structural Adjustment Programmes (SAPs) have become an integral part of the conditionalities imposed by the rich donor governments of the West and the International Financial Institutions (IFIs), in particular, the World Bank and the International Monetary Fund (IMF) for lending to borrowing nations. SAPs require recipient countries to change their economic policies, generally to encourage greater economic deregulation (“liberalization”) of trade, investment and finances. In 1986, the IMF established its own structural adjustment lending programme.

Usually, SAPs include several basic economic stabilization components geared towards bringing an economy into balance through reducing inflation and decreasing budget deficits while meeting debt payment schedules. They also contain structural and sectoral policies aimed at integrating countries into the global economy by promoting exports, reducing state activity, and liberalizing trade, investment and finance. They

54.Nigeria also had Free and Compulsory Primary Education (FCPE), Low Cost Housing, River Basin Development Authorities (RBDA), National Agricultural Land Development Authority (NALDA), Agricultural Development Programmes (ADP), Agricultural Credit Guarantee Scheme (ACGS), Strategic Grains Reserves Program (SGRP), Rural Electrification Scheme (RES), and Rural Banking Programme (RBP). These were programmes mostly designed to take care of objectives such as employment generation, enhancing agricultural output and income, and stemming the rural-urban migration tide, which greatly contributed to rising poverty levels.

55.See generally, V.E. Dike, The Global Economy and Poverty in Nigeria, available online at <http://www.nigerdeltacongress.com/garticles/global_economy_and_poverty_in_ni.htm> (accessed 16 June 2008); N. Jonah, Alleviating Poverty in Nigeria—The CDD Initiative, available online at <http://povertynewsblog.blogspot.com/2007/11/alleviating-poverty-in-nigeria-cdd.html> (accessed 22 June 2008); Buwai, supra note 52; A. Garba, Alleviating Poverty in Northern Nigeria (Paper presented at the Zumunta Association Annual Convention, Minneapolis, USA, July 28-29, 2006); D.O. Elumilade, T.O. Asaolu & S. A. Adereti, Appraising the Institutional Framework for Poverty Alleviation Programmes in Nigeria, 3 INTL RESEARCH J. FIN. & ECON. (2006), available online at <http://www.eurojournals.com/IRJFE%203%207%20asaolu.pdf>, (accessed 22 June 2008); Ogwumike, supra note 53.

2011]

A Rights-based Approach to Poverty Alleviation in Nigeria

195

generally entail reductions in government spending and employment, higher interest rates, currency devaluation, sale of government enterprises, reduction of tariffs and other trade barriers, and liberalization of foreign investment regulations and labour laws.56

The IMF had been variously criticized for its SAPs, which allegedly worsened the poverty profile in many countries. Supposedly, in response, the IMF renamed its structural adjustment facility as the Poverty Reduction and Growth Facility (PRGF). In 2000, borrowing countries began preparing Poverty Reduction Strategy Papers (PRSPs) as a prerequisite for a World Bank/IMF adjustment loan. These PRSPs could then serve as a framework for all IFIs and bilateral donor lending. Poverty Reduction Strategy Papers (PRSPs) are prepared by member countries in broad consultation with stakeholders and development partners, including the staffs of the World Bank and the IMF. Updated every three years with annual progress reports, they describe the country’s macroeconomic, structural, and social policies in support of growth and poverty reduction, as well as associated external financing needs and major sources of financing.57 Governments across the continent have developed Poverty Reduction Strategy Papers (PRSP), which attempt to comprehensively address the problem of poverty, through close collaboration with development partners.58

B. National Economic Empowerment and Development Strategy (NEEDS)

The NEEDS document, which is the bedrock of the reform programmes of the Federal Government of Nigeria, was launched on May 29, 2002.59 NEEDS is Nigeria’s plan for prosperity, its development plan inspired by current challenges for change and vigorous growth. Functionally, NEEDS is Nigeria’s Poverty Reduction Strategy Papers

56.C. Welch, Structural Adjustment Programs and Poverty Reduction Strategy, available online at <http://www.fpif.org/>, (accessed 3 June 2008).

57.IMF,NIGERIA:POVERTY REDUCTION STRATEGY PAPER—PROGRESS REPORT (IMF Country Report No. 07/270, August 2007), available at <http://www.imf.org/external/pubs/ft/scr/2007/cr07270.pdf> (accessed 19 June 2008).

58.F. Pamacheche & B. Koma, Privatization in Sub-Saharan Africa—An Essential Route to Poverty Alleviation, 1 AFR. INTEGRATION REV. 3 (2007).

59.Thereafter, the 36 States of the Nigerian federation, including the Federal Capital Territory, were invited to develop a broad, state-owned and led strategy for growth and poverty reduction, within the NEEDS and MDG framework in the form of the State’s Economic Empowerment and Development Strategies (SEEDS). The states were encouraged to document their entire medium term development plans, based on their peculiar local situations in the SEEDS. This has since been done. Subsequently, there has been the Local Government Economic Empowerment & Development Strategy (LEEDS), in Local Government Areas (LGAs) in Nigeria.

196

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

(PRSP).60 It is the people’s way of letting the government know what kind of Nigeria they wish to live in, now and in the future. It is also the government’s way of letting the people know how it plans to overcome the deep and pervasive obstacles to progress that the government and the people have identified. It is also seen as a way of letting the international community know where Nigeria stands in the West African sub-region and in the world and how it wishes to be supported.

The National Economic Empowerment and Development Strategy (NEEDS) 2004-2007 is Nigeria’s reform based medium-term plan for economic recovery, growth and development. NEEDS was conceptualized in 2003 and launched in 2004, as a response to the numerous challenges facing the nation one of which was the high level of poverty (about 70%).61 It was inaugurated with the aim of reforming the government, growing the private sector and empowering the people, with the national aspiration to be in the league of the 20 leading economies in the world by the year 2020. NEEDS was conceptualized to serve as a catalyst for the attainment of the goal. It was first implemented as NEEDS-1 from 2004-2007. NEEDS-1 was based on four goals which were poverty reduction, wealth creation, employment generation and value re- orientation. NEEDS-2 (2008-2011), whose preparation process was commenced, was to take care of the gaps in NEEDS 2004-2007. The strategic framework for NEEDS-2 has been developed and a drafting team of relevant stakeholders constituted.

From the onset, NEEDS was conceived as a living document that may continue to be modified as lessons of implementation emerge. In particular, the document will be reviewed and updated after every presidential election,62 hence NEEDS-2. Curiously and perhaps sadly too, indications have emerged as to the confusion in government circles over the status of NEEDS-2. The Minister of Finance was reported to have said that the programme (NEEDS) had been reviewed to accommodate the seven-point agenda of the current administration. However, this claim was contradicted by some sources within the Presidency, who took it as an indication that NEEDS, as a whole, had been abandoned.63 It is worrisome that even a suggestion (even if not real or merely misplaced) of such an atmosphere of confusion exists within government circles. In the least, it portends an inability to fully grasp the content and intent of the document by those saddled with the responsibility, in different capacities, to implement the programme. If this suspicion has any basis at all, it may have endangered the success of the programme itself.

60.See,C.C. Soludo, Preface to NATIONAL PLANNING COMMISSION OF NIGERIA, supra note 33.

61.See, supra note 57.

62.NATIONAL PLANNING COMMISSION OF NIGERIA, supra note 33, at vi – vii

63.Controversy over NEEDS 2 Status, THE GUARDIAN, July 8, 2008 at 1-2.

2011]

A Rights-based Approach to Poverty Alleviation in Nigeria

197

V. NEED FOR A PARADIGM SHIFT?

Admittedly, programmes and strategies for poverty reduction and alleviation implemented by various governments in Nigeria had accomplished very little, if anything at all. The NEEDS document professes that “despite great natural wealth, Nigeria [and by extension, Nigerians] is poor and social development is limited. If present trends continue, the country is not likely to meet the Millennium Development Goals.”64 It identified three main problems: not all of the people enjoy the same chance of prosperity; past governments in Nigeria, instead of focusing on delivering essential public services, assumed control of major sources of national income, thereby precipitating and facilitating corruption; and existence of many challenges in the way of private enterprise.65

No doubt, appreciable progress seemed to have been made in fostering economic development under the aegis of NEEDS. Regrettably, this has not seemingly translated into prosperity and well-being for the majority of the Nigerian people since the incidence of poverty is still pervasive and palpable in the country. It is submitted that the programmes that had been designed for poverty alleviation, in themselves, are not efficient. The same goes for NEEDS. However, much more needs to be done if the goals of poverty alleviation must be achieved. This will require a shift in concept, approach and implementation of poverty alleviation programmes.

A. Adoption of a Human Rights-based Approach

The strategy that has been most traditionally used as a tool in the fight against poverty has not proved to be effective. There is the need to develop a much broader vision more closely tied to human rights so as to acquire a first-rate legal dimension.66 This implies that poverty should no more be regarded as merely a governance issue but a denial of human rights. States, as primary duty-bearers, are obliged to respect, protect and fulfil the human rights entitlements of individuals, or rights-holders. This necessitates greater accountability of public institutions to all citizens. A human rights- based approach helps with a shift away from a needs approach based on “charity” to recognition of the rights of poor people to entitlements and the obligations on the part of others that are enshrined in law.

64.NATIONAL PLANNING COMMISSION OF NIGERIA, supra note 33, at xiii.

65.Id.

66.E.G. Salmon, The Long Road in the Fight Against Poverty and Its Promising Encounter with Human Rights, 4 SUR INTL J. HUM. RTS (2007), at 150-65.

198

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

It is contended that successful poverty reduction depends on providing opportunities for the poor people to contest their rights through normative changes, including through legal frameworks. Civil and political rights empower poor people not only to claim their economic and social rights but also to demand accountability for good public services, pro-poor public policies and a transparent participatory process open to hearing their views.67 It would then mean that as there is a right in the claimants—those caught in the throes of poverty—so is there a duty on government, for instance, to provide an enabling environment for poor people to get out of poverty.68 According to the UNDP, poverty eradication is a major human rights challenge of the 21st century. A decent standard of living, adequate nutrition, health care, education, decent work and protection against calamities are not just development goals, they are also human rights.69

On the other hand, the poor must not only be heard but must be empowered. In recognition of giving the poor a voice and its potential in the fight against poverty, the World Bank at the outset of this millennium initiated the Voices of the Poor project. In that study, the World Bank collected the voices of more than 60,000 poor men and women from around the world in an unprecedented effort to understand poverty from the perspective of the poor themselves. This work was to form the fulcrum of the 2000/2001 World Development Report entitled: Attacking Poverty. Advisedly, each country ought to build on the revelations in the Report, in formulating strategies to alleviate poverty and promoting the empowerment and capabilities of the poor.70

B. Integration of Freedom from Poverty into Fundamental Rights

Under the Constitution of the Federal Republic of Nigeria, 199971 certain rights are designated as fundamental rights. These rights are regarded as sacrosanct. Derogation from them, or an attempt to do so, except where justified under the Constitution itself, is amenable to judicial action.72 These rights include: right to life; right to dignity of

67.C. Luttrell & S. Quiroz, Linkages Between Human Rights-Based Approaches and Empowerment, <http://www.poverty-wellbeing.net/en/Home/Empowerment/document.php> (accessed 21 July 2008).

68.S. Jahan, Human Rights-Based Approach to Poverty Reduction—Analytical Linkages, Practical Work and UNDP, <www.undp.org/poverty/docs/employment/HRPR.doc> (accessed 19 June 2008).

69.UNDP, HUMAN DEVELOPMENT REPORT 8 (2000).

70.See e.g., WORLD DEVELOPMENT REPORT 2000/2001,NIGERIA:VOICEOF THEPOOR (Country Synthesis Report on Consultation with the Poor: Nigeria, 2000/2001).

71.Cap. C23, Laws of the Federation of Nigeria, 2004.

72.Id., § 46.

2011]

A Rights-based Approach to Poverty Alleviation in Nigeria

199

human person; right to personal liberty; right to fair hearing; right to freedom of thought, conscience and religion; right to freedom of expression, right to property and so on.73

It is submitted that the freedom from poverty is inexorably linked with the aforementioned rights. Indeed, in real terms, the so-called fundamental rights may be only nominal in the absence of freedom from poverty. In both the narrow and enlarged sense, involving income poverty and the concept of human poverty, poverty could be tantamount to a denial of many, or most if not all of these rights. In other words, if there must be real value to the fundamental rights, there must be freedom from poverty. It is, therefore, suggested that freedom from want should be included in the category of fundamental rights.

C. Rigorous Observance of the Fundamental Objectives and Directive Principles of State Policy in the Constitution

A symbiotic component of assimilation of freedom from poverty into fundamental rights is the rigorous observance of the fundamental objectives and directive principles of State policy which are contained in Chapter II of the 1999 Nigerian Constitution.74 The Constitution provides, inter alia, that the State shall harness the resources of the nation and promote national prosperity and an efficient, a dynamic and self-reliant economy. Furthermore, it requires that the State shall direct its policy towards ensuring the promotion of a planned and balanced economic development; that the material resources of the nation are harnessed and distributed as best as possible to serve the common good; that the economic system is not operated in such a manner as to permit the concentration of wealth or the means of production and exchange in the hands of few individuals or of a group; and that suitable and adequate shelter, suitable and adequate food, reasonable national minimum living wage, old age care and pensions, and unemployment, sick benefits and welfare of the disabled are provided for all citizens.75

In addition, the Constitution states that the State shall direct its policy towards ensuring that all citizens, without discrimination whatsoever, have the opportunity for securing adequate means of livelihood as well as adequate opportunity to secure suitable employment; that there are adequate medical and health facilities for all persons; children, young persons and the aged are protected against any exploitation whatsoever, and against moral and material neglect; and that there are equal and

73.Id., §§ 33-46.

74.Id., Ch. II & §§ 13-24.

75.Id., § 16 (1) & (2).

200

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

adequate educational opportunities at all levels. Government shall strive to eradicate illiteracy.76

Without more, the foregoing provisions of the Constitution impose positive duties on the government and its agencies to seek the utmost good of the generality of the populace. In consonance with poverty eradication, the State is to make provision to ensure that a citizen lives a meaningful life by guaranteeing avenues for his/her self realization and actualization. In support of this position, section 13 of the Constitution declares: “it shall be the duty and responsibility of all organs of government, and of all authorities and persons, exercising legislative, executive or judicial powers, to conform to, observe and apply the provisions of this Chapter of this Constitution.” It is, therefore, submitted that it will amount to a breach of the Constitution for a State to actively or perceptibly derogate from the citizens’ freedom from poverty or failing to do enough to alleviate poverty in the country.

D. Requirements of a Pro-active Judiciary

Under the 1999 Nigerian Constitution, the judicial powers of the federation are vested in the courts,77 covering the whole gamut of inherent powers and sanctions of a court of law.78 The Constitution also guarantees access to courts as well as the independence, impartiality and integrity of the judiciary.79 It states, however, the judicial powers of the courts shall not extend to matters contained in the Fundamental Objectives and Directive Principles of State Policy set out in Chapter II of the Constitution.80 Thus, the courts may not inquire into whether or not the act or omission by any authority or person or whether any law or any judicial decision is in conformity with the fundamental objectives. On the basis of this provision, it is contended that the provisions of the Constitution under its Chapter II is non-justiciable.81

Historically, the Nigerian provisions on the Fundamental Objectives and Directive Principles of State Policy were borrowed from the Indian experience in constitution-making.82 Although explicitly declared non-justiciable in terms of the Constitution, however, the same Constitution places a “paramount duty of observance”

76.Id., §§ 17 (3) & 18 (1) & (3).

77.Id., § 6.

78.Id., § 6 (6) (a).

79.Id., § 17 (2) (e).

80.Id., § 6 (6) (c).

81.It is not within the purview of this article to go into any details on the dialectics surrounding the non justiciability of the provisions in the Fundamental Objectives and Directive Principles of State Policy.

82.Upendra Baxi, The Rule of Law in India, 4 SUR INTL J. HUM. RTS 16 (2007).

2011]

A Rights-based Approach to Poverty Alleviation in Nigeria

201

in the making of law and policy to ensure the justiciability of the fundamental objectives on the government.83 In this regard, the Indian judiciary has successfully used the power of constitutional interpretation to favour interpretation that fosters, rather than frustrates the directives principles and fundamental objectives. This “indirect” justiciability has contributed a great deal towards fructification of the substantive “thick” versions of the Indian Rule of Law.84

As a corollary, and quite significant too, the Indian Supreme Court has begun to translate some Directives into rights. An example is the judicial insistence that the Directive prescribing free and compulsory education for young persons in the age group 6-14 is a fundamental right.85 The Court generated a constitutional interpretation enshrining this right as an integral aspect of Article 21, rights to life and liberty.86 It is requisite that the courts in Nigeria be decisively pro-active in constitutional interpretation, to forge a harmony in its provisions. One way of doing this is to construe the Directive Principles in the light of the fundamental rights.

E. Pro-active Civil Society

In its over fifty years of existence as an independent State, Nigeria has witnessed for the larger part of its history, military rule, bearing rule by prescriptive imperatives of decrees and fiats. There had been little tolerance of moderating contributions of the civil society. In 1999, the country returned to democratic governance. Despite this, there has been very little improvement in the life of the common man given the government’s insensitivity to the needs of its citizenry. The concept of checks and balances, a concomitant of the doctrine of separation of powers, is lacking in view of the overly powerful and overbearing executive with a controlling influence over other arms of government. This is the pattern with which Nigeria has been governed for the larger part of its nascent democracy.

However, the National Assembly has begun to play a more constructive role, while the media, policy think-tanks, academic institutions, faith-based organizations, and trade unions all function but are yet to play a critical role in reforms87 which could

83. See in particular s. 13 of the Constitution of the Federal Republic of Nigeria, 1999, supra

note 71.

84.Baxi, supra note 82.

85.§ 18, CONST. FEDERAL REP. NIGERIA (1999), supra note 69 For a comparable provision, see s. 18 of the Constitution of the Federal Republic of Nigeria, 1999, supra note 71.

86.Baxi, supra note 82; Constitution of the Federal Republic of Nigeria, 1999, supra note 71,

§§33 & 35.

87.Nigeria’s Poverty Reduction Strategy—NEEDS and SEEDS, available online at <http://www.dfid.gov.uk/pubs/files/nigeria-cap-1-b.pdf>, (accessed 21 March 2008).

202

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

lead to creating a better environment for the people, particularly the poor. For a nation that parades credence for lack of accountability and responsiveness of government, misallocation of state resources, corruption related to weak governance and patronage- based politics, among others, it is desirable to have an aware, virile and active civil society.

F. Legal Status of the NEEDS Document

NEEDS is conceived as a kind of pact between the people and the government of Nigeria. According to the NEEDS document,

NEEDS is ... the people’s way of letting the government know what kind of Nigeria they wish to live in, now and in the future. It is the government’s way of letting the people know how it plans to overcome the deep and pervasive obstacles to progress that the government and the people have identified.88

It is submitted that this declaration sounds grandiose; it does not portend stronger than a social pact. It is not a legal pact. At the highest, NEEDS is only a policy declaration: a policy directive indicating the direction and aptitude of a willing government. Its implementation is at the pleasure of the government. NEEDS is not a legally enforceable document. No judicial action can be taken against the government on it. In view of this, it is suggested that the government should enact or adapt the NEEDS document into law. After all, “NEEDS is a feasible plan ... the targets for progress are realistic, not ‘pie in the sky’ objectives that will never be achieved.”89

G. Poverty Reduction beyond Programmatic Agenda and Strategies

The government and all stakeholders in the fight against poverty must realize that the contest goes beyond mere conceptualization of programmes, agenda and strategies. If this is the case, the poverty fact sheets of Nigeria would have by now looked very promising and positive in view of the huge sums of money which had been committed to eradicating poverty in the country. There is a need for sincerity, transparency, political will, doggedness, focus and sustained genuine interest, among others, by the Nigerian government in its determination to reduce poverty and redress inequality in the polity.

88.NATIONAL PLANNING COMMISSION OF NIGERIA, supra note 33, at viii.

89.Id., at xiii.

2011]

A Rights-based Approach to Poverty Alleviation in Nigeria

203

It is observed that past administrations in the country have engaged in glorifying poverty alleviation on the pages of newspapers and news conferences without any meaningful impact on the poor and downtrodden in Nigeria. The story has been the same: empty promises of poverty alleviation through accelerated and improved practices, which only ended up in making the policy formulators richer and the poor masses poorer.90 In most cases, poverty alleviation programmes are geared towards scoring cheap political points or as a populist programme designed to confuse the existing situation. For example, the Green Revolution of the Second Republic turned out to be a ploy to favour politicians of the ruling party. Fertilizer procurement and distribution became political patronage with beneficiaries being mainly politicians of the ruling party. The actual farmers were left to depend on the emergency farmers—the politicians.91

In the same vein, the Better Life Programme, ostensibly designed to enhance the quality of life of rural women, among other objectives, ended up a caricature of itself, as “Better Life for Better Women.” Direct beneficiaries were the wives of the office holders, self-styled First Ladies, their cronies, and influential women politicians. The real targets went away with cheap clothing, having the images of the First Lady (wife of the Governor of the State or the President’s wife, as the case may be) printed on it, some “hand-outs” (little sums of money shared amongst them) at gatherings, grand receptions and rallies, eulogizing the acclaimed virtues of the First Lady and other functionaries of the Programme.92 Several other programmes suffered a similar fate. Authentic human development can never be achieved when the ultimate is the amassing of wealth and material goods, creating an unquenchable thirst for more power, profits and possessions. On the larger scale, poverty alleviation programmes rather than creating private wealth should promote and facilitate the creation of public wealth.93

90.Jonah, supra note 55.

91.A. Garuba, Adult Education and Poverty Alleviation Programmes in Nigeria: A Case for Harmonisation, <http://www.gla.ac.uk/centres/cradall/docs/Botswana-papers/Garubafinal_30.pdf> (accessed 21 July 2008).

92.According to Erapi, the “Better Life for Rural Women” programme was hijacked by the urban female elite. The programme created a few urban women millionaires but had no impact on the lives of the rural women for which it was meant. In the same category today, are the various programmes being run by first ladies and wives of political leaders, across Nigeria. Without exception, these programmes are better known to urban television viewers than to the poor for whom they are meant. See, G. Erapi,

P o v e r t y A l l e v i a t i o n o r P o v e r t y P r o p a g a t i o n , a v a i l a b l e o n l i n e a t <http://www.businessdayonline.co/analysis/ comments/1418.html> (accessed 22 March 2008).

93. K.V. Mofuoa, Poverty Reduction Through Wealth Creation: A Business Ethics Approach (Paper delivered at the 26th African Association for Public Administration and Management Annual Round Table Conference, Whitesands Hotel, Mombasa, Kenya, 7–11 March, 2005), available at <http://unpan1.un.org/intradoc/groups/public/documents/AAPAM/UNPAN025723.pdf>, (accessed 21 July

204

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

H. Poverty and Household Size

Poverty incidence, gap and severity seem to be positively correlated to the size of households,94 seemingly validating the conception among the Yoruba (one of the indigenous tribes in Nigeria) that “omo beere, osi beere,” meaning literally, “many children, much poverty.95 The population of Nigeria is currently put at about 140 million people.96 Nigeria is essentially a polygamous state, cutting across the entire tribes and peoples as well as the entire social strata. Arguably, the country is over populated; an average household size ranging between 8 and 12. The total fertility rate in Nigeria is as high as 6 per woman with teenage mothers contributing 10% of the births.97 The thrust here is that there is the need for individual responsibility in the efforts to curb the spiraling effects of poverty in the land. Despite that the nature of poverty in Nigeria appears to be systemic, the inordinate procreation tendencies have only exacerbated the condition.

Of course, the proclivity to have large families is steeped in cultural and social behaviours. Among the Yorubas of the Southern part of Nigeria, for example, large family size is treated as an asset, as the wives and many children contribute significantly to the labour force, for the purposes of farming. Also, the size of the family accentuates the social status of the family head. A saying goes: “Olomo lo l’aye,” that is, “the world belongs to those who have children.” Another is: “Olomola,” meaning, “the one with children is wealthy.” Another says: “Omo eni laso eni,” loosely translated, “one’s children are his covering, even as clothes cover a person’s nakedness or frailties.” Similar conceptions prevail amongst other groups in the country.

This cultural conception partly explains the reluctance or the lack of political will of successive governments to legislate on the family size. Previous attempts to do so failed. Various regulations pay only a lip service to any legal family size. For example, under the income tax law, tax deductions of N2, 500 per child are allowed a tax payer subject to a maximum of four children; such children must be receiving some form of educational instruction and be below 16 years.98 Also, under the National

2008).

94.Ogwumike, supra note 55.

95.O. Obilade & O. Mejiuni, Poverty Alleviation through Reproductive Health in Nigeria: Exploring Other Non-Formal Alternatives, <http://www.gla.ac.uk/centres/cradall/docs/Botswana- papers/Obiladefinal_63.pdf>, (accessed 23 July 2008).

96.National Population Commission Census, 2006.

97.Obilade & Mejiuni, supra note 95.

98.See, Personal Income Tax Act, Cap. P8, Laws of the Federation of Nigeria 2004, § 33 (3)

(b)(i).

2011]

A Rights-based Approach to Poverty Alleviation in Nigeria

205

Health Insurance Scheme,99 the health insurance cover is limited to “the spouse and four biological children of the participant,” provided that such children are below the age of 18.100 The participant would be required to make additional contributions if more children are to benefit under the scheme.101 However, there are no compellations not to have more than four children. When the debate was on, as to the prescription of four children per family, jocularly it was asked if this meant the prescribed number of children per woman. This implies that the man is at liberty to father as many children as he desires from his many wives. In other words, the family size could hardly be prescribed, as a matter of law.

I. Correlation of Human Poverty and Human Development

On one hand, human poverty is the lack of basic human capabilities, a deprivation in the most essential capabilities of life, including leading a long and healthy life, being knowledgeable, having adequate economic provisioning and participating fully in the life of the community.102 On the other hand, human development is a process of enhancing human capabilities, to expand choices and opportunities so that each person can lead a life of respect and value.103 However, the realm of human development extends further: other areas of choice highly valued by people include participation, security, sustainability, guaranteed human rights—all needed for being creative and productive and for enjoying self respect, empowerment and a sense of belonging to a community. In the ultimate analysis, human development is development of the people, for the people and by the people.104

In other words, human development is about creating an environment in which people can develop their full potential and lead productive, and creative lives in accordance with their needs and interests. People are the real wealth of nations. Development thus, is expanding the choices people have to lead the lives they value. Fundamental to enlarging these choices is building human capabilities—the range of things that people can do or be in life. The most basic capabilities for human development are to lead long and healthy lives, to be knowledgeable, to have access to the resources needed for a decent standard of living and be able to participate in the life of the community. Without these, many choices are simply not available, and many

99.Cap. N42, Laws of the Federation of Nigeria, 2004.

100.Operational Guidelines of the National Health Insurance Scheme, 2005, at 8.

101.Id.

102.UNDP, OVERCOMING HUMAN POVERTY (2000); UNDP, HUMAN DEVELOPMENT REPORT

(2000), at 17.

103.Id., at 2.

104.Id., at 17.

206

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

opportunities in life remain inaccessible.105

It is not surprising, therefore, that the efforts by successive Nigerian governments to alleviate or eradicate poverty had failed. Pockets of programmes targeted at the poor, in the form of loan here and there, provision of some kind of skeletal facilities now and then, serials of activities, and so on, failed to address the core issues namely, the development of the person; removal of barriers to self realization and actualization; deficiencies in infrastructure; hostile economic environment; pre- disposition to systemic inequalities and lopsided reward system and so on. The propensity for failure was further compounded by gross inefficiencies in the implementation of those programmes.

The goal of poverty alleviation mechanics, particularly in the Nigerian context, should not merely to be to improve the nutrition, medical care and sanitary conditions of the poor (even though they are desirable), but also to make it possible that the citizens can as well effectively defend and realize their basic interests. This capacity presupposes that they are free from bondage and dependence; that they are able to read and write and to learn a profession or vocation; that they can participate as equals in politics and in the labour market; and that their status is protected by appropriate legal rights which are enforceable through an open and fair legal system.106 Thus, there is the need for a holistic approach to poverty alleviation in Nigeria. This should not be by a selective policy intervention, but as well targeted at empowering the entire citizenry. Specifically, the poor should be empowered to get out of poverty. It is only when this is done that Nigeria can stand up tall to say that poverty is reduced in the country.

VI. CONCLUSION

In Nigeria, the poverty trend has continued to decline progressively from 70 per cent in 1999 to 54 percent in 2005. The outcome of the 2004 Core Welfare Indicators Survey (NBS) shows that the proportion of the population living in relative poverty reduced to 54 per cent, while 35 percent out of the 54 per cent of the poor people are considered extremely poor.107 Eradicating poverty is regarded as the most important goal of human development. Indeed, it is widely believed that at its core, development must be about improvement of human well-being, removal of hunger, disease and productive employment for all. The first goal of a nation that aspires to have great

105. The Human Development Concept, <http://hdr.undp.org/en/humandev/> (accessed 3 June

2008).

106.T.W. Pogge, Eradicating Systemic Poverty: Brief for a Global Resources Dividend, 4 SUR INTL J. HUM. RTS (2007), at 137-38.

107.IMF, supra note 57, at 34.

2011]

A Rights-based Approach to Poverty Alleviation in Nigeria

207

development should be the eradication of poverty. Government as a matter of priority should strive to end poverty and get its priority right by ensuring that all its citizenry are not jeopardized in terms of achieving the MGDs on schedule.

Certainly, NEEDS is an important road map not only in the bid to eradicate poverty, but also as a manifesto for political, social, cultural and economic turnaround of the Nigerian nation. In itself, NEEDS is transparently honest and appealing. It is no more a question of strategy but downright implementation. Given a redoubling of genuine and well directed efforts, the Millennium Goal 1 of halving the proportion of people living in extreme poverty and those suffering from hunger between 1990 and 2015 is still achievable if government is sincere in its efforts in eradicating poverty and commits adequate economic resources and the required political will to the various poverty alleviation programmes in the country. The task of minimizing the poverty level in Nigeria is a task that all and sundry must be ready to perform if we are to have a just society.

208

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

FEDERALISM AND LEGAL PLURALISM IN ETHIOPIA: PRELIMINARY OBSERVATIONS ON THEIR IMPACTS ON THE PROTECTION OF HUMAN RIGHTS

Getachew Assefa*

ABSTRACT

Through its 1995 Constitution, Ethiopia created a devolutionary federal state structure that is devised as a means of holding together the polity. The new political system combines federalism, self determination (up to and including secession) and legal pluralism as solutions to the erstwhile unequal relationships among ethno-national groups in the country. While it has devised these solutions to tackle problems, the new political arrangement displays many loose ends as regards the protection of human rights, be that of individuals or minorities. This article is an attempt to highlight some of the outstanding human rights problems the new political arrangement fails to deal with.

I. INTRODUCTION

Both federalism and legal pluralism are mechanisms of promoting respect for self-rule of culturally distinct interests in multi-ethic or multi-cultural societies. The old assumption of a ‘nation state’ and uniform laws for all members of a political community has proved to be defective and unsuitable particularly for societies with diversity. Conversely, federalism and legal pluralism provide for governance solutions for most of the political communities in the world today. But at the same time, one should be careful not to assume that everything in the package of federalism and legal pluralism would perfectly take care of everything in the polity to which they apply. There are byproducts of federalism and legal pluralism that adversely affect the rights of individuals and groups in a given polity unless a concerted and genuine legal and policy environment is created and such are even-handedly implemented. This article aims at explaining the problems and challenges of the application of federalism and legal pluralism in Ethiopia.

* Assistant Professor & Associate Dean, Faculty of Law, Addis-Ababa University. Email: <getaassefa@yahoo.com>.

2011]

Federalism and Legal Pluralism in Ethiopia

209

II. FEDERALISM: GENERAL BACKGROUND

Federalism can be defined in various ways and therefore different identifying features can be listed. Graham Smith for example defines federalism as ‘an ideology which holds that the ideal organization of human affairs is best reflected in the celebration of diversity through unity.’1 Federalism is also identified with the idea of distributing powers among different centers within a given polity on the basis of predetermined legal arrangements. Inherent in the idea of federalism is the desire to keep equilibrium between forces of centralization and decentralization, and as Smith succinctly puts it: “the federal idea, in short, is generally conceived as a compromise, conveyed by the image of checks and balances between unity and diversity, autonomy and sovereignty, the national and the regional.”2 Constitutional distribution of powers between the center and the sub-national units is an important operational or practical feature of federations. Constitutional arrangements in federations enable the sub-national entities to take part in the making of decisions on important matters (and all matters that affect them) at the national level. The participation of the federal units in the national decision making process while self-ruling their distinct affairs is an essential mark of a federation.

In a federal arrangement, the center cannot unilaterally change, abolish or modify the covenant that creates the federal polity. In that sense, sub-national units derive their rights and existence not from the national government but from the constitution that creates them both. In a constitution of a federation, all important details of competencies of both levels of government should be provided to avoid conflict on jurisdiction. The extent and pattern of power sharing can again vary from one system to another, but generally matters of sub-national identity should be placed under the competence of federal units while matters amenable to shared-rule should be placed under the jurisdiction of the national government.

While remarking about the basic requirements of federalism and federations, one should not however lose sight of the important practical (and also legal) variations that render certain federations dysfunctional. Federal systems would be distinguished from one another on whether they demonstrate commitment to constitutionalism, respect for rights (individual as well as group) and democracy. True and functional federations are those that entrench the basic requirements of a federal arrangement along with democratic principles in their basic laws and at the same time practice those

1.FEDERALISM: THE MULTI-ETHNIC CHALLENGE 4 (Graham Smith ed., 1995).

2.Id., at 5.

210

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

requirements and principles.3 Conversely, those that fail to entrench the above-stated requirements and principles or fail to implement them, cannot be considered as true federations.4 The main reason for the survival of such federations would be down-to- earth control exercised by the central government through various means of coercion.

The ways how federal polities arise, the justifications that propel federal forms of government and mechanisms of organizing the territorial federal units have been subjects of great theoretical and academic writings. Federalism in multi-ethnic societies has taken either a territorial orientation or a non-territorial one. Territorial orientation is embraced when the federal project aims at giving ethno-national groups territorial bases. Federations can be purely geographic and administrative such as in the USA. But at the same time, it is good to note that no two federations are alike on how they go about delineating the territorial contours for their sub-units. For our purpose, it suffices to say that the justifications, orientations, internal arrangements, etc, in federal systems are perhaps as many as the federal systems extant in the world today.

When ethnically based federations are rendered ‘false federations,’ the socio- political consequences to the polity would be doubtlessly fatal. Such a situation will breed all sorts of inter-ethnic disharmony and mistrust as there would not be fair resource and power sharing among the several ethno-national groups. This will also stir up nationalist sentiments among territorially concentrated ethno-national groups which their elites and nationalist leaders could use to stage secession claims. Several factors contribute to the inter-ethnic tensions in such federations. Though these factors definitely vary from one polity to another, common factors include for example the development of locally specific socio-political lifestyle such as self-identification with local language, creation of ethnic-based political parties and so on. These situations would lead to asymmetry between local and federal institutions, authorities and party elites.

One of the natural consequences of ethno-national federations is that all questions of power and resource sharing which are federal political matters automatically become ethnic questions because of the coincidence of the federal political question (which is power or resource sharing) with the ethnic question (which is the nationalist question of resource and power for a given group as compared to the other(s)). The latter facet of the question will have a far reaching consequence,

3.It has to be noted that most of the federations known to history including the socialist ones, have had nice principles and clauses in their constitutions about rights and democracy. The problem regarding the pseudo federations remained largely to be implementation of those rules and principles.

4.Some authors call the latter type of federations ‘Pseudo-federations.’ See e.g., I.DUCHACEK, THE TERRITORIAL DIMENSION OF POLITICS: WITHIN, AMONG AND ACROSS NATIONS (1986). Duchacek considered the now defunct Soviet Union, Yugoslav and Czechoslovakian federations as such.

2011]

Federalism and Legal Pluralism in Ethiopia

211

depending on how it is attended to, of either resolving the inter-ethnic tension or inbreeding conflict with the ultimate effect of inter-ethnic hostility and fragmentation. But the general arguments about federalism as weakening social cohesion or citizenship solidarity of members of the political community have been pretty much challenged. Now both theory and practice show us that federalism, ethnically based federalism included, if properly implemented, can actually promote harmonious relationship among members of a political community. But, at the same time, federalism and particularly ethnic federalism can have a disastrous consequence if all its basic conditions are not implemented together as a package. This package can be contained in a basket consisting of both genuine self-rule and well crafted shared-rule.

III. THE ETHIOPIAN FEDERAL SYSTEM: AN OVERVIEW

Since 1995, Ethiopia has been constitutionally a federal state.5 The 1995 Federal Constitution of Ethiopia (hereinafter the 1995 Constitution or the Constitution) proclaims in its very first Article that “the Constitution establishes a Federal and Democratic State structure....” When we look at the states of the Federation, it is tempting to say that the Ethiopian Federation is, to use the terms of Kartashkin and Abashidze, “ethnic-cum-geographical federation.”6 This is because the demarcation of the boundaries of the federating units did not strictly follow the ethno-linguistic lines particularly in the case of the SNNPS. However, in the opinion of these authors, the Ethiopian federation can and should be considered as ethnically-based most importantly because the ethno-national groups (officially known as “nations, nationalities and peoples”)7 are made to be the loci of sovereign powers.8 They are accorded the political center-stage to decide on their own future as well as on that of the Ethiopian state. Because of this sovereignty, they have the legal standing to exercise all the variants of self-determination entrenched in the Constitution such as the right to statehood within the Federation and even the right to secession.9

5.In fact the process of federalization started in 1991 with the forceful change of government and subsequent enactment of a Charter for the Transitional Period Government that recognized the rights of the ethno-linguistic groups to establish regional and local self-governments. The Charter also ushered in a new era in the Ethiopian political history by recognizing the right to independence to each and every ethno-linguistic group inhabiting the country. See, Articles 2 and 13 of the Charter, Negarit Gazeta, 50th Year No.1 (Addis Ababa, 1991).

6.V.A. Kartashkin & A.K.H. Abashidze, Autonomy in the Russian Federation: Theory and Practice, in 10 INTL J. MINORITY & GROUP RTS 203 (2003).

7.See, e.g., arts 8, 39 and 47 of the Ethiopian Constitution (1995).

8.Id., art. 8 & the Preamble.

9.Id., arts 39(1) & (4) and 47(2).

212

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

The Constitution divides the territory of the country into nine federating states and one federal territory.10 The nine states are the State of Tigray, Afar, Amhara, Oromia, Somalia, Beneshangul/Gumuz, Southern Nations, Nationalities and Peoples, Gambella Peoples and the state of Harari People.11 Of these states, Tigray, Afar, Amhara, Oromia and Somalia carry the names of the numerically majority and dominant autochthonous ethnic groups in the respective states. The state of Beneshangul/Gumuz carries the names of the two dominant (and competing) autochthonous ethnic groups, i.e., Benshangul (also known as Berta or Jebelawi) and Gumuz. The State of Gambella peoples is a kind of anomalous nomenclature. Gambella is the name of the Ethiopian territory bordering the Sudan. It is not therefore a name of a people. But the autochthonous ethno-linguistic groups are different by their ebony skin colour from most of the other peoples of the country.12 And there are five local ethnic groups in the Gambella State and apparently those are the people called the Gambella Peoples.13

The State that adds a geographical aspect of federalization to the Ethiopian federalism is the Southern Nations, Nationalities and Peoples State. Several ethno- linguistic groups inhabiting the geographical southern and southwestern parts of the country are subsumed under this State. There are about 59 autochthonous ethno- linguistic groups that inhabit this State. It is interesting to note here that before the 1995 Constitution (and after 1991), the ethno-linguistic groups in this State were organized under 6 National/Regional self Governments, categorizing the more than 50 ethnic groups into 6 self-governments on the basis of their geographical proximity.14 Though, the reasons for this decision is not visible, the makers of the Constitution thought that the southern peoples can fit into one state.

The ninth member of the Ethiopian federation is the State of the Harari People. This is a city state named after the Harar city found in eastern part of Ethiopia. Harar

10.Another City, Dire Dawa became a federal territory later by federal law although it was not designated as such in the Constitution. The reason for making the latter city a federal territory was the fact that it has been claimed by both the Somali and Oromia Regional States.

11.Art. 47 of the 1995 Constitution.

12.See, Dereje Feyissa, Ethnic Federalism in Ethiopia: The Experience of Gambella Regional State (Paper presented at the Seminar on Ethnic Federalism: The Challenge for Ethiopia, Addis Ababa University, April 14–16, 2004).

13.These are Nuer, Anywaa, Mejengir, Opo and Komo.

14.Proclamation No. 7/1992, A Proclamation to Provide for the Establishment of National/Regional Self-Governments, Negarit Gazeta, 51 Year No. 2, Addis Ababa, 1992. Under this Law, Ethiopia was divided into 14 self-administering regions. Out of those, Tigray, Afar, Amhara, Oromia, Somalia, Beneshangul/Gumuz, Harari and Gambella maintained their statehood under the 1995 Constitution, while the 6 regions were lumped under the Southern State. The only remaining region, Addis Ababa, the capital city, is made a federal territory by the Constitution.

2011]

Federalism and Legal Pluralism in Ethiopia

213

was historically a prominent Muslim emirate conquered and formally incorporated into the Ethiopian state by Emperor Menelik II in 1889. It is believed to have existed as a kingdom since the 9th century and its civilization reached its zenith during the 16th century under Amir Ahmed Ibn Al Ghazi who was able to conquer most of the Christian highland part of Ethiopia.15 Its glory started to decline with the latter’s death in 1543 in the war he fought for more than a decade.16 Since then, Harar became just a historical city serving as a capital of a local administration until 1991. In 1991, with the change of government and the move towards federal system in the Ethiopian State, Harar’s political importance started to significantly change.

According to the population census of 2007, the population of ethnic Hararis (the people after which the state is named) stands at 15,858. The Harari people constitute less than 9% of the population of the Harari People’s Regional State. The Harari people have political dominance in that Regional State where over 91% of the population constitute mainly the Oromos (56.4%), the Amharas (22.77%) and people of other ethnic groups (about 12%). Therefore, the standard used for the formation of the State of the Harari People under the above prevailing facts is unclear. One might of course say, as briefly stated above that the arithmetic notwithstanding, historical, cultural and socio-political grounds might have been taken into account in the establishment of the Harari State as a standing memory of the past glory of the once powerful Islamic sultanate of Harar.

IV. FEDERALISM AND HUMAN RIGHTS

Generalizations are impossible about the structure of human rights in all federations and could be misleading if attempted. This is because there are a lot of variations in the human rights set up of federations. The grounds for variations among federal systems in the structure of human rights may include, as Yash Ghai notes, whether the federation is of a ‘coming together’ or ‘a holding together’ type.17

When we see the history of federations in terms of the competence for the enforcement of rights, the general tendency is that sub-national units are believed to have the primary legal competence in the enforcement of rights. This has been in principle the legal position taken by the American legal system (as clearly seen from

15.Richard Caulk, Harar in the 19th Century and the Loss of its Independence, 1968 (Seminar Paper available at the Archives, Institute of Ethiopia Studies, Addis Ababa University), at 3-4.

16.Id.

17.Yash P. Ghai, The Structure of Human Rights in Federations, in HUMAN RIGHTS

COMMISSIONS AND OMBUDSMAN OFFICES: NATIONAL EXPERIENCES THROUGHOUT THE WORLD (Kemal Hussien et al eds, 2000), at 41.

214

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

the decisions of the American Supreme Court).18 In fact it is good to note that in the case of the United States, the Federal Constitution as enacted in 1787 did not have a bill of rights while most of the constitutions of the 13 ex-colonies that participated in the formation of the federation had bills of rights.

However, in a paradoxical way, the US states did not respect the equal citizenship rights of all members of their community and had to be instructed by the federal government on the basis of the post-civil war amendments to the Federal Constitution (notably 13th, 14th and 15th), which extended the jurisdiction of the federal government, in the areas of basic individual rights, to the states.19 The protection of rights in federations can be made difficult owing to several factors. In the United States of America, racial issue was the main factor that made state-level protection of rights worse than federal level protection.

In the Canadian federation, the protection of human rights began with a situation in which both the provinces and the federal government did not have bills of rights in their respective laws.20 It was not clear for example whether the provinces or the federal government or both had the primary jurisdiction to enforce rights. The legal regime started to progressively improve with the enactment of the Canadian Bill of Rights.

In the case of Ethiopia which is the principal concern of this article, new issues and concerns directly related to the post 1995 federal system have arisen with respect to the protection and promotion of the rights and freedoms of individuals and minorities. Some of the most serious human rights concerns arose in relation to minorities and persons belonging to exogenous groups—groups that lived in states (theoretically in any of the nine states mentioned above) to which they are not indigenous but into which they moved over the last 150 or so years.21 It is not open to question that people of different backgrounds move, migrate and intermingle especially when they share common economic and political community.

In the case of Ethiopia as well, this demographic factor has happened. But more than this normal demographic factor, there was a major event that took place in Ethiopia during the turn of the 19th century, and that was the southward expansion of the Ethiopian state by incorporating most of today’s eastern, southern and southwestern part of the country that were hitherto only loosely connected to it as for example

18.FEDERALISM AND RIGHTS (Ellis Katz & G. Alan Tarr eds, 1997), at xiv.

19.Id.

20.Id., at 47-48.

21.I use the terms ‘endogenous (indigenous)’ and ‘exogenous’ very loosely here. For the purpose of this article, and in the Ethiopian context, indigenous groups are those groups that are currently believed both legally and politically to be the owners of the territories in which they are found.

2011]

Federalism and Legal Pluralism in Ethiopia

215

vassals.22 A fundamental concomitant state of fact was that the people who served in expanding the state of Ethiopia (as soldiers and other servants) were predominantly the Amharas. The descendants of the Amhara settled in the newly incorporated areas and have since flocked in large numbers to these areas in search of better opportunities.23 Primarily because of this historical fact, the Amhara are now the largest group that live in states other than the state of Amhara. The majority of the Amhara people live in the state of Oromia and according to the 2007 national Census, about 2 million (over 7 % of the total population of the Regional State) live in that state. A Large number of Amharas (over 22%) also live in the Harari Regional State. Similarly, 22% of the population of the Beneshangul-Gumuz Regional State are ethnic Amharas. Overall, about 10% of the total population of Ethiopians live in states other than where their kin live.24

It is my contention that while the 1995 Constitution so generously recognizes the right to self-determination of ethno-national groups, it utterly fails to pay any attention to the non-indigenous (exogenous) groups who find themselves in the ‘wrong’ regional states. When the federal arrangement was negotiated in the early 1990s and the federal Constitution written, the issue of the large number of exogenous groups described above was never properly addressed. As a result, today there is no law at the federal level that addresses the rights of these exogenous groups. Nor are there laws at the regional states' level. For example, majority of the Amhara who inhabit the Oromia State or the Beneshangul-Gumuz State are not treated as a group of people with the right to exercise some cultural and linguistic rights. They cannot establish their political organization to participate in the conduct of regional or local governments.25

Political legitimacy has been linked to the legitimacy of one’s territorial existence. So other than in the Amhara Regional State, the Amharas cannot be recognized as a people with cultural and linguistic rights of their own—in other words, they have not been recognized as minorities under the Constitution. So they are left to the mercy of the ethno-national groups such as the Hararis and the Oromos who may (or may not) recognize some or any of their rights. There are clear legal and public

22.See generally, BAHIRU ZEWDE, A HISTORY OF MODERN ETHIOPIA: 1855-1991 (2002).

23.The movement of people from the north to the south was not only associated with the history of modern state formation. Another major factor, as will be later mentioned, was the resettlement program of the 1980s undertaken by the military government of Mengistu Hailemariam (1974-1991). In the case of Beneshangul-Gumuz and Gambella regional states, most of the non-endogenous groups (primarily Amhara, Oromon, Tigray) have come to these states through the resettlement programs.

24.As per the 2007 Census, Ethiopia’s population tops 74 million.

25.There are in fact some practical positive developments over the last 5 years or so such as schools that use the Amharic Language in urban areas of Oromia State. But these are not clearly put in laws or policy known to the public. These are political decisions that may be withdrawn any time.

216

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

policy gaps in this area that make the preservation and maintenance of self identity, and much less self administration of non-endogenous groups around the country all the more precarious. It might be useful to mention laws (and policies) in place in for example Oromia and Beneshangul-Gumuz regional states regarding self administration of residents of what are called ‘1st and 2nd grade cities’ in order to show the extent at which lopsided laws and policies that discriminate against the exogenous groups are being implemented.

In the Oromia State, a law (Proclamation No.116/2006) provides that if the number of ethnic Oromos are less than the number of non-Oromos in 1st and 2nd grade cities of Oromia, 50% of the seats of city councils shall be reserved for the Oromos while an additional 20% seats would be reserved for Oromos living in the surrounding rural counties. This matrix effectively turns the urban non-Oromo majorities into minorities by design. Similarly, an Act of Beneshangul-Gumuz State (Proclamation No. 69/2007) stipulates that at least 55% of the seats of city councils must be reserved for indigenous ethno-national groups. Here also the intention is clear—to perpetually keep the non-endogenous groups in the region out of political power which they would have been entitled to according to one-person-one vote principle. These decisions of the states have to-date gone unchallenged. And it will be difficult to challenge them because the Federal Constitution does not address such problems. On top of that, looking at the seemingly unlimited right of self determination of ethno-national groups, any challenge of it on the basis of minority or individual rights may fly in the face of the self-determination rights of groups.

The lopsided attention to the territorially based ethno-national groups at the expense of individual and minority rights was identified as a matter of concern in the Report on Ethiopia by the UN Independent Expert on Minority Issues.26 The report indicated lack of comprehensive legal and policy provisions to secure minority rights in the face of the ethnically based federal system put in place following the 1995 Constitution of Ethiopia. It also pointed out the problems that have occurred in the process of implementation of the constitutional right to self rule by the majority ethnic groups in their respective territories whereby rights of minorities within the ethnic regional states and sub-state administrative units could be violated by those dominant ethnic groups wielding political, social and economic powers.27

The Beneshangul-Gumuz Case—I have chosen to present one further case that has thus far shown the shortfalls of Ethiopia’s laws and policies in relation to individual and minority rights more vividly, the Beneshangul/Gumuz case. The case arose in 2000

26.GAY MCDOUGALL, REPORT OF THE INDEPENDENT EXPERT ON MINORITY ISSUES: ADDENDUM; MISSION TO ETHIOPIA (2006), A/HRC/4/9/Add.3.

27.Id.

2011]

Federalism and Legal Pluralism in Ethiopia

217

in the Beneshangul/Gumuz Regional State and was brought to the Council of Constitutional Inquiry (CCI).28 It was filed by the representatives of non-indigenous ethnic groups (such as Amhara, Oromo, Tigre and others) who live in the regional state.29 The immediate reason for the case was a decision by the Regional State and the National Election Board30 of Ethiopia which states that for a person to be a candidate for a national or regional election, he/she should be able to speak at least one of the languages of the autochthonous (endogenous) groups of a regional state of the intended candidature.31 This position of the Regional State government was given a legal basis by the Constitution of the Beneshangul/Gumuz Regional State which provides that the owners’ of the Region are the five endogenous ethno-national groups.32 For the National Election Board, the decision was based on the Ethiopian Election Law33 which under its Art. 38 states that a candidate for a national or regional election must be able to speak the vernacular of the regional state of his/her intended candidature.

Almost all members of the petitioning ethno-national groups came to the region through the earlier noted resettlement program of the previous government carried out in the 1980s. As stated above, these people are not generally considered as owners of the region. The case was particularly about a problem in the Bambassi Woreda (district) of the Assossa Zone (sub-regional administrative level) of the regional state. In this Woreda, the number of the Amharas is 14,467, the Oromos are 4,259 and the Tigrians are 1981, while the total number of the endogenous (Berta, Mao and Komo) groups is 12,950, much less than the number of the exogenous groups.34 The petitioners raised grievances and pleaded with the CCI (and the House of the Federation) for relief. The following were the relief sought:

(a)The decision of the regional state administration and the National Election Board that required the knowledge of the vernacular of one of the five endogenous groups was preposterous and unconstitutional. Therefore, it

28.The Council of Constitutional Inquiry (CCI) is a constitutional body established as an advisory body to the House of the Federation (HoF) of Ethiopia—a federal house that has a constitutional competence to interpret the constitution. The CCI has the power of making recommendations to the HoF which may accept or reject the recommendations made by the CCI. See, Arts 62, 81-84 of the Federal Constitution and Proclamation No. 250/2001.

29.According to the 1994 Housing and Population Census, about 42% of the population of the Regional State consists of Amharas, Oromos and Tigres.

30.The National Election Board is a body in charge of all periodic elections in Ethiopia.

31.There are five endogenous groups in the Region: Berta/Beneshangul, Gumuz, Sinasha, Mao

and Komo.

32.Art. 2 of the 2001 Constitution of the Beneshangul-Gumuz Regional State.

33.Proclamation No. 111/1995.

34.Data based on the 1994 Housing and Population Census of Ethiopia.

218

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

should be quashed or nullified. They argued that this decision tramples upon Art. 38 of the Federal Constitution which states among other things that every citizen has a right to be elected without discrimination on ethnic, national or language grounds;

(b)The fair and equitable representation in the regional and national administrative organs and hierarchies. It is interesting also to note that the petitioners demanded to be recognized as distinct ethno-national groups in the regional state along with the five groups. Accordingly, they asserted that their right of self-determination under Article 39 of the Constitution should be respected;

(c)That they be given a special administrative status in the region so that they will be able to exercise self-governance;

(d)Alternatively, they be repatriated to the regions or places where they can have their rights respected and be able to preserve and develop their culture and language;

(e)That those officials in the Regional State who have blackmailed them be brought to justice; and

(f)That the economic discrimination going on against them, including confiscation of land and the denial of access to grazing land as well as to the use of acacia trees for house-building and other purposes be halted.35

The above demands and claims raise important issues that may also be applicable to non-endogenous groups that are living in other regions such as Oromia and Gambella. The most interesting demand is the one that asserts they be considered as one of the ‘nations, nationalities or peoples’ of the region as per Article 39 of the Federal Constitution. As has been noted, neither the federal nor the regional constitutions give special status to such ethno-national groups living in different regional states, whose kin have their own separate regional state in the federation. It does not recognize them as minorities either.

The above case was entertained by the CCI. It is however very sad to see that only one of the relief sought, i.e., the right to be elected and the removal of the discriminatory language requirement put in place by the regional government and the

35. Translation from the original Amharic by the author.

2011]

Federalism and Legal Pluralism in Ethiopia

219

National Election Board, was dealt with in the recommendation of the CCI. The HoF in fact attempted, in a broad-brush way, to address the other matters in addition to the claim for candidature but not squarely. In the opinion of this writer, the claims not squarely dealt with raise as important rights’ issues as the one dealt with and as such should have been settled by the CCI and the House of the Federation. Several conclusions are possible from the behaviour of both the CCI and the House of the Federation in this case. One obvious conclusion is the apparent gap in the corps of laws (including the constitutions) of the country regarding the rights of exogenous groups and persons belonging to such groups in several of the regional states that left the CCI and the HoF without any clear legal basis for decision.

Coming to the recommendation of the CCI in the case under consideration, in an eight member deliberation, the CCI arrived at a decision by a majority of six members. The majority dealt with one major issue: whether Article 38 of Proclamation No. 111/95 (which requires the knowledge of the vernacular of the regional state for candidacy) violates Article 38 of the Federal Constitution that prohibits discrimination on the basis of national, ethnic or language grounds. It accordingly found that Art. 38 of the Proclamation imports a restriction not intended in the Federal Constitution and therefore was unconstitutional. It also further stated that the National Election Board’s decision should also be set aside as it was based on an unconstitutional legislation.

In a relatively more elaborately reasoned opinion, the minority of 2 members concluded that there was no incongruity between the Federal Constitution and Proclamation 111/95. The crux of the opinion of the minority was that Article 38 of the Proclamation could have had a discriminatory disposition if it did merge language and ethnic origin to be the requirement for candidacy. The logic of their argument was that if a person who comes from one of the five endogenous groups of Beneshanbul/Gumuz regional state does not speak the vernacular of the regional state, she/he would be excluded from candidacy just like any member of the exogenous groups. And since exclusion on the basis of ethnic origin was not the intention of both the regional government and the National Election Board, a person is not discriminated against because of his/her ethnic identity and therefore neither the decisions of the National Election Board nor Article 38 of the Proclamation violate Article 38 of the Federal Constitution.

The House of the Federation with whom the ultimate power of constitutional interpretation lies, however, did not accept the opinion of both the majority and the minority of the CCI summarized above. It rather worked out a sort of compromise solution. It did not venture on deciding on the constitutionality or otherwise of Article 38 of Proclamation No. 111/95 in clear terms but said that if the vernacular of the regional state (i.e., the working language of the state) is spoken by the intending

220

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

candidate, s/he has the right to be a candidate. But if the candidate cannot speak the language of the regional state, he does not have the right for candidacy.36 As indicated earlier, the petition put forward by the petitioners were not squarely addressed by the CCI as well as by the HoF. It seems to me that on a broader policy level the kinds of issues and claims raised by the petitioners need to be addressed.

Turning to other issues of human rights in federal Ethiopia, the author also contends that violations of rights have occurred in various parts of the country. We see that these serious violations of human rights have also occurred due to one or the other reasons. It is contended that timely actions by the regional governments and/or their local authorities could have made positive differences. Several examples of such violations can be cited as having occurred since the inception of the federal arrangement in 1991. The cases of Arba Gugu locality of the Oromia Region (occurred in 1991/2) where many civilians massacred each other in an ethnic-cum-religious tainted violence between the Amharas and the Oromos living in the same locality was one such case.37 In these conflicts, several properties were lost and thousands were made homeless and internally displaced persons.

At about the same time as above, in what is today’s Beneshangul/Gumuz Regional State, many members of the ‘exogenous’ groups such as the Amhara in the area of Metekel were massacred. 38 The case of violence among the ethno-national groups living in the Gambella Region that claimed the lives of several persons in 2003 and thereafter is also worth noting.39 In all cases, the interventions from the regional governments were very slow and arrived only after several lives had been lost and properties destroyed. Problems in detecting early warning signs on the pending violence and resources might have stopped the regional governments from acting. But at the same time, the citizens affected needed better security from their regional governments.

Similarly, individual citizens’ rights including the right to life were violated and constantly put under high risks as a result of the lack of preparedness and statesmanship by the regional states following the federalization of the state structure. An important case in point here is that of Somali and Oromo border claims and conflicts. The

36.In the Beneshangul/Gumuz regional state, the working language was (and still is) Amharic. The petitioners, as indicated above were required to know the language of one of the groups (owners of the region) for no purpose at all.

37.ETHIOPIAN HUMAN RIGHTS COUNCIL, DEMOCRACY, RULE OF LAW AND HUMAN RIGHTS IN ETHIOPIA: RHETORIC AND PRACTICE (1995), at 127–128.

38.Id., at 128.

39.See, Getachew Assefa, Protection of Fundamental Rights and Freedoms in the Ethiopian Federation, in PROCEEDINGS OF THE FIRST NATIONALCONFERENCEON FEDERALISM,CONFLICTAND PEACE

BUILDING (2003).

2011]

Federalism and Legal Pluralism in Ethiopia

221

overlapping claims for certain flashpoint places such as Miésso has engendered conflicts that claimed the lives of innocent persons and displaced thousands. The problem of wrangles over boundaries has in fact been dragging on since 1994/5 between the Somali and the Oromia regions. The problem however reached an acute stage after the referendum that took place in October 2005 in order to determine the administrative status of certain disputed localities between the Somali and Oromia regions.

Setting aside the dispute on the irregularities surrounding the conduct of the referendum, problems ensued even in areas where clear majority came out in favour of a given side, by the very side that became victorious. This was the case for example in the Bikkie, Afdem, Yerer and Mulu localities of the Miésso Woreda. The victims expressed their grievances that after the referendum, the localities fell under the Somali regional government’s administration, but soon after its conclusion, with the Somali local administration’s tacit consent, conflict arose and an act of ethnic cleansing against the Oromos was perpetrated resulting in the exodus of thousands and the murder of many.40 Some angrily expressed their views saying that all the evils resulted from the referendum. One refugee in the Miésso town said, the government “saw its poison among us by its act of referendum”.41

The elders of both the Somalis and the Oromos expressed their deep resentments that all of their misery happens because of lack of farsighted, genuine and neutral administration by the authorities. A statement of a Somali elder involved in resolving the conflict perhaps catches the feeling of the people:

There is a problem here. You know, children normally do what they see their father doing. The government administering us did not tell us—the Somalis, Oromos, Amharas and the Argobas—to live peacefully together as brothers and sisters. The Somali political leaders tell the Somalis that the Oromos are taking their land and that they should defend; the Oromo political leaders also tell the Oromos that the Somalis are overrunning them and they should stand against that. Even after the 2005 Elections, the Oromo party won an election here at Miésso area; we said we want to peacefully live under this administration; but our political leaders tell us not to seek administrative services from the Oromos. Both sides consider us (the people) as instruments for their political games. We do not know what

40.An interview with the Voice of America (Amharic Service) broadcast on 17 December 2005.

41.Id.

222

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

to do any more.42

A very consistent claim of the affected people is that the two regional governments did not make adequate efforts to solve the problems. The problems are said to be predominantly permeated by the lack of good governance. Similar conflicts have besieged several areas in the SNNPS (e.g. conflict between Shecko and Mejangir)43 and the Gambella regional State.44

As the above brief account of the situation of rights in the Ethiopian states show, there are some matters of fact that Ethiopians, as citizens of a promising multi- nation state, should be concerned about. As the above examples and facts show, the problems are not unsolvable. They are capable of being solved with the right policy and legal framework that is targeted at building a multi-cultural state at all levels of administration and in all states of the federation. And as it has been argued above, more needs to be done by our states in this regard.

V. LEGAL PLURALISM AND HUMAN RIGHTS

Another aspect of the Ethiopian ethnically based federal system that needs to be looked into (from the viewpoint of human rights) is its official recognition of religious and customary laws and courts in family and personal matters. According to Vanderlinden, Ethiopia is an aspect of official legal pluralism or pluralism within the state law.45 The Federal Constitution gives formal recognition to religious and customary laws and courts to operate side by side with the state legal system in the areas of family and personal matters.

This of course is an official recognition of the social pluralism of the Ethiopian society in those limited areas. The traditional norms and ways of life of the various Ethiopian peoples have survived the modern state and its legal and administrative institutions, since the latter was superimposed on it beginning from the turn of the 19th Century, and continued to exist side by side with it. The penetration of the modern state

42.Id., (translation by the author).

43.See generally, Sara Vaughan, Responses to Ethnic Federalism in Ethiopia’s Southern Region, in ETHNIC FEDERALISM: THE ETHIOPIAN EXPERIENCE IN COMPARATIVE PERSPECTIVES (David Turton ed., 2006).

44.See generally, Dereje Feyissa, The Experience of Gambella Regional State, in PROCEEDINGS

OF THE FIRST NATIONAL CONFERENCE ON FEDERALISM, CONFLICT AND PEACE BUILDING (2003).

45. J. Vanderlinden, cited in G.R. Woodman, Ideological Combat and social Observation: Recent Debate about Legal Pluralism, 42 J. LEG. PLURALISM & UNOFFICIAL L. (1998), at 24. For a clear and succinct discussion of legal pluralism, see J. Griffiths, What is Legal Pluralism? in 24 J. LEG. PLURALISM & UNOFFICIAL L. (1986).

2011]

Federalism and Legal Pluralism in Ethiopia

223

apparatus and its laws into the traditional societies of the country has been indeed a very slow process and it has not been achieved. This has been the case even in the face of official policies of most of the 20th Century Ethiopia (during the regimes of Haile- Selassie I and a Military-socialist Government: 1930-1991) that were targeted at uprooting the traditional social relations and replacing them with modern state system and laws.

It suffices to cite a legal provision in the 1960 Ethiopian Civil Code regarding the position of the government policy: “Unless otherwise expressly provided, all rules whether written or customary previously in force concerning matters provided for in this code shall be replaced by this code and are hereby repealed.”46 There was an attempt at total replacement of the traditional with the ‘modern’ in all of the areas of the civil law.47 This was the case also in criminal matters as evidenced by the enactment of the 1957 Penal Code which did not leave any room for customary criminal justice administration.

In spite of the attempts made by the state to centralize the law and legal institutions, the reality in Ethiopia today is that customary systems and institutions remain very active in most of the various Ethiopian societies.48 The current federal legal order of Ethiopia makes some changes in this regard. The Federal Constitution of Ethiopia has created a limited space for non-state law. The following are the relevant provisions of the Constitution:

(i)This Constitution shall not preclude the adjudication of disputes relating to personal and family laws in accordance with religious or customary laws, with the consent of the parties to the dispute. Particulars shall be determined by law.49

(ii)Pursuant to Sub-Article 5 of Article 34 the House of Peoples’ Representatives and State Councils can establish or give official recognition to religious and customary courts. Religious and customary laws that had state recognition and functioned prior to the adoption of the Constitution shall be organized on the basis of recognition accorded to them by this Constitution.50

46.Art. 3347.

47.See also, G. Krzeczunowicz, A New Legislative Approach to Customary Law: The "Repeals" Provision of the Ethiopian Civil Code of 1960, 1 J. ETHIOPIAN STUD. (1963).

48.See generally, GRASS-ROOTS JUSTICE IN ETHIOPIA: THE CONTRIBUTION OF CUSTOMARY

DISPUTE RESOLUTION (Alula Pankhurst & Getachew Assefa eds, 2008).

49.Art. 34(5).

50.Art. 78(5). State Councils are legislative assemblies of regional states.

224

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

Article 34(5) of the Federal Constitution quoted above takes a permissive stance in relation to both religious and customary laws and courts in the areas of family and personal disputes as regards consenting disputants. A close reading of Article 34(5) shows first that only a few of the areas of adjudication are carved out and given to the customary and religious laws and courts. In other words, in what are normally known as civil and commercial matters, the non-state laws and courts have jurisdiction only with respect to family and personal matters. Importantly, criminal jurisdictions are unequivocally denied to customary and religious laws and courts. Secondly, the jurisdictions of the non-state laws and courts are contingent on the consent of the disputing parties and cannot take place without the latter. Conversely, we could note that if the disputants agree to the jurisdictions of religious or customary courts and laws, the rules in the laws of custom or religion would apply to the consenting disputants regardless of the nature and contents of those laws.

In principle, by giving their consent, the disputants would be willing to absorb any kind of decisions weather they are repugnant to constitutional rights or ordinary sense of justice or not. Of course, one may argue that by virtue of Article 9(1) of the Constitution, decisions or religious and customary laws will have to yield to the Constitution in the event of their contradiction with the latter. But since the recognition accorded to customary courts and laws is given by the Constitution itself, again a possible counter-argument, to the effect that the very act of consent would ‘purify’ the ‘defective’ rules in custom and religion, is also plausible enough.

In spite of the imitative stance taken by the state, the empirical reality regarding the traditional or customary laws (including those with some ritual practices) in the country provides for a completely different picture. Although the state tries to gloss over the traditional laws in the country as non-existent in most of the rural areas (especially those farther away from the urban centres), the traditional laws and institutions still display a complete vitality. Many past and recent studies have confirmed that they exist in full force and the society uses them to settle disputes in their day-to-day lives.51 Importantly also today, as it was before, the jurisdictions of the

51. The following are just a few examples of such studies: Ayehu Legesse Teferra, Customary Contention: The Power and Authority of Partially Despised Waata Oromo in Dispute Settlement (M.A. Thesis, Addis Ababa University, 2005) (discussing how the traditional institutions of the Waata (Arsi) sub- group of Oromo settle disputes involving murder and other serious bodily injury to a person raping an unmarried girl, amputating one’s legs or hands, tooth breaking, arson, etc, through the traditional institution that consists of one man conciliator (the Waata) at first instance to a body of two to three elders

jaarsa qe'ee warraa (household or village elders) at the wider level and the jaarsa gosaa (elders of the sub-lineage) with conciliators numbering 3 to 5. At the community level, the jaarsa biyyaa (community elders), elders numbering up to 10 would be members of the ‘court.’ In serious cases such as murder, a ritual known as fixa gumaa (culmination of the process) would take place; Paulos Alemayehu, Potentials

2011]

Federalism and Legal Pluralism in Ethiopia

225

traditional laws and courts are not restricted to just family and personal matters, but rather encompass all kinds of civil and criminal matters.52

Whether the decision taken by the Constitution in relation to customary and religious laws of the country is well advised or not; whether it is comprehensive or not; and importantly, whether it is fully cognizant of the societal reality and is capable of addressing basic concerns of those interested or not, etc, are issues worth separate consideration. These however are not the areas of interest of this article. This article rather attempts to focus on the gaps in the law (including in the federal Constitution) in regulating the relationship between the formal courts and laws and traditional or religious courts and their impact on the enjoyment of constitutional rights by citizens.53

One of the main challenges of legal pluralism in Ethiopia today is the determination of which body should be the highest judicial body that could give a conclusive end to claims that have been submitted to the customary and religious courts. For example, should the final decision of the highest religious or customary court be subject to review by the ordinary courts, or for that matter by the highest ordinary court? This issue has been a battle ground between the liberal outlook and that of the supporters of more autonomy for cultural or self determination rights of ethno-

and Challenges of Indigenous Institutions for Good Governance: The Case of Gada among the Gedeo (M.A. Thesis, Addis Ababa University, 2005) (discussing the customary judicial institution of the Gedoe people of the SNNP State. The author describes how the traditional chiefs—the Hayitticha at its lower tier and the Abba Gada at the apex—dispense justice on all kinds of cases in the civil and criminal areas); Shack William, On Gurage Judicial Structure and African Political Theory, in 5 JOU (1963) (describing the judicial system of the Gurage of Ethiopia (SNNP State) as consisting of two tiers: the first instance with competence at the village (clan) level and the Yajoka as a court of appeals. The jurisdiction of the Yajoka also leaves out no case but principally deals with disputes which arise out of the network of kinship, economic and social rights, duties, and obligations existing among Gurage, and which are incumbent upon all Gurage who claim citizenship. William discusses an interesting situation in which the Gurage judicial system and the government courts existed side by side and the disputants chose where to take their cases). See also, Walelign Tadesse Robele, Continuity and Change in Ye-Gordena Sera System of Kistane-Gurage Traditional Governance (M.A. Thesis, Addis Ababa University, 2005). On the institution of the Gada of the Oromo, see Dinsa Lepisa Aba Jobir, The Gada System of Government and Sera Caffe Oromo (LL.B Thesis, Addis Ababa University, 1975); Seid Jundi, The Traditional Law Making and Enforcement Process in the Gadaa System of the Oromo: A Comparative Approach (LL.B Thesis, Addis Ababa University, 1994); Daniel Abebe Haile, Kinship, Marriage, and Alternative Dispute Resolution among the Sab of the Somali (M.A. Thesis, Addis Ababa University, 2005) (discussing the Somali customary law (Xeer) and its rules (Xeer Dulnimo and Xeer Do'nimo) and courts (Guddi) as passing up on all kinds of cases including a small misunderstanding among individuals to homicide cases). See also, Jemal Derie Kalif, The Customary Resolution of Homicide Cases in Ethiopian Somalis and its Impact on the Regional Justice Administration (LL.B Thesis, Addis Ababa University, 1999).

52.See, Pankhurst & Assefa, supra note 48.

53.See, the Kedija Beshir case, file No. 394/92 (of the 3rd Naieba [First Instance Sharia] Court of the City Administration of Addis Ababa).

226

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

national or religious groups. For example, in general the latter group opposes that the ordinary court of any level be allowed to review the judicial determination made by customary or religious courts.

In a related issue, Kymlicka notes that many American Indians oppose the idea that the US Supreme Court reviews their internal decisions as per the Bill of Rights. He observes that both the American Indians and Canadian Bands in relation to the Canadian Charter of Rights and Freedoms opposed to the Supreme Courts’ ability to review the decision of their local councils, and that they do not want members of their respective communities to challenge their decisions in the ordinary courts.54 The demand for exemption of decisions of the tribal bodies, Kymlicka notes, is opposed by liberal thoughts obviously because in the name and under the guise of group interest and ‘cultural purity,’ individuals or subgroups, such as women, may be subjugated, and therefore that tribal judicial or executive or legislative decisions must be subject to review by the nation’s highest court in the event of report of grievance and after the exhaustion of remedies available at the level of tribal institutions.

The reasons for the traditional institutions’ resistance of the review from the state institutions are many.55 But, the most overriding consideration can be said to be the concern that the modern institutions such as supreme courts may not be impartial in cases involving tribal cultural matters due to the ethnocentric bias the former would have against traditional institutions. When it comes to the review of religious institutions’ decisions by the modern state institutions, the suspicion of bias would be all the more pronounced. The Kedija Beshir case is illustrative of this situation.

This case involved a dispute on inheritance of a house among grand children of a Muslim family. In 1999, the plaintiffs (four persons) opened a case before the first instance Sharia Court56 claiming that they should be given their share which was under possession of the defendants (four persons). The Sharia Court received a response from the defendants who asserted basically that they did not consent to be adjudicated before

54.See generally, Will Kymlicka, Liberal Culturalism: An Emerging Consensus, in 1 ETHICAL

THEORY AND MORAL PRACTICE (1988).

55.Id., at 85. Kymlicka for example explains that in the case of the Indian tribes, they are opposed to the US Supreme Court’s power to review their institutions’ decisions because, among other things, the Supreme Court historically legalized the acts of colonization and conquest that dispossessed the Indians of their property and political power.

56.Based on the Constitutional recognition of religious laws and courts discussed earlier in the article, the Federal Parliament enacted a law, entitled “Federal Courts of Sharia Consolidation,” Proclamation No. 188/1999, which established a three-tier court of Sharia to have jurisdiction on parties and matters amendable to federal jurisdiction. The states can enact their own laws on the same matter. According to the law just mentioned, the courts of Sharia have jurisdiction on such matters as marriage, divorce, maintenance, guardianship of children and family relationships as well as wakf, gifts and inheritance. See, Art. 4 of Proclamation No. 188/1999.

2011]

Federalism and Legal Pluralism in Ethiopia

227

a religious/Sharia court, and secondly that the case was pending before the regular court with jurisdiction. They made it clear in their reply to the Court that as per Article 34(5) of the Federal Constitution, the religious/Sharia court will have jurisdiction on this case only if they consent to be bound and since they made it unequivocally clear that they do not consent to have their case adjudicated here, the case should be closed for want of jurisdiction.

The first instance Sharia Court (Naíeba court), set aside the preliminary objection of the defendants and went on to see the merits in which it found the applications of the plaintiffs founded and decided that the property be partitioned among the defendants and the plaintiffs. The court even imprisoned one of the defendants for 15 days (for court contempt) for having said during oral hearings that the court did not have jurisdiction. The defendants appealed to the High Sharia Court and the Cassation Division of the Supreme Sharia Court one after the other, both of which affirmed the first instance Sharia court’s decision.57

As per the procedural laws of the country, the defendants submitted an application for review to the cassation division of the Federal Supreme Court of Ethiopia, claiming that the decisions of the courts of Sharia committed a grave error of law. However, to the dismay of the petitioners, Federal Supreme Court’s cassation division stated that there is no error of law committed by the courts of Sharia and rendered the case inadmissible.58 The defendants, through the Ethiopian Women Lawyers’ Association—a local women’s rights advocacy group—petitioned the Council of Constitutional Inquiry (CCI) for review and quashing of the decision of the Courts of Sharia. The CCI admitted the case and decided in 2003 that the first instance Sharia Court could pass upon a given case only with a clear consent of the parties to the case, and its passing upon this case over clear rejection of its jurisdiction was unconstitutional. It made a recommendation to the HoF that the decision of the Sharia courts be overturned.

Several interesting points of analysis can emerge from this case. One is the possible ill-treatments that may result from the subjection of citizens to religious courts in light of the constitutional human rights principles and the broader international human rights regime to which Ethiopia is a party. Secondly, the judges who sit at the customary/religious courts do harbour a lot of sentiments to their own courts and laws. In this very case, they simply bypassed a very clear constitutional provision that states that the consent of a disputant is the only way from which a religious court gets its jurisdiction on a case. In defiance, the judge of the first instance Sharia court in Kedija Beshir went on to incarcerate an objecting party for court contempt.

57.File No. 7/95.

58.Cassation File No. 12400/1995.

228

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

In the case, Kedija Beshir and other defendants were made to undergo serious difficulty, financially and emotionally for more than three years in a matter that should have ended at the first or so hearing. It is interesting to note also that the cassation division of the federal supreme court of Ethiopia refused to admit the Kedija Beshir case stating that there was no error of law committed by the courts of Sharia. It said this while a clear constitutional provision was set aside by the decision of the latter. One therefore has to look beyond the black letter decision of the Federal Supreme Court. I believe that the Supreme Court’s Cassation division could clearly see that a fundamental error of law took place in the case—a deliberate error by the Sharia Courts not to heed to the constitutional provisions. But it seems to me that the cassation division of the Supreme Court wanted just to avoid the problem by not admitting it, like the proverbial pigeon that buries its head in the sands. This shows us the indeterminacy of the judicial stands on cases involving prior religious court decisions.

This, no doubt will be the case in customary legal regimes of the multitudes of the cultural communities of Ethiopia. Their norms have discriminatory treatment regarding especially women.59 Also, important is that the process for justice administration used by the customary institutions does not in most cases afford fair play for the parties, especially the defendants. The problem is exacerbated in the case particularly of customary courts and laws by the absence of clear legal regime guiding the citizens through the dispute settlement processes and the remedies available to them. To begin with, to date, there is no law both at federal and regional levels regulating the state of affairs of customary law and courts.60 As a result a lot of very important matters remain unregulated. For example, it is not clear as to what kind of procedural requirements should be observed by the customary courts; who should be a judge in customary courts; whether they should observe any constitutional limitation about the body of rules they could use regarding rights of disputants, etc., are not at all known.

59.See e.g., Wolde-Selassie Abbute, Gumuz and Highland Settlers: Differing Strategies of Livelihood and Ethnic Relations in Metekel, North-Western Ethiopia (M.A. Thesis, Addis Ababa University, 2002). Wolde-Sillassie discusses the dispute settlement among the Gumuz of Ethiopia as involving the giving away of a girl during the reconciliation process between the feuding clans. The girl can in principle be used by the victim families in anyway they wish, but normally would be taken as a wife for one of the members of that family. See also, Dolores A. Donovan and Getachew Assefa, Homicide in Ethiopia: Human Rights, Federalism and Legal Pluralism, in 51 AM. J. COMP. L. 505 (2003).

60.Note that Art. 34(5) of the Constitution states that the details on customary courts and laws shall be enacted in statute. The constitutions of the Regional States also state the same thing.

2011]

Federalism and Legal Pluralism in Ethiopia

229

VI. CONCLUDING REMARKS

Attempts have been made in this article to highlight some of the human rights concerns at the sub-national levels in Ethiopia. As this discussion begins to show, there are several reasons for the poor state of human rights in the states of Ethiopia. Some of these problems are created because of the absence of a neutral approach by the regional governments to recognize the equality of groups and individuals in their territories and under their administration. It however has also a lot to do with the problems in law and policy at the national level that fail to design mechanisms that serve all citizens in the country. In the absence of the policy and legal regimes, it would be impossible for the federal government to ensure the accountability of the regional authorities.

There are undoubtedly many positive things that have been brought with federalism in Ethiopia. I am inclined to believe that federalism is a better suited form of organizing state power in Ethiopia. I also equally believe that if federalism in Ethiopia is not well implemented—with genuine commitments to its principles and demands—a great danger looms on the future of the country as a polity.

While it is extremely important to ensure genuine self-rule rights to the various ethno-national groups in Ethiopia, it is equally important that the ethno-national groups with their own full measure of self-government are required to respect minority and individual rights of those who do not belong to their ethnic group. Such a matter should not be left to the mercy of the governments of the self-governing ethno-national groups; it rather has to be enacted into a federal law such as a constitution. The politico-legal system should also provide for mechanisms of sanctioning violations of such laws and at the same time provide for a remedy for those individuals and groups who happen to be mistreated.

As regards the recognition of customary and religious institutions for settlement of disputes in the country, there is no doubt about the fact that it is an excellent step forward and perhaps is simply a must given the nature of state structures established in response to the multi-ethnic nature of the country. But, as has been argued earlier in the article, the legal regime on the matter is not fully in place and this makes it very difficult to evaluate the state of affairs of customary justice system in the country. It should be emphasized that Ethiopia’s commitment to official legal pluralism would take her to task, among other things, on creating a means to follow-up the performance of the customary and religious legal regimes to make sure that the latter comply with at least the minimum standards of human rights protection and on upgrading the performance of these institutions.61

61. See, Donovan & Assefa, supra note 59, at 507.

230

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

THE RIGHT TO LEAVE AND ITS RAMIFICATIONS IN

ERITREA

Simon M. Weldehaimanot*

ABSTRACT

As part of the massive and serious human rights violations prevalent in Eritrea, the right to leave their country of many Eritreans between 10 to 50 years old is severely curtailed; giving rise to the apt designation of Eritrea as an “open air prison”. However, fraught by the overall repression of human rights, in spite of the draconian restrictions on the right to leave such as deadly measures of blocking the borders of the country and severely punishing apprehended attempters and deportees with no reference to due process of law, thousands of Eritrean youth are fleeing Eritrea every year in a manner the Government of Eritrea (GoE) calls “illegal”. This article analyzes the related rights to leave and to return to one’s own country as provided in three human rights treaties which bind Eritrea and in the 1997 Constitution of Eritrea. A depiction of glaring violations is made and consequences discussed.

I. INTRODUCTION

I made four failed attempts to cross the border, three times to Ethiopia and once to the Sudan. But I never gave up and succeeded with the fifth one. After six days of exhausting walk, I managed to get in to the Sudan on 17 November, 2007 via Sawa military training camp, along two other colleagues. It was very risky ... Had it not to be for one Sudanese nomad to rescue our life, we could all have vanished without trace in the deserts of eastern Sudan.1

An early expression of the right to leave one’s birthplace appeared in the Crito, where Plato quotes Socrates proudly explain: “we further proclaim to any Athenian by the

* JSD candidate, Notre Dame Law School, Indiana. Email: <sweldeha@nd.edu> The author thanks Dr Daniel R. Mekonnen for his valuable comments and Yohannes Teclemichael (LLM) for sharing his experience. The usual disclaimer applies. Certain parts of this article were presented at the 1st Human Rights Symposium of the Eritrean Global Solidarity (EGS) held in Washington, DC on 20 June 2009.

1. T. Abraham, A Refugee at Last (11 September 2009) <http://delina.org/en/articles/303-a- refugee-at-last> (accessed on 13 September 2009). Abraham’s testimony is not unique but the fate of thousands of Eritrea youth including the author who, himself being a victim, in 2007 filed a communication (Communication 349/07 Simon Weldehaimanot v. Eritrea) before the African Commission on Human and Peoples” Rights (the African Commission) mainly on account of violation of the right to leave and to return to their country of Eritrean youth (herein after referred as Communication filed).

2011]

Ramifications of the Right to Leave in Eritrea

231

liberty which we allow him, that if he does not like us when he has become of age and has seen the ways of the city, and made our acquaintance, he may go where he pleases and take his goods with him.”2 Early formal acknowledgment of the right to freedom of movement in national law can be found in the Magna Carta, a document dated 1215. The Magna Carta provided that “it shall be lawful in the future for anyone ... to leave our Kingdom and to return, safe and secure by land and water.”3 A general right to free movement is also reflected in the writings of 16th century publicists of international law. According to the Spaniard Francisco de Vitoria, “it was permissible from the beginning of the world for anyone to set forth and travel wheresoever he would.”4 During the 17th century Hugo Grotius postulated the principle that “every nation is free to travel to every other nation.”5

Some writers have indeed found justification for the contemporary rights to leave and to return to one’s country in ancient human history and have thus concluded the rights are innate to human beings.6 Nevertheless, as Hannum7 has rightly observed, whatever theory one adopts to explain the original source, the right to movement has now acquired the status of positive law through the widespread acceptance of the international covenants and numerous other international agreements.8

In its modern sense, freedom of movement contains internal and external aspects: freedom of movement within a country and between states respectively.9 The latter aspect is usually referred to as the rights to leave and to return to one’s country. It is the external aspect which is the focus of this article. While the rights to leave and to return are closely connected, in that the existence of one allows for the effective

2.J. Barist et al, Who May Leave: A Review of Soviet Practice Restricting Emigration on Grounds of Knowledge of “State Secrets” in Comparison with Standards of International Law and the Policies of Other States, 15 HOFSTRA L. REV. 381 (1987), at 384.

3.Magna Carta, Ch 42, quoted in S.E. THORNE ET AL, THE GREAT CHARTER: FOUR ESSAYS ON MAGNA CARTA AND THE HISTORY OF OUR LIBERTY 133 (1965).

4.Quoted in J.D. INGLÉS, STUDY OF DISCRIMINATION IN RESPECT OF THE RIGHT OF EVERYONE

TO LEAVE ANY COUNTRY, INCLUDING HIS OWN, AND TO RETURN TO HIS COUNTRY 2 (1963).

5.Id.

6.G. Liu, The Right to Leave and Return and Chinese Migration Law (PhD Thesis, University of Technology, 2005), at 15-22. See also, G. LIU, THE RIGHT TO LEAVE AND RETURN AND CHINESE

MIGRATION LAW (2007).

7.H. HANNUM, THE RIGHT TO LEAVE AND RETURN IN INTERNATIONAL LAW AND PRACTICE 5

(1987).

8.For a discussion of the right to freedom of movement in general, see B. Frelick, The Right of Return, 2 INTL J.REFUGEE L. 442 (1990), at 442-7; THE RIGHT TO LEAVE AND TO RETURN:PAPERS AND

RECOMMENDATIONS OF THE INTERNATIONAL COLLOQUIUM HELD IN UPPSALA, SWEDEN, 19-20 JUNE 1972 (K. Vasak & S. Liskofsky eds., 1976).

9. S.A. Jagerskiold, The Freedom of Movement, in THE INTERNATIONAL BILL OF RIGHTS (L. Henkin ed., 1981), at 167-70.

232

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

exercise of the other, they respectively respond to different needs of the individuals exercising them. The person leaving his or her country may be doing so out of a desire to travel, to emigrate, or to seek refuge; while the person seeking to return to his or her country is usually motivated by a desire to return home, to the place where he or she belongs, to his or her roots.10 This “natural desire for a base or homeland” has been said to demonstrate “the logical connection” of freedom of movement with the right to a nationality and the right to property.11 These and other factors could therefore lead to different standards applicable to the right to leave and the right to return.

The right to leave one’s country does not, for example, grant an automatic right to enter other alien countries.12 This fact coupled with the growing proportion of economic migrants to the west which the west has not been welcoming, and that illegal migrants face deportation and numerous violations of their rights, could tempt a third world state to, for example, make exit visa dependent upon securing entry. Regardless of this scenario, Harvey and Barnidge however argue that “the right to leave one’s own country remains significant in international human rights law.”13

II. THE RIGHTS TO LEAVE AND TO RETURN UNDER

INTERNATIONAL LAW

A. The Rights under Treaty Law

Out of the many treaties14 and soft laws which provide for the rights to leave and to return, this article focuses on two treaties Eritrea has ratified.15 These are the African Charter on Human and Peoples’ Rights (ACHPR),16 the International Covenant on Civil

10.D.N. Nseroko, The Right to Return Home, 21 INDIAN J. INTL L. 335 (1981), at 336.

11.S. Agterhuis, The Right to Return and its Practical Application (LL.M Thesis, Aristotle University of Thessaloniki, 2004 ), at 4.

12.C. Harvey & R.P. Barnidge, The Right to Leave One’s Own Country under International Law (paper prepared for the Policy Analysis and Research Program of the Global Commission on International Migration, 2005), at 1.

13.Id., at 16.

14.A few examples are Article VIII of the American Declaration of the Rights and Duties of Man, Article 22 of the American Convention on Human Rights and Article 2 of the Fourth Protocol of the European Convention for the Protection of Human Rights and Fundamental Freedoms. See also, INGLÉS, supra note 4, at 94-112 (listing provisions from various agreements).

15.On 31 July 2001 and 3 August 1994 respectively. Eritrea has also acceded to the International Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of Racial Discrimination and the Convention on the Rights of the Child. Both instruments provide for the rights to leave and return. See, arts 5(d) (ii)

&10 respectively.

16.Eritrea acceded to the ACHPR on 14 January 1999.

2011]

Ramifications of the Right to Leave in Eritrea

233

and Political Rights (ICCPR)17 and the Universal Declaration of Human Rights (Universal Declaration). The latter, even though a mere declaration, is binding on Eritrea because it has arguably attained the status of customary international law.18

Article 12(2) of the ACHPR provides that “every individual shall have the right to leave any country including his own and to return to his country.” Article 13 of the Universal Declaration provides that “everyone has the right to leave any country, including his own and to return to his country.” Article 12(2) of the ICCPR provides, in relevant part that “everyone shall be free to leave any country, including his own”; and article 12(4) provides that “no one shall be arbitrarily deprived of the right to enter his own country.”

B. The Boundaries of the Rights

In this world which often experiences worst dictatorial governments taking terms such as democracy and justice as their names, and in the context of such governments often claiming to be respectful of the rights to leave and to return, it is indeed important to discuss the permissible limitations of these rights.

Generally, three approaches of limiting rights can be identified. In some constitutions, there are no expressed limitation clauses on rights. Nevertheless, as all rights are not absolute, courts have read-in certain limitation in rights.19 With other constitutions and human rights instruments, a qualifier clause by which limitation of non-absolute rights is regulated is attached and there is no general limitation clause. Such qualifiers are often referred to as internal limitations or clawback clauses. Or rights are stated in seemingly absolute terms and then there is a general limitation clause applicable to the non-absolute rights.20 A third category of constitutions and human rights instruments not only attach an internal limitation but also provide for a general limitation clause—thus seemingly subjecting rights to double limitation.21 Derogation22 from rights during state of emergency situations is treated differently by

17.Eritrea acceded to the ICCPR on 22 January 2002.

18.See generally, H. Hannum, The Status of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights in National and International Law, 25 GA. J. INTL & COMP. L. 287 (1995/96).

19.The United States of America’s constitutional jurisprudence is the best example.

20.German Basic Law is one example.

21.Best examples are article 36 of the 1996 South African Constitution and article 26 of the 1997 Eritrean Constitution.

22.For more discussion of the notion of derogation, see generally D. McGoldrick, The Interface between Public Emergency Powers and International Law, 2 INTL J. CONST. L. 380 (2004).

234

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

different constitutions.23 Although there could be certain procedural implications,24 it seems however that the distinctions are more theoretical and all approaches tend to meet at the end result.

Under the Universal Declaration, the twin rights to leave and to return are subject to general limitation provided in article 29:

(i)Everyone has duties to the community in which alone the free and full development of his personality is possible.

(ii)In the exercise of his rights and freedoms, everyone shall be subject only to such limitations as are determined by law solely for the purpose of securing due recognition and respect for the rights and freedoms of others and of meeting the just requirements of morality, public order and the general welfare in a democratic society.

(iii)These rights and freedoms may in no case be exercised contrary to the purposes and principles of the United Nations.

Although the ACHPR is known for its trademark of not allowing derogation from its rights even during state of emergency, Heyns has convincingly argued that article 27(2) of the ACHPR which states the “rights and freedoms of each individual shall be exercised with due regard to the rights of others, collective security, morality and common interest” will increasingly be used by states as a general limitation in addition to the internal limitations.25 Article 12(2) of the ACHPR contains internal limitation by subjecting the rights to leave and to return to “restrictions, provided for by law for the protection of national security, law and order, public health or morality.”

The only limitation to the right to return contained in the ICCPR is that the right is not absolute but subject to derogation.26 Article 4 of the ICCPR allows state parties to, in time of public emergency which threatens the life of the nation and the existence of which is officially proclaimed, take measures derogating from their

23.See, e.g., art. 27 of the Eritrean Constitution (1997).

24.As a result the so called “two stage analysis” of a limitation of a right has been developed in recent South African constitutional jurisprudence. See generally, I. CURRIE & J. WAAL, THE BILL OF RIGHTS HANDBOOK (2005); R.J. Goldston, The South African Bill of Rights, 32 TEX.INTL L.J. 451 (1997).

25.C. Heyns, Civil and Political Rights in the African Charter, in THE AFRICAN CHARTER ON

HUMAN AND PEOPLES’ RIGHTS: THE SYSTEM IN PRACTICE, 1986-2000 (M. Evans & R. Murray eds, 2002), at 139.

26.Not all rights are subject to derogation. Article 4(2) of the ICCPR states that no derogation from articles 6, 7, 8 (paragraphs 1 and 2), 11, 15, 16 and 18 may be made.

2011]

Ramifications of the Right to Leave in Eritrea

235

obligations to the extent strictly required by the exigencies of the situation, provided that such measures are not inconsistent with their other obligations under international law and do not involve discrimination solely on the ground of race, colour, sex, language, religion or social origin. However, any state party to the ICCPR which desires to avail itself of the right of derogation is required to immediately inform the other parties to the ICCPR, through the intermediary of the Secretary-General of the United Nations, of the provisions from which it has derogated and of the reasons by which it was actuated.

On top of the possibility of derogation in accordance to article 4, article 12(3) indicates that the right to leave is subjected to additional restrictions insofar as such restrictions are provided by law, are necessary to protect national security, public order, public health or morals or the rights and freedoms of others and are consistent with the other rights recognized in the ICCPR. Thus, under the ACHPR, the two rights to leave and to return; and under the ICCPR, the right to leave are subjected to limitations at two stages.27

The Eritrean Constitution that was ratified on 23 May 1997 also provides under article 19(9) that “every citizen shall have the right to leave and return to Eritrea and to be provided with passport or any other travel document.” Article 26 of the Constitution provides for almost an identical limitation clause to those in the three instruments discussed above. According to article 26 which applies to article 19(9), the fundamental rights and freedoms guaranteed under the Constitution may be limited only in so far as limitation is in the interests of national security, public safety or the economic well-being of the country, health or morals, for the prevention of public disorder or crime or for the protection of the rights and freedoms of others. However, any law providing for the limitation of the fundamental rights and freedoms guaranteed in the Constitution must (a) be consistent with the principles of democracy and justice;

(b) be of general application and not negate the essential content of the right or freedom in question and (c) specify the ascertainable extent of such limitation and identify the article or articles hereof on which authority to enact such limitation is claimed to rest.

In addition, under article 27 of the Constitution, at a time when public safety or the security or stability of the state is threatened by war, external invasion, civil disorder or natural disorder or natural disaster, by a resolution passed by a two-thirds majority vote of all its members, the National Assembly of Eritrea can sanction declaration of state of emergency for six months (renewable only for additional three months) which could have the effect of suspending many rights including the rights to leave and to return.

27. For more on the “two stage analysis” to violation (limitation) of a right, see CURRIE & WAAL, supra note 24.

236

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

Generally, two requirements a permissible limitation has to meet can thus be identified with the ACHPR, the ICCPR, the Universal Declaration and the Eritrean Constitution: (1) the procedural (provided for by law) and (2) the substantive requirement (the purposes for which limitation is permitted). The discussion below looks at the meaning of both the procedural and substantive requirements and explores the preparatory works of the above instruments, other interpretative guides and interpretation of the rights by relevant bodies in the form of General Comments and cases.

1. Procedural Requirements.—There is no much documentation on the development of the provision of the ACHPR that can help in the interpretation of the rights to leave and to return. If “provided for by law” is to mean any domestic law, many writers however decried that it would mean what has been provided under international treaties can be withered away by laws states can pass at the end making rights contained in international treaties illusory.28 Fortunately, the African Commission on Human and Peoples’ Rights (monitoring body of the ACHPR) has not followed this literal interpretation and it is now settled that the phrase “provided for by law” is taken as referring to international human rights standards.29

When the Universal Declaration was debated in the General Assembly, the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics (USSR) proposed an amendment to Article 13(2) that would have added after the phrase “to leave any country, including his own” the words “in accordance with the procedure laid down in the laws of that country.”30 The USSR and Eastern bloc delegates defended the amendment as an accurate statement of “existing realities,” as “movement within a given country or across its frontiers” was a matter of domestic law.31 The USSR’s proposal for amendment, however, was strongly opposed by many nations and was defeated, and the USSR was subsequently the only nation to vote against the final wording of Article 13.32

The drafting history of Article 12 of the ICCPR also establishes the intent of the member states to recognize and protect the right to emigrate. As submitted to the General Assembly by the Commission on Human Rights, the right to emigrate, set out in Article 12, was preceded by a limiting paragraph:

28.Heyns, supra note 25, at 142; U. Essien, The African Commission on Human and Peoples’ Rights: Eleven Years After, 6 BUFF. HUM. RTS. L. REV. 93 (2000), at 95.

29.Communication 105/93, 128/94, 130/94 and 152/96, Media Rights Agenda and Constitutional Rights Project v. Nigeria, (12th Activity Report of the ACHPR 1998-1999, Annex V) ¶ 66.

30.Barist et al, supra note 2, at 386.

31.Id.

32.Id., at 387.

2011]

Ramifications of the Right to Leave in Eritrea

237

Subject to any general law of the State concerned which provides for such reasonable restrictions as may be necessary to protect national security, public safety, health or morals or the rights and freedoms of others, consistent with the other rights recognized in this Covenant...33

Although the delegates generally agreed with the substance of the proposed Article 12, they also felt that the drafting needed revision to make the principles of freedom to emigrate clear and paramount.34 Thus, the initial order of the provisions of Article 12 was amended so as to stress the principle rather than the exceptions and article 12 took its current shape. The amendment was immediately supported by many delegations, and was especially praised for its revised form which stressed the rights of the individual.35 The drafting history of the ICCPR also shows that the requirement that a limitation must be provided by law is necessary to curb executive discretion.36

There are also numerous guidelines showing the boundaries of permissible limitations and the procedures states should follow in limiting the rights to leave and to return. These include General Comment No. 27, the Siracusa Principles,37 the Uppsala Colloquium’s Declaration,38 Draft Principles on Freedom and Non- Discrimination in respect of the Right of Everyone to Leave Any Country, including His Own39 and the Strasbourg Declaration.40

In order to give content to the drafters’ intent to prohibit arbitrary restrictions on the two rights, the above principles and declarations further provide that laws shall guarantee procedural safeguards. In his seminal 1963 study on the implementation of

33.INGLÉS, supra note 4, at 89 (citing U.N. Doc. E/2573, annex I B (1959)).

34.In this regard the Italian representative was quoted to have said: “there was one fundamental objection to the text of Article 12 as it stood: instead of first proclaiming the right concerned, it began by giving a long list of restrictions. That was, to say the least, an inauspicious opening.” Quoted in Barist et al, supra note 2, at 388.

35.According to the Yugoslavian delegate, the amendment’s primary merit was that it listed restrictions only after stating the right. Quoted in Barist et al, id.

36.Id., at 398.

37.Siracusa Principles on the Limitation and Derogation of Provisions in the International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights, Annex, UN Doc E/CN.4/1984/4 (1984), available online at <http://hei.unige.ch/~clapham/hrdoc/docs/siracusa.html> (accessed on 12 December 2007).

38.Declaration on the Right to Leave and the Right to Return, adopted by the Uppsala Colloquium, Sweden, June 1972, reprinted in HANNUM, supra note 7, at 150 (hereinafter Uppsala Colloquium).

39.Draft Principles on Freedom and Non-discrimination in respect of the Right of Everyone to Leave any Country, Including His Own, and to Return to His Country, U.N. Doc. E/CN.41846 (1963), reprinted in HANNUM, supra note 7, at 142.

40.Strasbourg Declaration on the Right to Leave and Return, reprinted in 81 AM. J. INTL L.

434 (1987).

238

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

the ICCPR’s statement on the rights to leave and to return, Judge Ingles, whose position is also supported by the Uppsala Colloquium’s Declaration,41 the Draft Principles on Freedom and Non-Discrimination42 and the Strasbourg Declaration,43 required the following procedural safeguards to protect the rights to leave and to return:

(a) Everyone denied a travel document or permission to leave the country or to return to his country is entitled to a fair hearing. In particular, he shall have the possibility of presenting evidence on his own behalf, of disputing evidence against him and of having witnesses examined. The hearing shall be public except when compelling reasons of national security or the personal interests of the applicant require otherwise. (b) The decision of the competent authorities to grant, deny, withdraw or cancel the required permission or travel document shall be made and communicated to the individual concerned within a reasonable and specified period of time. (c) If the required travel document or permission is denied, withdrawn or cancelled, the reasons for the decision shall be clearly stated to the individual concerned. (d) In case of denial, withdrawal or cancellation of the required permission or travel document, the aggrieved individual shall have the right of appeal to an independent and impartial tribunal.44

2. Substantive Requirements.—It is convenient to analyze the substantive requirements by dividing them into three components: (1) are necessary (2) for the protection of national security, law and order, public health or morality, securing due recognition and respect for the rights and freedoms of others and the general welfare in a democratic society, and (3) are consistent with the other rights recognized in international standards.45

(a) Drafting history (travaux préparatoires)

There is no much information on the drafting history of the ACHPR on the particular rights to leave and to return. There is, however, substantial information on article 12

41.Uppsala Colloquium, supra note 38, art. 6.

42.See supra note 39.

43.Strasbourg Declaration, supra note 40, arts. 2, 4(a)(1), 4(b), 10 & 11.

44.INGLÉS, supra note 4, at 67.

45.These are the grounds mentioned in the three instruments.

2011]

Ramifications of the Right to Leave in Eritrea

239

of the ICCPR. After agreeing on an acceptable form, the General Assembly focused on the specific terms of Article 12(3) of the ICCPR, especially on those terms that in some way limited the rights established. As originally drafted by the UN Commission on Human Rights, Article 12 contained a long list of limitations on the right to emigrate than it has now; but the formula was eventually rejected, in part, because the restrictions were “too broad and required further qualification while providing no real protection against the enactment of arbitrary legislation.46 Concern was voiced that far-reaching restrictions could be justified under such a vague expression.47 The drafting history and the wording used in Article 12 make it clear that restrictions on freedom of movement were intended to be entirely exceptional. This position has been reinforced by the various declarations and principles mentioned above, General Comment No. 27 and case law of the Human Rights Committee and the African Commission.

(b) General Comment No. 27

In the course of its life, the monitoring body of the ICCPR, the United Nations Human Rights Committee (the Committee), has issued commentaries (commonly referred as General Comments) on the interpretation of the rights contained in the ICCPR.48 General Comment No. 27 adopted in 1999 specifically provides detailed principles to guide states in securing the freedom of movement generally. Paragraphs 1 and 2 affirm that “liberty of movement is an indispensable condition for the free development of a person” and the “permissible limitations which may be imposed … must not nullify the principle of liberty of movement, and are governed by the requirement of necessity … and by the need for consistency with the other rights recognized in the Covenant.”

Paragraph 8 explains that freedom to leave the territory of a state may not be made dependent on any specific purpose or on the period of time the individual chooses to stay outside the country or the state of destination. Since international travel usually requires appropriate documents, in particular a passport, paragraph 9 requires that the right to leave a country must include the right to obtain the necessary travel documents from the state of nationality of the individual; and the refusal by a state to issue a passport or prolong its validity for a national residing abroad may deprive a person his or her right to leave and to travel elsewhere.

46.INGLÉS, supra note 4, at 89.

47.Barist et al, supra note 2, at 389.

48.UNITED NATIONS, COMPILATION OF GENERAL COMMENTS AND GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS ADOPTED BY HUMAN RIGHTS TREATY BODIES, UN Doc., HRI/GEN/1/Rev.7, 12 May 2004, at 173–7.

240

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

Paragraph 13 clearly requires states to always be guided by the principle that the restrictions must not impair the essence of the right; the relation between right and restriction, between norm and exception, must not be reversed and the laws authorizing the application of restrictions should use precise criteria and may not confer unfettered discretion on those charged with their execution.

Paragraph 14 and 15 further stress that it is not sufficient that the restrictions serve the permissible purposes—they must also be necessary to protect them. Restrictive measures must conform to the principle of proportionality; they must be appropriate to achieve their protective function; they must be the least intrusive instrument amongst those which might achieve the desired result; and they must be proportionate to the interest to be protected. The principle of proportionality has to be respected not only in the law that frames the restrictions, but also by the administrative and judicial authorities in applying the law.

Paragraph 18 clearly requires that, to be permissible, restrictions need to be consistent with the fundamental principles of equality and non-discrimination. Thus, it would be a clear violation of the ICCPR if the rights to leave and to return are restricted by making distinctions such as on the basis of race, colour, sex, language, religion, political or other opinion, national or social origin, property, birth or other status.

(c) Other Interpretative Guides

A limitation is “necessary” when it, assessed objectively, responds to a pressing public or social need, pursues a legitimate aim and is proportionate to that aim.49 “National security, public order, public health or morals or the rights and freedoms of others” are the most fluid justifications states often rely on to shield their actions.50 Responding to this concern, the Siracusa Conference stresses that national security may be invoked to justify measures limiting certain rights only when they are taken to protect the existence of the nation or its territorial integrity or political independence against force or threat of force and cannot be invoked as a reason for imposing limitations to prevent merely local or relatively isolated threats to law and order or as a pretext for imposing vague or arbitrary limitations and may only be invoked when there exists adequate safeguards and effective remedies against abuse.51 Judge Ingles observed that a “general policy of not permitting anyone to leave the country is never justifiable except in time of war or

49.Strasbourg Declaration, supra note 40, art. 4(c).

50.INGLÉS, supra note 4, at 39-40; Barist et al, supra note 2, at 402.

51.Siracusa Principles, supra note 37.

2011]

Ramifications of the Right to Leave in Eritrea

241

national emergency.”52

Article 6 of the Uppsala Colloquium’s Declaration further provides that a “person’s right to leave a country shall be subject only to such reasonable limitations as are necessary to prevent a clear and present danger to the national security or public order, or to comply with international health regulations; and only if such limitations are provided for by law, are clear and specific, are not subject to arbitrary application and do not destroy the substance of the rights.”53 The kinds of limitations considered permissible under this view of national security would include those necessary to prevent espionage, to protect military secrets, and to regulate the movement of members of the military.54

3. Cases Before the ICCPR’s Human Rights Committee.—General Comments and the other guidelines, although detailed, contain yet abstract principles that provide guidance in understanding a right. Cases (communications) demonstrate how a right has been interpreted when states have allegedly breached their legal obligations. There are many cases in which the right to leave and to return featured. Lauri Peltonen v. Finland55 in particular squarely applies to the situation in Eritrea and thus merits detailed consideration.

In Lauri Peltonen, Finland notes that Section 7, paragraph 1, of the Constitution Act (94/1919) provides for the right of a Finnish citizen to leave his/her own country which is further spelt out in the Passport Act (642/1986) and Passport Decree (643/86), which regulate the right to travel abroad. Furthermore, Section 75 paragraph 1 of the Constitution Act regulates the obligation of Finnish citizens to participate in the defence of the country; this is spelt out in the Military Service Act (452/50) and the Non- Military Service Act (1723/91).

Section 3, paragraph 1, of the Passport Act provides that a Finnish citizen shall obtain a passport, unless otherwise stipulated in the Act. In addition, a passport “may be denied to persons aged 17 to 30 if the requesting citizen cannot show its issuance (by implication leaving Finland) would not be used to evade military service.”56 In such cases, a request for a passport should be accompanied by various documents that show

52.INGLÉS, supra note 4, at 40 & 59.

53.Uppsala Colloquium, supra note 38, at 127.

54.Jagerskiold, supra note 9, at 172; Strasbourg Declaration, supra note 40.

55.Communication No. 492/1992, Peltonen v. Finland, U.N. Doc.CCPR/C/51/D/492/1992 (1994) ¶ 1-2, <http://www1.umn.edu/humanrts/undocs/html/vws492.htm>, (accessed 13 December 2007).

56.Citing § 9(1)(6), ¶ 6.2 of the Committee’s decision which reads: “passport may be denied to persons aged 17 to 30 if they are unable to demonstrate that the performance of military service is not an obstacle to the issuance of a passport.” However, the quoted provision can only be construed as meaning the same as the italicized text above.

242

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

either the requesting individual is exempted or has completed or can be trusted to honour his/her duty to complete the service.57 A Finnish citizen living abroad, and falling into the category of Section 9(1)(6) must obtain a statement from the police of his last place of residence in Finland, showing that he is not liable for military service.

As to the authorities’ discretion to give or deny a person a passport, Finland points out that, when considering a passport application from a person falling within the category of Section 9(1), consideration must be given to “the significance of travel related to the applicant’s family relations, state of health, subsistence, profession and other circumstances,” in accordance with Section 10 of the Act. In this context, Finland refers to the ratio legis of the Passport Act as explained in Parliament, where it was noted that the decision to grant a passport is taken by legal discretion, based on acceptable objective grounds. Furthermore, according to a circular of the Legal Office of the Ministry for Foreign Affairs of 22 June 1992,58 an Embassy must consider its decisions in Section 9(1) cases on the basis of the statement obtained from the police of the applicant’s last residence in Finland, and must take into account the circumstances of the case and the grounds referred to in Section 10. Thus, Finland contended, the Embassy’s discretion to grant a passport is not unlimited, since the Passport Act contains clearly specified grounds for rejecting a request for a passport.

As regards to the time dimension, it is submitted by Finland that the denial of a passport cannot be limited solely to the period of a person’s actual military service, but it necessarily covers a more extensive period before and after such service, in order to secure that a conscript really performs his military service.59 Finland explained that, for a person who has participated in his call-up for military or alternative service, or who has been granted a deferral (for up to three years, for example) of performance of such service, a passport is generally granted up to 28 years of age.60 Once the person liable for military service has reached the age of 28, the passport is generally granted for a shorter period of time, so that by the age of 30, he must perform his military service. Generally, citizens are not called for military service after the age of 30.

The complainant, Mr Lauri Peltonen, is a Finnish citizen born in 1968, residing in Stockholm, Sweden, since 1986. In June 1990, the complainant applied for a passport at the Finnish Embassy in Stockholm and he was denied on the ground that he had failed to report for his military service in Finland on a specified date. The

57.Section 4 of the Passport Decree.

58.No. 0IK-4, 1988/1594/68.40.

59.Application of § 9(1)(6) of the Passport Act.

60.The length of the service is 8 to11 months. Thus 28 years is arguably selected because it provides two years (until a person reaches 30) within which a reluctant citizen can be forced and thus denial of passport can be applied.

2011]

Ramifications of the Right to Leave in Eritrea

243

complainant appealed against the Embassy’s decision but the appellate court upheld the Embassy’s decision. The complainant then appealed to a higher court which confirmed the previous decisions. Subsequently the complainant filed a communication with the Human Rights Committee. The complainant noted that the administrative and judicial instances seized of his case did not justify the denial of a passport.

In its decision, the complainant contended the last appellate court merely observed that the Embassy had the right not to issue a passport to the complainant because he was subject to conscription and had failed to prove that by getting a passport he was not planning to evade.61 The complainant also contended that the interpretation by the court means that Finnish Embassies around the world have full discretion to deny passports to Finnish citizens until they reach the age of 30. The duration of the denial of a passport is likely to exceed by far the period of “eight to eleven months,” as it did in this case.62

The complainant acknowledged that failure to report for military service is an offence under the Finnish Military Service Act. The complainant did not challenge Finland’s position that a state must have some means at its disposal to secure that conscripts actually perform their military service. He observed, however, that the Finnish authorities could have instituted criminal or disciplinary proceedings against him; failure to do so is said to further underline that the denial of a passport was and continues to be used as a de facto punishment. Thus the complainant submitted that the denial of a passport is a disproportionate punishment in relation to the offence of failure to report for military service and thus amounts to a violation of his right under article 12 of the ICCPR. The complainant argued that Finland cannot use denial of passport as legal means of forcing citizens to carry out the military service which is 8 to 11 months. The contention of the complainant is that the ramification of denial of a passport is too disproportional to the interest that is intended to be served.

Finland further noted that when requesting for a passport, the complainant did not show he was not trying to evade his liability for military service. Finland noted the complainant did not react to his military call-up in 1987,63 and that he has disregarded

61.Citing one document (CCPR/C/SR.1016, ¶ 21), the Committee quotes what Finland submitted to contextualize the complainant’s contention: “there might have been some misunderstanding concerning the question of obligation of military service. A passport could be issued to a person under duty of performing his military service and conscription, but its validity must temporarily expire during the period of military service. There is no de facto possibility for a conscript to leave the country during his military service … which is only ... 8 to 11 months.” See, Peltonen v. Finland, supra note 55, ¶ 2.3.

62.Indeed in the case at hand it is 11 years. A 19 year old can be denied passport for 11 years in so far as the individual did not report to the military service.

63.Born in 1968, Mr Peltonen, the complainant, was only 19 years old in 1987 and he has 11 years within which he can respond to the service. See, Peltonen v. Finland, supra note 55, ¶ 1.

244

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

all subsequent call-ups. Finland further referred to the conduct of the complainant which it seems to show that the complainant was reluctant to start his service. Furthermore, Finland contended, no mention was made in his request for a passport of any significance of the intended travel of the complainant which the complainant seems not to rebut. Finland contended that the restriction is a permissible restriction under article 12(3) of the ICCPR.

In paragraph 8.3, the Committee concluded that pursuant to the requirements of article 12(3), states could “impose reasonable restrictions on the rights of individuals who have not yet performed such [mandatory national] service to leave the country until service is completed.” Thus, national service obligation laws that “reasonably restrict” the right to leave will not be held to violate article 12. At the same time, national service obligation laws that undermine the essence of the right to leave, or exceptions that violate the rule, will be contrary to article 12.

There are scholars who agree and differ from the Committee’s conclusion. Jagerskiold noted that “if there is a mandatory national service requirement, individuals who have not yet served may be prohibited from leaving until service is completed.”64 On the other hand Nowak asserted that “[o]nly in special cases may persons who have not fulfilled their military service be prohibited from leaving the country.”65 Comparing with certain concluding observations66 in which the Committee stated that it “is further regretted that all individuals who have not yet performed their national service are excluded in principle from enjoying their right to leave the country,” Harvey and Barnidge noted contradictions with the Committee’s conclusion.67

Uncontested contention of Finland shows that if the significance of the desired travel is explained and found to be convincing, it seems that a passport can be granted even to a citizen subject to conscription. It also appears that if the desired travel is for visiting family members or health, subsistence, profession and other circumstances of the traveller, passport (permission to leave) can be granted. Assuming that the complainant failed to mention any of such significance of his travel, it is sound to conclude that the Committee was right to find the proportionality equation in favour of limiting the right of the complainant.

64.Jagerskiold, supra note 9, at 178.

65.M. NOWAK, UN COVENANT ON CIVIL AND POLITICAL RIGHTS: CCPR COMMENTARY 212

(1993).

66.Concluding Observations, Russian Federation, ICCPR, A/50/40 vol. I (1995) 65, ¶ 381, <http://www.bayefsky.com/themes/leave_ concluding-observations.php>, (accessed on 19 December 2007).

67.C. Harvey & R.P. Barnidge, Human Rights, Free Movement, and the Right to Leave in International Law, 19 INTL J. REFUGEE L. 1 (2007), at 10, fn 58.

2011]

Ramifications of the Right to Leave in Eritrea

245

III. CURTAILMENT OF THE RIGHTS TO LEAVE AND TO RETURN IN

ERITREA

Eritrea got independence on 24 May 1991 from Ethiopian domination that lasted almost for four decades. The de facto independence achieved in 1991 was consummated to de jure status in 1993 after a referendum in which the Eritrean people overwhelmingly supported Eritrea to be an autonomous state. The Eritrean struggle for independence was led to final victory by the Eritrean People’s Liberation Front (EPLF). Since 24 May 1991, the EPLF took charge of the administration of the whole country and on 22 May 1992 ultimately established by law68 a transitional government called Provisional Government of Eritrea (PGE). On 19 May 1993 the PGE slightly restructured itself by law69 and was renamed “Government of Eritrea” (GoE). The EPLF, renamed as Peoples’ Front for Democracy and Justice (PFDJ) has since 1994 remained the only political party in Eritrea.

As of May 1991, the PGE and later the GoE started to take important decisions and actions that gave rise to hopes for a better future of the country. Imminent of these were that the GoE took the initiative to promulgate a democratic constitution and during the transitional time prepare the country to constitutional governance. After a three year-long process of constitution-making, the Constitution of Eritrea (the Constitution) was adopted on 23 May 1997. The lifespan of the GoE was for a maximum of four years (1993-97); after which a constitutional government should have been established.70 As such, transformation from the transitional setting to the constitutional setting was envisaged to take place immediately after the ratification of the Constitution.71

The Eritrean youth were the main driving forces of the Eritrean independence struggle (1950s to 1991).72 The hope the Independence Day brought also aroused great enthusiasm in the Eritrean youth to serve their country. After independence, thousands

68.See, Proclamation 23/1992: A Proclamation to Provide for the Structures, Powers and Responsibilities of the Provisional Government of Eritrea. In Eritrea, a legislation that in other jurisdictions is commonly referred to as an “Act” is called a Proclamation. What other jurisdictions refer to as a “Regulation” is called a “Legal Notice.” For more on the lawmaking process in Eritrea, see S.M. Weldehaimanot & D.R. Mekonnen, The Nebulous Lawmaking Process in Eritrea, 53J.AFR.L.171(2009).

69.See, Proclamation 37/1993: A Proclamation to Provide for the Structures, Powers and Responsibilities of the Provisional Government of Eritrea. Proclamation 23/1992 was repealed by Proclamation 37/1993 and certain provisions of the latter are amended by Proclamation 52/1994. The three proclamations make the interim constitution of Eritrea.

70.Proclamation 37/1993, art. 3.

71.Id., art. 3(2).

72.For the role of the youth, see D. CONNELL, AGAINST ALL ODDS: A CHRONICLE OF THE

ERITREAN REVOLUTION (1997).

246

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

of Eritrean youth who did not take part in the independence struggle mainly because of their age expressed their readiness to the PGE to contribute to the rehabilitation of the war-shuttered country. In the context of the enormous support the Eritrean youth demonstrated to help rebuild their country, in 1991, the PGE devised a National Service Program through which the youth give mandatory service to the country.73 The National Service Program includes two components: six months of military training and 12 months of service devoted to rehabilitation of the country.74 The National Service Program was designed to take place in rounds, tens of thousands of youth participating in each round. Hitherto 22 rounds have participated and around 350,000 to 400,000 youth are believed to have been enrolled in the past 20 years.

Although the implementation strategies of the National Service Program were not the result of a democratic process, after the Program was declared, it was however highly supported. Many youth volunteered to enroll in the first rounds. At first, the youth who were unemployed or who planned to discharge their duty earlier were the only participants. Students and employed youngsters were not compelled to enroll in the National Service until they finished their studies or made arrangements to enroll at a particular time.75

During the early rounds, there were incidents of young children of less than 14 years and Diaspora Eritrean youth, with high enthusiasm, enrolling to the National Service.76 In the first rounds, although the participants who experienced and witnessed the unconstructive implementation of the Program soon rightly started to question the real but hidden motives of the GoE in launching the National Service,77 the Program

73.Proclamation 11/1991, National Service Proclamation.

74.This was clarified by Proclamation 82/1995.

75.Proclamation 11/1991, art. 5(1). See also, Proclamation 82/1995, art. 14(2).

76.See, Eritrea: Conscientious Objection and Desertion (a documentation by Connection of Germany War Resisters’ International and the Eritrean Anti-Militarism Initiative), at 10.

77.The declared objectives of the National Service include (1) the establishment of a strong defence force based on the people to ensure a free and sovereign Eritrea; (2) to preserve and entrust future generations the courage, resoluteness heroic episode shown by Eritrean people in the past thirty years; (3) to create a new generation characterized by love of work, discipline, ready to participate and serve in the reconstruction of the nation; (4) to develop and enforce the economy of the nation by investing in development work of the Eritrean people as a potential wealth; (5) to develop professional capacity and physical fitness by giving regular military training and continuous practice to participants in training centres, and (6) to foster national unity among the Eritrean people by eliminating sub-national feelings. In the course of implementation, however, the National Service was indeed turned into a means of repression. See the findings of the Asylum and Immigration Tribunal in MA (Draft Evaders – Illegal Departures – Risk) Eritrea CG [2007] UKAIT 00059, ¶ 185 (hereinafter the MA Case). The United Kingdom’s Asylum and Immigration Tribunal is the successor to the Immigration Appellate Authority and the Immigration Appeals Tribunal. The Tribunal was set up under the Asylum and Immigration (Treatment of Claimants etc) Act 2004 and came into being on 4 April 2005. The purpose of the Tribunal

2011]

Ramifications of the Right to Leave in Eritrea

247

was not entirely unpopular until 1998 when Eritrea and Ethiopia went to war due to a border conflict.78 In spite of their reservation on the manner of the implementation of the National Service, thousands of Eritrean youth again presented themselves to the GoE in defence of their country. The war with Ethiopia lasted from May 1998 to June 2000 in destructive rounds. All the time, the Eritrean youth remained committed to the defence of their country until both countries agreed to submit the contentious issue to international arbitration.79 Figures of the UNHCR and refugee hosting countries clearly show that the number of Eritreans seeking asylum started to grow after the war was over.

A. Legal Limitations on the Rights to Leave and to Return of Eritrean Youth

The seeds of the violation of the right to movement of the Eritrean youth, particularly to and from Eritrea were, however, planted within the implementation strategies of the National Service. In 1991, when the National Service was first proclaimed, it was provided that unless authorised by the Secretary of Defence (now Ministry of Defence), or provided certificate of completion or exemption from the National Service, no person between the age of 18 to 40 can travel outside of Eritrea.80 A proclamation enacted in 1995 further reinforced the above restriction. It provided that any person who has the obligation to do the National Service (18 to 50 years old) can only travel outside Eritrea upon (1) producing certificate of exemption or completion of the National Service or

(2) showing registration card for the National Service that shows that the card bearer is registered to enroll to the National Service at a certain round and the bearer deposits

is to hear and decide appeals against decisions made by the Home Office in matters of asylum, immigration and nationality. Reported determinations receive a neutral citation number of the form [2003] UKIAT 00001. They are anonymized and are to be cited by the neutral citation number. Starred determinations (indicated as such with STARRED being the first word in the title of the determination) have a special status. They are to be treated as binding by all Adjudicators and the Tribunal unless inconsistent with authority binding on the Appellate Authorities.

78.ELF-RC, The Public Has Doubts and Reservations on the Aims of the National Service, 13 DEMOKRASIAWIT ERITREA 2-4 (1995); ELF-RC, Interview with an Eritrean Youth, 13 DEMOKRASIAWIT

ERITREA 6-7(1995). Both sources are in Tigrinya, one of Eritrea’s dialects. See also, G. Kibreab, The Eritrean National Service: A Missed Opportunity (paper presented at the founding conference of Citizens for Democratic Rights in Eritrea (CDRiE) held in London, on 11 January 2009), <http://papers.ssrn.com/sol3/papers.cfm?abstract_id=1664873> (accessed on 7 September 2009).

79.The border conflict is settled by law. See the Eritrea/Ethiopia Boundary Commission’s Decision Regarding Delimitation of the Border between the State of Eritrea and the Federal Democratic Republic of Ethiopia (13 April 2002).

80.Proclamation 11/1991 art. 12. Emphasis added.

248

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

60,000 Birr81 to guarantee his or her enrolment.82

The restrictions are supported by the immigration laws of Eritrea. No person is allowed to leave Eritrea except through the exit gates83 that the Secretary (now Department) of Immigration from time to time specifies and proclaims by Legal Notices.84 No person is permitted to exit from Eritrea without holding a valid immigration document (mainly a passport) and a valid exit visa.85 Citizens who ask for exit visa shall provide (1) those who seek to exit for any kind of education, a supporting letter from the concerned body; (2) those for different governmental activities or activities of a private body, a supporting letter from such body; (3) those for employment on contract basis, a supporting letter from the labour office (Ministry of Labour and Human Welfare) and (4) those for medical reasons, a supporting letter from the department of health (Ministry of Health).

Article 25 of the Eritrean Constitution that was ratified on 23 May 1997 provides that citizens shall have the duty to (1) owe allegiance to Eritrea, strive for its development and promote its prosperity; (2) be ready to defend the country; (3) complete one’s duty in national service; (4) advance national unity; (5) respect and defend the Constitution; (6) respect the rights of others; and (7) comply with the requirements of the law. On the other hand, article 19(9) provides that “every citizen shall have the right to leave and return to Eritrea and to be provided with a passport or any other travel document.”

Article 26 of the Constitution provides for almost an identical limitation clause to those in the three treaties discussed in part one of this article. According to article 26 which applies to article 19(9), the fundamental rights and freedoms guaranteed under the Constitution may be limited only in so far as limitation is in the interests of national security, public safety or the economic well-being of the country, health or morals, for the prevention of public disorder or crime or for the protection of the rights and freedoms of others. However, any law providing for the limitation of the fundamental rights and freedoms guaranteed in the Constitution must (a) be consistent with the principles of democracy and justice; (b) be of general application and not negate the essential content of the right or freedom in question and (c) specify the ascertainable

81.Birr is the legal tender of Ethiopia which Eritrea was using until 1997. In 1995, the exchange rate of the Birr against the US Dollar was about 7 to 1.

82.Proclamation 82/1995, art. 17.

83.Legal Notice 4/1992: Travel and Immigration Regulations, provide for the list of entry/exit gates. See, art. 3.

84.Proclamation 24/1992: Proclamation to Regulate the Issuance of Immigration Documents, Entry to and/or Exit from Eritrea and Residence of Aliens in Eritrea, art. 10(1). See also, art. 17(11) of Legal Notice 4/1992.

85.Proclamation 24/1992 art. 11. Emphasis added.

2011]

Ramifications of the Right to Leave in Eritrea

249

extent of such limitation and identify the article or articles hereof on which authority to enact such limitation is claimed to rest.

In addition, under article 27 of the Constitution, at a time when public safety or the security or stability of the state is threatened by war, external invasion, civil disorder or natural disorder or natural disaster, by a resolution passed by a two-thirds majority vote of all its members, the National Assembly of Eritrea can sanction declaration of state of emergency for six months (renewable only for additional three months) which could have the effect of suspending many rights including the rights to leave and to return.

However, the Constitution has never been respected in whatever form or shape and thus the GoE has not applied its relevant parts even to justify in its favour the massive human rights violations it has been perpetrating.86 Thus, the statutes that were promulgated before the Constitution were ratified (1997) and Eritrea acceded to the ACHPR and the ICCPR (1999 and 2002 respectively) have not been revised to be brought in line with the Constitution and the two human rights instruments. The GoE’s non-compliance with the requirements of the rule of law is so flagrant that in Eritrea, there is no even a remote resemblance to the constitutional order. As noted clearly by one Eritrean legal scholar, even during the height of the border war with Ethiopia (1998-2000), Eritrea never cared to declare public emergency to shield the restrictions under the derogation clause of the ICCPR.87 Objectively, there has never been emergency situation that could have justified the restrictions on the right to leave except during the war. As a matter of fact, the restrictions were promulgated as early as in 1991 when the future of the country looked bright.

B. Practical Limitations

Whereas the statutes are severely restrictive, their implementation has been by far prohibitive.88 The authorities that are empowered to give letters of support that allow getting exit visa for the permitted limited grounds are tied by the policy of the GoE that has not been largely in support of many youth to leave Eritrea for whatever reason. In a country where fear of higher authorities as opposed to fear of the law governs, lower officers tend to err on the side of denying than permitting. As a matter of fact, the

86.For more on the fate of the Constitution, see generally S.M. Weldehaimanot, The Status and Fate of the Eritrean Constitution, 8 AFR. HUM. RTS. L. J. 108 (2008).

87.D.R. Mekonnen, A Rejoinder to Sophia Tesfamariam’s Crude Allegations (September 2007), available online at <http://zete9.asmarino.com/ftHiynges.php?itemid=1019>, (accessed 8 January 2008).

88.See the testimonies of Dr Pool in the MA Case, supra note 77, at ¶¶ 83-9.

250

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

entire process of getting a passport and exit visa was complicated by the fluctuation of directives from the Office of the President; from time to time making the requirements more restrictive. As a result many youth could not get exit visas in spite of fulfilling the requirements provided by the relevant statutes.89 The low respect for the rule of law coupled with the GoE’s conception of rights as state privileges makes the provisions of the laws that were unduly restrictive in the first place, very illusory. The yearly reports of the State Department of United States have reflected the situation accurately:90

Men under the age of 50, regardless of whether they had completed national service; women of ages 18 to 27; members of Jehovah’s Witnesses … and others who were out of favour with or seen as critical of the government were routinely denied exit visas. In addition, the government often refused to issue exit visas to adolescents and children as young as 5 years of age, either on the grounds that they were approaching the age of eligibility for national service or because their diasporal parents had not paid the 2 percent income tax required of all citizens residing abroad. Some citizens were given exit visas only after posting bonds of approximately $7,300 (100 thousand nakfa).

C. Lack of Procedural Safeguards

Contrary to the international and domestic legal standards mentioned in part one of this article, the statutes related to immigration provide no judicial means of reviewing a decision refusing to grant a passport or a visa by immigration authorities. Although the ordinary courts can, in theory, review immigration abuses, so far the courts have played no role.91 The judiciary is not only weak and unindependent, but also the case of travel restriction is politically very sensitive as it is linked to the repressive governance that no citizen dares to take it to court. In this regard in his written testimony to the African Commission, Mekonnen laments:

89.Email written by the author on 27 August 2005 to Margaret Arach Orech, the organizer of the Regional Training Programme. The email is attached as evidence 2.1 to the Communication filed, supra note 1.

90.USA DEPARTMENT OF STATE, COUNTRY REPORTS ON HUMAN RIGHTS PRACTICES, 2005: ERITREA (2005).

91.For the general lack of the practice of judicial review of administrative actions in Eritrea, see generally D.R. Mekonnen, The Judicial Review of Administrative Action in Eritrea: The Prevailing Practice (Part I), (2007) (draft article on file with the author).

2011]

Ramifications of the Right to Leave in Eritrea

251

As a court clerk, assistant prosecutor, magistrate and provincial court judge who served in different parts of Eritrea between 1998 and 2001, I am well informed about the Eritrean legal system and judiciary. In terms of human rights protection, the Eritrean judiciary has played no role since the country’s independence in 1991. Practically, the Eritrean judiciary adjudicates mainly on civil and criminal matters involving individual citizens. To my knowledge, no successful case has been brought before any Eritrean court where the government was challenged for violation of human rights.92

D. Human Rights Violations, Travel Restrictions and the Desire to Emigrate

The aftermath of the border conflict between Eritrea and Ethiopia exposed the severe maladministration of the GoE more than any time before. The way the National Service was implemented was one point of focus. The Constitution prepared after popular participation and which remained unimplemented three years after its ratification in spite of popular expectation for speedy implementation was another point of focus. Equally, the little or no progress made by the transitional government to prepare Eritrea for constitutional governance became a subject of scrutiny. The overall undemocratic nature of the transitional government was also exposed to heavy criticism and comprehensive reform was called for.93 Contrary to what the reformers demanded, the GoE declined to implement the Constitution and ignored the other reform proposals. Instead, unprecedented repression of fundamental rights and freedoms have prevailed in Eritrea since then.94

Specifically, the GoE declared a new form of National Service called Warsai- Ykaalo Campaign. The campaign was declared by the President alone and it has no legal backing. To the contrary, the new campaign eroded the minimum compliance with the law the National Service had when it started. Particularly, the campaign condemned the Eritrean youth to indefinite duty under the government in the pretext

92.Written testimony to the African Commission, attached as evidence 3.2 to the Communication filed, supra note 1.

93.For these developments, see generally D. CONNELL, CONVERSATION WITH ERITREAN POLITICAL PRISONERS (2005). See also, Awate Team, The Chronology of the Reform Movement (2 December 2002), <http://www.awate.com/portal/content/view/72/9/> (accessed on 26 January 2011).

94.See e.g., Annual Reports (2000 to 2006) of the USA Department of State, Bureau of Democracy, Human Rights and Labour, on Human Rights Practices of Eritrea. See, A. BARIAGABER, ERITREA: CHALLENGES AND CRISES OF A NEW STATE (a Writenet report commissioned by United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees, Status Determination and Protection Information Section – DIPS, 2006), at 11-2.

252

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

of national development and the alleged threat to national security in the context of unresolved boarder conflict. The severe restriction of the right to leave of Eritrean youth under the pretext of forcing the youth to first discharge their duty to National Service or defending the country, presupposes that the youth would flee the country in order to avoid the two obligations. This supposition is, however, unfounded and directly contradictory to the historical role of the Eritrean youth who, as explained above, have dedicated decades of their life for the liberation of their country at the cost of their lives.

As stated above, the youth were enrolling voluntarily when the program started. Rather, it is the nature of the National Service—a programme which was turned into a mechanism of repression—that caused the youth to flee.95 Campbell, for example, explained that the Warsai-Ykaalo campaign, among others, is “apparently used to control dissent.”96 Some experts of the GoE also clearly differed from the GoE’s policy of keeping the youth for fear of war because the border issue had been legally resolved.97 Indeed, the more time the campaign took the more basic things got expensive and the more the youth get frustrated as they see themselves in a supposedly rehabilitation program with little or no contribution to the country.98

With regard to the right to get a passport and exit visa, the indefinite Warsai- Ykaalo Campaign virtually means thousands of the youth cannot travel out of Eritrea. The relevant statutes mentioned above require completion of the National Service, which is supposed to be 18 months long, as a condition for getting exit visa.99 The

95.In this regard, before the Asylum and Immigration Tribunal, Dr Kibreab has testified: “In Eritrea it is slavery not National Service and it is misnomer to quote National Service. For me it is a violation of the basic human rights principle.” See, MA Case, supra note 77, at ¶ 185. In its recent guidelines, the United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees (UNHCR) has noted that according to “analysis of the claims lodged by Eritreans and information provided by the States concerned, three main trends in the claims can be identified. First, a significant number of Eritrean nationals are fleeing military conscription. Secondly, there are Eritreans fleeing the country on account of religious persecution. The third typology in the asylum claims can be grouped together under the broad category of human rights violations owing to, inter alia, political opinion, freedom of speech/press and association. In addition, potential claims by women with specific profiles and homosexuals are also considered.” See, UNHCR, Eligibility Guidelines for Assessing the International Protection Needs of Asylum-Seekers from Eritrea, (April 2009), <http://www.unhcr.org/refworld/docid/49de06122.html> (accessed on 10 September 2009), at 9-10.

96.Quoted in, Findings of the Asylum and Immigration Tribunal in IN (Draft Evaders—Evidence of Risk) Eritrea CG [2005]UKIAT OO106, ¶ 26 (hereinafter the IN Case). See also, Kibreab, supra note 78.

97.Testimony of Dr Amanuel Gebremedhin, quoted in the MA Case, supra note 77, at ¶ 249.

98.Testimony of Dr Kibreab, quoted in id., at ¶ 150. See also, Dr Gebremedhin’s affidavit as quoted in id., at ¶ 185.

99.Exceptional circumstance can cause the extension of the 18 months period.

2011]

Ramifications of the Right to Leave in Eritrea

253

indefinite Warsai-Ykaalo campaign thus means curtailment of the right to travel to and from Eritrea and to get the necessary documents indefinitely.100

The unhappy retreat of the country from its expected march to constitutional governance, followed by severe violation of rights and freedoms in every walk of life and the exploitation of the youth under the Warsai-Ykaalo Campaign has made the Eritrean youth to consider their own country as open air prison.101 The human rights record of the GoE has been getting worse from time to time. This inevitably forced the youth to flee their country at any cost.102 The GoE invariably responded by denying the youth their right to leave their country by denying them passports and exit visas. The worse the human rights situation of the country gets day by day, the more the number of youth fleeing the country,103 the more the GoE tightens requirements for exit visa and deploys armed forces to guard the borders.104 Eventually, issuing visa and passport became a presidential task that the Office of the President gives to few and denies to others arbitrarily.105 The requirements for getting a passport and exit visa fluctuated from time to time without the slightest regard to the rule of law and the principle of legality.

100.HUMAN RIGHTS WATCH, SERVICE FOR LIFE: STATE REPRESSION AND INDEFINITE CONSCRIPTION IN ERITREA (2009), at 63 & 64.

101.A.M. Dias, War and State Formation: Outcomes of an Interstate War in the Post-cold War Era: Ethiopia and Eritrea 1998-2000 (AEGIS 2nd European Conference on African Studies, African Studies Centre, Leiden, The Netherlands, 11-14 July 2007), at 34. See also, BARIAGABER, supra note 94, at 11-2.

102.Many Young Eritreans Seek Exile at All Costs, SUDAN TRIBUNE, 31 August 2007, attached as evidence 11 to the Communication filed, supra note 1.

103.This is supported, for example, by the number of applications received from Eritrean asylum seekers in the UK (excluding dependants) from 1998 to 2007 which was 345, 565, 505, 620, 1,180, 950, 1,105, 1,760, 2,585 & 1,810 (the last figure is provisional). The nationalities accounting for the highest numbers of applicants were Afghan, Iranian, Chinese, Iraqi and Eritrean. The top ten applicant nationalities in 2007 were Afghan 2,500 (11%), Iranian 2,210 (9%), Chinese 2,100 (9%), Iraqi 1,825 (8%), Eritrean 1,810 (8%), Zimbabwean 1,800 (8%), Somali 1,615 (7%), Pakistani 1,030 (4%), Sri Lankan 990 (4%) and Nigerian 780 (3%). The main nationalities to be granted asylum in 2007 were Eritreans (31%), Somali (23%) and Zimbabwean (7%). See, Home Office, Asylum Statistics: United Kingdom 2007, 11 HOME OFFICE STATISTICAL BULLETIN 1 (2008), at 1, 3, 6 & 29.

104.HUMAN RIGHTS WATCH, WORLD REPORT 2006: ERITREA (2006).

105.Application form for Official Travel Abroad for Government Employees Only (on file with the author). Using this form, governmental institutions request the Office of the President to grant permission for their staff/s to get exit visa for exclusively governmental travel.

254

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

E. Leaving “Illegally:” The Only Option

As a result of these restrictions on the rights to leave and to return to Eritrea and acquire a passport, many youth have been severely affected. Many missed scholarship opportunities and other academic benefits that were offered to them because they could not undertake them as they were denied permission to leave Eritrea.106 In totality, the youth are denied exposure to the outside world and the benefits they could get in this highly globalized world. Many youth, however, could not see such opportunities simply pass. Rather, they have taken a high risk of fleeing Eritrea by crossing to neighbouring countries through complicated trans-boundary human smuggling arrangements.

The National Service requires the youth to be always around the areas where they “serve.” Nevertheless, the rate of “deserters” at any given time is very high. As a result, the GoE has severely curtailed the right to movement of the youth within Eritrea too. One needs a permit to move from one place to another. Main roads are intercepted by roadblock check points where security forces board buses and any other public transport and make sure every person has a permit. Periodic round-ups and house-to-house searches for deserters add-up to further restrict the right to movement. The youth who flee Eritrea, therefore, have to pass many hurdles inside Eritrea to get close to Eritrea’s border with Sudan or Ethiopia. Many of those who manage to reach closer to the borderline often hire guides to help them cross the most critical check points where the border guards patrol.107 The guides, some of them corrupt government officials, are people involved in the human trafficking business at exorbitant charges.

In a similar way, some Eritrean youth also cross to Djibouti, Yemen and Saudi Arabia. The figures of fleeing youth, when compared to the total Eritrean population, are alarmingly high. According to the UNHCR, in 2009 only, there were 43,400 asylum seekers from Eritrea, majority of whom were youth.108 The highest concentration of Eritrean asylum-seekers was in Ethiopia (17,300) and Sudan

106.Out of the 31 students of the Faculty of Law of the University of Asmara (a 98 batch graduated in 2005), for example, 11 are already out of Eritrea for further studies and 5 had to leave Eritrea “illegally” to Sudan while the rest could not be considered to have obtained their visas in accordance with the due process of law.

107.Interview with recently fled Eritrean youth in Khartoum, Sudan, conducted by the author via yahoo messenger chat (on file with the author). See also, Findings of the Asylum and Immigration Tribunal, in AH (Failed Asylum Seekers – Involuntary Returns) Eritrea CG [2006] UKAIT 00078 ¶ 5 (hereinafter the AH Case).

108.UNHCR, STAT. Y.B. 2009 (2010), at 8.

2011]

Ramifications of the Right to Leave in Eritrea

255

(10,200).109 In 2009 the UNHCR had 209,200 Eritreans refugees.110

F.Ramifications of Leaving “Illegally”

1.Risk to Life.—The implications of the denial of the right of Eritrean youth to leave their country and the consequential adventures such youth are taking are indeed many. The way such youth manage to get themselves in neighbouring countries is agonizingly risky.111 Many have successfully fled while some have fallen into the hands of the border security guards and have been incarcerated.112 While crossing the check points, the youth and the guides pass through agonising moments. The risk of getting caught by the patrolling guards who are free to shoot at any one is high. Hence, the suffering of the youth is indeed unbearable.113 In this regard, the United Kingdom’s Asylum and Immigration Tribunal has noted that “it is therefore apparent from the evidence, that the Eritrean Government has indeed taken ‘draconian steps to prevent its citizens leaving illegally.’”114

The number of people so far killed while trying to flee Eritrea or after being apprehended while trying to escape is not precisely known. However, the GoE does not even care to hide the fact that it shoots to kill anyone found at the borderline. In some instances, the GoE brought some apprehended youth nearby towns and shot them in front of the public eye or left them dead to deter others. Diaspora Eritrean websites are full of reports of Eritreans dying at the borderline or in the Mediterranean Sea.115 Human Rights Watch gives a glimpse of the situation.116

2.Harsh Punishment.—The GoE has never followed the due process of the law with regard to prosecuting those caught trying to flee Eritrea. Articles 20 and 37 of Proclamation No 11/1991 and 82/1995 (two immigration related statutes) provide that, without prejudice to graver penalties provided by the Penal Code, whosoever violates the provisions of both proclamations is punishable with 2 years imprisonment

109.Id., at 47.

110.Id., at 23.

111.HUMAN RIGHTS WATCH, supra note 104, at 65 (noting that “leaving Eritrea is not an easy undertaking … heavily patrolled borders, mine-fields, and a shoot-to-kill policy make escape from Eritrea difficult”).

112.See, e.g., Dr Kibreab’s testimony in the MA Case, supra note 77, at ¶ 138. See also, SUDAN TRIBUNE, supra note 102.

113.See, supra note 76, at 10-1 & supra note 102.

114.MA Case, supra note 77, ¶ 353. Emphasis in the original.

115.See, e.g., Eritrea’s Killing Fields, EVENTS MONITOR, 22 September 2007, available online at <http://www.awate.com/portal/content/view/4623/5/> (accessed on 8 September 2009).

116.HUMAN RIGHTS WATCH, supra note 104, at 39-40.

256

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

or 3,000 Birr fine or both. However, both statutes have never been respected nor were the entire criminal justice system used. The status of rule of law in Eritrea is aptly described as “annihilated” by one Eritrean lawyer and human rights activist.117 Alleged offenders are thus punished administratively by local commanders without any form of trial, legal recourse or opportunity for appeal or redress. The forms of punishment consist of torture and arbitrary detention for an indefinite period.118 Several hundreds of these fleeing youth who managed to get into other countries were deported back to Eritrea in the face of incessant appeals by international human rights organizations.119

In 2002, several hundred Eritreans leaving Libya (via Sudan) landed on the island of Malta, mainly as a result of shipwreck or sea rescue, and were detained. In September and October 2002, Malta forcibly deported some 220 Eritreans back to Eritrea, where they were all immediately detained on arrival in Asmara and sent to the nearby Adi Abeto military detention centre. Since then, they have been languishing in prison for years without facing trial and several opposition websites have been indicating that 160 of them were summarily executed by presidential order.120 Between 12 and 19 June 2008, up to 1,200 Eritrean asylum-seekers were forcibly returned from Egypt to Eritrea, majority of whom were transferred to the remote Wia prison and other military facilities, where they are still being held, while some (mainly pregnant women and women with children) were released after weeks in detention.121 Again Human Rights Watch describes treatment in detention camps as inhumane.122

3. Harassment as Undocumented Aliens.—Calculating the risk of being caught, many of the youth who attempt to flee Eritrea leave behind or mail their identity documents to Sudan. A passport has been turned into the most precious document for

117.D.R. Mekonnen, Annihilation of the Rule of Law: Cause for all Pitfalls in Eritrea (articles series in Tigrinya, part 1 to part 6, 2007) <www.awate.come> (accessed on 22 November 2007).

118.See, AMNESTY INTERNATIONAL, “YOU HAVE NO RIGHT TO ASK” – GOVERNMENT RESISTS

SCRUTINY ON HUMAN RIGHTS (19 May 2004), AI Index: AFR 64/003/2004.

119.Human Rights Watch, Eritrean Refugees in Danger of Deportation from Libya: Letter to Mu’ammar al-Gadaffi, 22 July 2004. See also, AMNESTY INTERNATIONAL, MALTA: THE GOVERNMENT SHOULD SUSPEND DEPORTATIONS OF ERITREANS (10 October 2002), AI Index: EUR 33/001/2002 (Public) News Service No. 180.

120.AMNESTY INTERNATIONAL,THE STATE OF THE WORLDS HUMAN RIGHTS:ERITREA (2007). See also, AMNESTY INTERNATIONAL, supra note 118.

121.Amnesty International, Eritrean Asylum-seekers Face Deportation from Egypt (19 December 2008, <http://www.amnesty.org/en/news-and-updates/news/eritrean-asylum-seekers-face- deportation-egypt-20081219> (accessed on 7 September 2009).

122.HUMAN RIGHTS WATCH, supra note 104, at 40.

2011]

Ramifications of the Right to Leave in Eritrea

257

Eritrean youth that they often, if they have it,123 mail it in advance to where they feel is a safe place. Thus when they successfully reach neighbouring countries, such youth are undocumented aliens and they are exposed to corrupt security officers who obtain money by arbitrarily arresting and releasing asylum seekers. The appalling predicament of such youth in Egypt, for example, is well documented:

Eritreans and Ethiopians complain of being hassled, laughed at, and mocked by Egyptians on a day-to-day basis. People are aggressively asked where they are from, why they do not leave Egypt, and told that they are not wanted here. Overt racism is common, such as pejorative calls of “donkey,” “animal,” or “slave.” Common also is sexual harassment against Eritrean and Ethiopian women, who are called “prostitute” and “chocolata.” These women also face physical sexual harassment.124

4. Unable to Return.—The GoE is highly offended by those youth who flee their country in the above mentioned manner.125 To put it in perspective, these fleeing youth are undeniable testimonies of the nature of governance inside Eritrea and their unabated escape, in spite of the enormous risk they encounter, is one of the tangible and expressive dissents the youth managed to show against the GoE.126 These many categories of dissenters are the least tolerated by the GoE. Indeed, when the latter could reach the dissenters it shows no mercy.127 Thus, the GoE has dubbed the fleeing of youth as traitors. In fact, when such youth approach the Eritrean Embassy in the Sudan for a passport or other documents, they are asked to make self-incriminating statements in writing.128 This is a notorious fact that even the Immigration Appeal Tribunal in the United Kingdom has observed that the “issue of military service has become politicized

123.In the past five years, requirements for getting a passport have been restrictive. The Eritrean passport serves for five years (renewable). This implies that even those youth who secured passports when the restrictions were not severe could only have expired passports.

124.N.R. Brown, S. Riordan & M. Sharpe, The Insecurity of Eritreans and Ethiopians in Cairo, 16 INT’L J. REFUGEE L. 661 (2004), at 680.

125.In NM (Eritrea) [2005] UKIAT 00073, it has been rightly stated that “the situation is not normal in Eritrea so far as the Government’s attitude towards military service is concerned. Being perceived as a draft evader does carry political connotations in the eyes of the authorities to the extent that the appellant would be at risk of serious harm for a convention reason: her perceived opposition to the government.”

126.Submissions of Mr M. Jackson, Counsel for the applicant in AH Case, supra note 107, at

20.

127.Brown, Riordan & Sharpe, supra note 124, at 677.

128.Interview with some youth in Sudan (on file with the author).

258

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

and actual or perceived evasion of military service is regarded by the Eritrean authorities as an expression of political opinion.”129 The same tribunal eventually concluded:

A person who is reasonably likely to have left Eritrea illegally will in general be at real risk on return if he or she is of draft age, even if the evidence shows that he or she has completed Active National Service … By leaving illegally while still subject to National Service, (which liability in general continues until the person ceases to be of draft age), that person is reasonably likely to be regarded by the authorities of Eritrea as a deserter and subjected to punishment which is persecutory and amounts to serious harm and ill-treatment.130

In Said v. The Netherlands,131 the European Court of Human Rights considered that substantial grounds had been shown for believing that, if expelled at the present time, the applicant, who is a typical representative of the fleeing youth, would be exposed to a real risk of being subjected to torture or to inhuman or degrading treatment or punishment. Accordingly, the Court found that the expulsion of the applicant to Eritrea would be in violation of Article 3 of the European Convention on Human Rights. The risk at stake when such youth get deported is also clearly indicated by the public outcry recently echoed in opposition to perceived act of deportation of around 1,200 Eritreans from Egypt.132

Since 2007, thousands of Eritreans and others have signed a petition opposing deportation of the said youth from Libya.133 In 2002, Amnesty International concluded

129.MA Case, supra note 77, ¶ 227 & IN Case, supra note 96, ¶ 44(v).

130.MA Case, supra note 77, ¶ 1. The UNHCR also agreed: “UNHCR considers that most Eritreans fleeing their country should be considered as refugees according to the criteria contained in the 1951 Convention relating to the Status of Refugees (1951 Convention) and its 1967 Protocol, and/or the 1969 Convention governing the Specific Aspects of Refugee Problems in Africa (OAU Convention), particularly on the grounds of ‘political opinion’ (both real and imputed) and ‘religion.’ In this respect, the groups considered to have a presumption of eligibility include, but are not limited to, draft evaders/deserters, political opponents or dissidents (real or perceived), journalists and other media professionals, trade unionists and labour rights activists, members of religious minorities, women with particular profiles and homosexuals.” See, UNHCR supra note 95, at 10.

131.ECHR Application No. 2345/02, Chamber Judgment, ¶ 46.

132.UN News Centre, UN Human Rights Chief Urges Egypt to Stop Deporting Eritrean Asylum-seekers (19 June 2008).

133.Petition against forced deportation of Eritreans from Libya. The petition to the United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees was created and written by BH Selassie and had a feature that enabled many Eritreans to sign it. The petition is available at <www.PetitionOnline.com> as a public

2011]

Ramifications of the Right to Leave in Eritrea

259

that “Eritrea cannot be regarded as a ‘safe’ country with regard to national service deserters who would be at risk of serious human rights violations including arbitrary detention, torture or ill-treatment, extrajudicial execution or the death penalty, if returned to Eritrea.”134 The risk of deporting or repatriating such youth is rightly highlighted by other institutions and researchers.135

For these reasons, those who successfully escaped from Eritrea, despite the deplorable life they live in neighbouring countries and despite their willingness to return to their country, they do not feel safe to do so.136 Many students who have finished their studies and who would like to return to their country and serve their communities do not feel safe to do so.137 For the same reasons (severe repression of human rights) it has been noted that the older generation of Eritrean refugees in Sudan and Ethiopia in particular are not keen to return to Eritrea.138

5. Punishing Parents.—The families of such fleeing youth are frequently punished too—again without any legal or judicial reference.139 Fathers or mothers or other relatives have been unlawfully detained in secret for short or long periods without charge or trial on account of their sons or daughters who fled the country. Sometimes they are being held as virtual hostages to try to force the wanted person(s) to surrender or asked to pay a sum of money extremely exorbitant to their income standards.140 The intention of the GoE, as bluntly explained and admitted by many high level officials several times, is to stop the youth from fleeing the country for fear of harassment of their parents.

document. More than 2,000 people have signed it. See also, Letter of appeal by Dr B.H. Selassie, Distinguished Professor of African Studies, and Professor of Law at the University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill, to Mr Antonio Guterres, Commissioner, United Nations High Commission for Refugees, dated 16 July 2007.

134.Amnesty International, Malta: Open Letter to the Government of Malta, (27 September 2002) AI Index: EUR 33/002/2002.

135.Brown, Riordan & Sharpe, supra note 124, at 699; and UNHCR, Position on Return of Rejected Asylum Seekers to Eritrea (January 2004), <http://www.unhcr.se/Pdf/Position_countryinfo_ papers_06/eritrea04.pdf> (accessed 7 September 2009).

136.Expert testimony of Dr June Rock in AH Case, supra note 107, ¶¶ 8-9 & 11-4.

137.D.R. Mekonnen & S.B. Abraha, The Plight of Eritrean Students in South Africa, <http://emdhr.civiblog.org/blog/_archives/2004/4/2/1020940.html> (accessed on 4 June 2007).

138.BARIAGABER, supra note 94, at 5. For more on the return and reintegration of the old generation refugees, see generally J. Bascom, The Long, “Last Step” Reintegration of Repatriates in Eritrea, 18 J. REFUGEE STUD. 165 (2005).

139.AMNESTY INTERNATIONAL, ERITREA: OVER 500 PARENTS OF CONSCRIPTS ARRESTED

(2006), AI Index: AFR 64/015/2006 (Public). See also, AMNESTY INTERNATIONAL, supra note 118.

140.MA Case, supra note 77, ¶ 388.

260

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

In summary, the Asylum and Immigration Tribunal has aptly described the whole chain of the violation of the right to leave and to return in the following paragraph:

The evidence of a “shoot to kill” policy in respect of deserters, the imprisoning of parents and the process known as “the giffa,”141 together with the more general objective evidence regarding the oppressive nature of the Eritrean regime, confirms that any such punishment is likely to be both extra-judicial and of such a severity as to amount to persecution, serious harm and ill-treatment.142

IV. CONCLUSION

The rights to leave and to return of Eritrean youth to their country have been rampantly violated together with the overall repression of human rights in Eritrea. The rights have been treated as mere “state privileges” as was the case with the former USSR and its satellites143and China.144 The curtailment of the two rights in the pretext of forcing Eritrean youth to perform their duty to the National Service is different from Lauri Peltonen v. Finland in terms of the restriction being unnecessary having regard to the history of the Eritrean youth; unlimited in terms of time; unlimited in terms of the aims which have been alleged to serve (often used as a means to control the Eritrean youth); and the destruction of the rule of law and the emasculation of the Eritrean judiciary that has offered no protection. The Eritrean case is also different in terms of the draconian steps the GoE took to close the country’s borders, harsh punishment imposed on apprehended “offenders” and collateral denial of the right to return for those who successfully escaped but wish to return. Punishing parents for the “sin” of their adult sons and daughters without establishing criminal complicity is unjustified in any sense.

However, besieged by the repression in Eritrea, tens of thousands of youth have managed to flee Eritrea. Ironic as it may seem, the restrictions on the right to emigrate have given rise to new generation of refugees. Those who managed to leak through the tight border control of the GoE cannot return to their country for well founded fear of persecution or ill treatment. As a result, there are thousands of Eritrean youth refugees

141.In Tigrinya (one of the dialects in Eritrea), this is the frequent periodic and indiscriminate searches for and round ups of “draft evaders.”

142.MA Case, supra note 77, ¶ 445.

143.Barist et al, supra note 2, at 429-41. See also, N. Rubins, The Demise and Resurrection of the Propiska: Freedom of Movement in the Russian Federation, 34 HARV INTL L. J. 545 (1998).

144.LIU, supra note 6, at 159-225.

2011]

Ramifications of the Right to Leave in Eritrea

261

in Sudan and Ethiopia.

This article recommends that the GoE swiftly and unconditionally return its focus towards democratization and respecting human rights. Only drastic improvement in the human rights situation and democratization of Eritrea can solve the prevalent exodus of the Eritrean youth. Such improvement can solve the mass emigration in two ways. One, it can remove the main expelling element; thus remedy the problem from its roots. And second, such improvement can avoid the camouflage the Eritrean youth who migrate for economic reasons, albeit very few, have been getting. In the meantime this article recommends to the international community to lend assistance to such Eritrean youth. Documenting the severe violations the youth are facing is also an important engagement Eritreans and the international community should give attention.

262

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

POLITICIZATION OF LAND LAW AND GENDER RELATIONS IN UGANDA: A CASE STUDY

Godard Busingye*

ABSTRACT

This article explores the impact of custom on the right of women to effectively participate in land decision-making processes in Uganda based on a case study of Ibanda Town Council (ITC). It makes an analysis of issues of access, ownership, control and usability of land by both women and men in order to come up with a clear understanding of how each of them is related to custom, which have been politicized. It can thus be asserted that if these issues had not been politicized, their impact on women would have been different. In order to arrive at such a conclusion, this article gives a historical perspective of land law and gender relations in ITC. The history of land law and gender relations in ITC can best be understood by examining the broader history of Ankole Kingdom, in which ITC lies because not much has been written about its history. On the other hand, a lot is known about Ankole Kingdom in broader terms. In order to capture the broader issues of the land question in Ankole Kingdom, however, the article adopts a broader perspective on law and gender relations in Uganda.

I. INTRODUCTION

Issues of access, ownership, usability and control of land by women in Uganda, which traditionally were determined by making reference to customary norms of each group of people, were politicized at the time the country became a British colony in 1900 by virtue of signing the Buganda agreement. Ibanda Town Council, which was part of Ankole Kingdom did not become part of the British territory until 1901 when the Ankole agreement was signed.

The politicization of land in the country came up as a result of requiring that land which was a subject of customary land tenure before the advent of colonial rule in the country be subjected to statutory law and be administered in accordance with the whims and wishes of the colonial political administrators. Colonial administration in Uganda was entrenched through a number of agreements between the representatives of the Monarch of England and Ugandans, who were not, at that time literate or even aware of the potential value of the land they superintended over before the signing of

* LL.D Candidate, Makerere University; Advocate of Courts of Judicature of Uganda. E-mail: <godardbusingye@yahoo.com>.

2011]

Politicization of Land Law & Gender Relations in Uganda

263

the colonial agreements. The salient, and probably the most essential features of all the colonial agreements referred to was the appropriation of land, making it subject to the Registration of land titles and divesting the customary owners of their rights they hitherto enjoyed over such land. Women in Uganda were adversely affected by the registration and politicization of land under both the colonial administration and even during the post colonial period.

At the time of writing this article, many Ugandans were grappling with how to redress the historical imbalances created by colonial history in the law and gender relations sector. Women in particular had not yet attained the yearned-for gender equality in respect to access, ownership, usability and control of land in Uganda. That was the case in spite of constitutional and legal reforms ushered in the country by the 1995 Constitution, which in respect to gender equity principles; takes up a lot from the United Nations Women Conference that was held in Beijing in 1995 and the Declaration that ensued from the Conference proceedings. In a nutshell, the Beijing Declaration advocated for the involvement of women in decision-making processes, concerning all aspects of their lives. That point of advocacy was based on the understanding that women’s rights are human rights, and therefore, they should enjoy all aspects of their lives without discrimination based on any grounds including sex and gender. By advocating for equal enjoyment of human rights by women and men, the Beijing Conference was restating the position taken earlier by the United Nations which adopted the Universal Declaration of Human Rights in 1948, a document that would be a point of reference for future initiatives by governments to address issues of gender imbalances in their jurisdictions.

In the case of Uganda, and for purposes of this study, specific attention was paid to aspects of land law and gender relations, which as asserted were politicized and rendered problematic to women and the enjoyment of their rights of access, ownership, usability and control of land. It was understood that land in Uganda forms the basis for livelihoods of the majority of Ugandans, and that most women are engaged in livelihood activities related directly to harnessing of the land resource. In order to come up with a clear understanding of the imbalanced relationship between land law and gender relations in Uganda, a case study method based on Ibanda Town Council (ITC) was adopted for this study.

II. THE POLITICS OF ACCESS, OWNERSHIP, CONTROL AND USABILITY OF LAND IN IBANDA TOWN COUNCIL

In this article, issues of access, ownership, control and usability of land in ITC are informed by the feminist perspective. This perspective, as internalized and expounded

264

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

upon by Freeman, would be understood as:

... a range of committed inquiry and activity dedicated first, to describing women’s subordination—exploring its nature and extent; dedicated second, to asking both how—through what mechanisms, and why—for what complex and interwoven reasons—women continue to occupy that position; and dedicated third to change’… Feminism inquires into the politics of law, but its particular focus is on the [role of law] in perpetuating patriarchal hegemony.1

The feminist perspective is imperative in analyzing the concept of patriarchy, which is informed by custom among other aspects such as colonial history that can be discerned from imported English law into the juridical norms of Uganda. In its politicized form, patriarchy is upheld in social settings where men are the organizers of society. An understanding of the patriarchal hegemony would then be important in articulating the impact of patriarchy on women’s right of access, ownership, control and usability of land in ITC and also in other parts of Uganda.

Available literature indicates that customary law was the norm in the pre- colonial Uganda and as such in ITC.2 Before colonialism, there were a few variations in the overall principle of access to land rights; these were based on occupancy acquired through lineage and inheritance.3 The occupancy of land during the pre-colonial Uganda was based on land tenurial systems that were largely informed by customary political settings.4

The land tenurial systems in the pre-colonial Uganda could be conveniently divided into two categories. The first was where the ownership of communal or tribal land occupied by a community or tribe was vested in the paramount leader of the community or tribe, who would be a man, as the owner, the latter holding it in trust for the people under his dominion. The second category was where ownership of clan or

1.M.D.A FREEMAN, LLOYDS INTRODUCTION TO JURISPRUDENCE 1028 (1994). Freeman cited the views of other feminist proponents such as Clare Dalton and H. Wishik. See, e.g, C. Dalton, Where We Stand: Observations on the Situation of Feminist Legal Thought, 3 BERKELEY WOMEN'S L. J. 1 (1987- 1988) (delineating historical stages of feminist theory).

2.See, S.R KARUGIRE, A HISTORY OF THE KINGDOM OF NKORE IN WESTERN UGANDA TO 1896 (1971). See also, E.ISTEINHART,CONFLICT AND COLLABORATION:THE KINGDOMS OF WESTERN UGANDA

(1977).

3.J.M.B. TUKAHIRWA, POLICIES, PEOPLE AND LAND USE CHANGE IN UGANDA: A CASE STUDY

OF NTUNGAMO, LAKE MBURO AND SANGO BAY SITES (2002).

4. Interview with James Kahigiriza on the 16 July, 2007 at Kyamugorani, Kakiika, Mbarara. Kahigiriza, was the Enganzi (Prime Minister) of Ankole Kingdom from 1963 to 1967.

2011]

Politicization of Land Law & Gender Relations in Uganda

265

family land was vested in the clan or family, the latter holding it in trust for the whole clan or family. The clan and family institutions were crafted under the male figurehead.5 Relics of clan or communal land holding systems in Uganda can be traced in the northern region of the country, where the traditional leaders such as the Rwot in Acholi region still has a say on how land could be accessed, owned, used or controlled. That type of land tenurial system would not accommodate individual appropriation of interest in such land. Community or tribal interests took precedence over individual interests in any piece of land. Such clan or community interests could then be interpreted as male interests basing on the fact that the society of ITC was crafted on a politicized male figurehead, the Omugabe.

From the observation made, the relics of such tenurial systems in ITC could be identified in areas of communal interests in land such as water sources, clay and sand extraction points and in some cases hilly areas still reserved as communal agricultural and grazing land. In a few cases, road reserves were used as communal grazing land for domestic animals such as cows, goats and sheep. Some families still preserved family burial grounds for the burial of all their dead family members. However, to date, there are few families that keep communal burial parcels of land. Individual households have their own burial grounds. According to Godfrey Mwitani,6 in ITC, Kibubura’s burial grounds (ekituuro kya Kibubura),7 could probably be the equivalent of clan land because some family members in Kibubura’s lineage, since she did not beget a child of her own, wherever they live bring their dead to be buried at the same place. Ekituuro kya Kibubura is also regarded as communal land because most people in ITC regard it as their cultural heritage property and respect it as such. The graveyard is cared for by a male heir to Kibubura, much as the latter did not have any children. However, the initial area demarcated as Kibubura’s burial grounds have been encroached upon by developers and no deliberate attempts have been put in place to maintain the place. It is asserted that if Kibubura had a son or a child at all, her estate would have been protected by that child and could not have been encroached upon as if it had no owner.

According to Mwitani, another communally revered piece of land in ITC was that upon which is located amabare ga Galt (Galt’s memorial heap of stones) at

5.F.I. Kindi, Challenges and Opportunities for Women’s Land rights in Post-Conflict Northern Uganda (MICROCON Research Working Paper 26, 2010). Retrieved from <http://www.microconflict.eu/publications/RWP26_KFI.pdf>, (accessed July 13, 2010).

6.Interview with Godfrey Mwitani, a retired Clerical Officer in his early sixties and son to the late Yairo Mujonjo, who was the Treasurer for the late Kibubura; Mwitani occupies part of Kibubura’s mailo land, just a few metres from the spot where Kibubura was buried.

7.Kibubura was a Gomborora (subcounty) Chief of Ibanda at the time colonial administration was extended to the place.

266

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

Kamukuri on Ibanda-Kagongo road. Much as it was not a communal burial ground, it was a site of communal importance to all the people in the area because it was the place where the British colonial administrator, Galt was speared to death in 1905. The heap of stones on the former Rest House in which Galt was killed resurrects colonial cruelty memories which are handed down from generation to generation in the area. Such memories included the torture and humiliation men in ITC suffered under the hands of colonial administrators of Ankole while collecting stones and heaping them on the house in which the muzungu8 was killed.

From the study, it can be noted that under the customs of the people in ITC, women would not be regarded as able bodied persons when activities considered as hard tasks such as collecting of heavy stones in the case mentioned would have to be undertaken. They would also not be expected to participate in discussions relating to access to land, its ownership, use and control. That is why for instance, when Kibubura died, her land was taken care of by a man. This indicates how customary norms of the people of ITC placed women in a subordinate position compared to men in respect to land matters.

It can further be noted that the subordinate position women in ITC found themselves in followed them to the grave as illustrated in the case of Kibubura whose former male attendants and relatives shared her property and neglected to maintain her grave yard. In the kinyankore custom,9 when a woman died while a spinster or had no children, her death would mark the end of her legacy, since there would be no customary heir to her estate as is the case in the kiganda culture, where each person, irrespective of gender considerations, would have an heir.10 It can be observed that because Kibubura did not have an heir, her prominence would fade in the memories of the people of ITC after her death and that her grave yard would become of less significance to individual developers who would encroach on it. In fact what keeps Kibubura’s name in the minds of the people of ITC is Kibubura Girls’ Secondary School which was named after her in commemoration of her great contribution towards upholding the values of gender equality in the area.11

It can thus be concluded that the kinyankore custom, which is the same custom for most people of ITC, women would not be permitted to own land in their sole capacities. They would access, own, control and use land via male members of their

8.This term is literally used to refer to a white person possibly from the western world.

9.This is a custom practiced by the Banyankore, one of the ethnic tribes of western Uganda.

10.This is a custom practiced by the biggest ethnic tribe in Central Uganda known as the

Baganda.

11. Interview with Naume Bishaka, a retired Chairperson of Mothers Union in Ankole at her home, Bubare Ward, ITC on 26 July 2008.

2011]

Politicization of Land Law & Gender Relations in Uganda

267

society. In that regard, custom impacted negatively on the right of women to effectively participate in land decision-making processes in Ibanda Town Council.

In respect to the land law, the colonial administration in Uganda subjected the people of ITC to the same laws and regulations as were generally in force throughout Ankole Kingdom law.12 The Ankole agreement made fundamental changes in the land tenurial systems in ITC. Prior to 1901, land in ITC was held under customary tenure systems and documentary evidence of occupancy to land was unknown.13 The 1901 Ankole agreement formed the core of the land tenurial systems that hitherto did not exist in ITC, namely mailo, freehold and leasehold. The land tenurial systems introduced in ITC disadvantaged women who were not allocated any land at the time of land redistribution under the colonial administration. Under the Ankole agreement, the omugabe and his notables (chiefs) who were all men were the only persons allocated mailo land in the kingdom.

Under the traditional communal tenure system that existed in ITC before the introduction of colonial land law, each household was entitled to claim use rights to any piece of land he or she would find available and not in use by others at that particular moment in time. According to Kigula, such a requirement provided some limited degree of gender equality.14 The introduction of the colonial land law further politicized land and gender relations which resulted into limited, and consequently diminished the right of access, ownership, control and usability of land by women in ITC. This was largely as a result of the introduction of the requirement of registering the hitherto customary interest in land by those persons who would be in position to do so—the majority of whom would be men. Men were already favoured by the patriarchal and patrilineal nature of the society they lived in, since under that system they would be the ones to inherit family customary land. As such, they were able to register that same land in their personal capacities because the law did not require a person applying to bring land under the Registration of Titles Act to co-register it with their spouses or other users of the same parcel of land. This played to the disadvantage of women in ITC because it divested them of the interests they hitherto held in customary land and vested it entirely on men.

12.Ankole agreement, 1901, art. 7.

13.Interview with Patrick Nathan Kirindi, a retired Lay Magistrate, on 30 December, 2006 at Omukatongole, Kikyenkye, Ibanda district and Michael Kibeiherere in ITC on 28 & 29 July, 2008.

14.J. Kigula, Land Disputes in Uganda: An Overview of the Types of Land Disputes and Dispute Settlement for Access to Land and Other Natural Resources in Uganda (Makerere Institute of Social Research and the Land Tenure Centre, Wisconsin-Madison University, 1996).

268

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

III. BROADER ASPECTS OF LAND LAW AND GENDER RELATIONS IN

IBANDA TOWN COUNCIL

An exploratory review of a number of studies on African gender relations and decision- making processes indicate that women’s plight and gender discrimination, particularly during the colonial and post-colonial periods were deliberately neglected, ignored, misconceived and distorted by scholars and politicians.15 Gender inequality and biases against women particularly under customary systems, rendered land inaccessible to women in terms of ownership, control and usability due to the terms set for them by the politicized male dominated society. This situation was not only unique to Uganda, but also to the neighbouring United Republic of Tanzania where the ground was not levelled in terms of law and gender relations. For example, according to the findings of a study conducted by the Government of the United Republic of Tanzania, all major decisions on land were made by men or an assembly of men due to the traditional male domination and female subservience.16 It therefore becomes apparent that underpinning the problem of gender discrimination, women’s marginalization and exclusion were the complex economic, social, cultural and political issues perpetuated through social institutions including the family, community, custom, religion, and the market and state ideologies.

Mamdani for instance, stated that the system referred to in Common Law Africa as ‘Customary Law’ was in fact a collection of rules, norms and institutions of dubious province, including judge-made law, mutations of inherited colonial practice, and indigenous values and practice of various African communities refined through decades, possibly centuries, of inter-migration and interaction with one another.17 This observation becomes equally apparent that issues of women subordination as a consequence of land law and gender relations in ITC were compounded by the introduction of an alien British legal system which when critically analyzed, was an amalgam of the complex concepts espoused by Mamdani. Mamdani’s position and the findings of the study conducted by the government of the United Republic of Tanzania indicate that a number of factors, including mutations of the law, male biases and domination, female subservience and customary systems had an influence on the land

15. See, INTRODUCTION: PERSPECTIVE OF GENDER IN AFRICA (A. Cornwall ed., 2005); BARGAINING WITH PATRIARCHY (D. Kandiyoti ed., 1997); GENDER, POWER AND CONTESTATIONS: ‘RETHINKING BARGAINING WITH PATRIARCHY (D. Kandiyoti ed., 1998); and C. OBBO, AFRICAN WOMEN:

THEIR STRUGGLE FOR ECONOMIC INDEPENDENCE (1980).

16.UNITED REPUBLIC OF TANZANIA, REPORT OF THE PRESIDENTIAL COMMISSION OF INQUIRY INTO LAND MATTERS 124 (1994).

17.M.MAMDANI,CITIZENS AND SUBJECTS:CONTEMPORARY AFRICA AND THE LEGACY OF LATE COLONIALISM (1996).

2011]

Politicization of Land Law & Gender Relations in Uganda

269

law and gender relations in Africa and thus prevented women from equally participating in land decision-making processes as men.

In Ibanda Town Council, clan leaders, who were hierarchically below the omugabe played a big role in the adjudication of land disputes. Land disputes were, however, rare in ITC, which was occupied by two groups of people; abahima (cattle keepers), and abairu (peasants). The abairu’s main economic activity was crop farming while for the abahima it was livestock keeping. The abahima lived a nomadic lifestyle, in search of water and pasture for their animals, while the abairu practiced shifting cultivation. None of those groups required permanent places of settlement and rarely did they engage in land wrangles.

In general terms, land in ITC during the pre-colonial period was largely viewed as a symbol of social empowerment in the case of the omugabe (king) and an aspect of production and reproduction for his subjects—the abahima and abairu equally. However, the situation changed during the colonial period. Land disputes which were rare in the pre-colonial ITC increased due to the privatization and conceptualization of land as a commodity during the colonial period. In the same vein, gender relations which were conditioned by the land law too were to change in a manner that would disadvantage women, who would have to seek for permission from their male counterparts—the registered owners of land before accessing or utilizing it. Much as there was an ideological shift in the land law and gender relations between the pre- colonial and colonial periods, there was no corresponding paradigm shift in the land law and gender relations between the colonial and the post-colonial periods in ITC. Indeed, the female-male gendered relations during the early post-colonial period were a continuation of the problematic patriarchal female-male gendered relations started during the pre-colonial period and reinforced by instruments of colonialism such as religion and education. In support of that position, Matembe while discussing the provisions of the 1967 Constitution of the Republic of Uganda in respect to gender relations, stated that:…one could have thought that this was a mere oversight, but in fact Article 20, Clause 4 of the 1967 Constitution, expressly allowed the enactment of laws that were discriminatory in relation to family matters.18 Article 20 Clause 1 of that Constitution provided that:

Clause (1) of this Article shall not apply to any law so far as that law makes provision…(d) with respect to adoption, marriage, divorce, burial, devolution of property on death or other matters of personal law; (e) for the imposition of restrictions on the acquisition or use by

18. M. MATEMBE, GENDER, POLITICS, AND CONSTITUTION MAKING IN UGANDA 125 (2002).

270

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

any person of land or other property in Uganda.

According to Matembe’s discussion, it can rightly be asserted that the above constitutional provisions of the 1967 Constitution expressly allowed enactment of discriminatory laws in respect to among others access, ownership, control and usability of land in any part in Uganda. It can be observed that the continuum of unbalanced gender relations led to the maintenance of women in ITC in a subordinate and marginalized position in respect to the rights of access, ownership, control and usability of land. In support of that view, Kahigiriza stated that:

it is not a debatable issue that in Ankole women are subordinate to men; women derive their social prestige from their husbands. Even when Uganda was colonized, the British had no means of changing that situation. Women did not own land before colonialism, and could not own land after the British had colonized Uganda. The British, however, made it rather difficult for women to access land when they introduced a system of titling interests in land. Before Uganda was colonized, even men in general terms did not own land, land was for every person. A few notables such as the omugabe and his chiefs superintended over land for the benefit of all their subjects, who in turn paid tribute to them, these were not owners of land. I think the British gave land to men under the colonial agreements so that those men could be their allies in fighting wars. It was not because land had any special value to men by then, but the exercise of land redistribution turned out to limit women’s rights of access to the same land later.19

Kahigiriza’s narration indicates that the British colonial masters in Uganda having been informed by custom entrenched and augmented the position of men that was supported by the patriarchal and patrilineal nature and already problematic to women in respect to rights of access, ownership, control and usability of land. This was done by introducing land titling, which to date has remained problematic and disadvantageous to women because it was never intended to benefit them.

Women marginalization in ITC, like in any other parts of the Protectorate was a function of both Custom and colonial history.20 In political terms, ITC became a British colony in 1901 by virtue of the Ankole agreement of 1901. At its advent,

19.Interview with Kahigiriza, supra note 4.

20.KARUGIRE, supra note 2; Matembe, supra note 18.

2011]

Politicization of Land Law & Gender Relations in Uganda

271

colonialism improved some men’s gendered positions in ITC by according them more privileges than women in political, judicial, economic and social domains. For instance, the Ankole agreement awarded registered interest in land to men but none to women. Under the agreement, the omugabe and most of his notable subjects, who were largely men, acquired registered interests in land in addition to political and judicial offices.21 For example, Abdula Aziz, then Gomborora Chief of Ibanda at the time the British colonial administrator of Ibanda, Bwana Galt was assassinated in 1905 wielded both political and judicial powers. Abdula Aziz executed those powers ruthlessly against the natives of Ibanda while investigating the murder of Bwana.22

The subordinate and marginalized position of women in ITC was strengthened through the active silencing of women’s voices by the patriarchal structures constructed by custom and maintained throughout the colonial and post-colonial history in Uganda by statutory law. Kirindi stated in an interview that:

“a munyankore woman had limited rights in respect to decisions concerning access, ownership, control and usability of land. A woman’s rights in that respect depended on her relationship with a man. When she behaved well, she enjoyed all those rights. When she asked for independent rights in land, she created problems for herself and even her parents. Asking for such rights would be interpreted by her husband and the whole family as an insult and a woman who dared a man in that respect would be brought before the family ‘court’ and would be adjudged an undisciplined wife. She would then be ordered to publicly apologize to her husband and the whole family, and pay a fine. The fine would be paid by her parents; if she refused, the sentence was automatic; she would be divorced by her husband’s family. Such a woman would face further penalties at her parents’ home. In fact very few women, if any, would dare men by demanding for rights in land. A munyankore woman would be instructed by her ishenkazi (father’s sister) before her marriage not to bring shame to her parents by crossing the line that separated men from women; it was a red line and every munyankore knew it. Women were married into the family not only by their husbands alone. The husband’s whole family observed their behaviour and determined whether they were good wives or not.”23

21.Ankole Agreement, 1901, arts 5, 6 &7.

22.K.K. NGANWA, ABAKOZIRE EBYOKUTANGAZA OMURI ANKOLE (1948).

23.See supra note 13.

272

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

It was not until the promulgation of the 1995 Constitution of Uganda and later the Land Act of 199824 that women, just like during the pre-colonial period, were allowed to own land by custom. Prior to the 1995 Constitution, women were not facilitated by statutory law to acquire registered interest in land. That position had been entrenched by the provisions of Article 20 of the 1967 Constitution, which permitted the enactment of laws that discriminated against women. In ITC and other parts of the country, land was increasingly acquired by men for commercial and speculative purposes under the land tenurial systems introduced by the colonial regime and strengthened by the post- colonial State, namely mailo, freehold and leasehold. Consequently, women’s rights of access, ownership, control and usability of land in ITC were increasingly becoming problematic and disadvantageous day by day. It was stated that:

land registration in ITC was a fairly new venture; however, men were registering land in unprecedented manner and very few women had come up to register their interest in land. That move was due to the rapid urbanization that was taking place in ITC. Some people, particularly men, would register land and eventually sell it when prices for land in particular areas of the Town Council went up. There was no specific law that prevented men from registering land in their sole capacities, what was in place under the Land Act was a requirement for obtaining consent of spouses, but that was not specifically enforced.25

Dr. Gamurorwa’s narration about land registration in ITC was a continuation of the legacy of patriarchy that was rarely interrogated when women’s rights were at stake. Colonial land tenurial systems were let to operate alongside existing systems of customary law.26 During the colonial era, the British administration introduced land titling in Uganda, under which system men were recognized as the heads of households. In Ankole, land titling was followed closely by land redistribution programme based on the 1901 agreement, only men were allocated land much as it was a fact that women needed land to continue their lifestyles started long before colonization.

The disadvantageous and problematic position of women in respect to enjoyment of rights of access, ownership, control and usability of land and in general

24.Cap. 227.

25.Interview with Dr. Gamurorwa, the Chairperson of Ibanda District Land Board at Ibanda District Headquarters on 28 July, 2008.

26.G. Gopal, Gender-Related Legal Reform and Access to Economic Resources in Eastern Africa (World Bank Discussion Paper No. 405, 1998); P. MCAUSLAN, LEGAL PLURALISM AS A POLICY

OPTION: IS IT DESIRABLE? IS IT DOABLE? (2006).

2011]

Politicization of Land Law & Gender Relations in Uganda

273

terms was also affected by other instruments of the colonial legacy including education, religion in addition to law.27 On this point, Obbo wrote that:

But the vast of the majority of women who survived training, fieldwork, degree-getting and publishing to give us information were themselves trained by men. Some scholars claimed that if they dealt with questions concerning women, their data would be regarded as ‘soft’ and their work not academically serious.28

Still on the impact of colonial education on women in Uganda, Nakanyike Musisi stated that:

Missionaries sincerely attempted to raise the status of women through education. The education they offered, however, first single-handedly and later in conjunction with the colonial government did not go beyond preparing women for the domestic life, nor did it differ significantly from pre-colonial education for women. … In 1926, the government declared its commitment to leaving girls’ education in missionary hands, as long as the curriculum emphasized domesticity.29

On his part and in support of the views expressed by Obbo and Musisi on the impact of colonial education and religion, Rodney asserted that:

The Christian church has always been a major instrument for cultural penetration and cultural dominance. Equally important has been the role of education in producing Africans to service the capitalist system and to subscribe to its values.30

The views held by Obbo, Musisi and Rodney on the relationship between pre-colonial education, colonial education and missionary work indicate that the forces that impacted on women’s ability to overcome male dominance were reinforced by each

27.G. Mianda, Colonialism, education, and Gender relations in the Beligian Congo: The `Evolue` Case, in WOMEN IN AFRICAN COLONIAL HISTORIES (2002); N.B. Musisi, Morality as Identity: The Missionary Moral Agenda in Buganda,1877–1945, 23 J. RELIGIOUS HISTORY (2002); OBBO, supra note 15.

28.Id., at 1.

29.N.B. Musisi, Colonial and Missionary Education: Women and Domesticity in Uganda, 1900-1945, AFRICAN ENCOUNTERS WITH DOMESTICITY (Karen T. Hansen ed., 1992).

30.W. RODNEY, HOW EUROPE UNDERDEVELOPED AFRICA 26 (1972).

274

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

other and not easy to overcome. The views expressed by Rodney were in particular informative on how christianity and western education were the major instruments for entrenching western systems including capitalism into African social fabric. These factors greatly contributed towards the imposition of western patriarchy onto Africans. The imposed western patriarchal-capitalism partnership as analyzed by Obbo, Musisi and Rodney was not only problematic and disadvantageous to women but also impacted on the land law and gender relations in Uganda in general terms.

Women’s problems in ITC in respect to access, ownership, control and usability started from the time land titling was introduced in Ankole under the 1901 agreement.31 According to her, mailo grants and individual freehold titles were acquired by a few prominent men in ITC. This meant that men had been deliberately empowered by the land law to have leverage over women in order to keep the latter in a subordinate position. It can also be observed that social forces prevented women from being participants in land transactions. According to Buruhwari, the land tenurial systems introduced by the colonial government escalated the already disadvantaged situation for women in ITC. She stated that:

The introduced land tenurial systems in ITC induced the acquisition of interests in land as a commodity, yet previously all land belonged to all members of the family in equal terms. Women never bothered about rights of access, ownership, control and usability of land because there was no contention about these issues. Everyone was an owner of land, I only learnt about registered land ownership when I went to school in the 1930s.32

Available literature indicated that only one woman, Julia Kibubura, owned land in ITC and probably in the whole of Ankole Kingdom in her sole capacity. Kibubura was a female chief appointed by the British Administration in ITC.33 Kibubura enjoyed the same respect as men; she was allotted land, though without a land title by the colonial administration.34 Kibubura’s mailo covered much of the Wards of Bubaare, Kyaruhanga and Kyabugaija in the present day ITC.

31.Interview with Dorothy Buruhwari in ITC at her home, Kagongo Ward, Ibanda Town Council on 27 December, 2009.

32.Id.

33.See NGANWA, supra note 22.

34.Interview with Eriseeba Kyamulesire at her home, Bubare Ward, ITC on 22 June, 2008; Michael Kibeiherere, nephew to Julia Kibubura, at his shop premises, ITC, on 26 July, 2008; and Godfrey Mwitani, a retired Clerical Officer and son to Yairo Mujonjo, who was the Treasurer for Kibubura, at his home, Bufunda Ward, ITC on 28 December, 2009.

2011]

Politicization of Land Law & Gender Relations in Uganda

275

It was observed that women in Ankole Kingdom were traditionally renowned for their diviner role; they provided divine guidance to male rulers.35 Prominent women diviners in the kingdom included Murogo, Nyabuzaana, Kishokye, and Kibubura, the last in the lineage of diviners whose origin is traced from Bunyoro Kingdom.36 This indicates that women in ITC were never regarded with the same esteem as men in respect to land rights under the kinyankore custom. Women’s prominence would be attributed to their “divine” powers. As diviners, for instance, women had an obligation to ensure that men, the rulers, remained in political power by giving them information which enabled them to conquer their enemies.37

Political power in Ankole Kingdom was the basis upon which one accessed, owned, controlled and used land. Customary and later statutory land ownership legislation, were functions of gender power relations that were more favourable to men than women. According to Kibeiherere, land law and gender relations in ITC were maintained through a continuous and active system of denial of women’s rights in broad terms. Kibeiherere stated that:

Women were never given an opportunity to air their views when decisions concerning access, ownership, control and usability of land were to be taken. Men knew that women were a strong pressure group, which would over power them when given opportunity to articulate their demands in respect to land rights. As such, men manipulated and continuously denied them the right to participate in any fora that would be discussing serious matters concerning land. That was intended to maintain them in a subordinated position.38

In general terms, women in ITC were disadvantaged by custom and colonial history in respect to their rights of access, ownership, control and usability and that their views were systematically suppressed by the patriarchal society they lived in. That disadvantaged situation continued up to the time of undertaking this study albeit, in a modified form to impact on women’s rights of access, ownership and usability of land in ITC.

35.Id.

36.See supra note 22.

37.Id.

38.Interview with Kibeiherere, supra note 34.

276

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

IV. LAND LAW AND GENDER RELATIONS IN ITC IN THE BROADER

POLITICAL SETTING OF ANKOLE KINGDOM

The indigenous inhabitants of ITC, the Batagwenda, belonged to the larger community of the Banyankore, who traditionally owed their allegiance to the omugabe. Due to immigrations into the area, however, the composition of the people of ITC has changed; in addition to the Batagwenda, it consists of Bakiga, a few Bahima and many other ethnic groupings, the latter largely consisting of employees and business communities.39 The omugabe was the traditional leader of the Banyankore. Symbolically, the omugabe was the owner of all land in his kingdom. His eminence was prominent in the period before the promulgation of the 1967 Republican Constitution of Uganda which abolished the institution of traditional rulers in the country.

The revival of traditional institutions in Uganda under the 1995 Constitution did not revive the glory of Kingdoms and particularly for Ankole Kingdom. Historically, the omugabe was referred to as the ‘leading bull.’ That attribute signified his status in the tribe, not only as a supreme ruler but also as the leader of all the heads of families and the richest cattle-owner in his own right. That attribute was based on the analogy of the leading bull in the kraal, which was the most prized animal for the Banyankore in any given herd of cattle.40

Ankole and other Kingdoms existed in Uganda long before the country was colonized. These were, however, abolished by the 1967 Constitution of the Republic of Uganda, which formerly replaced the 1962 Independence Constitution. The 1962 Constitution had been temporarily interrupted by the 1966 Interim Constitution of 15 April, 1966; the pronouncements in the 1966 Interim Constitution were formalized when the 1967 Republican Constitution was promulgated on 8 September, 1967. The abolition of kingdoms was effected under the provisions of Article 118 (1) of the 1967 repealed Republican Constitution, which provided that:

The institution of King or Ruler of a Kingdom or Constitutional Head of a District, by whatever name called, existing immediately before the commencement of this Constitution under the law then in force, is hereby abolished.

Such institution was restored by the 1995 Constitution under Article 246 but with a number of restrictions imposed on such leaders. Unlike the period before the abolition

39. IBANDA TOWN COUNCIL, THREE YEAR DEVELOPMENT ROLLING PLAN, 2004/5 - 2006/7

(2004).

40. See KARUGIRE, supra note 2.

2011]

Politicization of Land Law & Gender Relations in Uganda

277

of the institution in 1967, after 1995 traditional leaders would not enjoy administrative, legislative or executive powers of government or local government. A person would not, while remaining a traditional leader or a cultural leader, join or participate in partisan politics and no person would be compelled to pay allegiance or contribute to the cost of maintaining a traditional or cultural leader. It is important to note that since 1967, some of the institutions referred to under Article 118 (1) of the 1967 repealed Republican Constitution of Uganda have not been legally recognized by the Government. Some sections of the people in those abolished institutions such as Ankole Kingdom, however, continue to owe their traditional allegiance to the heads of such institutions, their non-recognition by the Government notwithstanding. The people’s insistence on recognizing such traditional institutions demonstrates the strength of customary law over written law, at least in practice much as the situation is different on paper.

Ankole Kingdom is one such kingdom that existed immediately before the promulgation of the 1995 Constitution of Uganda. Currently, however, Ankole kingdom is not legally recognized by the Government of the Republic of Uganda and other sections among the Ankole community on the basis of ethnic differences among the Banyankore and land ownership in the kingdom.41 On the whole, neither the issue of ethnic differences among the Banyankore nor the land question could be held to be the sole cause of the disagreement on whether or not the obugabe in Ankole should be restored and that none could simply be brushed off. The issue of ethnic differences among the Banyankore was as paramount as the land question because each of them is related to the institution of obugabe in a special way. The institution of obugabe, which was the preserve of the Bahima, discriminated against the Bairu; in addition, the obugabe as a dominant institution owned all land in the Ankole kingdom, while the Bairu were predominantly servants of the Bahima under the obugabe. It was, therefore, not a surprise that some sections of the Banyankore, particularly those with information about the institution of obugabe would come up to oppose its restoration and subsequent recognition by the Government.

However, the fear among some people in Ankole to resurrect the ethnic divide between the Bahima and Bairu created by history was a general reason advanced for the lack of unanimity among the Banyankore over the restoration of the institution of omugabe. According to Kate, this was a compounded issue.42 Furthermore, the Bahima

41.Interview with James Kahigiriza, supra note 4. See also, J.J. Barya, Democracy and Culture in Uganda: Reflections on the (Non) Restoration of the Ankole Monarchy, 4 EAST AFR. J. PEACE HUM. RIGHTS 14 (1998); STEINHART, supra note 2.

42.J. KATE, A HISTORY OF ETHNIC RELATIONS IN ANKOLE, UGANDA, DURING THE COLONIAL

PERIOD 1989-1962 (2006).

278

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

section of the Banyankore asserted itself as the superior section in Ankole and generally despised the Bairu ethnic group;43 and the latter were looked down upon because they did not own cows, which in Ankole were regarded as a symbol of prestige and wealth.44 It can be observed that that relationship was not only problematic to the Bairu as a sub-group of Banyankore, but it was particularly problematic to the Bairu women

who would be despised by both Bahima men and women; it was also problematic to the overall concept of land law and gender relations in Ankole. The fact that all Bairu were held to be subordinate to all Bahima in the kingdom meant that all Bairu women were subordinate to all Bahima, women and men equally. It also meant that because before the advent of colonialism all land in Ankole belonged to the omugabe, who was a Muhima, all Bairu women and men never owned land in the kingdom. That meant that all Bairu women in Ankole could not participate in decisions relating to access, ownership, control and usability of land because even their husbands could not.

According to Karugire, when a Mwiru acquired cows or ascended to a position of political leadership in Ankole, he ceased to belong to the category of Bairu although he never became a Muhima at all. Such a relationship between the Bairu and Bahima could be one of the possible reasons that might be hinged upon by the current Government to refuse to restore the monarchy in Ankole. That could largely be for fear of resurrecting the old ethnic divide between the two groups of Banyankore, which has currently been at low. According to Barya, the disagreement among the people of Ankole kingdom on the issue of the restoration of obugabe is due to the unresolved land question in the country as a whole.45 He sums up the issue of land ownership in Ankole in relation to the non-restoration of the Ankole monarchy thus:

The return of the lands and properties to a controversial king in the case of Ankole, however, would deprive those settled on them of their property rights otherwise enjoyed by other people directly holding from the state either as customary tenants or title owners. A resolution of the monarchy question in Ankole thus also requires a democratic resolution of the land question.

By proposing a democratic resolution of the land question in Uganda, Barya probably was contemplating setting in motion the provisions of Article 246 (2) of the Constitution. Article 246 (2) provides that:

43.Interview with Kibeiherere, supra note 34 and Kirindi, supra note 13.

44.See supra note 2.

45.Barya, supra note 41.

2011]

Politicization of Land Law & Gender Relations in Uganda

279

In any community, where the issue of traditional or cultural leader has not been resolved, the issue shall be resolved by the community concerned using a method prescribed by Parliament.

According to Kahigiriza, the Government lacked the will to have the problem resolved in a manner that might be contrary to the stand it had already taken about the kingdom in light of the vivid division among the Banyankore on the matter. The land question in relation to omugabe’s land in Ankole had its roots in the long history of the kingdom, but it was magnified at the time when Kingdoms were abolished and their properties all over the country appropriated to the State.

Prior to the abolition of kingdoms in Uganda in 1967, a number of persons oppressed by the obugabe as a patriarchal institution lived on omugabe’s land as tenants and paid tribute to him. After the abolition of the Kingdoms and all the rights attached to them, persons who had previously been tenants on omugabe’s land were ‘liberated’ from the oppression of the obugabe, ceased to be tenants of that institution and remained on such land deriving their interest from the State. Their position was probably better because under the 1967 Republican Constitution, all land in the country was taken over by the Uganda Land Commission, which was empowered under Article 108 (3) to hold and manage any land vested in it by the Constitution or any law or acquired in Uganda by the Government of Uganda and had such powers as could be conferred upon it by Parliament. This could be interpreted as holding land in trust of all Ugandans since the Commission was the one that granted, on application, interests in land of any sort to Ugandans.

Article 118 (4) of the 1967 repealed Constitution empowered Parliament to make revision for the devolution of any property held by any person by virtue of his or her office or by any other person or authority, being property connected with or attaching to the institution of the King or Ruler or Constitutional Head. Parliament never made such a revision until 1995 when the 1967 Constitution was repealed. On the face of it, it would appear that the abolition of the Kingdoms was inter alia intended to redress the land law and gender relations problems whose origins could be traced to the pre-colonial Uganda, but which were over politicized by colonialism and maintained by the post-colonial State until 1967. The reasons for abolishing the kingdoms, however, seem to be more political than socio-economic. The souring relations between the then central government and the traditional leaders, particularly the Kabaka46 of Buganda played a central role in providing a fertile ground for the Obote Government to abolish kingdoms in the country.

46. This is the title given to the traditional king of Buganda kingdom.

280

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

As mentioned earlier, the controversy surrounding the institution of obugabe in Ankole Kingdom notwithstanding, some of the people in Ankole region still regard themselves as subjects of the omugabe, much as they do not uniformly agree that the institution should be restored in the present era.47 As pointed out by Barya, it would be important for the Government of Uganda to resolve the current land tenurial problems in the country so that all Ugandans are assured of their rights in respect to the land they occupy before the people of ‘Ankole Kingdom’ can resolve the obugabe issue.

In other words, the land question in Uganda cannot be resolved in a piecemeal manner; it requires a holistic approach for instance, by promulgating a comprehensive land policy for the country and then revisiting the specific provisions of the existing land legislation concerning access, ownership and general rights in land to align them with the policy. Uganda is in advanced stages of promulgating a comprehensive land policy for the country, the draft policy document has been revised four times; the fifth revision was still on-going. However, the whole process of promulgating a comprehensive land policy for Uganda has been surrounded by controversies largely in respect to land mailo tenurial system.

In order to address the issue on the restoration of the obugabe, there is need to first address the land question, the political question, and the relationship between the Central Government and the Kingdoms. Persons who have settled on the omugabe’s land since 1967 and claimed interest in it or have made developments on it would also have to be compensated first before they vacate such land. Their interest in such land would be recognized by law by virtue of Article 237(8) of the Constitution, which provides that:

upon the coming into force of this Constitution and until Parliament enacts an appropriate law (sic), the lawful or bonafide occupants of mailo land, freehold or leasehold land shall enjoy security of occupancy on the land.

The omugabe’s land was registered under the mailo tenure system. Owners of mailo tenure interests in Uganda today hold it subject to the rights of customary interests’ holders in the same land as long as the latter interests inhered over it before the coming into force of the 1995 Constitution. After the abolition of kingdoms in Uganda in 1967 and prior to 1995, there were people who occupied the Omugabe’s land, they either became lawful or bonafide occupants of that land after the promulgation of the 1995 Constitution. Therefore, the argument of resolving the land question before restoring

47. Interview with Patrick Nathan Kirindi, supra note 13.

2011]

Politicization of Land Law & Gender Relations in Uganda

281

the Obugabe becomes valid.48 This is because once the obugabe is restored basing on the experience of other Kingdoms such as Buganda, Toro and Bunyoro, demands to regain the obugabe land would arise which could also result into demands for compensation by the current occupants in accordance with the provisions of Article 26 of the Constitution. The Article provides:

No person shall be compulsorily deprived of any interest in or over property of any description except where:

(a)the taking of possession or acquisition is necessary for public use or in the interest of defence, public safety, public order, public morality or public health; and

(b)the compulsory taking of possession or acquisition of property is made under a law which makes provision for:

(i)Prompt payment of fair and adequate compensation, prior to the taking of possession or acquisition of the property; and

(ii)a right of access to a court of law by any person who has an interest or right over the property.

According to some people currently occupying land that belonged to the omugabe before 1967, restoring the obugabe before the Government putting in place a clear land policy and law on their future status, would be rendered precarious since they derived their land rights from the 1967 constitutional reforms.49

In the case of ITC, much of the current Kyaruhanga, Bubaare and Kyabugaija, which constitute much of Ibanda Township fall under the “mailo land” that was allocated to Julia Kibubura when she became the Omukru w’ekyanga kya Ibanda (equivalent of a sub-county chief). That land in essence belonged to the omugabe because Kibubura did not become the registered owner of it but she held it in her capacity as a royal servant of the omugabe. Some of the people on that land are not even aware of the exact boundaries of Kibubura’s “mailo”, yet they stand to be displaced if it were to be returned to the obugabe.50 However, there are efforts by Kibubura’s relatives to identify the boundaries of her land with a view of petitioning the Government to designate that estate as a cultural heritage for the whole country.51

48.See, Barya, supra note 41.

49.Interview with the people occupying the Obugabe land in ITC, who were mainly from Bubare and Bufunda Wards of ITC.

50.Interview with Godfrey Mwitani, supra note 34. Mr Mwitani, who occupies part of Kibubura’s mailo land, just a few metres from the spot where Kibubura was buried, acknowledged not knowing the boundaries of Kibubura’s mailo.

51.Id.

282

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

Another informant, Kibeiherere, who was a nephew to the late Kibubura, was, however, not aware of Mwitani’s allegations of petitioning the Government to gazette Kibubura’s burial grounds and her whole palace as a cultural heritage for Uganda.

On the whole, it seems that gazetting Kibubura’s burial grounds as a cultural heritage for the whole country would be an important step towards recognizing the role of women in the overall decision-making processes in Uganda. That would be so because, not only would the burial grounds be gazetted, but Kibubura’s achievements as a prominent woman leader in ITC would be documented and made available to the whole world. Making such information available to the whole world would complement other government initiatives to redress gender imbalances in the country caused by history, which according to Obbo, were over emphasized in the country’s history by the colonial rule. Specifically, the availability of that information would correct the wrong information available or the lack of it to the effect that no woman was prominent in the area, and, therefore, that women had no basis to claim equality with men in the social arenas.

It was observed that laying claims by the omugabe for his properties in Ankole would mean that many people in ITC and even Government establishments such as Ibanda police station and all Ibanda district local government structures would be claimed.52 The claims would probably be advanced by Kibubura’s relatives on behalf of the omugabe. However, according to Mwitani, the claims by Kibubura’s relatives would only be confined to the burial grounds, which are identifiable and known by people in ITC, and that extending the claims to the whole mailo would be contested and probably defeated even in courts of law. Kibubura did not have registered interest in her mailo and that today, most of the occupants of that land are not only in the category of bonafide occupants, but largely in the category of registered owners because they had land tittles issued to them by Government in respect of the land they occupy.53 It was noted that women’s agenda in Uganda today is considered with high respect. That came out clearly from President Museveni’s averments in one of his books, Sowing the Mustard Seed. According to Museveni:

One of the principles the NRM is proud to have initiated is that of bringing women into the mainstream of the country’s governance. Women constitute more than half of the country’s population and carry out most work in the major economic sector that is agriculture. In spite of this, however, for a long time, they were relegated to the periphery…. The NRM has created opportunities for women which

52.Id.

53.Id.

2011]

Politicization of Land Law & Gender Relations in Uganda

283

were aimed at redressing this historical imbalance.54

It can be observed that President Museveni’s statement was an acknowledgement of the global awareness that women’s rights should be respected by all governments, and not necessarily an invention of his Government.

Unlike the colonial period, when land was largely a means of subsistence production and prestige to the kings, land in Uganda, during the post-colonial period became the basis for the generation of wealth and the sustainability of livelihoods. The situation changed further in 1986 when the National Resistance Movement (NRM) ascended to political power in Uganda. Land gained more monetary value throughout the country, particularly in urban areas. Access, ownership, control and usability of land in Uganda thereafter, which were largely in the domain of men, influenced gender- power relations in the home, the community and nationwide. One who owned land, controlled access to it and its usability and other means of other people’s livelihood that depended on it, whether that ownership was disadvantageous to others or not.

It can thus be observed that during the period 1986 to 1995, land in Uganda became a key resource for production and often the only capital available to the majority of Ugandans, particularly women. Consequently, access, ownership, control and usability of land in Uganda were the basis for livelihoods of most Ugandans and thus played a pivotal role in the provision of shelter, food and income to them, particularly the rural poor and women. That required secure rights in land, particularly for women, not only guaranteed, but also to have incentives and opportunities for household food security and investment created for them if they were to utilize the land sustainably. That meant that alongside the basic survival necessities, secure rights to land could act as a catalyst to sustainable land management and also improve access to capital by women.

V. CONCLUSION

Deriving from the analysis on the politicization of land law and gender relation in ITC in relation to access, ownership, control and usability of land in any part in Uganda, it can rightly be argued that the continuum of unbalanced gender relations led to the maintenance of women in ITC in a subordinate and marginalized position in respect to the rights of decision-making processes concerning access, ownership, control and usability of land.

54. Y.K MUSEVENI, SOWING THE MUSTARD SEED: THE STRUGGLES FOR FREEDOM AND

DEMOCRACY IN UGANDA (1997), at 190-92.

284

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

It can also be observed that the disadvantageous and problematic position of women in respect to enjoyment of rights of access, ownership, control and usability of land in general terms was also affected by other instruments of the colonial legacy including education, religion in addition to law. Furthermore, the land law and gender relations in ITC were maintained through a continuous and active system of denial of women’s rights in broad terms. It can therefore be noted that in ITC, all land belonged to the omugabe, who was a Muhima, and therefore, all Bairu, women and men never owned land in that part of the country. That meant that all Bairu women in Ankole could not participate in decisions relating to access, ownership, control and usability of land because even the Bairu men could not.

Basing on the observations, it comes to the fore that the feminist perspective provides key tools necessary for the interpretation of locations of gender imbalances and women’s oppression in society. That in the kinyankore custom, women would not be permitted to own land in their sole capacities; and as such underpinning the problem of gender discrimination and women’s marginalization and exclusion in ITC were the complex economic, social, cultural and political issues were expressed through social institutions including the family, community, custom, religion, and the market and State ideologies. Lastly, that no single factor such as custom or colonial history could be blamed for the lack of a gender balanced society when it comes to understanding the politicized matters of access, ownership, control and usability of land in ITC.

2011]

A Historical Perspective on Land Transfer in [B]Uganda

285

A HISTORICAL PERSPECTIVE ON LAND TRANSFER: “SHOWING THE LAND,” SURVEY, AND REGISTRATION IN (B)UGANDA FROM 1900-1950

Holly E. Hanson*

ABSTRACT

Analyzing court cases from 1900 to 1950, this article documents the incomplete creation of a land market in Buganda, despite the legal possibility of land sale following the creation of mailo land in 1900. Survey, titling and registration of land became combined with mechanisms for land transfer which had already existed in Buganda, and the melding together of two sets of forms - and meanings- for land transfer led, inevitably, not only to ineffective transfer of land in individual cases, but also to the incomplete creation of a market in land. The buyers and sellers of land rarely, if ever, treated land as a commodity stripped of social obligations. The article describes the mechanisms for land transfer before the creation of private property in land, provides evidence of the hybrid mechanisms for land transfer which evolved, and documents the potential for fraud inherent in titling and registration and the potential for ambiguity inherent in “showing the land.” The difficulty in implementing private land ownership in Buganda between 1900 and 1950 suggests some challenges that will be faced in the implementation of the Land Act.

I. INTRODUCTION

Access to productive land assures subsistence as well as the ability to create wealth, and the land laws of the Uganda Protectorate sought to balance the interests of both mailo land owners and the people living on that land. A careful examination of litigation over land suggests that the intention of the law to protect the concerns of both land owners and land occupiers (tenants) were not always successful.

As the 2009 Land Act begins to take effect, a century of accumulated history regarding private land ownership in Buganda gains new relevance.1 Mechanisms for

* Associate Professor of History, Mount Holyoke College, South Hadley MA USA. Email: <hhanson@mtholyoke.edu>

1. See, S.L.LUNYIIGO,THESTRUGGLEFORLAND IN BUGANDA 1888-2005(2007);H.E.HANSON, LANDED OBLIGATION: THE PRACTICE OF POWER IN BUGANDA (2003); A.B. MUKWAYA, LAND TENURE IN BUGANDA: PRESENT DAY TENDENCIES (1953); H.W. WEST, LAND POLICY IN BUGANDA (1972); and E. Troutt, Rural African Land Markets and Access to Agricultural Land: The Central Region of Uganda (Ph.D

286

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

land transfer are one arena in which the accumulated evidence from Buganda suggests the long term consequences of tenure innovation may be different than those we anticipate. This paper argues that survey, titling and registration became combined with mechanisms for land transfer which had already existed in Buganda and the melding together of the two sets of forms—and meanings—for land transfer led, inevitably, not only to ineffective transfer of land in individual cases, but also to the incomplete creation of market for land.

The argument proceeds in four sections. First, the article describes the mechanisms for land transfer. Before the individualization of tenure, there were the social drama of “showing the land,” and the ceremony for succession on death called olumbe. Surveying, titling and the registration of titles were instituted to support individual land ownership. It is important to note that quite different expectations regarding the use of land were embedded in these forms of land transfer. The second section outlines the ways that mechanisms for land transfer became enmeshed with each other: the act of surveying, independent of the map produced for title became equated with “showing the land” and documentation related to Ganda succession upon death became part of the process of registration of title. Court cases show that the various logics of land use were also combined. The third section examines how these hybrid mechanisms complicated land transfer in Buganda: the tendency for sale to occur at the time of inheritance led to land sale failures. The potential for fraud inherent in titling and registration and the potential for ambiguity inherent in “showing the land” were also sources of land sale failures. The concluding section of the article identifies aspects of the history of land transfer in Buganda that may be useful in contemplating land titling and registration schemes at present.

II. LAND TRANSFER BEFORE MAILO

Over the centuries, probably beginning sometime around 900 A.D, permanently cropped bananas became the staple food of the Baganda, which developed clearly defined means of transferring land.2 Land scarcity was not an aspect of the tenure situation before the middle of the 20th century.3 Before the individualization of land tenure in 1900, land was allocated by the local political authorities, acting in the name of the kabaka, who was in theory the owner of all land. A person who received land was committed to use it, and to express allegiance to the allocating authority.

Dissertation, University of Wisconsin, 1994).

2.HANSON, id., at 28-36.

3.WEST, supra note 1, at 5.

2011]

A Historical Perspective on Land Transfer in [B]Uganda

287

In 1900, private property was created at the level of large estates: the people who had been chiefs became owners of junks of land purportedly equivalent to what they had controlled and continued to allocate plots to peasant farmers on their lands. The specific mechanism for transferring land—both large estates and small plots—was the social drama of “showing the land:” a group of people including the giver and the receiver of the land, representatives of several levels of political authorities and neighbours observed the giver of the land showing its boundaries to the receiver and the planting of a bark cloth tree to commemorate the exchange. In a 1959 court case one, of the witnesses to a social drama of “showing the land” described the event:

We were three attestors to the scene of giving the plaintiff the new plot. If the giver and the given are added, then the number becomes five. ... The giver took round the plaintiff showing him where the plot takes limits. ... After the inspection of the plot, the plaintiff was told to start cultivating; he needed not give first a gift of gratitude to the giver.4

All the people present at “showing the land” were obligated to remember and passed down the memory of land exchanges for generations. In the 1920s, when Ganda chiefs were arguing about how specific lands had been allocated in the past, each person backed up their claim by reference to the messenger of the King who had been sent to divide the land. Where a messenger had been sent by the Kabaka and could be named, a land exchange had taken place; if no messenger had been sent, that was proof that no land had been exchanged.5 Legitimacy in land transfer rested in people's memory of the person responsible for taking land from one person and giving it to another, as is evident in this testimony by a clan elder:

I was at my place at Kavumiro and I have never seen any one who came to turn me out of it, if I have ever been turned out, let that person who turned me out come forward.6

In addition to “showing the land,” Ganda facilitated the transfer of land through a succession ceremony called olumbe, which took place some months after a death. At

4.Principal Court at Mengo, Civil Case 401 of 1959; High Court of Uganda at Kampala, Civil Appeal 107 of 1960.

5.Archives of the Uganda Protectorate, Secretariat Minute Paper No. 6902, “Bataka Land Commission” at 390, 391, 425 & 453.

6.Id., at 425.

288

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

this event, attended by all the significant relatives of the deceased person, his or her successor was named and all the deceased’s property was delineated and distributed. The leaders of the clan or sub-clan met to identify all the deceased’s property and decided on a just distribution. Male heirs were then introduced to the king, and sometime before 1910, the whole disposition of the deceased's property was recorded in the king’s “Book of Inheritance.”

Once authority over land had been transferred from one person to another in the social drama of “showing the land” or olumbe; the new controller of the land continually asserted his or her authority in relationships with other people. The land controller received tribute from the people who lived on the land and acted as their patron. A person who stopped receiving tribute and dispensing protection to the people who lived on land was no longer in control of that land.

In Ganda thought, control of land implied control of people on the land. Ganda chiefs and the British Protectorate authorities developed new mechanisms for land transfer in order to allocate individually owned land. Documents replaced memory as the means of demonstrating people’s claims to land. At the time of the original allocation of mailo, which happened between 1900 and 1911, each new land owner received a “Preliminary Certificate” which included the typewritten name of the estate and a sketch map.7 As teams of surveyors passed from county to county from 1904 onwards, these claims were solidified in “Final Certificates” which demarcated estates in maps that conformed to the cadastral survey: the surveying teams and local chiefs adjudicated boundary disputes between rival claimants.8

Land registration began in 1909, using the Torrens system, although the form of the law was modified in 1922.9 In theory, sellers, buyers, and heirs of land registered ownership by arranging for survey of the parcel, if necessary, and then paying a fee to file the appropriate documents at the Land Registry in Entebbe. However, by 1925 it was estimated that 8,000 changes in ownership which had not been surveyed were waiting to be registered; by 1946 it was estimated there were 150,000 unregistered transactions.10

The authority implied by a certificate of title was absolute; owners of registered land originally had no obligations to the people living on their land: in fact, the assumption of the British colonial officers in creating means of documenting individual ownership of land was that titles would allow owners to commercialize their relationships with people on the land and use it to create wealth for themselves.

7.Transcription of the Records of the Buganda Lukiko.

8.H.B. THOMAS & A.E. SPENCER, A HISTORY OF UGANDA LAND SURVEYS 73 (1938), at 75.

9.WEST, supra note 1, at 165.

10.Id., 173-174.

2011]

A Historical Perspective on Land Transfer in [B]Uganda

289

III. HYBRID FORMS OF LAND TRANSFER

An examination of records of conflicts over land suggests that new forms for land transfer did not replace older forms, nor did they simply co-exist. Instead, the Ganda combined “showing the land,” survey, negotiations of sale, olumbe and registration, so that these ways of transferring land blended with each other, and a successful land exchange required all of them. “Showing the land” continued to be an enactment of the transfer and of every participant’s good intentions. Witnesses who had been present at the “showing of the land” acted to preserve the interests of the land owner. Courts sometimes ordered that a recalcitrant land seller “shows the land” in the presence of local bureaucrats to a buyer who had paid but had not received land. Memories of “showing the land” continued to have validity in determining who owned land.11 An important component of land cases at local district and higher level courts was a re- enactment of “showing the land” in which the judges of the cases and both litigants travelled to the land in question and met with local authorities, witnesses to the original land exchange and neighbours.12

In Buganda, land survey took on the meaning of the social drama of “showing the land.” Instead of being the technical preliminary step that would allow the accurate marking of boundaries on the title of land to be transferred, survey became an event that demonstrated ownership. In contrast to “showing the land,” however, survey was a social drama that did not require the participation of neighbours, witnesses and local authorities. People whose claims to land were not acknowledged in the community hired one of the two independent surveyors in Buganda to give their claims credibility and keeping the surveyor off the land—or getting the surveyor on the land—became a focus of land conflicts. Local chiefs had the authority to prevent a survey from taking place, unless the person who wanted to carry it out could prove with documents that he owned the land.13

Olumbe became an integral part of land registration and sale. The most obvious aspect of this is that the Buganda “Book of Inheritance” served (and continued to serve in the 1990s) as the first reference point regarding land ownership. Succession to land involved entering the distribution of property in the “Book of Inheritance” and also changing the title deed. Both systems operated simultaneously, but the “Book of

11.Principal Court Civil Case 141/1953; E.S. HAYDON & I.S. LULE , KINGDOM OF BUGANDA CUSTOMARY LAW REPORTS 1940-1955, (1956).

12.E.g, Kalule v. Bwaniko, High Court Civil Case 401 of 1959, Civil Appeal 107 of 1960; Walusimbi v. Kironde, Civil Case 104 of 1941, Civil Appeal 10 of 1942.

13.Nsingisira v. Nabamba, Principal Court of Buganda at Mengo, Civil Case 55 of 1942; High Court of Uganda at Kampala, Civil Appeal 3 of 1943.

290

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

Inheritance” was considered primary. People who wished to transfer title to land in Buganda had take to the Registry Office a document indicating that evidence regarding their authority over the land could be found in “The Book of Inheritance;” this involved searching through the volumes in which the succession decisions of clans were recorded.

A more subtle integration of olumbe and land sale is that the death of a land owner was the moment at which most land sales occurred. Undoubtedly some inheritors of land sold immediately because they felt they had no need for land, but a further explanation is that, in Ganda thought, the death of someone who controls land is the time when control of that land will shift in significant ways. Colonial judges and land officers considered hasty sales of land immediately following the death of a land owner to be one of the main causes of land conflicts in Buganda. They criticized clan elders who sold land because they were “craving to eat meat at the funeral” and people rushed to buy land from heirs before the new owners understood the value of their property.14

A. Hybrid Land Transfer: A Case Study

The hybridization of the means of land transfer is evident in the case of Yozefu Damulira and Alixondere Katende, whose conflict over 100 acres of land lasted from 1934 to 1951.15 The dispute arose because Damulira immediately sold his portion of inheritance before his co-heirs had surveyed their land. Once the co-heirs had surveyed their parts of the mailo which was at Katogo, in Kyaggwe, the 100 acres of land which Damulira had sold Katende no longer existed. This was not uncommon: people bought an undesignated number of acres from someone who was due to inherit land, but the process of dividing land among heirs always took a long time, sometimes heirs stalled to avoid getting a less valuable piece or to avoid conflicts and they occasionally refused division in order to prevent sales. A buyer could be frozen out of his abstract purchase for long periods, up to decades, waiting for the heirs to make the succession concrete.

Six years after the initial sale, Damulira promised Katende 100 acres from his mailo in Bubwa village in Sabagabo, Kyaggwe. However, he refused to designate the specific 100 acres which belonged to Katende. After waiting thirteen years to be shown his land, Katende took Damulira to the Principal Court and obtained an order for representatives of the provincial and district authorities, and the local chief in person, to observe Damulira showing the land to Katende in January, 1947. This event took

14.See generally, HAYDON & LULE, supra note 11.

15.Katende v. Damulira, Principal Court of Buganda at Mengo, Civil Case 109 of 1947, Civil Case 174 of 1948; High Court of Uganda at Kampala, Civil Appeal 81 of 1951.

2011]

A Historical Perspective on Land Transfer in [B]Uganda

291

place in front of the appropriate authorities and neighbours designated as witnesses. A short while later, however, one of the witnesses observed Damulira allowing “Mr Sa,” an Indian tree cutter, to cut the trees on the land that had been shown to Katende. He challenged Damulira, but “when I asked the defendant why he had sold trees in the land of the plaintiff, he said he sold land to him and not trees.” Katende sued Damulira for shs 4,900/= for the value of the trees in 1948. Katende lost the case, even though the Principal Court and High Court judges agreed that the trees had belonged to him. The first step in his failure was the court's decision to ask him for evidence of a survey. The trees that had been cut down were within the area marked for him in the showing of the land; if he had been allowed to bring as witnesses the people who were present at the showing of the land, or if the court had travelled to observe the dispute on the land in the presence of representatives of the chiefs, Katende would have won. Katende makes this clear in his appeal:

Notwithstanding that the defendant does not deny having cut down the said trees complained of him in this case, even this being so still the court of the Omulamuzi refused to call those witnesses, the very representatives who handed the said land to me as above explained, nor did the court send its representatives or arising itself to reach at the land in dispute to make certain what part of the land from which the defendant did cut the trees. My lord, the trees complained of from the defendant were cut from the very part handed over to me by the said representatives and in consequence of which I would request this Court to direct or send out representatives to the scene and make sure.16

Katende got Mr. Boazman, one of the independent surveyors, to survey his land, as he had been instructed by the court and brought with him receipts to prove that he had accomplished that expensive task. The court then failed to take the next logical step - travelling to the land to see whether the felled trees were inside the cairns marking Katende’s land. The British judge who heard the case at the High Court level ridiculed Katende for failing to bring a survey map to the court; but Katende had taken the normal course of action—having one’s land measured and marked with cairns by the “chain men” of the independent surveyor was, in practice, a technical equivalent of the ceremony of showing the land.

16. Id.

292

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

Perhaps Katende failed to make his case because he could not afford to pay for the court to travel to Kyaggwe; perhaps Damulira, who was clearly adept at managing court cases to his advantage, intervened in a way that caused the case to be heard by a judge who was particularly ignorant of Ganda land issues. The risks of taking land matters to court are apparent in this example: Katende stated in his appeal that he had “already pledged the land in this case,” that is, he had borrowed money to finance the survey of the land by Boazman so that his efforts to obtain compensation for his lost trees does not cost him the land itself.

IV. THE CONSEQUENCES OF HYBRID LAND TRANSFER

MECHANISMS

The mingling of forms for land transfer made individual land ownership logical in Buganda and sometimes protected people from unscrupulous land dealings, but the complicated forms of transfer also led to essentially irresolvable conflicts over land ownership. “Showing the land,” olumbe, survey and title all had validity in the courts. Furthermore, the logic that people who control land are obliged to take care of the people who live on that land co-existed with the logic that an owner of land has complete rights over his or her property. This multiplicity of ways to legitimate control over land meant that litigants could prolong cases, hoping for a judge who would give more weight the evidence favouring them.

Land cases are the thickest files in the record rooms of the High Court because the same cases got heard over and over again. Among the conflicts that re-occur, with various resolutions, in land cases were conflicts between the authority of documents opposed to the authority of memory of social interactions; the propriety of using land to make profits opposed to the propriety of protecting the people on the land; exercising the right to sell opposed to protecting the heirs to preserve the wealth of their forefathers. Here below are discussed two examples of land sale failures.

A. Muhamadu Kakembo v. Zakaliya Mubi

The potential for fraud in land sale and frustration of commercial intentions for land use are apparent in the case of Muhamadu Kakembo v. Zakaliya Mubi.17 Kakembo had sold his two mailos to Mubi for Shs 10,000/- in one hasty transaction on February 7, 1947. He claimed that he thought he was pledging the land in return for a Shs 5,000 loan with Shs 5,000 interest, but he signed over the title documents that day, and the loan

17. Principal Court at Mengo, Civil Case 126 of 1947; Appealed to the High Court.

2011]

A Historical Perspective on Land Transfer in [B]Uganda

293

document he produced in court was considered to be a forgery.

In February, 1947, Muhamadu Kakembo was looking for money. According to his statement (in December 1949), he went to the shop of the “Indian Merali” where John Wangi and his friend John Lutaya told Kakembo that they could take him to someone who would lend him any amount of money at a moderate amount of interest. Lutaya was one of the men who worked for Mubi as a broker—finding people who wanted to sell their land. Kakembo claimed that at Mubi’s office he was told, orally, that the land was to be transferred into Mubi’s name just to prevent him from selling it to someone else; other people who sold land for ridiculously small amounts told the same story.

In court he produced the sale document, written on February 7, 1947 and a loan document, which the court considered to be a forgery, dated February 25, 1947. Whether the initial transaction was understood to be a sale or a loan, an agreement of sale was prepared in Mubi’s office and Mubi, Kakembo, and Wangi— the broker, drove immediately to Entebbe in Mubi’s car, where Kakembo signed the transfer of title in front of the Registrar of Titles. Mubi had paid the transfer fee of Shs 224/- and Kakembo signed a receipt for Shs 10,000/-. He testified:

Kakembo made for me the transfer of the land into my names which he duly signed in the presence of the Registrar after having it read over to him and waived and then signed on it ... also the transfer was made on the 7th February, 1947, and that was the end of that.18 Kakembo claimed he did not know at the time that it was the end of his ownership on the two miles his grandfather had received half a century before.

“We lost our land to lawyers” is a common statement in people’s land histories in Buganda: buying land from people who needed cash immediately appears to have been one of the businesses of Hamisi Mukasa and Company. That the entire transaction was concluded immediately suggests that Mubi knew it was unfair and Kakembo would not consent to it if he had an opportunity to think about it: usually months elapsed before the several phases of the Entebbe Land Registry Office portion of a land transfer were completed.

The strongest evidence that Kakembo really had not perceived the transaction as a sale was his reported alarm when he discovered that Mubi had dismissed his land stewards. According to Kakembo, it was the sending away of his stewards which

18. Id.

294

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

alerted him of Mubi’s “determinedly intention to deceive my land.” The power to control the people on the land demonstrated ownership more clearly than the procedures at the Land Registry office; it is conceivable that Kakembo only realized that all the formality in Entebbe implied he had given up his land when Mubi drove away his stewards and appointed new ones. When this happened, he tried to give Mubi back the money, but was unable to do so, and then he took the case to court for the first time.

Kakembo initiated a court action in July, 1947, after discovering his land stewards had been dismissed, some of his porters had been driven away from his coffee plantation and Mubi was harvesting his coffee. He withdrew this case two months later, perhaps because he realized he lacked sufficient evidence. When he initiated the case again, he had created the loan document and found witnesses to back up his loan story, but the forgery was obvious and the witnesses did not corroborate each other. When Kakembo failed to get his land back, he strategically changed the terms of the argument. Instead of claiming to be an owner of two miles which had been swindled out of his land, he claimed to be the producer of coffee on several plots on the land that had been sold and that a new owner could not deprive a peasant agricultural producer of the fruits of his labour. Mubi drove away Kakembo’s twelve porters who were working on the coffee and tried to harvest it “saying that he also bought that shamba in conjunction to the land.” Kakembo disagreed, admitting that he had sold the land (a switch from his earlier story), but he had never intended to sell his coffee trees.

The Principal Court met on the land in the presence of both parties and representatives of the provincial, district, and local chiefs. They measured the size of the coffee plantations and heard from witnesses who stated that it was Kakembo's coffee. Back in court, Kakembo questioned Mubi, “While buying this land was there any mention in the agreement that I also sell the coffees to you?” to which Mukasa replied, “There was no mention as regards the coffees that he had also sold the coffees at all.” Kakembo asked court to think of him as a tenant on the land that he had just sold. Perhaps because the sale had clear elements of a swindle, both the Principal Court and High Court complied with Kakembo’s view of the situation. He had lost two square miles of land in one afternoon transaction, but the new owner was not able to control the productive resources on the land.

B. Sonko v. Senkubuge

The first phase in Kresipo Senkubuge’s twenty two year struggle to control land involved a purchase he claimed to have made from Yoana Sonko in 1947.19 Sonko was

19. Sonko v. Senkubuge, Principal Court Criminal Case 202 of 1948, Civil Appeal 75 of 1951.

2011]

A Historical Perspective on Land Transfer in [B]Uganda

295

a district chief who was the second generation owner of mailo land. He asserted his status as a chief, justifying his statements by referring to his followers, “my people all knew of this.”

Kresipo Senkubuge was a highly educated man with a town address, who complained of trouble with his labourers and carried out all his correspondences in formal English, challenged the Registrar of the High Court regarding his capacity to uphold the standards of British Justice, and referred to the clerks who could not find a file as “two Africans on your staff.” Senkubuge claimed to have bought 50 acres of land from Yoana Sonko in 1947 for Shs 350/=. This seemed to be an absurdly low price, particularly as Senkubuge also claimed that Sonko had received shs 2,886/= in rent that should have gone to Senkubuge in the five years the case had been disputed (i.e., the rent stood at shs 580/= per year). Senkubuge gave Sonko Shs 350/- in 1947, which Sonko maintained was a loan, but the loan document had gotten burnt in his house. (Houses did burn down often, however, Sonko also might have set the fire to get rid of the document.) G. K. Rock, a British solicitor, either gave Senkubuge a Shs350/- loan to buy the property, or according to Sonko, advised Senkubuge on how to legally cheat Sonko out of the land. In his appeal in 1951, Sonko wrote,

Your Honour, I have to disclose this to you, that it is through his (Rock’s) cunningness that he gives advices to other people to cheat, if not, what is his proper profession which he is doing there in his office if it is not for advising people to cheat other persons’ land?

Whatever the original agreement between the two men, Sonko refused to sign the official transfer document which meant that Senkubuge could not survey or control the land. Senkubuge apparently won the case which required Sonko to sign the transfer, but Sonko appealed against the ruling and avoided having it last for seven years. The Principal Court in Mengo and the High Court seem to have complied with Sonko in delaying Senkubuge's case: he eventually won in the lower court on a technicality which, given the opportunity, the Court might have overlooked, but Senkubuge would not allow them: his five letters to the High Court eventually succeeded in having Sonko’s appeal overturned.

Yoana Sonko, like Senkubuge, invoked the formal rules of British land administration, but he also used profoundly meaningful Ganda rules of rights to land in his effort to keep the land away from Senkubuge. He argued that the agreement made with Senkubuge and Rock could not be legitimate because “it is not made in the formal way... It neither contains his signature nor those of the witnesses like how valid agreements are usually made out.” The other component of Sonko's argument was that

296

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

he had sold that land to another man whose ancestors were buried on the land. At some time, either before (according to Sonko) or after (according to Senkubuge) the 1947 Shs350/- transaction, Sonko sold the same land to Yozefu Kabogoza, who was entitled to it because;

in that place there is contained Kabogoza’s burials of his fathers and relatives a place which I should not have been able to sell to another person other than the respective owner of such burials to which he holds the ancestral rights.

Kabogoza’s graves gave his claim legitimacy in accordance with the Ganda land law. It is possible that Sonko sold to Kabogoza in order to invalidate his sale to Senkubuge; it is also possible that he intended to sell the two men different pieces. Although Senkubuge was eventually able to force Sonko to sign the document transferring control of the land to him, Kabogoza was already behaving like the owner of the land. Kabogoza had collected busuulu and nvujo since 1947, had surveyed the 354.60 acres of land he had bought and showed the court land tax receipts that he had paid. Senkubuge and Kabogoza pursued opposite strategies in their efforts to prove that the each had the rightful ownership over the disputed land. Kabogoza solidified his claim by welcoming tenants and collecting busuulu. Senkubuge made his claim by creating a plan for commercial use of the land and trying to dismiss tenants.

A second court case, between Senkubuge and Muwanga, a tenant who had been paying busuulu and nvujjo to Kabogoza, placed that conflict in the location of the court. Senkubuge had sent away two other tenants before he took Muwanga to court to get rid of him. In 1948 he had sent away Mr. Kazimiri, “as I did not like him to damage my land.” In January, 1953, he wrote to the next tenant who had been rented in by Kabogoza, Stefano Buyondo, saying that he had “reserved the land in question for my own purposes,” that he would have gained Shs 2919/- from the land through supplying food contracts during the year that Buyondo had farmed it, and therefore Buyondo owed him Shs 2919/-, or “I will be compelled of taking the matter into litigation—subject to your own expenses and peril. In case you continue breaking my land during 1953, claim will be topped up accordingly.” This notice was copied to three levels of courts. Buyondo was the legitimate tenant of Kabogoza, but he was frightened by Senkubuge’s threat and left the land in 1953 or 1954.

However, in 1954, Kabogoza showed the land to Muwanga, and Muwanga became Kabogoza's tenant on the same land. Senkubuge then claimed that the commercial value of the land to him was Shs 50,000/- because he had intended to use it for grazing goats and cattle and as a rest camp for porters and Muwanga had to refund

2011]

A Historical Perspective on Land Transfer in [B]Uganda

297

him the Shs 3750/- he had already paid to a contractor to erect the labour camp. Senkubuge also made two explicit denials of social responsibility for Muwanga: first, that Muwanga lived on the land of another land owner—therefore Senkubuge did not have to grant him the rights of a tenant, and secondly, that he had not “as yet erected my headquarters therein”—therefore, he was not presently obligated to act as a landlord. Muwanga used his rent payments to Kabogoza to prove his right to be on the land; he presented his rent tickets as evidence, and described the ceremony in which he was shown the land:

In 1955, I George Muwanga of Kayabwe in the Ggombolola of Sabawali, Mawokota became a tenant on Mr. Yozefu Kabogoza’s land situated in the above village. He took me round the boundaries of the kibanja.

Testifying in support of Muwanga, Kabogoza described his fulfillment of the obligations of tenancy—that he had been shown the boundaries and stayed inside them, and that he was cultivating the land appropriately. Senkubuge’s failure to collect rent was the main evidence against him: clearly, if he was not collecting rent, he could not actually be the owner. Kabogoza had been collecting busuulu from the whole village for ten years; in the opinion of the court, this made Kabogoza the owner, unless Senkubuge could prove otherwise by survey.

The High Court notes on the case that it does not indicate how Senkubuge overcame Kabogoza regarding survey: both men had surveyed the same land. Somehow, Senkubuge won an acknowledgement that he was the owner of the land, but the Principal Court ordered Senkubuge to accept Muwanga as his tenant. This decision was framed in terms of when the survey was done: it was wrong for him to have sent eviction notices until after he had surveyed; and Muwanga had complied with the tenant’s law because he could not know before the survey had been done that he was paying rent to the wrong owner. The social means of establishing control of land were entirely absent in the court's reasoning, but its decision was that Senkubuge was obliged to accept social responsibility for Muwanga as a tenant.

For the next thirteen years, Senkubuge and Muwanga fought over this obligation. Senkubuge appealed to the High Court and won a determination that Muwanga should leave, but Senkubuge did not actually have the social power to evict a tenant and ten years later, Muwanga asked the High Court to reverse its decision, claiming he had repeatedly attempted to pay rent during that time. Senkubuge’s ability to make land law and court procedures work in his favour were limited to the courts: he got the decision he wanted, but he was unable to drive a tenant off the land.

298

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

IV. LESSONS FROM A CENTURY OF LAND TRANSFER IN BUGANDA

The fraught history of land sale in Buganda provides lessons for Uganda as the consequences of the Land Act unfold. In Buganda, the forms of land transfer that had been useful before the creation of individualized tenure continued to exist. Survey, land title and registration were changed through their interaction with the forms of land transfer that were already in place.

The Ganda people who sold land, bought land and judged cases of land conflicts did not abandon the social logic that had characterized their use before the creation of individual tenure. The concept that people who controlled land were obligated to allow people to live on and use their land was challenged but not extinguished by the concept that land owners had complete rights over their land. Multiple and somewhat contradictory notions of land use interacted in the motivations and decisions of people who owned and used land. The one hundred year history of private property on land in Buganda draws attention to the importance of cultural variables in the transformation of tenure systems. In Buganda, “showing the land” became a component of court deliberations over land disputes and the social implications of death, as much as any economic factor, determined where and when land became available for sale. The buyers and sellers of land rarely, if ever, treated land as a commodity stripped of social obligations. Private land ownership in Buganda in the first half of the twentieth century provides a unique background against which current land policy decisions can be considered.

2011]

Alien Torts in Bolivia

299

WESTPHALIAN PROCEDURE, POST-WESTPHALIAN SUBSTANCE: ALIEN TORTS IN BOLIVIA

Eric Engle*

In Mamani et al v. Sánchez de Lozada/Mamani et al v. Sánchez Berzain1 the survivors of the murderous suppression of a riot by the Bolivian government bring suit in the U.S. under the Alien Torts Statute (ATS).2 The cases represent a conflict between Westphalian and post-Westphalian international law. Under the Westphalian system, the general principle of non-intervention,3 as well as the principle of sovereign equality,4 prohibited any state from interfering in the internal affairs of any other state: Mamani would have no legal remedy before a U.S. court. In contrast, in the post- Westphalian system, states are subject to universal non-derogable duties—jus cogens.5 Human rights, protected as jus cogens, and the expansion of universal jurisdiction to enforce them mark post-Westphalian international law.6

This normative conflict is resolved by seeing it in terms of substance versus procedure: Procedurally, the Westphalian system’s rules condition the substantive post- Westphalian claims. So, issues such as comity (a discretionary doctrine),7 the act of

* Professor of Law, Pericles-ABLE LLM Program, Moscow, Russian Federation. E-mail: <EEngle@pericles.ru>.

1.The pleadings in Mamani are available at <http://ccrjustice.org/ourcases/current- cases/mamani,-et-al.-v.-s%C3%A1nchez-de-lozada-/-mamani,-et-al.-v.-s%C3%A1nchez-berzain>.

2.28 USC 1350, available at <http://www4.law.cornell.edu/uscode/28/1350.notes.html>

3.See, e.g., Mark Rothert, On Intervention in East Timor, 39 COLUM. J. TRANSNAT'L L. 257 (2000), at 262.

4.See, S.S. Lotus (Fr. v. Turk), 1927 P.C.I.J. (ser. A) No. 8, 4, 32 (Sept. 7) (Rejecting France’s contention that the Turkish criminal proceedings against Lt. Demons, the officer on watch on the Lotus during the collision with the Boz-Kourt, violated international law principles of sovereign equality), available at <http://www.worldcourts.com/pcij/eng/decisions/1927.09.07_lotus/>.

5.A jus cogens norm is “a norm accepted and recognized by the international community of states as whole from which no derogation permitted can be modified only subsequent general law having same character.” See, Siderman de Blake v. Republic of Argentina, 965 f.2d 699, 714 (9th cir. 1992) (Quoting Vienna Convention on Treaties, art. 53, May 23, 1969, 1155 UNTS 332, 8 ILM 679).

6.See. E.A. Engle, The Transformation of the International Legal System: The Post-Westphalian Legal Order, 23 QLR 23 (2004), available at SSRN: <http://ssrn.com/abstract=1020475>.

7.Sabbatino, 376 U.S. 408-409 (stating that “principles of comity governing this country’s relations with other nations, sovereign states and [sic] allowed to sue in the courts of the United States). See also, Hilton 159 U.S. 163 (calling neither a matter of absolute obligation, on one hand, nor mere courtesy good will, upon other).

300

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

state doctrine, and jurisdiction8 are governed by Westphalian concepts such as the general principles of non-intervention and sovereign equality9—including, at least currently, the doctrines of sovereign immunity and official immunity (which may apply even as to violations of jus cogens). Over the next decades one can expect immunity as a ground for exculpation to decline, as it has in other fields of tort law.

In contrast to the realist Westphalian procedural rules, the post-Westphalian universal rights such as the right to one’s own life10 govern substantive claims. The substantive (post Westphalian) rights are reached only after the exhaustion of domestic remedies (like comity, a discretionary doctrine), the finding of (universal) jurisdiction (over acts which violate jus cogens), and overcoming the burden of sovereign and/or official immunity (which ought not to apply for violations of jus cogens)—we must attack the Westphalian procedural obstacle course in order to reach the post- Westphalian substantive prize: real protection of basic human rights. Each procedural obstacle is challenging, yet can be overcome, but any of the procedural obstacles to an ATS claim can block finding a remedy for the plaintiffs. The fact of procedural manipulability in ATS cases is consistent with the legal realists’ position, that law is sufficiently flexible as to allow judges to plausibly reach any outcome they desire.

Under the Westphalian system, the substantive claims in Mamani would never have been cognizable. First, the sovereign acted in his sovereign capacity and thus would be immune. Second, the general principle of non-intervention would have prohibited any state from making any legal claim to a transaction within the territory of another sovereign except as to its own citizens. Third, individuals were mere objects not subjects of international law with no directly enforceable rights. Today however, the substantive claim is admissible: exceptionally, individuals have directly applicable rights and duties under international law certainly in the context of jus cogens rights and also where international treaties expressly or implicitly are self executing (i.e. directly effective). Substantively, the question in Mamani is whether the deadly suppression of a political protest can constitute a crime against humanity; to which the answer must be yes.11 Whether the suppression of this particular uprising qualifies as a crime against

8.See generally, Eric Engle, The Alien Tort Statute and the Torture Victims' Protection Act: Jurisdictional Foundations and Procedural Obstacles, 14 WILLAMETTE J. INT'L L. & DISPUTE RES. 1 (2006), available at <http://papers.ssrn.com/sol3/papers.cfm?abstract_id=1020512>.

9.No state may impose its will on any other sovereign state. See, S.S. Lotus (Fr. v. Turk.), 1927 P.C.I.J. (ser. A) No. 10, at 18 (Sept. 7).

10.Prosecutor v. Blaskic, Appeals Judgment, No. IT-95-14-A, 143, 147-49, 152, 156-59 (July 29, 2004), available at <http://www2.ohchr.org/english/law/ccpr.htm>.

11.Crimes against humanity have been recognized as a violation of customary international law since the Nuremberg Trials in 1944. See, Aldana v. Fresh Del Monte Produce, Inc., 305 F. Supp. 2d 1285, 1299 (S.D. Fla. 2003); see also Mujica v. Occidental Petroleum Corp., 381 F. Supp. 2d 1164, 1179-80

2011]

Alien Torts in Bolivia

301

humanity depends on the facts of this case. Since the court could choose to adjudicate on the merits, we examine the legal rights at issue in detail.

International law and U.S. law alike12 recognize claims for crimes against humanity due to extrajudicial killings.13 A claim for a crime against humanity in the case of extrajudicial killings must prove two elements: first, “a widespread or systematic attack directed against any civilian population, with knowledge of the attack.”14 A widespread attack is “conducted on a large scale against many people.”15 U.S. Courts have recognized crimes against humanity even with fewer than 100 victims.16 In Cabello, the Eleventh Circuit upheld a finding of crimes against humanity involving the killing of approximately 72 people.17 In Hurtado, this court issued a default judgment for crimes against humanity for an attack in which 60 people were killed.18 A systematic attack in contrast reflects “a high degree of orchestration and methodical planning.”19 The distinction appears to be: number of bodies (widespread) and whether an identifiable class of persons was deliberately targeted for killing (systematic). Notice also that it is in the alternative: either systematic or widespread extrajudicial killing is a violation of the fundamental human right to life. The facts in Mamani appear to meet either criterion.

(C.D. Cal. 2005).

12.Cabello, 402 F.3d at 1157–58; Ford ex rel. Estate of Ford v. Garcia, 289 F.3d 1283, 1286 (11th Cir. 2002) (extrajudicial killing).

13.<http://www.worldlii.org/int/cases/IACHR/2001/5.html>; Cabello, 402 F.3d at 1154; Almog

v.Arab Bank, PLC, 471 F. Supp. 2d 257, 278 (E.D.N.Y. 2007); Doe v. Saravia, 348 F. Supp. 2d 1112, 1153-54 (E.D. Cal. 2004); Estamirov v. Russia, 46 Eur. Ct. H.R. 33, ¶¶ 111-14 (2006); Barrios Altos Case, Judgment of March 14, 2001, Inter-Am. C.H.R. (Ser. C) No. 75 (summary execution a violation of international right to life).

14.Statute of the International Criminal Court, § 7(1)(a), available at <http://www.c- fam.org/docLib/20080625_Rome_Statutes_Criminal_Ct.pdf> ; See also, Cabello, 402 F.3d at 1161 (“To prove the claim of crimes against humanity, the Cabello survivors had to prove a widespread or systematic attack directed against any civilian population.”). Though the U.S. has not (yet) ratified its adhesion to the Rome Statute, that treaty is evidence of international customary law.

15.Presbyterian Church of Sudan v. Talisman Energy, Inc., 226 F.R.D. 456, 479-80 (S.D.N.Y. 2005); Aldana, 305 F. Supp. 2d at 1300 (defining a widespread attack as a “frequent, large-scale action carried out collectively with considerable seriousness and directed against a multiplicity of victims”), available at <http://caselaw.findlaw.com/data2/circs/2nd/070016p.pdf>

16.<http://openjurist.org/402/f3d/1148/cabello-v-fernandez-larios>

17.402 F.3d at 1152, 1161.

18.No. CA 07-21783, at 2; see also Mujica, 381 F. Supp. 2d at 1169, 1183 (crimes against humanity involving 17 deaths). But see, Prosecutor v. Musema, Case No. ICTR-96-13-A, ¶ 362, available at 2000 WL33348765 and at <http://www.unhcr.org/refworld/publisher,ICTR,,,48abd5791a,0.html> (Jan. 27, 2000).

19.Prosecutor v. Limaj, No. ICTY-03-66-T, Judgment, ¶ 183 (Nov. 30, 2005) [available at 2005 WL 3746053] and at <http://www.unhcr.org/refworld/publisher,ICTY,,,48ac19112,0.html>

302

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

Substantively then, the case presents a valid claim of a violation of the right to life. However, even if the litigants overcome the procedural obstacles (jurisdiction, comity, the act of state doctrine, immunity) they must still meet other U.S. prudential documents which could well preclude liability for what is, in Westphalian terms is a “purely internal affair” a “political” not “legal” issue. Since Alvarez-Machain v. United States and Alvarez-Machain v. Sosa,20 it is clear that ATS claims based on customary international law must rest on clear and certain rules – lex lata, not de lege ferenda. Thus “in determining what offenses violate customary international law, courts must proceed with extraordinary care and restraint.”21 So, Flores concluded that the alleged prohibition on “intranational pollution” and “rights to life and health [were] insufficiently definite to constitute rules22 of customary international law.” In sum: ATS claims must assert a ‘clear and unambiguous’ rule of customary international law”).23

Likewise, since Sosa it is clear that the requirement of exhaustion of local remedies is a strict one.24 Lower courts have made clear that exhaustion is a serious obstacle to ATS Claims: “Although we decline to impose an absolute requirement of exhaustion in ATS cases, we conclude that, as a threshold matter, certain ATS claims are appropriately considered for exhaustion under both domestic prudential standards and core principles of international law. Where the “nexus” to the United States is weak, courts should carefully consider the question of exhaustion, particularly, but not exclusively, with respect to claims that do not involve matters of “universal concern.” Matters of “universal concern” are offenses “for which a state has jurisdiction to punish without regard to territoriality or the nationality of the offenders.”25 ATS may be

20.See generally, Eric Allen Engle, Alvarez-Machain v. United States and Alvarez-Machain

v.Sosa: The Brooding Omnipresence of Natural Law, 13 WILLAMETTE J. INT'L L. & DISPUTE RES. (2005), available at SSRN: http://ssrn.com/abstract=1020514.

21.Kadic v. Karadzic, 70 F.3d 232, 248 (2d Cir.1995).

22.Flores v. Southern Peru Copper Corporation 414 F.3d 233, 254-255; Flores, 343 F.3d at 160, available at <http://openjurist.org/414/f3d/233/flores-v-southern-peru-copper-corporation> (holding that “the asserted ‘right to life’ and ‘right to health’ are insufficiently definite to constitute rules of customary international law”).

23.Beanal v. Freeport-McMoran, 197 F.3d 161, 167 (5th Cir.1999) (stating that customary international law cannot be established by reference to “abstract rights and liberties devoid of articulable or discernable standards and regulations”).

24.Sosa, 542 U.S. at 725, 124 S.Ct. 2739 (“[C]ourts should require any claim based on the present-day law of nations to rest on a norm of international character accepted by the civilized world and defined with a specificity comparable to the features of the 18th-century paradigms we have recognized.”).

25. Sarei v. Rio Tinto, PLC 550 F.3d 822 C.A.9 (Cal.), 2008, available online at <http://ca.findacase.com/research/wfrmDocViewer.aspx/xq/fac.%5CC09%5C2008%5C20081216_000 5649.C09.htm/> and citing 825 Kadic v. Karadzic, 70 F.3d 232, 240 (2d Cir.1995) (citing Restatement (Third) Foreign Relations Law of the United States § 404 (1987).

2011]

Alien Torts in Bolivia

303

invoked as to any tort, not merely jus cogens violations though the jus cogens torts have a procedural advantage with respect to the procedural limits on the ATS remedy.

Thus, in Mamani, I argue that plaintiffs should base their claim against extradjudicial killing on the Torture Victims Protection Act as well as the ATS. “A TVPA claim requires the following three elements: (1) an individual (2) committed torture or extrajudicial killing (3) under actual or apparent authority, or colour of law, of any foreign nation.”26 On the merits, a TVPA claim would likely succeed due to specific legislative enumeration of the substantive claim, as opposed to an uncertain claim on customary international law.

Mamani presents theoretically good substantive claims under international law which could be remedied under the ATS or TVPA.27 The question is, whether and how the U.S. government will react to these claims. I argue that a vigorous enforcement of international human rights, particularly of jus cogens rights, via the ATS and TVPA will prove key in restoring the U.S. to its rightful role as a leader in the struggle for human rights and freedoms.

26.Sinaltrainal v. Coca-Cola Co. 578 F.3d 1252, 1265 C.A.11 (Fla., 2009), citing 28 U.S.C.

§1350 note § 2(a).

27.See, <http://www.haguejusticeportal.net/eCache/DEF/10/034.html> (for the legal papers on

Mamani).

304

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

REVIEW OF MAJOR DECISIONS ON FUNDAMENTAL RIGHTS AND FREEDOMS IN UGANDA, 2008–2009

Henry Onoria*

I. INTRODUCTION

The major decisions on fundamental rights and freedoms in the years 2008 and 2009 are underpinned by particular situations and circumstances obtaining in the preceding 4-5 years. They are largely two-fold. Firstly, a number of the decisions arose from key incidents of a politically-charged post-2005 period in the wake of the opening up of political space following the reversion to a multiparty system of governance. This included the prosecution of an opposition presidential candidate for various offences (including those under the anti-terrorism law); refusal to grant bail to officers and men awaiting trial before a military court and the intransigence of prosecuting terrorist suspects before military courts. These incidents provided the context of several decisions on fundamental rights before the Constitutional Court from 2004 to 2006 and, at the appellate stage, before the Supreme Court in 2008 and 2009. Secondly, several decisions, especially on appeal, were rendered in late 2008 and in 2009 owing to the lack of quorum to hear constitutional appeals before the Supreme Court.

In that respect, decisions of the Constitutional Court arising from petitions related to the aforementioned political-military incidents were not heard and determined on appeal until 2008 and 2009. This was also the case with appeals from other decisions of the Constitutional Court pertaining to the death penalty and grant of bail. And similarly the case with a petition before the Constitutional Court on fair trial guarantees within the military justice system (for which an appeal on an application had been pending before the Supreme Court since 2003).

The other major decisions in 2008 and 2009 were in respect of the freedom of assembly (in the context of the power of the police to prohibit assemblies); the right to property vis-à-vis protection of the environment; and the procedural aspects of enforcing human rights. This review examines these major decisions on fundamental rights and freedoms in the years 2008 and 2009.

* Senior Lecturer, Department of Public & Comparative Law, Faculty of Law, Makerere University. Email: <honoria@law.mak.ac.ug>

2011]

Major Decisions on Fundamental Rights & Freedoms in Uganda, 2008 - 2009

305

 

II. RIGHT TO LIFE VIS-À-VIS THE DEATH PENALTY

 

The right to life is guaranteed under article 22 of the 1995 Constitution.1 However, the right is not absolute and deprivation can inure as a result of a judicially-sanctioned sentence of death. The death penalty had been retained under the Constitution on the premise that it had the support of the majority of Ugandans with regard to certain heinous crimes.2 Although the penalty has been imposed by the courts since 1995, it has rarely been carried out, save for a few notable incidents.3

Additionally, while there has been debate on the constitutional or legal aspects of the penalty,4 this was never raised before the courts5 until 2003 when some 418 death row inmates petitioned the Constitutional Court to challenge the penalty and the conditions of their incarceration in Susan Kigula & 417 Ors v. Attorney General.6

Regarding it as an “exception to the enjoyment of the right to life”,7 and as not in contravention of the freedom from cruel, inhuman and degrading treatment or punishment, the Constitutional Court upheld the retention of the penalty (including the mode of its execution by hanging),8 although, by a majority of 3-2, it held the prescription of mandatory death sentences and delays in executions (resulting in the “death row” syndrome) unconstitutional.9 The Attorney General appealed and the

1.UGANDA CONST. (1995), art. 22(1).

2.See, e.g. REPORT OF THE UGANDA CONSTITUTIONAL COMMISSION: ANALYSIS AND

RECOMMENDATIONS (1993), ¶¶ 7.120-7.122. As of 2009, the penalty exists in respect of offences under the penal law: Penal Code Act, Cap. 120, §§ 23, 124, 129(1), 134(5), 189, 243(1), 286(2) and 319(2), Penal Code (Amendment) Act No. 7/2006, § 2; offences under the military law: Uganda Peoples’ Defence Forces Act, No. 7/2005, §§ 15, 17-20, 28-30, 32, 34, 36-8, 49-51, 53, 57, 60(a) and 70; and offences under the anti-terrorism law: Anti-Terrorism Act, No. 14/2002, § 7.

3.The incidents include the execution of thirty-one (31) civilian convicts (by hanging) at Luzira Government Prison in April 1999 and of two (2) low-ranking members of the armed forces (by firing squad) in March 2002 after summarily being tried for murder before a Field Court Martial.

4.See, e.g., G.P. Tumwiine-Mukubwa, The Promotion and Protection of Human Rights in East Africa, 6 EAST AFR. J. PEACE HUM RIGHTS 130 (2000), at 153; A.N. Makubuya, The Constitutionality of the Death Penalty in Uganda: A Critical Inquiry, 6 EAST AFR. J. PEACE HUM RIGHTS 222 (2000).

5.The constitutionality of the death penalty was alluded to by the Constitutional Court in an obiter dictum in Simon Kyamanywa v. Uganda, Const. Ref. No. 10/2000 (CC)(unreported), at 15.

6.Const. Petition No. 6/2003 [2005] 1 EALR 32 (CC).

7.Id., judgments of Okello, JA, at 143-5; Twinomujuni, JA, at 160-70; Mpagi-Bahigeine, JA, at 201-3. Neither the original court decision nor the case-reporting in the East African Law Reports contain a separate judgment of Byamugisha, JA.

8.Id., judgments of Okello, JA, at 53-4; Twinomujuni, JA, at 181-4; Mpagi-Bahigeine, JA, at

208.

9.Id., judgments of Okello, JA, at 149-52, 156-60 and Twinomujuni, JA, at 173-9, 186-91. The dissenting judgments did not regard the mandatory death sentences and death-row syndrome to be in contravention of articles 24, 28 and 44 of the Constitution. See, id., judgments of Mpagi-Bahigeine, JA,

306

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

petitioners cross-appealed to the Supreme Court in Attorney General v. Susan Kigula & 417 Ors.10

By and large, the Supreme Court upheld the decision of the Constitutional Court. Firstly of all, while recognizing that the “right to life is the most fundamental of all rights”,11 the Court regarded the retention of the penalty under article 22(1) of the Constitution to be in conformity with international human rights law and, in effect, Uganda’s obligations under the relevant treaty instruments.12 Further, it regarded the penalty under the constitution (and the international legal regime) as buttressed by safeguards, in particular the right to a fair hearing and the prerogative of mercy under articles 28 and 121 of the Constitution.13 Secondly, the Court rejected the contention that the penalty constituted cruel, inhuman and degrading treatment or punishment and is therefore inconsistent with articles 24 and 44(a) of the Constitution. It held that given the premise behind the drafting of articles 22 and 24 provisions, there was no conflict between the two provisions. It held that the non-subjection of the right to life under article 22(1) to the derogation clause under article 44 was to be considered against the safeguards to the right to life in several provisions of the constitution which underscored the fact that the penalty did not (and was never intended to) fall within the ambit of the freedoms under article 24 of the Constitution.14 The Court construed the absence of conflict between articles 22(1) and 24 on two other premises—that is, one historical and the other conceptual. On the one hand, the Court held that the relationship between the two provisions had to be contextualized in the history of Uganda. Reflecting on the country’s experiences with human rights violations, the

at 205-7, 209 and Kavuma, JA (agreeing with Mpagi-Bahigeine, JA that the “petition should fail in toto”).

10.Const. Appeal No. 3/2006 (SC) (unreported).

11.Id., at 11.

12.Id., at 11-8. The Court examined the scope of the right to life under international instruments such as the Universal Declaration of Human Rights, 1948; the International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights, 1966 and the African Charter on Human and Peoples’ Rights, 1981. In particular, the Court highlighted the use of the word “arbitrary” in the provisions of the instruments on the right to life as a recognition that “under certain acceptable circumstances a person may be lawfully deprived of his life.” See id., at 13, 17. In the end, the Court noted that “[t]he retention of capital punishment by itself is not illegal or unlawful or a violation of international law.” See id., at 19. Although this was not addressed by the Court, it is to be noted that Uganda is yet to ratify the Second Optional Protocol to the International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights that seeks to universally abolish the death penalty.

13.Id., at 13-4, 21-3. It concluded that, in light of the deliberative provisions encapsulating those safeguards, “the framers of the Constitution purposefully provided for the death penalty in the Constitution of Uganda.” See id., at 23.

14.Id., at 25, 29-31. The Court had prior deferred to the provisions of articles 6 and 7 of the International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights, regarding them to be in pari materia with articles 22(1) and 24 of the 1995 Constitution, and noted that the UN Human Rights Committee had not construed any conflict between the two provisions of the Covenant: id., at 14-5.

2011]

Major Decisions on Fundamental Rights & Freedoms in Uganda, 2008 - 2009

307

Court noted that:

The framers of the Constitution had in mind the recent history of Uganda, characterized by gross abuses of human rights … Article 22(1) is clearly meant to deal with and do away with extra-judicial killings by the state. The article recognizes the sanctity of human life but recognizes also that under certain circumstances acceptable in the country, that right might be taken away… The framers of the Constitution were also aware of the numerous instances of torture and other cruel punishments that had characterized our recent history. They seem to have come out on these two aspects of out history and dealt with them by providing that life is sacrosanct and may only be taken away after due process up to the highest court, and after the President has had opportunity to exercise the prerogative of mercy. On the other hand, there must not be torture or cruel, inhuman or degrading punishment under any circumstances. In our view there is no conflict between article 22(1) and 44(a).15

On the other hand, the Court considered the conceptual aspects of the right under article 22(1) and the freedoms under article 24 to underpin the absence of a conflict between the two provisions. It noted that while the freedoms in article 24 pertained to the quality of living as a process, the right in article 22 concerned with the existence of life as a state.16 In the court’s view, this conceptual discourse underpinned the higher value accorded to the freedoms in article 24 (as to render them non-derogable under article 44(a)) than to the right in article 22.17 In the end, the Court concluded that the “[death] sentence could not be torture, cruel or degrading punishment in the context of article 24.”18

15.Id., at 30-1. The Court referred to the human rights situation as documented in the reports of the Commission of Inquiry into violations of Human Rights in Uganda from 1962 to 1986 and the

Uganda Constitutional Commission: id., at 29-30. In light of the historical realities, the Court concluded: “the effect and purpose of the two provisions was to treat the right to life with qualification but with the necessary safeguards, while totally outlawing all forms of torture, cruel and degrading punishments as had been found to have taken place in Uganda”: Id., at 31.

16.Id., at 25-6.

17.Id. The Court pointed out that the conceptual premise on the right and the freedoms has resonance in the international human rights discourse.

18.Id., at 31.

308

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

Thirdly, the Court did not regard hanging, as a manner of carrying out the penalty, to be inconsistent with article 24 and 44(a) of the Constitution.19 Deferring to the constitutional permissibility of the penalty, the Court held that the “difficulty must be to identify the method of carrying it out … without causing excessive pain and suffering.”20 The Court was inclined to view “pain and suffering” as inherent in the execution of a penalty that is constitutionally permissible and, in that respect, it was unable to regard the manner of its execution by hanging “unconstitutional in the context of article 24 of the Constitution”.21

Fourthly, the Court upheld the judgment of the majority of the Constitutional Court as regards mandatory death sentences in certain capital offences and delays in the execution of sentences of death. The Court viewed the mandatory death sentence as a contravention of a fair trial and equality rights. Observing that the “process of sentencing is part of the trial”, the Court considered mandatory death to be inconsistent with a court’s exercise of its function as “an impartial tribunal in trying and sentencing a person” and therefore “compromises the principle of fair trial”.22 In the Court’s view, the denial or removal of a court’s exercise of sentencing powers was inconsistent with the right to a fair trial guaranteed under article 28(1) of the Constitution.23 Further, the Court felt that the failure to avail a convict of a capital offence the opportunity to mitigate a sentence (as was the case with a convict of a lesser offence) was inconsistent with the right to equality before (and under) the law as guaranteed under article 21 of the Constitution.24

Additionally, the Court viewed mandatory death sentence as constraining the functioning of (and the administration of justice by) the courts, particularly in exercise of judicial discretion in sentencing. It held that by “fixing a mandatory death penalty, Parliament removed the power to determine sentence from the courts” in a manner inconsistent with articles 121(5) and 126 of the Constitution and in denigration of the principle of separation of powers.25

As regards delays in the execution of death sentences, the Court construed the “death row” syndrome as occasioned by inordinate delays in carrying out executions

19.Id., at 53-8. Hanging as the method of carrying out the penalty is provided for by section 99 of the Trial on Indictments Act, Cap. 23.

20.Id., at 55-6. The Court considered “a method that causes death within minutes” to “meet the standards of not causing excessive pain and suffering.” See id., at 58.

21.Id., at 57.

22.Id., at 38, 41.

23.Id., at 38.

24.Id., at 38-40.

25.Id., at 38, 40-1.

2011]

Major Decisions on Fundamental Rights & Freedoms in Uganda, 2008 - 2009

309

and the conditions of incarceration pending execution.26 The Court construed inordinate delay in the context of death row syndrome as a period of three years after confirmation of a death sentence by the highest appellate court,27 and it held that, upon the expiration of the three years, a “death sentence shall be deemed to be commuted to life imprisonment without remission”.28

Ultimately, the orders of the Supreme Court are in respect of two key aspects of its judgment—the death row syndrome and mandatory death sentences. It ordered the processing and determination within three years of petitions of mercy for convicts whose sentences have been confirmed by the highest court, with inaction on petitions resulting in the sentences being commuted to life imprisonment without remission.29 Further, it ordered the remittal to the High Court of cases involving sentences arising from mandatory death provisions for hearing and determination solely on mitigation of sentences.30

Except for a few divergences in judicial reasoning and modification in the orders, the Supreme Court arrived at the same decision on the issues framed as the Constitutional Court. Nonetheless, the Court exhibited the same reluctance that had hamstrung the Constitutional Court with regards the interpretation of article 22(1) vis-à- vis article 24 of the Constitution. The Court’s reasoning is premised upon the supposed absence of conflict between articles 22 and 24 of the Constitution and, given its view that the right under article 22 was never intended to fall within the ambit of the freedoms under article 24, its decision is further based on a separate application and interpretation of the two constitutional provisions. To that end, the three strands that underpin its decision—the safeguards to the deprivation of the right under article 22(1); the historical context of articles 22(1) and 24; and the conceptual aspects of the right and freedoms—serve to highlight the keenness of the Court to construe article 22(1) separately from article 24 under the guise that there is no conflict between the two provisions. In deferring to the obligations under human rights treaties, the Court was partial in its examination and treatment of the decisions of the UN Human Rights Committee.

A correct rendering of the decisions of the Committee (and other human rights bodies) reveals a harmonious reading of the permissibility of the penalty vis-à-vis the likelihood of certain aspects of penalty being in violation of the prohibition on cruel,

26.Id., at 44.

27.Id., at 51-3.

28.Id., at 53, 59.

29.Id., at 59. The Court indicated that the petitions for mercy “must be processed and determined within three years from the date of confirmation of the sentence” (italics mine).

30.Id.

310

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

inhuman or degrading treatment or punishment. The gist of the decisions31—given the Court’s recognition of the provisions of the Covenant on Civil and Political Rights as being in pari materia with articles 22(1) and 24 of the Constitution—is: a general prohibition of the penalty is not envisaged under article 24 given that it is constitutionally permissible under article 22(1), save circumstances or factors pertaining to the penalty may situate punishment or treatment arising from the penalty within the proscription under article 24.32 This reflects a harmonious interpretation of articles 22(1) and 24 that the Court opted not to adopt33—for in the three strands that define its decision, the Court tended to construe article 22(1) separately from article 24. Thus, the existence of constitutional safeguards is examined in isolation of the fact that, irrespective of the safeguards, inordinate delays in carrying out executions situate the penalty within the proscription of article 24.34

The conceptualization of the right and the freedom as pertaining to the state of being and the process of living similarly underscores the Court’s views on the penalty (and manner of its execution by hanging) and the death row syndrome. It explains the Court’s disinclination to regard the penalty and hanging (as a manner of executing the penalty)—in contrast to the death row syndrome as a condition of incarceration— as falling within the proscription under article 24. However, there is difficulty with the conceptualisation of hanging as a facet of the existence of life as a state where the realities are such as to render the method to fall short of the threshold of article 24.

To view hanging in the context of the existence of life as a state in the conceptual discourse is to simplify and diminish the realities of the experiences that define hanging (or, for that matter, any other method of executing the penalty). The factual realities of hanging, as practiced in Uganda, are underpinned by acts of brutality and barbarism in the run-up to and by the act of execution itself that render it, as a manner of executing the penalty, cruel, inhuman and degrading within the proscription

31. The relationship between the death penalty and prohibition against torture and cruel, inhuman or degrading treatment provisions in human rights treaty instruments has been dealt with by the Human Rights Committee: e.g. Earl Pratt & Another v. Jamaica, Commn Nos 210/1986 and 225/1987, ¶¶ 13.7 and 14(a); Martin Howard v. Jamaica, Commn No. 317/1988, ¶ 12.2; Chitat Ng v. Canada, Commn No. 469/1991, ¶¶ 16.1-16.5; Joseph Kindler v. Canada, Commn No. 470/1991, ¶¶ 15.2-15.3; and the European Court on Human Rights: e.g. Soering v. United Kingdom (1989) 11 EHRR 439, ¶¶ 103-4, 111. For a discussion and analysis of some of these decisions, see K.N. Bojosi, The Death Row Phenomenon and the Prohibition against Torture and Cruel, Inhuman and Degrading Treatment, 4 AFR. HUM. RTS L. J. 303 (2004), at 319-21.

32.This understanding of the gist of the decisions, in particular the Ng and Soeting cases underpins the dissenting judgment of Egonda-Ntende, Ag. JSC, supra note 10, at 69-81, 89-90.

33.This is a criticism apparent in the dissenting judgment of Egonda-Ntende, Ag. JSC, id., at

74, 79.

34.See, Chitat Ng case, supra note 31, ¶ 16.1; Soering case, supra note 31, ¶ 111.

2011]

Major Decisions on Fundamental Rights & Freedoms in Uganda, 2008 - 2009

311

under article 24.35 In effect, there is difficulty in accepting the Court’s finding on hanging; for the method as practiced in Uganda fails to satisfy the test of “causing the least possible physical and mental suffering.”36 In fact, it is to be noted that the Court uses the phrase “causing excessive pain and suffering” which is a higher threshold than that used by the UN Human Rights Committee in the Ng case (and in its other decisions).

Therefore, although the decision of the Court might have been the right one, its reasoning on the pertinent issues as regards the relationship between articles 22(1) and 24 was premised on a separate, rather than harmonious, interpretation of the two provisions of the Constitution. It was therefore to that extent unsatisfactory. The proper interpretation—one that mirrors the jurisprudence of international human rights bodies—is to subject the constitutional permissibility of the death penalty to its non- contravention of the prohibition on torture, cruel, inhuman or degrading treatment or punishment.37 The factual realities of death row should have engendered that the court find the penalty as imposed (and not merely the conditions of incarceration) to constitute cruel, inhuman or degrading punishment of treatment.

III. THE RIGHT TO APPLY FOR GRANT OF BAIL

Bail is historically and traditionally associated with the administration of criminal justice. In that regard, applications for grant of bail are largely dealt with by the courts from the purview of criminal procedural law.38 In human rights discourse, it is a facet of the right to personal liberty.39 Since 1995 (particularly from 2004), the courts have in numerous decisions addressed the rationale for grant of bail in the context of other

35.The factual realities of hanging in Uganda—presented in an affidavit of one Mr. Okwanga, a former prison officer but was at the time of the petition on death row—include decapitation, bludgeoning and round-the-clock reminder of impending death by hanging for three days. It is to be noted that the Constitutional Court had found hanging, as a manner of executing the penalty, to be cruel but not in the context of article 24 given the constitutional permissibility of the penalty under article 22(1). See supra note 7, judgments of Okello, JA, at 153-4; Twinomujuni, JA, at 183-4 and Mpagi-Bahigeine, JA, at 208. In his dissenting judgment, Egonda-Ntende, Ag. JSC highlighted the realities in the use of hanging as a method of executing the penalty in Uganda. See supra note 10, at 81-90. In the end, he concluded that “hanging as a method of execution as it is carried out in Uganda is a cruel, inhuman and degrading treatment or punishment.” See id., at 90.

36.In the Ng case, the Human Rights Committee regarded asphyxiation by cyanide gas to constitute cruel and inhuman treatment in violation of article 7 of the Covenant, since it would not meet the test of “causing the least possible physical and mental suffering.” See supra note 31, ¶ 16.4.

37.See supra note 10, dissenting judgment of Egonda-Ntende, Ag. JSC, at 71-4, 79-80.

38.See, Magistrate Courts Act, Cap. 16, § 74; Trial on Indictments Act, § 14.

39.The right to apply for grant of bail is guaranteed under article 23(6) of the 1995 Constitution.

312

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

rights, especially the right to a fair trial,40 as well as the character of the fundamental right as guaranteed under the constitution.41 The rationale and character of the right to grant of bail resurfaced in the decisions rendered in 2008 in Foundation for Human Rights Initiative v. Attorney General42 and Attorney General v. Joseph Tumushabe43 before the Constitutional Court and the Supreme Court respectively.

In the FHRI case, the issues concerned the constitutionality and legality of the restrictions imposed on the grant of bail by specific provisions of, inter alia, the criminal procedural law and the military law.44 The provisions of the said laws were challenged as inconsistent with the provisions of, inter alia, article 23(6) of the Constitution.45 Before addressing the issues, the Constitutional Court reiterated an aspect of bail it had previously pronounced upon; that is, that bail is not an automatic right but is granted at the discretion of the courts.46 In that regard, the Court regarded the restrictions on grant of bail under sections 14(2) and 15(1)-(3) of the Trial on Indictments Act as not taking away the discretion given that the restrictions were not “mandatory” and the courts would still be “free to exercise discretion judicially … to

40.The courts have variedly addressed the grant of bail in light of the guarantees to the right to a fair trial under article 28 of the Constitution. On the right to presumption of innocence (art. 28(3)(a)): e.g. Emmanuel Katto v. Uganda, Crim. Misc. Appln No. 10/2005 (HC)(unreported); Aliphusadi Matovu

v.Uganda, Misc. Crim. Appln No. 15/2005 (HC)(unreported). On the right to a speedy trial (art. 28(1)): e.g. Joseph Tumushabe v. Attorney General, Const. Petition No. 6/2004 (CC)(unreported). On the right to be afforded adequate time and facilities for preparation of one’s defence (art. 28(3)(c)): e.g. Uganda v. Denis Obua, Crim. Appln No. 18/2005 (HC) (unreported).

41.The character of bail as a constitutional right has been affirmed by the courts: see, Col. (Rtd.) Dr. Kizza-Besigye v. Uganda, Crim Misc. Appln Nos 228 & 229/2005 (HC)(unreported); Uganda (DPP)

v.Col. (Rtd.) Dr. Kizza-Bseigye, Const. Ref. No. 10/2005 (CC)(unreported); Uganda Law Society v. Attorney General, Const. Petition No. 18/2005 (CC)(unreported).

42.Const. Petition No. 20/2006 (CC)(unreported).

43.Const. Appeal No. 3/2005 (SC) (unreported).

44.The impugned provisions were §§ 14(2), 15(1)-(3) of the Trial on Indictments Act; §§ 75(2) and 76 of the Magistrate Courts Act and §§ 219, 231 and 248 of the Uganda Peoples Defence Forces Act. It is to be noted that the Constitutional Court had in previous decisions hinted on the question of the constitutionality of certain provisions of the Trial on Indictments Act and the Magistrate Courts Act: see,

Tumushabe case, supra note 40, judgment of Twinomujuni, JA, at 17-8; Charles Mubiru v. Attorney General, Const. Petition No. 1/2001 (CC)(unreported). A similar concern had been expressed by the High Court: see, Alex Burton Ssemanda v. Uganda, Misc Appln No. 157/1999 (HC)(unreported), at 7.

45.The other provisions of the Constitution that the provisions of the laws were regarded inconsistent with were articles 20, 23(1), 28(1) and 28(3).

46.Supra note 43, at 20-3, 26. The lead judgment was delivered by Mukasa-Kikonyogo, DCJ. For the Constitutional Court’s previous pronouncement on this aspect of bail: see, Col (Rtd.) Dr. Kizza- Besigye case, supra note 41.

2011]

Major Decisions on Fundamental Rights & Freedoms in Uganda, 2008 - 2009

313

impose reasonable conditions on the applicant.”47

Additionally, the Court viewed the restrictions as underscored by the object and effect of bail as an important judicial instrument to ensure, on the one hand, “individual liberty” and, on the other, “the accused person’s appearance to answer charge or charges against him or her.”48 Further, it regarded the restrictions under the impugned provisions of the criminal procedural laws as not inimical to the right to presumption of innocence.49 Ultimately, the Court held that the right to bail had to be “enjoyed within the confines of the law” and, to that end, it declared that the provisions of sections 14(2) and 15(1)-(3) of the Trial on Indictments Act and section 75(2) of the Magistrate Courts Act were not inconsistent with article 20, 23(6) and 28 of the Constitution.50 However, in light of the fact that the State had conceded that the other impugned provisions of the criminal procedural law and military law, the Court declared them void to the extent of inconsistency with the provisions of article 23(6) of the Constitution.51

In the Tumushabe case, in an appeal from the decisions of the Constitutional Court by the Attorney General, the crucial issue, as rightly set out by the Supreme Court, concerned the constitutionality of the failure of the General Court Martial, as a military court, to release over 25 detained officers and men on bail.52 At the outset, the Court considered the genesis of the right to bail as the protection of the right to liberty: therefore while not questioning the relationship between the right to grant of bail and the right to a fair trial as underpinned the decisions of the Constitutional Court,53 the Supreme Court held that the rationale for the right was primarily to be founding the

47.Id., at 25. See generally, id., at 24-5. The provisions in question deal with the power of the court to cancel bail (§ 14(2)) and the accused being requited to demonstrate that he or she will not “abscond” or of the existence of “exceptional circumstances” (§ 15(1)-(3)).

48.Id., at 25-6.

49.Id., at 26, 28. The Court rejected the contention that the limitation in §75(2) of the Magistrate Courts Act – restricting grant of bail by a magistrate court with regards to certain offences – inferred guilt on part of the accused for the offences preferred: id., at 28. It is to be noted that the High Court had held somewhat in similar terms that “rejection of a bail application and presumption of innocence can co-exist:” Dr. Aggrey Kiyingi v. Uganda, Misc. Crim. App. No. 41/2005 (HC).

50.Id., at 28.

51.These included § 16 of the Trial on Indictments Act, § 76 of the Magistrate Courts Act and

§§219, 231 and 248 of the Uganda Peoples Defence Forces Act: id., at 28-9, 30.

52.The Supreme Court felt that the arguments before (and decision of) the Constitutional Court had obscured the crucial issue in the petition: supra note 44, judgments of Mulenga, JSC, at 6 and Katureebe, JSC, at 9.

53.For an analysis of the decision of the Constitutional Court in 2004: see, H. Onoria, Review of Major Decisions on Fundamental Rights and Freedoms in Uganda in 2004, 11 EAST AFR.J.PEACE HUM

RIGHTS 323 (2005), at 346-9.

314

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

right to personal liberty itself.54

Admitting that the right to liberty is not absolute and is subject to limitation, the Court considered the permissible derogations “not permanent or indefinite”, with liberty reclaimable through specific judicial guarantees in the right to an order of habeas corpus and the right to bail.55 The Court regarded the non-derogable character of the right to an order of habeas corpus to lie in the question of the lawfulness of a detention in contrast to the question of seeking release from detention in respect of the right to bail—in the former, a court must order release of a detainee while in the latter, a court has discretion whether to grant such release.56 However, the Court considered the discretion to grant bail qualified with respect to mandatory bail, since a “court has no discretion except in regard to reasonable conditions to impose.”57

More significantly, the Supreme Court addressed the import of the provisions on mandatory bail in light of the fact that much of the confusion before the Constitutional Court stemmed from construing clauses (b) and (c) of article 23(6) of the Constitution.58 The Court held that the object of the two provisions was not to identify or distinguish the courts empowered to grant bail but rather to stipulate the maximum periods of custody on remand.59 The Court observed that the differentiation in the periods of custody for purposes of mandatory release on bail obtains from pre-trial procedures in respect of indictable offences before the High Court, which calls for more time, while such procedures are not required for cases tried before “subordinate courts.”60

Ultimately, the Supreme Court held that article 23(6) of the Constitution applied to every person awaiting trial for criminal offence without exception61 and, in that regard, included persons awaiting trial before the General Court Martial as a military court. The Court viewed this as arising from a constitutional guarantee of rights to every person and a constitutional imposition of duties upon the State, its

54.Supra note 43, at 7-9.

55.Id., at 8-9.

56.Id., at 9.

57.Id. In the FHRI case, the Constitutional Court stated somewhat similarly that “in … article 23(6)(b) and (c) [of the Constitution] the court has discretion to determine the conditions of bail.” See supra note 42, at 23.

58.The pertinent issue before the Constitutional Court was in respect of the two clauses of article 23(6) of the Constitution applied to proceedings before the General Court Martial. For a review of the Court’s decision on this issue. See, Onoria, supra note 53, at 348-9.

59.See supra note 43, at 9-10.

60.Id., at 10.

61.Id. The Court stated: “The framers of the Constitution deliberately directed the provisions in Article 23(6) to everybody who happens to be on criminal charge and so had no reason to particularise any category.” See id., at 11.

2011]

Major Decisions on Fundamental Rights & Freedoms in Uganda, 2008 - 2009

315

diverse agencies and organs and all persons to uphold the rights so guaranteed. It stated that:

[T]he Constitution guarantees to every person the enjoyment of the rights set out in Chapter 4 except only in the circumstances that are expressly stipulated in the Constitution. The Constitution also commands the Government, its agencies and all persons, without exception, to uphold those rights. The General Court Martial is not exempted from the constitutional command to comply with the provisions of Chapter 4 or of Article 23(6) in particular, nor is a person on trial before a military court deprived of the right to reclaim his/her liberty through … application for mandatory bail in appropriate circumstances.62

In the end, the Court held that the failure to release the detainees, remanded in custody for more than 120 days awaiting trial before the General Court Martial, was “inconsistent with Article 23(6)(b) of the Constitution.”63

IV. THE RIGHT TO A FAIR TRIAL

The right to a fair trial guaranteed under article 28 of the Constitution was a crucial facet of several decisions in 2008 and 2009. This included the decisions of the Supreme Court on the death penalty and the right to grant of bail in the Kigula and Tumushabe case respectively. The more significant decision however was rendered by the Constitutional Court in 2009 in respect of the guarantees that buttress the right in the context of military courts and military justice in Uganda Law Society & Anor v. Attorney General.64 Filed in the wake of the military execution of two low-ranking soldiers at Kotido in March 2002,65 the petitioners challenged the trial of the soldiers before a Field Court Martial as being in violation of the right to a fair trial under article

62.Id., at 11.

63.Id., at 15. The Court upheld the detainees’ right to mandatory bail under article 23(6) of the Constitution “irrespective of the provisions of the UPDF Act concerning bail.” In any event, the provisions on bail under the military law had been declared inconsistent with article 23(6) of the Constitution by the Constitutional Court in the FHRI case, supra notes 44 and 51 and accompanying text. The decision in the FHRI case was delivered three months prior to the decision of the Supreme Court in the Tumushabe case.

64.Const. Petition Nos 2 and 8/2002 (CC) (unreported).

65.For a constitutional-legal analysis of the trial and executions, see H. Onoria, Soldiering and Constitutional Rights in Uganda: Kotido Military Executions, 9 EAST AFR. J. PEACE HUM. RIGHTS 87 (2003).

316

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

28 of the Constitution.66 Additionally, in light of that trial, the petitioners challenged the subsequent execution of the soldiers as a violation of the right to life under article 22 of the Constitution.

In terms of the right to a fair trial, the Court grudgingly regarded the Field Court Martial as satisfying the requirement of “independence” and “impartiality” in article 28(1) of the Constitution within the context of the existing laws under which it was constituted and the military structure in which it operated.67 Additionally, the Court found a “substantial compliance” with the right to language of the accused as guaranteed under article 28(3)(b) of the Constitution, except it opted to couch it as the “right to an interpreter.”68 However, the Court regarded the three hour trial to be a contravention of article 28(1) of the Constitution, noting that the requirement of a “speedy” trial had to “be measured against the requirement that the trial must be fair in all other aspects spelt out by the Constitution.”69

Further, the Court felt that, given the circumstances surrounding the trial before the field military court—haste in the trial, the quiet and unquestioning attendance of the accused soldiers to proceedings—the right to adequate time and facilities to prepare a defence and the right to legal representation as guaranteed under article 28(3)(c) and (e)

66.The two petitions, filed separately by the Law Society and Jackson Karugaba, were consolidated by the Constitutional Court. It is to be noted that the decision of the Constitutional Court was rendered seven years after the petitions were filed in 2002 owing to several factors. Firstly, the petitioners sought a stay to further death penalty executions in the military (Uganda Law Society & Anor v. Attorney General, Const App. No. 7/2003 (CC) (unreported)) which application was unsuccessful before the Constitutional Court. Secondly, the petitioners appealed to the Supreme Court (Uganda Law Society & Another v. Attorney General, Const Appeal No. 4/2003) and, as occurred to several other appeals between 2004 and 2008, the appeal became victim to lack of quorum in the Supreme Court and it remained unfixed and unheard until 2008. Thirdly, when the appeal eventually came up for hearing, it was withdrawn by the petitioners (appellants) and the petition was thereupon heard on its merits before the Constitutional Court.

67.See supra note 64, at 14-17. The lead judgment was delivered by Twinomujuni, JA. See also the declaration of Kavuma, JA, at 40-41.

68.Id., at 17-18. See also declaration of Kavuma, JA, at 44. The right to an interpreter is in fact guaranteed under article 28(3)(f) of the Constitution. The Court noted that, at the start of the trial before the field court, the accused were asked the language they preferred to use and they indicated Kiswahili and, although the Court remarked as to the absence on record of the military court of the identity of a person brought to interpret in Kiswahili, the corollary could have been that, having indicated a language of preference, the accused were conversant with the language and there was therefore no need for an interpreter. The Court’s holding is invariably bolstered by a contextual interpretation of clauses (b) and (f) of article 28(3) of the Constitution

69.Id., at 17. The Court emphasized that haste in the trial process was never intended to be at the expense of a proper investigation and prosecution of the case. See, however declaration of Kavuma, JA, arguing that speed is a facet of administration and operations in the military: id., at 43-44.

2011]

Major Decisions on Fundamental Rights & Freedoms in Uganda, 2008 - 2009

317

of the Constitution had been contravened.70 The Court expressed particular disquiet over the right to legal representation since the soldiers were charged with capital offences.71 Ultimately, it held that the “gross contravention of article 28(3) (e) of the Constitution” was not “cured by the fact that there was a military legal officer present throughout the trial.”72 In the end, having construed article 28 of the Constitution as a “package of protections” (each constituting inexhaustively what the right to a fair trial comprises of),73 the Court concluded that, given the denial of certain of those protections, “the trial cannot be said to [have been] fair.”74 In light of the violation of the right to a fair trial, the Court additionally considered the execution of the soldiers to have been in contravention of article 22(1) of the Constitution.75

It is to be noted that the Court found a violation of the right to life within the purview of article 22(1) itself given that, apart from requiring a sentence of death to inure from a fair trial, the court handing down a death penalty conviction has to be competent and the conviction has to be confirmed by the highest appellate court. Although it considered a field Court Martial to be a competent court76 and a right of appeal to exist from decisions of the field military court,77 the Court felt that the condemned soldiers had been denied the right of appeal and the sentences had not been confirmed by the Supreme Court as the highest appellate court.78

The right to a fair trial in the context of trial before the military courts was also considered in an appeal before the Supreme Court involving the Law Society in Attorney General v. Uganda Law Society.79 The contentious issue on appeal, as had been the case before the Constitutional Court, concerned the trial of civilians for offences of terrorism before military courts as well as before the High Court. In

70.Id., at 18-20. On the right to legal representation, see also declaration of Kavuma, JA, at 44-45. For a discussion of the pertinent issues on legal representation (as relied upon by the Court). See, Onoria, supra note 65, at 104-5.

71.The Court observed that “the proceedings of the [court] … reveal that the accused [were] not even informed that he had a right to legal representation;” id., at 18.

72.Id., at 20.

73.Id., at 13, 20.

74.Id., at 20.

75.Id., at 21, 30-31.

76.Id., at 24-5. See also, declaration of Kavuma, JA, at 39-40.

77.Id., at 26-27.

78.Id., at 27-30. See, however, declaration of Kavuma, JA, disputing the existence of a right of appeal from the decisions of a field military court in light of the provisions of the military law, although he held that the non-existence of a right of appeal under the law resulted in the “execution of the soldiers before their sentences had been confirmed by the Supreme Court” in violation of their right to life under article 22(1) of the Constitution. See id., at 46-48.

79.Const. Appeal No. 1/2006 (SC) (unreported).

318

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

upholding the judgment of the lower court, the Supreme Court considered the concurrent trials of the accused persons in the two courts to be “inconsistent with the principle underlying the provision in Article 28(9) of the Constitution.”80 The Court noted that prosecutorial discretion as regards trial should entail recognition of the principle that an accused person should be “subjected to trial on the same facts only once”81—that, is the principle against double jeopardy. To that end, the trial of the accused persons for the same offences of terrorism with respect to the same facts, albeit concurrently and in different courts, was inconsistent with the right to protection against double jeopardy under article 28(9) of the Constitution.

The other major decision on the right to a fair trial was in Soon Yeon Kim & Anor v. Attorney General.82 The matter before the Constitutional Court, coming as a reference from a criminal trial before a magistrate court, concerned the right of the applicants, as accused persons, to be availed copies of prosecution witness statements and exhibits. Reflecting on a history of pre-trial procedure in Uganda since 1960s,83 the Constitutional Court considered pre-trial disclosure a facet of the right to a fair trial in the context of the guarantees on presumption of innocence, being afforded adequate facilities and preparation of one’s defence and equality of arms between litigants.84 The Court therefore regarded what it viewed as “trial by ambush” to be inconsistent with the provisions of article 28(3)(a), (c), (d) and (g) of the Constitution. In the end, it held that an accused person had a prima facie right to pre-trial disclosure of material statements and exhibits, with the timing and scope of disclosure within the discretion of a trial court.85

V. FREEDOM OF ASSEMBLY

The freedom of assembly is part of the quintet of freedoms guaranteed under article 29(1) of the 1995 Constitution.86 The freedom was the subject of a petition filed before the Constitutional Court in Muwanga Kivumbi v. Attorney General.87 The petition arose

80.Id., at 10. The lead judgment was delivered by Mulenga, JSC

81.Id., at 10-11.

82.Const. Ref. No. 6/2007 (CC) (unreported).

83.The court noted that pre-trial disclosure arrangements in Uganda had moved from preliminary hearings (screening) to disclosure under the Criminal Procedure (Summary of evidence) Act 1967 to trial by “ambush” under the Magistrate Courts (Amendment) Statute 1990, id., at 7-8.

84.Id., at 5-8.

85.Id., at 8-9. The Court observed that “[e]ssentially, disclosure should be made before the trial commences depending on the justice of each case and on which documents to be disclosed:” id., at 9.

86.See supra note 1, art. 29(1)(d).

87.Const. Petition No. 9/2005 (CC) (unreported).

2011]

Major Decisions on Fundamental Rights & Freedoms in Uganda, 2008 - 2009

319

from several aborted efforts between March and May 2005 by the Popular Resistance against Life Presidency (PRALP), of which the petitioner was a member, to organize a rally, seminar and public dialogues in various places in Uganda. The PRALP’s efforts, through letters written seeking permission to hold the said assemblies, were thwarted by refusals to grant permission in light of the provisions of the police law. The contention before the Court pertained to the constitutionality of section 32 of the Police Act.

The Constitutional court declared the impugned provision of the police law unconstitutional for being in contravention of the freedom of assembly under article 29(1)(d) of the Constitution. The decision of the court is premised on several reasons. Firstly, the Court considered the freedom of assembly to lie at the heart of public debates and discourse and was therefore closely related to the other conscientious freedoms under article 29(1) of the Constitution and, in that regard, it was a vital aspect of a democratic society. Mpagi-Bahigeine, JA stated:

[T]he right of assembly is the aggregate of the individual liberty of the person and individual liberty of speech. The liberty to have personal opinions and the liberty to express them is one of the purposes of the right to assemble, which right or freedom constitutes one of the essential foundations of a democratic society and one of the basic conditions for its progress and therefore each individual’s self- fulfillment.88

Secondly, in its examination of the nature of the restrictions under the police law, the Court considered them to be prohibitive than regulatory,89 particularly in light of the availability of other powers exercisable by the police to maintain law and order—the Court viewed such powers to include the arrest of any persons acting in breach of the peace, provision for more security in anticipation of disturbances, securing undertakings of good behavior, etc.90 Thirdly, the Court considered the police law to place the power to prohibit assemblies at the mercy of the subjective reasoning of the police chief or his

88.Id., at 7. See also judgments of Kitumba, JA, at 9 and Byamugisha, JA, at 11-2. The lead judgment was delivered by Byamugisha, JA.

89.Id., judgments of Mukasa-Kikonyogo, DCJ, at 4; Okello, JA, at 6 and Byamugisha, JA, at 13, 16. Byamugisha, JA observed that the operative word in section 32(2) of the Police Act as to powers of the Inspector General of Police with regard to assemblies is “to prohibit,” which ordinarily means “to forbid someone from doing something.” See id., at 13.

90.Id., judgments of Mukasa-Kikonyogo, DCJ, at 4; Okello, JA, at 6; Mpagi-Bahigeine, JA, at 7; Kitumba, JA, at 9; and Byamugisha, JA, at 15.

320

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

junior officers, with the danger that it could be exercised arbitrarily and excessively.91 The decision of the Court addresses what has been a perennial situation in which peaceful processions and demonstrations have been forcibly dispersed by the

police and, in extreme cases, has involved the use of tear-gas and batons. However, owing perhaps to the narrowness of the scope of the petition—in the sense that it sought to impugn the provisions of section 32 of the Police Act as regards the power of the police to prohibit assemblies—the other nugatory aspects of policing powers over assemblies were left unaddressed.92 This is particularly the case with the provisions of section 35 of the Act requiring the obtaining of a permit to assemble (and criminalizing participation in an assembly held without such a permit): in fact, the PRALP’s efforts, through letters, were to seek permission for the various assemblies it had intended to hold. The Constitutional Court’s decision about arbitrariness applies similarly to the unchallenged provisions of the Act, since they hijack and place the freedom of assembly under the personal disposition and uncontrolled discretionary power of an individual police officer.93

VI. THE RIGHT TO PROPERTY VIS-À-VIS PROTECTION OF THE

ENVIRONMENT

The concern over the utilization of natural resources and preservation of the environment was dealt with by the Constitutional Court in Amooti Godfrey Nyakana v. National Environment Management Authority & 6 Ors.94 The petition was brought in the wake of the demolition of the petitioner’s incomplete house by the first respondent after inspections had revealed that the house was being constructed on a wetland and after the authority had served him with an environmental restoration order. The

91.Id., judgments of Mukasa-Kikonyogo, DCJ, at 4; Okello, JA, at 5-6 and Kitumba, JA, at 8-9 (noting that section 32(2) of the Police Act gave the Inspector General of Police excessive powers that he may use as he wishes to curtail rights and freedoms) and Byamugisha, JA, at 12 (noting the dangers of the power being exercised by the police in an unaccountable and discriminatory manner and of its being “open ended since it has no duration”).

92.For a critical analysis of the case, see R. Kakungulu-Mayambala, Muwanga Kivumbi v. Attorney General: An Appraisal of the Right to Assemble and Demonstrate in Uganda, 14 EAST AFR. J. PEACE HUM. RIGHTS 485 (2008).

93.The courts in Tanzania, Ghana, Zimbabwe and Zambia have struck down (and declared unconstitutional) provisions of police (or public order) legislation requiring the obtaining of a permit in order to hold a peaceful assembly: see, Rev. Christopher Mtikila v. Attorney-General, Civil Case No. 5/1991 (unreported) (Tanzania HC); New Patriotic Party (NPP) Headquarters v. Inspector-General of Police & Ors, Writ No. 4/1993 (unreported) (Ghana SC); Re Munhumeso & Ors [1994] 1 LRC 282 (Zimbabwe SC); Christine Mulundika & 7 Ors v. The People [1996] 2 LRC 175 (Zambia SC).

94.Const. Petition No. 3/2005 (CC) (unreported).

2011]

Major Decisions on Fundamental Rights & Freedoms in Uganda, 2008 - 2009

321

issuance and service of the restoration order was made under the provisions of sections 67, 68 and 70 of the National Environment Act. The petitioner challenged the said provisions of the environmental law as inconsistent with articles 21, 22, 24, 26, 28, 43, 237 and 259 of the Constitution. In the end, the issues were narrowed down to whether the Act (and actions of the first respondent) were inconsistent with the petitioner’s rights to property and fair hearing under articles 26 and 28 of the Constitution.

In dismissing the petition, the Constitutional Court took cognisance of the fact that the National Environment Act conferred upon the first respondent “power to deal with and protect the environment for the benefit of all”.95 The Court noted that the Act imposed restrictions on the use of wetlands and, in that regard, vested in the first respondent the power to carry out inspection on the petitioner’s land to ascertain that its use was in compliance with the provisions of the law.96 Further, the Court regarded the environmental restoration order as drawing the attention of the petitioner to the misuse of land and his obligation to restore the environment.97 In the end, it rejected that there had been an infringement on the petitioner’s right to property under article 26 of the Constitution, given that “[w]hat was taken away from him was misuse of land and this was done to protect the environment.”98 Additionally, the Court held that, given the grace period accorded to the petitioner after being served with the environmental restoration order, the provisions of the Act has “in built mechanisms for fair hearing as is enshrined in Article 28 [of the Constitution].”99

The decision of the Court highlights the growing concerns over the use (and misuse) of ecologically-fragile areas for human activity. Unfortunately, the more pertinent concern as to how in the first place part of a wetland was leased to the petitioner as private property was not addressed by the Court. Nonetheless, it was voiced in passing by Mpagi-Bahigeine, JA who, in agreeing with the judgment of the Court, emphasised that “such wetlands could not be granted to private individuals/entities because the State holds such natural resources in trust for the citizenry and they must be preserved for the public benefit, in this case to protect the environment.”100

95.Id., at 13.

96.Id., at 12-13. The Court observed that restrictions on the use of wetlands were provided under section 36 of the Act and that “the petitioner is not challenging the constitutionality of these restrictions.”

97.Id., at 13.

98.Id., at 14 (my italics).

99.Id., at 13. The Court noted that “upon receipt of the restoration order, the petitioner had 21 days within which to make a presentation to the first respondent for a review or variation of its order.”

100.Id., at 14.

322

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

VII. PROCEDURAL ASPECTS IN ENFORCING HUMAN RIGHTS

For several years after the 1995 Constitution, the enforcement of fundamental rights and freedoms has proceeded in part on the basis of procedural rules that predate the constitution. The relevant procedural rules—particularly where the enforcement is sought before the High Court as a “competent court” in terms of article 50 of the Constitution—have been the 1992 Fundamental Rights and Freedoms (Enforcement Procedure) Rules.101 The other rules adopted in 1996 after the inception of the constitution were intended to deal with petitions to the Constitutional Court.102

Over the years, while it was accepted that claims in respect of violations of human rights (in which no interpretation of the Constitution is called for) could be brought before a “competent court” other than the Constitutional Court, the manner of presentation of such claims was never clearly defined. In most instances, given the accepted practice, the claims were filed before the High Court by way of notice of motion. The procedure and manner of presentation of claims for violations of human rights was the subject of three decisions across the three tiers of the courts of record in 2008 and 2009. In Charles Harry Twagira v. Attorney General & 2 Ors,103 the appellant had filed before the High Court an application seeking several declarations of the court with respect of his criminal prosecution before a magistrate court. Before the High Court and on two appeals, the contention pertained to the appropriateness of the appellant presenting his application by way of notice of motion rather than as a petition (to the Constitutional Court).

Reaffirming the now-settled position that claims seeking declarations involving interpretation of the constitution had to be presented by petition under article 137 of the Constitution,104 the Supreme Court voiced concern as to the propriety of instituting a claim in respect of declarations on human rights as well as damages by notice of motion.105 The Court’s concern was in respect of how the damages could be awarded by a court without evidence being called as to such damages in the absence of

101.SI No. 26/1992 (or SI 13-14 with the 2000 revision of the laws of Uganda). Under the Rules, a person seeking to enforce his or her rights had to apply to a single judge of the High Court for necessary redress.

102.Const. Court (Petitions of Declarations under Article 137 of the Constitution) Direction, Legal Notice No. 4/1996. The Direction has since been replaced by the Constitutional Court (Petitions and References) Rules, SI 91/2005.

103.Civil App. No. 4/2007 (SC) (unreported).

104.Id., at 12, 15. For an examination of the jurisprudence on jurisdiction of the Constitutional Court under articles 50 and 137 of the Constitution, see, Onoria, supra note 53, at 361-66.

105.Civil App. No. 4/2007, supra note 103, at 13.

2011]

Major Decisions on Fundamental Rights & Freedoms in Uganda, 2008 - 2009

323

institution of an ordinary suit by way of a plaint.106 It held that in spite of the prevailing practice as regards the institution of proceedings under article 50 of the Constitution by notice of motion, this was not the only procedure for doing so.107 In the end, the Court held that the “[p]rocedure under Article 50 can be by plaint or by motion depending on the facts and nature of each case.”108 In the context of the ruling of the Court, it is implicit that a claim primarily for declarations as regards human rights could be brought by notice of motion while a claim that additionally sought damages could only be brought by way of a plaint.

The manner of instituting a claim in respect of human rights was also raised in

Hannington Mwesigwa & 3 Ors v. Attorney General,109 in which the appellants appealed against the dismissal of their application before the High Court seeking the enforcement of their human rights as well as damages. Their application, brought under article 50 of the Constitution, was by notice of motion. Although the Court of Appeal conceded that, in light of the Twagira case, the appellants’ claim in seeking additionally damages should have been brought by way of a plaint,110 it considered the Supreme Court decision as having been overtaken with the adoption of new procedural rules in 2008 requiring claims regarding human rights under article 50 of the Constitution to be brought by notice of motion.111 The Court further observed that the concerns of the Supreme Court as regards proof of damages by evidence had been addressed under the new rules.112

The 2008 rules were in issue before the High Court in Eng. J.S. Ghataura v. Uganda Telecom Ltd.,113 in which the plaintiff sued the defendant for the violation of his right to a clean and healthy environment under article 39 of the Constitution. The claim under article 50 of the Constitution, by plaint, was in respect of the defendant allegedly illegally erecting a mast in a residential area. Given that the suit had been

106.Id., at 13, 15.

107.Id., at 15-6.

108.Id., at 16.

109.Civil Appeal No. 2/2008 (CA) (unreported).

110.Id., at 3. The appellants’ claim before the High Court was in respect of acts of mistreatment, torture and detention incommunicado committed against them by the military.

111.Id., at 5-6. The new procedural rules, adopted by the Rules Committee (chaired by the Chief Justice) are the Judicature (Fundamental Rights and Freedoms Enforcement Procedure) Rules, SI 55/ 2008. The rules came into force on 12 December 2008, five months after the decision of the Supreme Court in the Twagira case delivered on 7 July 2008.

112.Id., at 7. Reflecting on the possibility of calling evidence on any particular matter in an application (by notice of motion) under rule 6 of the 2008 Rules, the Court noted that “the Rules Committee has made an innovation for a simpler way of adducing evidence to prove anything including damages.”

113.Civil Suit No. 238/2008 (HC) (unreported).

324

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

filed before the 2008 rules came into force, the Court considered the procedure to be that under the then prevailing specific procedural rules (the 1992 rules) “by way of notice of motion.”114 In the end, the Court regarded the procedure adopted by the plaintiff in instituting a plaint with respect to his human rights as “fundamentally flawed.”115

Although the decision of the Court is largely correct in terms of the law, neither the court nor counsel referred to the decisions of the Supreme Court and Court of Appeal in respect of the Twagira and Mwesigwa cases. The correctness of the decision, given the context of its filing prior to the 2008 rules, lies in the fact that the plaintiff was primarily seeking a declaration as to his human rights. In light of the decision in the Twagira case, the claim ought to have been brought by notice of motion (rather than by plaint). In effect, although the High Court observed that the pre-2008 procedure by notice of motion had been re-adopted in the 2008 rules,116 this could not be the proper premise of its decision.

VIII. ADDITIONAL OBSERVATIONS AND CONCLUDING REMARKS

It was noted at the outset of this review, the major decisions on fundamental rights and freedoms in 2008 and 2009 were in respect of petitions and appeals that had been pending before the courts for several years. The passage of the years during which the petitions and appeals were pending had implications for decisions before the courts in respect of the pertinent human rights issues underlying those decisions. This was for instance the case with death penalty convictions. Additionally, with appeals pending before the Supreme Court, the status of provisions of specific laws vis-à-vis human rights had remained in a flux. The following observations and remarks address the import and implications of the major (and certain minor) decisions during (and prior to) 2008 and 2009 upon the scope, content and enforcement of fundamental rights and freedoms in Uganda.

A. Death Penalty Convictions: Reasserting Judicial Discretion on Sentencing?

Although the constitutional permissibility of the death penalty was reaffirmed in the Kigula case, the Supreme Court importantly reasserted the discretion of the courts to hand down death penalty convictions. In real terms, it even took away the power of the executive to dither over death penalty executions in the context of the Court’s orders

114.Id., at 3, 5-6.

115.Id., at 5.

116.Id., at 3.

2011]

Major Decisions on Fundamental Rights & Freedoms in Uganda, 2008 - 2009

325

regarding inordinate delays and death row. The correctness of the overall decision of the Supreme Court—and the question as to whether the retention of the penalty under article 22(1) of the Constitution only “recognizes its existence” but does not constitutionalize the penalty as such117—will undoubtedly remain the subject of further debate among human rights activists and scholars.

More significantly, the decisions of the Supreme Court addressed the sense of uncertainty over the penalty that had bedeviled the three tiers of the higher courts—the High Court, Court of Appeal and the Supreme Court itself—during the three or so years of the pending constitutional appeal. While the appeal was pending, sentencing of offenders convicted of capital offences was the source of considerable uncertainty at the High Court while it largely came to a standstill at the Court of Appeal and the Supreme Court. At the High Court and the Court of Appeal, the judges tended, in light of the decision of the Constitutional Court (although it was subject to appeal), to view the power to hand down death penalty convictions as discretionary and, in that respect, heard convicted offenders in mitigation and imposed lesser sentences where appropriate.118 On the other hand, the stance of the Supreme Court was to suspend or postpone confirmation of death sentences.119 In the aftermath of the judgment of the Supreme Court, the courts have asserted the discretion to hand down death sentences within the context of the constitutional permissibility of the penalty.120

117.For this view see, Tumwiine-Mukubwa, supra note 4, at 153.

118.See, e.g. Uganda v. Bizimana, Crim. Case No. 122/2005 (HC) (unreported). The High Court sentenced the accused, convicted (with several others) of nine counts of murder, to 15 years imprisonment instead of death, noting that, in light of the Kigula case, “the [Constitutional] court ordered that in capital offence the trial court must, before sentencing the convict afford him/her a hearing on mitigation of sentence.” See, William Okwang v. Uganda, Crim. Appeal No. 69/2002 (CA) (unreported). The Court of Appeal noted that, given the decision of the Constitutional Court, it had to take “into account all the mitigating factors,” although in the end, it “found no mitigating factors deserving reduction of the sentence” given that it was of the “considered view that this was a brutal murder.” But see, Uganda v. Wepondi Robert alias Mutto, Crim. Case No. 3/2005 (HC) (unreported). The High Court, in sentencing the accused to death for convictions on three counts of murder, held that there was “only one sentence authorized by the law and that is that you shall suffer death in a manner authorised by the law.” The Wepondi case was decided just over a month after the Constitutional Court had declared mandatory death sentences to be unconstitutional in the Kigula case.

119.See, e.g., Henry Walugembe & Anor v. Uganda, Crim. Appeal No. 39/2003 (SC)(unreported); Susan Kigula Serembe & Anor v. Uganda, Crim. Appeal No. 1/2004 (SC) (unreported); Enock v. Uganda, Crim. Appeal No. 11/2004 (SC) (unreported); Philip Zahura v. Uganda, Crim. Appeal No. 16/2004 (SC) (unreported); Hasan Sekandi v. Uganda, Crim. Appeal No. 12/2005 (SC) (unreported); Peter Batagenda v. Uganda, Crim. Appeal No. 10/2006 (SC) (unreported).

120.In this regard, the Court of Appeal has for instance, in the appeals heard since 21 January 2009, mitigated the death sentence to life imprisonment with respect to aggravated robbery: e.g. Moses Kamaukama v. Uganda, Crim. Appeal No. 52/2002 (CA) (unreported); found no mitigating factors in respect of a conviction for murder: e.g. Santos Bongomin v. Uganda, Crim. Appeal No. 16/2007 (CA)

326

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

B. Restoring Liberty: Reaffirming Discretion to Grant Bail?

In the FHRI and Tumushabe cases, the Constitutional Court and the Supreme Court reiterated the discretionary nature of the grant of bail. Further, both courts regarded the discretion qualified to the imposition of reasonable conditions of bail with respect to mandatory release on bail under article 23(6)(b) and (c) of the Constitution. The constitutionality of certain provisions of the criminal procedural laws and the military law limiting or restricting the grant to bail was addressed by the Constitutional Court in the FHRI case. It is to be noted that the State’s concession as to unconstitutionality of section 76 of the Magistrate Courts Act and section 16 of the Trial on Indictment Act was essentially premised on the fact admission that the period of pre-trial custody with respect to bail under the impugned provisions was at variance with the periods stipulated under article 23(6) of the Constitution.121 On the other hand, the concession as regards the unconstitutionality of sections 219, 131 and 248 of the Uganda Peoples’ Defence Forces Act was in respect of restrictions placed upon military courts granting bail for certain offences.

Invariably, in premising the rationale for the right to grant of bail as primarily to restore liberty through release from lawful detention, the Supreme Court in the Tumushabe case determined that the non-release of the over 25 officers and men was unconstitutional in terms of article 23(6)(b) of the Constitution. In that regard, with the continued detention of the soldiers unconstitutional (and, in effect, unlawful), the remedy to regain their liberty in the circumstances was, in light of the reasoning of the Supreme Court, an order of habeas corpus.122 This reasoning is similar to that of the Constitutional Court which deferred to the right of the detained soldiers to apply for a writ of habeas corpus before the High court for their release.123

(unreported); and upheld the death sentence as the maximum penalty for convictions in respect of brutal and heinous acts of murder: e.g. Lubega Musiitwa v. Uganda, Crim. Appeal No. 73/2003 (CA) (un- reported); Matayo Chesakit v. Uganda, Crim. Appeal No. 95/2004 (CA)(unreported); Jackline Atto v. Uganda, Crim. Appeal No. 146/2004 (CA) (unreported); Syson Muganga v. Uganda, Crim. Appeal No. 33/2005 (CA) (unreported).

121.The provisions of the two criminal procedural laws provide for 240 and 480 days period of pre-trial custody while article 23(6)(b) and (c) stipulated, as of 2005, 120 and 360 days. The periods of pre-trial custody for purposes of mandatory bail have since been reduced to 60 and 180 days. See, Constitution (Amendment) Act (No. 2), 2005. This reduction in the periods of pre-trial custody was deferred to by the Supreme Court in the Tumushabe case. See supra note 43, at 10.

122.See supra notes 55-6 and accompanying text.

123.For a discussion of this aspect of the decision of the Constitutional Court in the Tumushabe case, see Onoria, supra note 53, at 349 & supra note 120. See also, infra note 134 and accompanying text.

2011]

Major Decisions on Fundamental Rights & Freedoms in Uganda, 2008 - 2009

327

C. Of Officers and Men: Constitutionalizing the Military?

The more significant implication of the decisions rendered in 2008 and 2009 has perhaps been with regards to the military in the context of constitutionalism. In both the Uganda Law Society and Tumushabe cases, the Supreme Court determined that the military—including its courts (and overall criminal justice system) and legal framework—was subject to the Constitution. This was similarly reiterated by the Constitutional Court in the Uganda Law Society case involving the Kotido military executions. In that regard, in the context of the decisions in the three cases, the military was subject to the provisions on the right to life, grant of bail and fair trial guarantees under articles 22, 23 and 28 of the Constitution.

In the Uganda Law Society case before the Constitutional Court, the Court rejected and departed from its previous position that article 22(1) of the Constitution was inapplicable to field military courts, a position that was premised on the special status accorded to the Field Court Martial under the provisions of articles 121(6) and 137(5) of the Constitution.124 The concern of the Constitutional Court at the time—in respect of an application by the Law Society for a stay of further death penalty executions in the military125—was in respect of the right of appeal in the context of article 22(1) of the Constitution as regards death penalty convictions by field military courts.126 Deferring to the decision of the Supreme Court in the Tumushabe case affirming the subjection of the military to the constitution, the Constitutional Court held that the exemptions accorded to the field military court under the constitution (under articles 121(6) and 137 (5)) did not render the provisions of article 22(1) similarly inapplicable to those courts.127 On the exemption accorded to the field military court under article 137(5) of the Constitution, the Court explained:

[T]his provision is intended to ensue that proceedings which start in Military Courts remain there until they are finalised in the Court Martial Appeal Court or in case of capital offences, until they are referred to the Court of Appeal. This is logical in that it minimizes delays which would otherwise occur if cases moved from Military Courts to civilian courts and then backwards to Military Courts. [We]

124.Supra note 64, at 27-29.

125.Supra note 66 and accompanying text.

126.For an analysis and criticism of the Court’s ruling at the time in 2003, see H. Onoria,

Review of Major Decisions on Fundamental Rights and Freedoms in Uganda in 2003, 11 EAST AFR. J. PEACE HUM. RIGHTS 137 (2005), at 142-43.

127.See supra note 64, at 29-30.

328

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

do not read this article as recognising that the Field Courts Martial as special courts that should be exempted from the application of article 22(1) of the Constitution.128

The Court similarly viewed the exemption under article 121(6) of the Constitution as only intended to expedite proceedings before a field military court but not as exempting it from the “mandatory application of article 22(1) of the Constitution” or affecting the “right of appeal.”129 In fact, the Court did not consider article 121(6) of the Constitution as taking away the prerogative of mercy in the President, since he could exercise the prerogative save at his own initiative and “without the intervention of the Advisory Committee on the Prerogative of Mercy.”130

In the Tumushabe case, the Supreme Court rejected what it construed as a disguised appeal to supremacy of military law over the Constitution,131 holding that the provisions of the Constitution on grant of bail applied to all persons awaiting trial, including those being tried under the military justice system.132 Further, the Court’s determination of the parallel status of the General Court Martial, as a military court, and the High Court was only intended to clarify on an issue that had underpinned the contention of the inapplicability of article 23(6) of the Constitution to military courts.

In explaining the status of the General Court Martial as a “subordinate” court vis-à-vis the High Court in terms of article 23(6) of the Constitution—as premised on the mode of establishment rather than the appellate hierarchy of the two courts133—the Supreme Court implicitly addressed the powers of the two courts with regards to the particular remedies for purposes of restoring liberty. In that regard, while the power to grant bail to persons awaiting trial before the General Court Martial lay with the military court, the power to grant an order of habeas corpus— in the context of the lawfulness of the continued detention of the detained soldiers beyond the pre-trial custody period of 120 days—would lie with the High Court.134

128.Id., at 31

129.Id., at 32.

130.Id. In September 2003, a soldier sentenced to death by a Field Court Martial for the offence of cowardice and due for execution was saved by the President’s exercise of the prerogative of mercy. See, Uganda President Quashes Death Sentence for “Coward” Soldier, CLARINEWS, September 18, 2003, available online at <http://quickstart.clari.net/qs_se/webnews/wed/dr/Quganda-military-justice. RJb1_DSI.html>, (accessed on 8 February 2010).

131.See supra note 43, at 14-5. See also, judgment of Katureebe, JSC, at 18.

132.See supra note 61 and accompanying text.

133.Supra note 43, at 11-3. See also, judgment of Katureebe, JSC, at 18-19.

134.Id., judgment of Katureebe, JSC, at 19. See also, supra notes 122-3 and accompanying text. The High Court has in fact upheld its jurisdiction to entertain habeas corpus application in matters involving officers charged before military courts and, although it affirmed the availability of bail to

2011]

Major Decisions on Fundamental Rights & Freedoms in Uganda, 2008 - 2009

329

D. Fair Trial Guarantees: Expanding the Scope of Article 28?

The right to a fair trial (or its import in other rights and freedoms) was pre-eminent in the decisions in 2008 and 2009. Both the Constitutional Court and the Supreme Court notably recognised article 28 of the Constitution to constitute a package of protections or minimum requirements that the right to a fair trial is comprised of.135 Although in the Kigula case, the Supreme Court opted to address the question of mandatory death sentences from the viewpoint of right to equality under the law,136 it could likewise, as the Constitutional Court did, have regarded denial to a convict of a right to mitigate a sentence as inconsistent with the right to equality of arms and therefore the right to a fair trial.137 Likewise, in the Uganda Law Society case, the Constitutional Court did not construe the right of appeal in the context of article 22(1) of the Constitution as a facet of the right to a fair trial under article 28 of the Constitution.138 However, in Soon Yeon Kong Kim case, the Court rightly considered pre-trial disclosure to be a facet of, inter alia, the right to equality under article 28(3)(g) of the Constitution, in terms of “ensuring equality between contestants in litigation.”139

The scope of the right to a fair trial was considered in a number of several other minor decisions. In Dong Yun Kim v. Uganda,140 the Court of Appeal held that the appellant was entitled to a certified copy of the proceedings of the trial court since it was pertinent to the right to adequate preparation of one’s appeal in terms of article 28(3)(c) of the Constitution.141 Conversely, in Butamanya Kabaale v. Uganda,142 the denial to an advocate of the opportunity to make submissions on the appellant’s case was not considered a violation of the right to a fair trial.143 Although the Court of Appeal premised its decision on the fact that “the omission to make the submissions by the advocate of the appellant did not prejudice his case”,144 the right to address court

detainees under jurisdiction of military courts, it expressed reluctance to intervene to grant bail. See, Lt. Godfrey Kasangaki v. Uganda, Misc. Crim. App. No. 17/2002 (HC) (unreported).

135.See, Uganda Law Society case, supra note 64, at 11-3; Soon Yeon Kong Kim case, supra note 82, at 5. See also, supra notes 73 & 74 and the accompanying text.

136.Supra note 10, at 38-40.

137.Supra note 67, judgments of Okello, JA, at 149-52 and Twinomujuni, JA, at 173-9.

138.For an analysis of the right of appeal in this context in light of the military law and the Kotido military executions, see Onoria, supra note 65, at 106-09.

139.Supra note 82, at 7-8 (my italics). See also, supra note 85 and accompanying text.

140.Crim. Appeal No. 86/2007 (CA) (unreported).

141.Id., at 4.

142.Crim. Appeal No. 16/2003 (CA) (unreported).

143.Id., at 5.

144.The Court observed that while submissions assist court, by the time they are made, evidence in a case has already been adduced (as was the case from the record of the court).

330

East African Journal of Peace & Human Rights

[Vol. 17:1

and to make submissions is in fact implied in the right to legal representation.145

Finally, in Uganda Projects Implementation Management Centre v. Uganda Revenue Authority,146 although the Constitutional Court upheld the right of access to court as a facet of the right to a fair trial,147 it did not find a violation of the right to a fair trial given that the petitioner’s case, by a reference, was “based on discrimination under article 21 and not article 28 which provides for access to court.”148 Therefore, specific acts or situations can be construed as attributes of the right or read into the right as additional attributes beyond those specifically stipulated under article 28 of the Constitution. To that end, article 28 is indeed only a minimum of a package of protections with regards the right to a fair trial.

E. Decisions vis-à-vis Law-making and Reform

The increased constitutional litigation of the Bill of Rights since the inception of the 1995 Constitution has meant that petitions are challenging not only acts or conduct of the State (and non-State actors) but also existing legislation (or provisions thereof) as inconsistent with the provisions of the Bill of Rights.

The decisions of 2008 and 2009 witnessed provisions of legislation such as the Penal Code Act, Magistrate Courts Act, the Trial on Indictment Act, the National Environment Act, the Police Act and the Uganda Peoples Defence Forces Act being challenged as inconsistent with provisions on fundamental rights and freedoms under the Constitution. With a few exceptions, most of the impugned provisions of the said laws were declared unconstitutional by the courts. In the corollary, in some of the decisions, changes in the previous legal framework were taken into account. Thus, in Tumushabe case, the Supreme Court took notice of the reduction of the period of pre- trial custody for purposes of mandatory bail under article 23(6) of the Constitution in light of the 2005 amendment to the constitution.149

In Mwesigwa and Ghataura cases, the Court of Appeal and High Court were cognizant of the adoption of the Judicature (Fundamental Rights and Freedoms

145.See, Bandaranaike v. Jagathsena & Ors [1985] LRC (Crim.) 776 (Sri Lanka, SC).

146.Const. Ref. No. 18/2007 (CC) (unreported).

147.Id., at 8. Referring to the decision of the Court of Appeal of Tanzania in Ndyanabo v. Attorney General, the Court regarded the right of access to court (and to justice) as central to the rule of law, fundamental rights and an independent, impartial and accessible judiciary. See id., at 6-8.

148.Id., at 8. The Court found no evidence of discrimination against the petitioner in terms of article 21 of the Constitution.

149.Supra note 121 and accompanying text.

2011]

Major Decisions on Fundamental Rights & Freedoms in Uganda, 2008 - 2009

331

Enforcement Procedure) Rules.150 Notably, the rules adopted five months after the decision of the Supreme Court in the Twagira case are to be seen as a proactive response by the Rules Committee to address an area of procedure that had become a source of confusion. In fact, the need to revisit the procedure for the institution of claims on human rights had been voiced by the Chief Justice in the Twagira case as:

In view of the apparent uncertainty regarding the proper procedure to be followed in making applications under Article 50 of the Constitution, I would direct that copies of this judgment in this appeal be forwarded to the Rules Committee for the purposes of reviewing the Judicature (Fundamental Rights and Freedoms) Enforcement Procedure Rules, SI 13-14 (previously SI 26 of 1992) and making appropriate amendments to clarify the procedure applicable.151

The pro-activeness of a committee comprised of Justices of the Supreme Court is a very welcome one in the face of a decade of decisions, dating back to 1997-1998, declaring the provisions of specific laws unconstitutional without responsive efforts at legislative reform. In the Kigula and Uganda Law Society cases, the Supreme Court and the Constitutional Court called for legislative efforts to review the death penalty and to address the flaws in the military justice system respectively.152 The necessity for reforms in the relevant legislation cannot be gainsaid.

150.Mwesigwa case, supra note 109, at 5-7; Ghataura case, supra note 113, at 1-3. See also, supra note 117 and accompanying text. In the Mwesigwa case, the Court of Appeal observed that “the appellants should be the first beneficiaries of the new rules.” See id., at 7.

151.Supra note 103, judgment of Odoki, CJ, at 20.

152.In the Kigula case, the Supreme Court urged Parliament, as the legislature, to “reopen the debate on the desirability of the penalty in our Constitution.” See supra note 10, at 58. In Uganda Law Society case, Kavuma, JA made additional orders for the executive and legislative arms of government to “review and where necessary amend the laws relevant to the administration of justice by [Field] Martial Courts.” See supra note 64, at 55.